2006 Encore Software, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright 1998-2006, Cadsoft Corporation.

Helios32
Radiosity Renderer 1994-2005 by Heart Consultants Ltd. Portions of this product were created using
LEADTOOLS 1991-1997 LEAD Technologies, Inc. 3D Studio File Format Library 1996-2001 by J.E.
Hoffmann je-h@gmx.net All rights reserved. This software contains ImageCELs texture files from Imagetects.
1989-2004. ImageCELs is a registered trademark of IMAGETECTS. Portions of content 2001 Corbis Images.
This software contains some symbols from Cad Easy Corporation 1991-2005. All rights reserved by their
respective parties. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other
countries. Plant Encyclopedia, 1994-2005, DiComp. All rights reserved. Encore and the Encore logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Encore Software, Inc. All rights reserved. All other brands, product
names, logos, marks, copyrights and/or trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Published by
Encore Software, Inc.
The online services advertised as part of this product may be changed or discontinued at any time for any
reason.
NOTE: DESIGN PLANS CREATED IN 3D HOME ARCHITECT OR 3D HOME LANDSCAPE VERSIONS 4
OR EARLIER CANNOT BE IMPORTED INTO THIS PRODUCT.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
(this "License Agreement") is between Encore Software, Inc. ("Encore") and Encore's licensors (together with
Encore, collectively "Licensor"), and Consumer ("You").
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT RELATES TO ALL COMPUTER SOFTWARE, WHETHER DOWNLOADED
ELECTRONICALLY (ELECTRONIC SOFTWARE DELIVERY SHALL BE REFERRED TO HEREIN AS "ESD")
OR CONTAINED WITHIN A PHYSICAL CD-ROM, AND THE ACCOMPANYING USER DOCUMENTATION
CONTAINED EITHER WITHIN THE DOWNLOADED CONTENT OR ON THE PHYSICAL CD-ROM (THE
"SOFTWARE"). THE SOFTWARE IS COPYRIGHTED AND LICENSED (NOT SOLD) TO YOU. BY USING
THE SOFTWARE, YOU ARE ACCEPTING AND AGREEING TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT. THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT REPRESENTS THE ENTIRE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU
AND LICENSOR CONCERNING THE SOFTWARE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS
LICENSE AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL THIS SOFTWARE, AND REMOVE ALL PORTIONS OF THE
SOFTWARE, IF ANY, THAT HAVE BEEN INSTALLED. IF YOU ARE THE ORIGINAL INSTALLER OF THE
SOFTWARE AND DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, YOU MAY
PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE AMOUNT PAID (BUT NOT YOUR
SHIPPING COSTS, IF ANY) BY PROVIDING THE FOLLOWING MANDATORY ITEMS: (1) IF A PHYSICAL
CD-ROM WAS PURCHASED, PROVIDE TO ENCORE (A) THE COMPLETE PRODUCT IN GOOD
CONDITION (ALL DISCS, MANUALS AND PRINTED MATERIALS); (B) THE BOX WITH THE UPC CODE
INTACT; (C) YOUR ORIGINAL DATED RECEIPT; AND (D) A LETTER OR CARD WITH YOUR FULL NAME
AND RETURN MAILING ADDRESS; OR (2) IF THE SOFTWARE WAS ELECTRONICALLY DOWNLOADED,
PROVIDE TO THE ESD PROVIDER FROM WHICH YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE (A) AN E-MAIL
ADDRESSED TO THE ESD PROVIDER'S WEBSITE WHICH INCLUDES YOUR FULL NAME, RETURN
MAILING AND E-MAIL ADDRESS AND A REPRESENTATION THAT THE SOFTWARE WAS NOT
INSTALLED. IN THE EVENT THAT A PHYSICAL CD-ROM WAS PURCHASED, PLEASE SEND THE
MANDATORY ITEMS TO THE FOLLOWING ADDRESS: ENCORE SOFTWARE, INC., 999 N. Sepulveda
Blvd. Suite 700, El Segundo, CA 90245.
1. License Grant. Licensor hereby grants to you, and you accept, a non-exclusive license to use the Software
in machine-readable, object code form only (collectively referred to as the "Software"). Unless otherwise
stipulated in the license agreement accepted by you in connection with the ESD (the "ESD Agreement"), the
Software may be used only on a single computer owned, leased, or otherwise controlled by you; or in the

event of inoperability of that computer, on a backup computer selected by you. Unless otherwise stipulated
in the ESD Agreement, neither concurrent use on two or more computers nor use on a local area network or
other network is permitted. You agree that you will not assign, sublicense, transfer, pledge, lease, rent, or
share your rights under this License Agreement, except that you may permanently transfer all of your rights
under this License Agreement, provided that you retain no copies, transfer all of the Software (including all
related media and printed materials and any upgrades), and the transferee agrees to the terms of this
License Agreement. You agree that you will not reverse assemble, reverse compile, or otherwise translate
the Software.
2. Licensor'
s Rights. You acknowledge and agree that the Software is the proprietary product of Licensor
protected under U.S. copyright law. You further acknowledge and agree that all right, title and interest in and
to the Software, including any associated intellectual property rights, are and shall remain with Licensor. This
License Agreement does not convey to you an interest in or to the Software, but only a revocable limited
right of use revocable in accordance with the terms of this License Agreement. You are responsible for, and
must use your best efforts to prevent the breaking of these terms by any other person.
3. Scope of Rights. You may:
a. Install/download the Software on your computer;
b. Retain the Software CD, if any, for backup purposes;
c. If not copy protected, make one copy of the Software on a second CD for the purpose of backup in the
event the Software CD is damaged or destroyed (retaining any copyright and other proprietary notices
that appear on the original CD); and
d. Make one copy of the User'
s Manual for backup purposes so long as any such copies of the Software or
the User'
s Manual include Licensor'
s copyright and other proprietary notices.
e. Do anything which is expressly permitted under the ESD Agreement whether conflicting with this
License Agreement or not.
4. Restrictions on Use. You may not:
a. Use, copy, modify, or distribute the Software (electronically or otherwise), or any copy, adaptation,
transcription, or merged portion thereof, except as expressly authorized by Licensor;
b. Reverse assemble, reverse compile, or otherwise translate the Software;
c. Transfer, lease, assign, or sublicense your rights except for a transfer of the Software in its entirety.
d. Reproduce, republish or reuse any photograph or any other element or content of the Software,
individually or in combination, but applicable copyright law may give you such rights. If you are
uncertain about your rights, please contact an attorney.
e. Do anything which is prohibited by the ESD Agreement.
5. Fees and Payments. The license fees paid by you are paid in consideration of the licenses granted under
this License Agreement and any ESD Agreement.
6. Term. This License Agreement is effective upon your opening/downloading of this Software, as applicable,
and shall continue until terminated. You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by following
those steps set forth in the second paragraph of this License Agreement which address what to do in the
event that the terms hereof are not accepted by you. Licensor may terminate this License Agreement upon
the breach by you of any term hereof. Upon such termination by Licensor, you agree to return to Licensor the
Software and all copies and portions thereof, and/or to delete from your computer'
s hard drive any and all
electronic copies of the Software. There shall be no refund in the event of termination under the provisions
of this paragraph.

7. Limited Warranty.
a. Excluding the internet website link(s), Encore Software, Inc. ("Encore") warrants, for your benefit alone, for
a period of 90 days from the date of commencement of this License Agreement (referred to as "Warranty
Period") that the Software CD-ROM in which the Software is contained is free from defects in material and
workmanship. If during the Warranty Period, a defect in the Software appears, you may return the physical
CD-ROM containing the Software to Encore or notify the Electronic Software Delivery ("ESD") provider from
which you purchased the electronic download of the Software of such defect for either replacement, or, if so
elected by Encore or the ESD Provider, as applicable, refund of amounts paid by you under this License
Agreement or the license agreement accepted by you in connection with the ESD ("ESD Agreement"),
respectively. You agree that the foregoing constitutes your sole and exclusive remedy for breach by Encore
of any warranties made under this Agreement. EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE,
THE SOFTWARE, AND THE SOFTWARE CONTAINED THEREIN, ARE LICENSED "AS IS", AND
ENCORE DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
b. This product may contain hyperlinks to web sites on the World Wide Web (the "Linked Sites"). You
acknowledge and agree that (i) the Linked Sites are not under the control of Encore; (ii) Encore is not
responsible or liable for the content, advertising, expiration, availability, changes or updates related to any
Linked Sites or hyperlink contained in a Linked Site, or any goods or services made available on such Linked
Sites; and (iii) Encore is not responsible for webcasting, software, download or any other form of
transmission or media received from any Linked Site. Linked Sites are provided to you only as a
convenience, and the inclusion of any Linked Sites does not imply endorsement by Encore of any such
Linked Sites. You acknowledge and agree that Encore shall not be responsible or liable, either directly or
indirectly, for any damage or loss caused or alleged to be caused by or in connection with use of or reliance
upon any content, goods or services available on or through any such Linked Site.
YOU ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR ALL USE OF OR ACCESS TO LINKED SITES, AND ACCESS THE
SAME AT YOUR OWN RISK. ENCORE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR LINKED
SITES. LINKED SITES ARE MADE AVAILABLE TO YOU WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE,
NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ADVICE
OR INFORMATION GIVEN BY ENCORE, ITS AFFILIATES OR ITS CONTRACTORS OR THEIR
RESPECTIVE EMPLOYEES SHALL CREATE ANY WARRANTY.
8. Remedies. Your exclusive remedy shall be, at Encore'
s sole option, (i) the refund of the amount you paid for
the Software; or (ii) repair or replacement of the Software, provided that, if a physical CD-ROM containing
the Software was purchased, such defective CD-ROM is returned to Encore (at Encore Software, Inc., Attn:
Customer Service, 999 N. Sepulveda Blvd. Suite 700, El Segundo, CA 90245.), and regardless of the format
of the originally purchased Software, proof of the date of purchase is submitted to Encore (for physical CDROMs) or the ESD provider (for electronic downloads) within ninety (90) days from the date of purchase.
This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from accident, abuse, neglect or
misapplication. Any replacement Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period
or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Except as set forth above, the Software is sold "as-is", without any
express or implied warranties of any kind.
9. Limitation of Liability. The cumulative liability of Licensor to you for all claims relating to the Software and
this agreement, including any cause of action sounding in contract, tort, or strict liability, shall not exceed the
license fee paid to Licensor for use of the Software.

IN NO EVENT SHALL LICENSOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS; ANY INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; OR ANY CLAIMS OR DEMANDS BROUGHT
AGAINST YOU, EVEN IF LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH CLAIMS OR
DEMANDS. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THAT THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
10. Proprietary Protection. Licensor shall retain sole and exclusive ownership of all right, title, and interest in
and to the Software and all modifications and enhancements. This License Agreement does not provide
you with title or ownership of the Software, but only a right of limited use.
11. Costs of Litigation. If any action is brought by either party to this License Agreement against the other party
regarding the subject matter hereof, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover, in addition to any other
relief granted, reasonable attorney fees and expenses of litigation.
12. Severability. In the event that any terms of this License Agreement are or become or are declared to be
invalid or void by any court of competent jurisdiction, such determination shall have no effect on the
remaining terms of this Agreement, which shall remain in full force and effect.
13. Governing Law. This License Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws
of the State of California, U.S.A. All actions or proceedings seeking the interpretation and/or enforcement of
this Agreement shall be brought only in the State or Federal Courts located in Los Angeles County in the
State of California. Licensor and Consumer hereby submit themselves to the jurisdiction of such courts.
14. Dispute Resolution. Any dispute, claim or controversy concerning the parties'duties under this License
Agreement shall be directed to binding arbitration administered by, and pursuant to the rules of, the
American Arbitration Association ("AAA"). Such arbitration shall take place in Los Angeles County in the
State of California. Each party shall bear the expense of their own attorney'
s fees and its prosecution of its
claims/defenses. The parties shall share equally all other costs and expenses associated with such
arbitration. Judgment upon any AAA award may be entered in any court having jurisdiction as outlined in
section 11 of this License Agreement.
15. No Waiver. The failure of either party to enforce any rights granted hereunder or to take action against the
other party in the event of any breach hereunder shall not be deemed a waiver by that party as to
subsequent enforcement of rights or subsequent action in the event of future breaches.
16. No Adequate Legal Remedy. You acknowledge that, in the event of your breach of any of the foregoing
provisions, Licensor will not have an adequate remedy in money or damages. Licensor shall therefore be
entitled to obtain an injunction against such breach from any court of competent jurisdiction immediately
upon request. Licensor'
s right to obtain injunctive relief shall not limit its right to seek further remedies.
17. U.S. Government Restrictions. This Software is provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication, or
disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227 - 7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2)
of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
18. Conflict. In the event of any conflict between the terms of this License Agreement and the terms of the
ESD Agreement, the terms of this License Agreement shall prevail as between you and Licensor, and the
terms of the ESD Agreement shall prevail as between you and the ESD provider, except as otherwise set
forth herein. Otherwise, except as specifically set forth in this Addendum, all the terms and conditions of
the Agreement are hereby ratified and affirmed.

Table of Contents

Table of
Contents

The Basics

Chapter 1: Welcome......................................................................................1
Package Contents ............................................................................................................................................ 2
System Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 2
Installing the Program.................................................................................................................................... 2
Starting the Program ...................................................................................................................................... 2
Starting a New Project.................................................................................................................................... 2
Using the House Builder Wizard.................................................................................................................. 2
Starting a Drawing from Scratch .................................................................................................................. 2
Viewing Sample Projects................................................................................................................................ 3
Adjusting Your Display Settings .................................................................................................................. 3
Online Help...................................................................................................................................................... 3
Electronic Users Guide.................................................................................................................................. 3
Glossary of Terms ........................................................................................................................................... 4
Online Self-Support ........................................................................................................................................ 4
Technical Support ........................................................................................................................................... 4
3D Home Architect Online ............................................................................................................................ 4

Chapter 2: Screen Layout.............................................................................5

Title Bar ............................................................................................................................................................ 6
Menu Bar .......................................................................................................................................................... 6
Toolbars and Toolbar Tabs ............................................................................................................................ 6
Building Toolbar ..................................................................................................................................... 6
Interiors Toolbar...................................................................................................................................... 6
Landscape Toolbar.................................................................................................................................. 6
Terrain Toolbar........................................................................................................................................ 7
Basic View Control Toolbar................................................................................................................... 7
Zoom and Navigate Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 7
Catalog Panel ................................................................................................................................................... 7
Status Bar.......................................................................................................................................................... 8

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Chapter 3: House Builder Wizard................................................................ 9

Using the House Builder Wizard................................................................................................................ 10
Preventing the House Builder Wizard from Launching ......................................................................... 12
Creating a Custom House Builder Wizard Configuration ..................................................................... 12

Chapter 4: Building Locations................................................................... 15

Defining Building Locations ....................................................................................................................... 16
Current Building Location........................................................................................................................... 17
Location Dimming ........................................................................................................................................ 17

Chapter 5: Drawing & Editing Basics ....................................................... 19

Inserting Elements ........................................................................................................................................ 20
Selecting an Insertion Method for Line-Drawn Elements....................................................................... 20
Repeating the Insertion of
Line-Drawn Elements.............................................................................................................................. 20
Going into Selection Mode for Editing ...................................................................................................... 21
Selecting Elements for Editing .................................................................................................................... 21
Deselecting Elements.................................................................................................................................... 21
Making Elements on All Locations Selectable in 2D Plan View ............................................................ 21
Disabling Pre-Selection ................................................................................................................................ 22
Accessing Edit Tools..................................................................................................................................... 22

Controlling the View

23

Chapter 6: 2D and 3D Viewing................................................................... 25

Viewing the 2D Plan..................................................................................................................................... 26
Viewing a 2D Designers View ................................................................................................................... 26
Displaying 3D Camera Views ..................................................................................................................... 27
Zooming In..................................................................................................................................................... 27
Zooming Out ................................................................................................................................................. 27
Zooming in Realtime .................................................................................................................................... 27
Zooming a Selected Area ............................................................................................................................. 28
Zooming to Fit the Drawing Area .............................................................................................................. 28
Panning Across a Drawing .......................................................................................................................... 28
Zooming Back to the Previous View.......................................................................................................... 28
Changing the Display Mode ....................................................................................................................... 29
Displaying a Wireframe View..................................................................................................................... 29
Displaying a Hidden Line View ................................................................................................................. 29
Displaying a Rendered View ...................................................................................................................... 29

ii

Table of Contents

Displaying a Rendered Outline View ........................................................................................................ 30

Displaying a Patterned View ...................................................................................................................... 30
Displaying Framing ...................................................................................................................................... 30

Chapter 7: View Filter..................................................................................33

Filtering the Display ..................................................................................................................................... 34
Displaying/Hiding Elements on Locations .............................................................................................. 34
Displaying/Hiding Building Locations .................................................................................................... 35
Displaying/Hiding Elements on the Terrain............................................................................................ 35
Displaying/Hiding Text .............................................................................................................................. 36
Displaying/Hiding Dimensions................................................................................................................. 36
Displaying/Hiding Electrical Wiring ........................................................................................................ 36
Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images ................................................................................................. 37
Selection Filtering.......................................................................................................................................... 37
Making Elements on Locations Selectable or Non-Selectable ................................................................ 38
Making Building Locations Selectable or Non-Selectable ...................................................................... 38
Making Elements on the Terrain Selectable or Non-Selectable ............................................................. 39
Making Text Selectable or Non-Selectable ................................................................................................ 39
Making Dimensions Selectable or Non-Selectable................................................................................... 39
Making Electrical Wiring Selectable or Non-Selectable .......................................................................... 40
Making Project Trace Images Selectable or Non-Selectable ................................................................... 40

Building Your Home

41

Chapter 8: Foundation ................................................................................43

Creating a Basement or Crawlspace Foundation ..................................................................................... 44
Editing the Size of a Wall............................................................................................................................. 45
Lengthening and Shortening Walls............................................................................................................ 45
Rotating a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 46
Curving a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 46
Breaking a Wall ............................................................................................................................................. 46
Deleting a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 46
Applying a Different Material to the Foundation Floor.......................................................................... 46
Creating a Slab Foundation ......................................................................................................................... 47
Moving a Slab ................................................................................................................................................ 47
Rotating a Slab............................................................................................................................................... 47
Resizing a Slab............................................................................................................................................... 47
Reshaping a Slab ........................................................................................................................................... 48
Curving a Slab ............................................................................................................................................... 48
Editing the Thickness of a Slab ................................................................................................................... 48

iii

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Deleting a Slab............................................................................................................................................... 48

Chapter 9: Support Elements .................................................................... 49

Attaching Strip Footings to Walls............................................................................................................... 50
Editing the Strip Footing Type.................................................................................................................... 50
Editing the Size of Strip Footings ............................................................................................................... 50
Moving/Stretching Strip Footings ............................................................................................................. 50
Lengthening and Shortening Strip Footings............................................................................................. 51
Breaking Strip Footings................................................................................................................................ 51
Deleting Strip Footings ................................................................................................................................ 51
Inserting Columns ........................................................................................................................................ 51
Editing the Column Type ............................................................................................................................ 51
Editing the Size and Elevation of a Column ............................................................................................. 52
Moving Columns .......................................................................................................................................... 52
Deleting a Column........................................................................................................................................ 52
Attaching Mono Footings to Columns ...................................................................................................... 52
Editing the Mono Footing Type.................................................................................................................. 52
Editing the Size of Mono Footings ............................................................................................................. 53
Moving Mono Footings................................................................................................................................ 53
Rotating a Mono Footing ............................................................................................................................. 53
Deleting Mono Footings............................................................................................................................... 53

Chapter 10: Walls........................................................................................ 55

Drawing the Ground Floor Exterior Walls................................................................................................ 56
Adding a Story .............................................................................................................................................. 57
Applying Different Finishes to Exterior Walls ......................................................................................... 58
Drawing Interior Walls ................................................................................................................................ 59
Editing the Size of a Wall............................................................................................................................. 59
Dropping an Exterior Wall Face ................................................................................................................. 59
Raising or Lowering a Wall ......................................................................................................................... 60
Lengthening and Shortening Walls............................................................................................................ 60
Rotating a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 60
Curving a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 60
Breaking a Wall ............................................................................................................................................. 60
Deleting a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 61
Adding Paint and Wallpaper ...................................................................................................................... 61
Adding Trim to Walls................................................................................................................................... 61
Specifying Framing Members for Walls .................................................................................................... 62

Chapter 11: Doors, Windows & Openings................................................ 65

Inserting Doors.............................................................................................................................................. 66

iv

Table of Contents

Editing Door Types....................................................................................................................................... 66

Editing the Size and Shape of a Door......................................................................................................... 66
Editing a Doors Sidelites and Highlites.................................................................................................... 67
Editing a Door Leaf....................................................................................................................................... 68
Editing Door Details ..................................................................................................................................... 68
Flipping a Door ............................................................................................................................................. 69
Flipping a Door Swing ................................................................................................................................. 69
Moving a Door .............................................................................................................................................. 69
Raising or Lowering a Door ........................................................................................................................ 70
Deleting a Door ............................................................................................................................................. 70
Inserting Windows ....................................................................................................................................... 70
Editing Window Types ................................................................................................................................ 71
Editing a Windows Size Properties........................................................................................................... 71
Editing a Windows Sidelites, Highlites and Lowlites ............................................................................ 72
Editing Window Details............................................................................................................................... 73
Flipping a Window ....................................................................................................................................... 74
Moving a Window ........................................................................................................................................ 74
Raising or Lowering a Window.................................................................................................................. 74
Deleting a Window....................................................................................................................................... 74
Inserting Wall Openings .............................................................................................................................. 75
Editing the Shape of a Wall Opening......................................................................................................... 75
Editing the Size of a Wall Opening ............................................................................................................ 75
Moving a Wall Opening............................................................................................................................... 76
Raising or Lowering a Wall Opening ........................................................................................................ 76
Deleting a Wall Opening.............................................................................................................................. 76

Chapter 12: Floors & Ceilings ....................................................................77

How Floors are Created ............................................................................................................................... 78
Dividing a Floor ............................................................................................................................................ 78
Raising or Lowering a Floor ........................................................................................................................ 78
Editing the Thickness of a Floor ................................................................................................................. 78
Specifying Framing Members for Floors ................................................................................................... 79
Applying Different Materials to Floors ..................................................................................................... 79
Deleting a Floor ............................................................................................................................................. 79
Cutting an Opening in a Floor .................................................................................................................... 79
Resizing or Reshaping a Floor Opening .................................................................................................... 80
Curving a Floor Opening Edge................................................................................................................... 80
Removing an Opening from a Floor .......................................................................................................... 80
How Ceilings Are Created........................................................................................................................... 80
Inserting a Ceiling Throughout a Building Location............................................................................... 80
Inserting a Ceiling in a Room...................................................................................................................... 81
Inserting a Ceiling by Picking Points ......................................................................................................... 81

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Creating a Tray Ceiling ................................................................................................................................ 82
Creating a Cathedral Ceiling....................................................................................................................... 82
Moving a Ceiling........................................................................................................................................... 83
Resizing or Reshaping a Ceiling ................................................................................................................. 83
Curving a Ceiling Edge................................................................................................................................ 84
Raising or Lowering a Ceiling .................................................................................................................... 84
Cutting Openings in Ceilings...................................................................................................................... 84
Resizing or Reshaping a Ceiling Opening................................................................................................. 84
Curving a Ceiling Opening Edge ............................................................................................................... 85
Removing an Opening from a Ceiling ....................................................................................................... 85
Applying Different Colors and Materials to Ceilings ............................................................................. 85
Specifying Framing Members for Ceilings................................................................................................ 85
Deleting a Ceiling.......................................................................................................................................... 86

Chapter 13: Stairs, Ramps & Railings ...................................................... 87

Inserting Stairs and Ramps.......................................................................................................................... 88
Parts of a Staircase ........................................................................................................................................ 88
Editing Stair Size Properties........................................................................................................................ 88
Editing a Staircase Layout ........................................................................................................................... 89
Editing Stair Details ...................................................................................................................................... 90
Editing the Appearance of the Cut Line .................................................................................................... 91
Editing General Ramp Properties............................................................................................................... 91
Editing the Layout of a Ramp ..................................................................................................................... 92
Moving a Staircase or Ramp........................................................................................................................ 93
Rotating a Staircase or Ramp ...................................................................................................................... 93
Deleting a Staircase or Ramp ...................................................................................................................... 93
Inserting Railings on Staircases and Ramps ............................................................................................. 93
Inserting a Horizontal Railing..................................................................................................................... 95
Parts of a Railing ........................................................................................................................................... 95
Editing Railing Properties............................................................................................................................ 95
Changing the Length of a Railing............................................................................................................... 97
Stretching a Railing....................................................................................................................................... 97
Rotating a Railing.......................................................................................................................................... 97
Deleting Railings ........................................................................................................................................... 97

Chapter 14: Roofs....................................................................................... 99

Inserting an Automatic Roof Over Perimeter Walls.............................................................................. 100
Inserting a Roof by Picking Points ........................................................................................................... 100
Changing the Way a Lower-story Roof is Created ................................................................................ 101
Converting a Hip Roof to a Gable Roof................................................................................................... 101
Changing the Appearance of Raked Surfaces Under Gable Ends....................................................... 102

vi

Table of Contents

Extending Walls Beneath Gable Ends...................................................................................................... 102

Creating a Porch Roof ................................................................................................................................ 103
Selecting a Roof for Editing ....................................................................................................................... 104
Stretching a Roof ......................................................................................................................................... 105
Moving a Roof ............................................................................................................................................. 105
Rotating a Roof ............................................................................................................................................ 105
Editing a Roofs Shape and Size................................................................................................................ 105
Editing the Height of a Roof...................................................................................................................... 106
Editing a Roofs Frame Details.................................................................................................................. 106
Applying a Different Roofing Material ................................................................................................... 107
Cutting an Opening in a Roof ................................................................................................................... 107
Removing Roof Openings.......................................................................................................................... 107
Deleting a Roof ............................................................................................................................................ 108
Inserting Dormers ....................................................................................................................................... 108
Moving a Dormer Roof .............................................................................................................................. 109
Stretching a Dormer Roof .......................................................................................................................... 109
Deleting a Dormer ...................................................................................................................................... 109
Inserting Skylights ...................................................................................................................................... 109
Moving a Skylight....................................................................................................................................... 110
Rotating a Skylight...................................................................................................................................... 110
Editing the Properties of a Skylight ......................................................................................................... 110
Deleting a Skylight...................................................................................................................................... 110

Designing the Interior

113

Chapter 15: Kitchen Builder Wizard ........................................................115

Creating a Kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard............................................................................ 116
Launching the Kitchen Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup ...................................................... 117
Creating a Custom Kitchen Builder Wizard Configuration ................................................................. 117

Chapter 16: Cabinets ................................................................................119

Inserting Cabinets ....................................................................................................................................... 120
Moving Cabinets ......................................................................................................................................... 120
Rotating Cabinets........................................................................................................................................ 120
Raising or Lowering a Cabinet.................................................................................................................. 120
Editing Cabinet Properties ........................................................................................................................ 120
Applying Different Finishes to Cabinets ................................................................................................. 122
Inserting a Sink into a Cabinet .................................................................................................................. 122
Deleting a Cabinet....................................................................................................................................... 122

vii

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Chapter 17: Appliances............................................................................ 123

Inserting Appliances................................................................................................................................... 124
Moving Appliances..................................................................................................................................... 124
Rotating Appliances ................................................................................................................................... 124
Raising or Lowering an Appliance........................................................................................................... 124
Editing Appliance Size Properties............................................................................................................ 124
Applying a Different Color or Finish to Appliances ............................................................................. 125
Deleting an Appliance................................................................................................................................ 125

Chapter 18: Furniture, Electronics & Accessories ................................ 127

Inserting Interior Furniture ....................................................................................................................... 128
Inserting Electronics ................................................................................................................................... 128
Inserting Interior Accessories.................................................................................................................... 128
Moving Furnishing Elements.................................................................................................................... 128
Rotating Furnishing Elements................................................................................................................... 128
Raising or Lowering a Furnishing Element ............................................................................................ 129
Editing the Size of Furnishing Elements ................................................................................................. 129
Applying Different Colors, Fabrics and Finishes to Furnishing Elements......................................... 129
Deleting Furnishing Elements................................................................................................................... 130

Chapter 19: Equipment ............................................................................ 131

Inserting Equipment................................................................................................................................... 132
Moving Equipment..................................................................................................................................... 132
Rotating Equipment.................................................................................................................................... 132
Raising or Lowering Equipment............................................................................................................... 132
Editing the Size of Equipment .................................................................................................................. 132
Applying Different Colors or Materials to Elements............................................................................. 133
Deleting Equipment.................................................................................................................................... 133

Utilities

135

Chapter 20: Interior Lighting ................................................................... 137

Inserting Interior Light Fixtures ............................................................................................................... 138
Changing the Way a Light Snaps on Insertion ....................................................................................... 138
Raising or Lowering a Light Fixture ........................................................................................................ 138
Moving Light Fixtures................................................................................................................................ 139
Rotating Light Fixtures .............................................................................................................................. 139
Editing the Size of Light Fixtures ............................................................................................................. 139
Editing a Light Fixtures Light Source ..................................................................................................... 139

viii

Table of Contents

Turning a Light On or Off ......................................................................................................................... 140

Changing the Look of a Light Fixture...................................................................................................... 141
Deleting Light Fixtures............................................................................................................................... 141

Chapter 21: Electrical................................................................................143

Inserting Outlets and Switches ................................................................................................................. 144
Inserting Thermostats and Smoke Detectors .......................................................................................... 144
Raising or Lowering an Electrical Element ............................................................................................. 144
Moving an Electrical Element ................................................................................................................... 145
Editing the Size of an Electrical Element ................................................................................................. 145
Applying a Different Color or Material to an Electrical Element ........................................................ 145
Deleting Electrical Elements...................................................................................................................... 145
Inserting Electrical Wiring......................................................................................................................... 146
Stretching and Reshaping Wiring Segments .......................................................................................... 146
Changing the Line Style of Wiring ........................................................................................................... 146
Deleting Wiring........................................................................................................................................... 147

Chapter 22: Plumbing ...............................................................................149

Inserting Plumbing Fixtures...................................................................................................................... 150
Raising or Lowering a Plumbing Fixture ................................................................................................ 150
Moving Plumbing Fixtures........................................................................................................................ 150
Rotating Plumbing Fixtures ...................................................................................................................... 150
Editing the Size of a Plumbing Fixture .................................................................................................... 150
Applying a Different Color or Finish to Plumbing Fixtures................................................................. 151
Deleting Plumbing Fixtures....................................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 23: HVAC .....................................................................................153

Inserting Heating and Cooling Elements ................................................................................................ 154
Inserting Floor Registers and Cold Air Returns..................................................................................... 154
Inserting a Chimney ................................................................................................................................... 154
Moving HVAC Elements ........................................................................................................................... 155
Rotating HVAC Elements.......................................................................................................................... 155
Raising or Lowering an HVAC Element ................................................................................................. 155
Editing the Size of an HVAC Element ..................................................................................................... 155
Deleting HVAC Elements.......................................................................................................................... 156

ix

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Terrain

157

Chapter 24: Terrain Modeling .................................................................. 159

Defining How the Terrain Cuts Around the Building .......................................................................... 160
Editing the Elevation of the Terrain ......................................................................................................... 160
Editing the Size of the Terrain................................................................................................................... 160
Editing the Grid Mesh Spacing of the Terrain........................................................................................ 160
Selecting a Texture for the Terrain ........................................................................................................... 160
Creating Hills and Valleys......................................................................................................................... 160
Creating Berms and Trenches ................................................................................................................... 161
Creating Plateaus ........................................................................................................................................ 163
Creating Slopes............................................................................................................................................ 164
Turning the Terrain On and Off ............................................................................................................... 165

Chapter 25: Sidewalks, Pathways

& Driveways .............................................................................................. 167
Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways and Driveways ..................................................................................... 168
Moving a Path Element.............................................................................................................................. 168
Stretching a Path Element.......................................................................................................................... 168
Curving a Path Element ............................................................................................................................. 169
Editing the Thickness or Width of a Path Element ................................................................................ 169
Applying Different Materials to Path Elements ..................................................................................... 169
Deleting a Path Element............................................................................................................................. 170

Chapter 26: Pads & Patios ....................................................................... 171

Creating a Pad ............................................................................................................................................. 172
Moving a Pad............................................................................................................................................... 172
Rotating a Pad ............................................................................................................................................. 172
Resizing a Pad ............................................................................................................................................. 172
Reshaping a Pad.......................................................................................................................................... 172
Curving a Pad.............................................................................................................................................. 173
Editing the Thickness of a Pad.................................................................................................................. 173
Applying a Different Material to a Pad ................................................................................................... 173
Deleting a Pad ............................................................................................................................................. 173

Chapter 27: Retaining Walls .................................................................... 175

Drawing Retaining Walls........................................................................................................................... 176
Editing a Retaining Walls Height, Width or Elevation ........................................................................ 176
Lengthening and Shortening Retaining Walls........................................................................................ 176

Table of Contents

Rotating a Retaining Wall.......................................................................................................................... 176

Curving a Retaining Wall .......................................................................................................................... 176
Breaking a Retaining Wall ......................................................................................................................... 177
Applying Different Finishes to Retaining Walls .................................................................................... 177
Deleting a Retaining Wall .......................................................................................................................... 177

Chapter 28: Property Lines ......................................................................179

Defining Your Building Lot....................................................................................................................... 180
Creating a Site Boundary Using the Reference Angle Method............................................................ 180
Creating a Site Boundary Using the Angle Bearing Method................................................................ 181
Moving a Site Boundary ............................................................................................................................ 182
Stretching a Site Boundary ........................................................................................................................ 182
Editing the Length or Direction of Site Boundary Edges...................................................................... 182
Defining Building Setbacks ....................................................................................................................... 183
Curving Site Boundary Edges................................................................................................................... 183
Editing a Site Boundarys Line, Text and Peg Styles ............................................................................. 183
Selecting a Method of Angle Measurement When Drawing a Site Boundary................................... 184
Deleting a Site Boundary ........................................................................................................................... 185

Landscaping

187

Chapter 29: Trees, Shrubs & Plants ........................................................189

Inserting Plants............................................................................................................................................ 190
Moving a Plant ............................................................................................................................................ 190
Changing the Elevation of a Plant ............................................................................................................ 190
Editing the 2D Appearance of a Plant...................................................................................................... 190
Changing the Age of a Plant ..................................................................................................................... 191
Forcing a Custom Plant Size...................................................................................................................... 191
Deleting a Plant ........................................................................................................................................... 192
Seeing Plant Growth Over Time............................................................................................................... 192
Applying Seasonal Changes to Plants ..................................................................................................... 192
Using the Plant Encyclopedia ................................................................................................................... 193
The Encyclopedia Main Page .................................................................................................................... 194
Selecting a Plant to View.................................................................................................................... 194
Viewing Plant Information ................................................................................................................ 194
Plant Views .......................................................................................................................................... 195
Plant Care Calendar.................................................................................................................................... 196
World Map Page ......................................................................................................................................... 197
Notebook Page ............................................................................................................................................ 198
Picture Page ................................................................................................................................................. 199

xi

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Diseases Page............................................................................................................................................... 200
Filtering the Plant List ................................................................................................................................ 201
Inserting Plants from the Encyclopedia................................................................................................... 202
Adding a Plant from the Encyclopedia to the Catalog.......................................................................... 202

Chapter 30: Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas ........................ 205
Creating Filled Areas.................................................................................................................................. 206
Moving a Filled Area.................................................................................................................................. 206
Rotating a Filled Area................................................................................................................................. 206
Resizing a Filled Area................................................................................................................................. 206
Reshaping a Filled Area ............................................................................................................................. 207
Curving a Filled Area ................................................................................................................................. 207
Changing the Fill Material......................................................................................................................... 207
Deleting a Filled Area................................................................................................................................. 208

Chapter 31: Edging................................................................................... 209

Inserting Edging.......................................................................................................................................... 210
Cleaning Up Corners.................................................................................................................................. 210
Changing the Length of Edging................................................................................................................ 211
Breaking Edging.......................................................................................................................................... 211
Moving Edging............................................................................................................................................ 211
Rotating Edging .......................................................................................................................................... 211
Editing the Height or Width of Edging ................................................................................................... 212
Changing the Edging Material.................................................................................................................. 212
Deleting Edging........................................................................................................................................... 212

Chapter 32: Irrigation ............................................................................... 213

Inserting Irrigation...................................................................................................................................... 214
Moving Sprinklers ...................................................................................................................................... 214
Rotating Sprinklers ..................................................................................................................................... 214
Editing the Height of a Sprinkler.............................................................................................................. 214
Editing a Sprinklers Spray Coverage ...................................................................................................... 214
Deleting a Sprinkler.................................................................................................................................... 214

Chapter 33: Fences & Gates .................................................................... 215

Inserting a Fence ......................................................................................................................................... 216
Stretching a Fence Layout.......................................................................................................................... 217
Changing the Length of a Fence ............................................................................................................... 217
Creating a Break in a Fence ....................................................................................................................... 217
Parts of a Fence............................................................................................................................................ 217
Editing the Properties of a Fence .............................................................................................................. 217

xii

Table of Contents

Changing the Fencing Material................................................................................................................. 219

Deleting a Fence .......................................................................................................................................... 219
Inserting a Gate ........................................................................................................................................... 219
Moving a Gate ............................................................................................................................................. 220
Flipping a Gate ............................................................................................................................................ 220
Flipping a Gates Swing ............................................................................................................................. 220
Editing the Properties of a Gate................................................................................................................ 220
Deleting a Gate ............................................................................................................................................ 221

Chapter 34: Decks .....................................................................................223

Using the Deck Builder Wizard ................................................................................................................ 224
Launching the Deck Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup........................................................... 225
Building a Deck with the Deck Tool ........................................................................................................ 225
Moving a Deck ............................................................................................................................................ 226
Rotating a Deck ........................................................................................................................................... 226
Changing the Direction of Deck Boards .................................................................................................. 226
Stretching a Deck ........................................................................................................................................ 226
Reshaping a Deck........................................................................................................................................ 227
Curving a Deck Edge.................................................................................................................................. 227
Changing the Height of a Deck................................................................................................................. 227
Editing Deck Post Properties..................................................................................................................... 227
Displaying and Editing Footings Under Deck Posts ............................................................................. 228
Editing the Deck Frame.............................................................................................................................. 228
Changing the Railing Style ........................................................................................................................ 229
Controlling the Display of Deck Railings................................................................................................ 229
Controlling the Display of Deck Skirting ................................................................................................ 230
Inserting Openings in a Deck.................................................................................................................... 230
Resizing a Deck Opening........................................................................................................................... 230
Reshaping a Deck Opening ....................................................................................................................... 230
Curving a Deck Opening Edge ................................................................................................................. 231
Removing Deck Openings ......................................................................................................................... 231
Deleting a Deck ........................................................................................................................................... 231
Adding Stairs to a Deck ............................................................................................................................. 231
Moving Deck Stairs..................................................................................................................................... 232
Parts of a Staircase ...................................................................................................................................... 232
Editing the Size of Deck Stairs .................................................................................................................. 232
Controlling the Display of Railings on Deck Stairs ............................................................................... 233
Editing Stringers, Risers and Treads ........................................................................................................ 233
Deleting Deck Stairs ................................................................................................................................... 234

xiii

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Chapter 35: Shed Builder Wizard ............................................................ 235

Building a Shed with the Shed Builder Wizard...................................................................................... 236
Moving a Shed............................................................................................................................................. 237
Rotating a Shed ........................................................................................................................................... 237
Editing a Shed.............................................................................................................................................. 237
Launching the Shed Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup ........................................................... 237
Creating a Custom Shed Builder Wizard Configuration ...................................................................... 237

Chapter 36: Exterior Furniture................................................................. 239

Inserting Exterior Furniture ...................................................................................................................... 240
Moving Exterior Furniture ........................................................................................................................ 240
Rotating Exterior Furniture ....................................................................................................................... 240
Editing the Size of Exterior Furniture ...................................................................................................... 240
Applying Different Colors or Finishes to Exterior Furniture ............................................................... 241
Deleting Exterior Furniture ....................................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 37: Exterior Structures .............................................................. 243

Inserting Exterior Structures ..................................................................................................................... 244
A Note About House Templates .............................................................................................................. 244
Moving Exterior Structures ....................................................................................................................... 244
Rotating Exterior Structures ...................................................................................................................... 244
Editing the Size of an Exterior Structure ................................................................................................. 245
Applying Different Colors or Materials to Exterior Structures............................................................ 245
Deleting an Exterior Structure .................................................................................................................. 245

Chapter 38: Exterior Lighting .................................................................. 247

Inserting Exterior Lighting ........................................................................................................................ 248
Moving a Light Fixture .............................................................................................................................. 248
Editing the Size of a Light Fixture ............................................................................................................ 248
Editing a Light Fixtures Light Source ..................................................................................................... 248
Turning a Light On or Off ......................................................................................................................... 249
Changing the Look of a Light Fixture...................................................................................................... 250
Deleting a Light Fixture ............................................................................................................................. 250

Chapter 39: Exterior Accessories ........................................................... 251

Inserting Exterior Accessories................................................................................................................... 252
Moving Exterior Accessories..................................................................................................................... 252
Rotating Exterior Accessories.................................................................................................................... 252
Raising or Lowering an Exterior Accessory............................................................................................ 252
Editing the Size of an Exterior Accessory................................................................................................ 252

xiv

Table of Contents

Changing the Look of an Exterior Accessory ......................................................................................... 253

Deleting an Exterior Accessory................................................................................................................. 253

Drawing & Editing Tools

255

Chapter 40: Drawing Aids.........................................................................257

Setting Up a Drawing Grid........................................................................................................................ 258
Turning the Drawing Grid On and Off ................................................................................................... 258
Using the Grid Snap ................................................................................................................................... 258
Turning the Grid Snap On and Off .......................................................................................................... 258
Using the Object Snap ................................................................................................................................ 258
Using Ortho ................................................................................................................................................. 259
Using Angle Snap ....................................................................................................................................... 259
Disabling/Enabling Collision Control..................................................................................................... 259

Chapter 41: Measurement ........................................................................261

Changing the Unit of Measure.................................................................................................................. 262
Suppressing Metric Units in Dialogs ....................................................................................................... 262
Measuring Distances .................................................................................................................................. 262
Measuring Area and Perimeter................................................................................................................. 263

Chapter 42: Commander...........................................................................265

Displaying the Commander ...................................................................................................................... 266
Using the Commander ............................................................................................................................... 266
Displaying the Coordinate Icon................................................................................................................ 266
Specifying the Insertion Height of an Element Before You Insert It ................................................... 267
Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements .................................................... 267
Entering Values in the Commander......................................................................................................... 267
Direction and Angle of Rotation............................................................................................................... 268
Specifying Distance and Direction ........................................................................................................... 268
Specifying X, Y and Z Coordinates .......................................................................................................... 268
Using the Commander When Rotating Elements .................................................................................. 269
Using the Commander When Curving Elements .................................................................................. 269

Chapter 43: Editing Your Design .............................................................271

Undoing the Previous Action.................................................................................................................... 272
Redoing an Undo ........................................................................................................................................ 272
Accessing Edit Commands........................................................................................................................ 272
Moving Elements ........................................................................................................................................ 272

xv

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Doing a Straight Drag-and-Drop...................................................................................................... 272
Using the Move Tool .......................................................................................................................... 272
Raising or Lowering an Element .............................................................................................................. 273
Rotating Elements in 2D Plan View ......................................................................................................... 273
Doing a Simple, On-the-Spot Rotation ............................................................................................ 273
Using the Rotate Tool ......................................................................................................................... 274
Changing an Elements Orientation......................................................................................................... 274
Copying Elements on the Same Location................................................................................................ 275
Copying Elements to Other Locations ..................................................................................................... 275
Arraying Elements ...................................................................................................................................... 275
Mirroring Elements..................................................................................................................................... 276
Editing the Size and Composition of an Element .................................................................................. 276
Changing an Elements Material or Color............................................................................................... 277
Replacing Elements..................................................................................................................................... 278
Deleting Elements ....................................................................................................................................... 279

Power Tools

281

Chapter 44: Photo Boards ....................................................................... 283

Importing a Photo Board ........................................................................................................................... 284
Adding an Imported Photo Board to Your Catalog............................................................................... 285
Inserting a Photo Board from the Catalog............................................................................................... 285
Moving a Photo Board ............................................................................................................................... 285
Rotating a Photo Board in 2D Plan View ................................................................................................ 285
Changing the Elevation of a Photo Board ............................................................................................... 286
Changing a Photo Board from Stationary to Rotating and Vice Versa............................................... 286
Editing the Size of a Photo Board ............................................................................................................. 286
Deleting a Photo Board .............................................................................................................................. 286
Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images...................................................................................... 286

Chapter 45: Text & Dimensions............................................................... 289

Adding Text to Your Drawing .................................................................................................................. 290
Moving Text................................................................................................................................................. 290
Rotating Text................................................................................................................................................ 290
Editing Text Content .................................................................................................................................. 290
Changing the Style of Text......................................................................................................................... 291
Changing the Justification of Multi-line Text ......................................................................................... 291
Deleting Text................................................................................................................................................ 291
Adding Text with a Leader........................................................................................................................ 291
Moving and Stretching a Leader .............................................................................................................. 292

xvi

Table of Contents

Changing the Leader Arrow Style............................................................................................................ 292

Moving Leader Text ................................................................................................................................... 293
Editing Leader Text .................................................................................................................................... 293
Deleting Text with a Leader ...................................................................................................................... 293
Dimensioning .............................................................................................................................................. 293
Setting the Current Dimension Style ....................................................................................................... 293
Creating Automatic Exterior Dimensions ............................................................................................... 294
Specifying Exterior Dimension Settings .................................................................................................. 294
Creating Auto Interior Dimensions.......................................................................................................... 295
Specifying Interior Dimension Settings ................................................................................................... 296
Creating Linear Dimensions...................................................................................................................... 296
Creating Aligned Dimensions................................................................................................................... 297
Moving a Dimension Line ......................................................................................................................... 297
Stretching Dimensions ............................................................................................................................... 297
Changing the Style of a Dimension.......................................................................................................... 298
Deleting a Dimension ................................................................................................................................. 298
Dimension Style Properties ....................................................................................................................... 298
Anatomy of a Dimension................................................................................................................... 298
Lines and Arrows................................................................................................................................ 298
Dimension Text ................................................................................................................................... 299
Line Styles ............................................................................................................................................ 299

Chapter 46: Project Estimate ...................................................................301

Generating a Project Estimate ................................................................................................................... 302
Hiding Grid Lines in the Report Window .............................................................................................. 302
Selecting a Report Template...................................................................................................................... 302
Filtering Locations from a Project Estimate ............................................................................................ 302
Excluding Elements from a Project Estimate .......................................................................................... 303
Editing Material Pricing............................................................................................................................. 303
Saving a Project Estimate ........................................................................................................................... 304
Opening a Project Estimate in its Associated Editor ............................................................................. 304
Printing a Project Estimate ........................................................................................................................ 305

Chapter 47: 3DTrueView .......................................................................307

How 3DTrueView Rendering Works................................................................................................... 308
Setting the Viewpoint for the Scene ......................................................................................................... 308
Setting the Scene.......................................................................................................................................... 308
Defining Your Location and Time of Day ............................................................................................... 309
Creating a 3DTrueView Rendering...................................................................................................... 310
Adjusting the Rendering Quality ............................................................................................................. 311
Changing the Refresh Rate During Lighting Calculations ................................................................... 311

xvii

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Adjusting the Brightness of the Rendered Image .................................................................................. 311
Turning Daylight Off.................................................................................................................................. 311
Using Antialiasing to Reduce Jagged Edges........................................................................................... 312
Creating a Fog Effect .................................................................................................................................. 312
Creating a Smoke Effect ............................................................................................................................. 312
Adjusting the Light Coming from Light Fixtures .................................................................................. 313
Editing the Surface Properties of Materials ............................................................................................ 313
Saving a 3DTrueView Rendering to a File .......................................................................................... 313
Specifying the Output Size of Rendered Images.................................................................................... 314
Creating Multiple 3DTrueView Renderings in the Same Project .................................................... 314

Chapter 48: Animation ............................................................................. 315

Creating an Animation............................................................................................................................... 316
Drawing an Animation Path ..................................................................................................................... 316
Drawing Separate Camera and Target Paths.......................................................................................... 317
Previewing the Animation ........................................................................................................................ 318
Repeating an Animation During the Preview ........................................................................................ 318
Changing the Path Order in an Animation............................................................................................. 318
Choosing the Paths to Include in an Animation .................................................................................... 319
Moving an Animation Paths Control Points.......................................................................................... 319
Adding Control Points to an Animation Path ........................................................................................ 319
Removing a Control Point from an Animation Path ............................................................................. 319
Editing the Elevation of a Control Point.................................................................................................. 320
Adding Sounds to an Animation.............................................................................................................. 320
Removing Sounds from an Animation .................................................................................................... 320
Selecting a Default Sounds Directory ...................................................................................................... 320
Exporting an Animation to a File ............................................................................................................. 321
Editing the Name or Location of the Animation Output File .............................................................. 321
Changing the Speed of an Animation...................................................................................................... 321
Compressing an Animation Output File ................................................................................................. 322
Editing the Resolution of an Animation Output File ............................................................................ 322
Editing the Frame Rate of an Animation................................................................................................. 322
Ray Tracing an Animation......................................................................................................................... 322
Turning Animation Paths On and Off ..................................................................................................... 323
Deleting an Animation Path...................................................................................................................... 323

Managing Projects

325

Chapter 49: Opening, Saving & Printing ................................................ 327

Opening a Saved Project ............................................................................................................................ 328

xviii

Table of Contents

Changing the Number of Files in the Recently Used File List ............................................................. 328
Repairing Damaged Projects ..................................................................................................................... 328
Saving Projects............................................................................................................................................. 328
Setting the Automatic Save........................................................................................................................ 328
Specifying a Default Save Directory ........................................................................................................ 329
Saving a Project as a Template.................................................................................................................. 329
Selecting a Default Project Template........................................................................................................ 330
Disabling the Use of Templates ................................................................................................................ 330
Setting the Path to the Templates Directory ........................................................................................... 330
Selecting a Directory for Temporary Files............................................................................................... 330
Closing Projects ........................................................................................................................................... 331
Printing Drawings....................................................................................................................................... 331
Editing the Print Scale of a View .............................................................................................................. 332
Printing Across Multiple Sheets of Paper ............................................................................................... 333
Printing to a File .......................................................................................................................................... 333
Using Print Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 333

Chapter 50: Importing ...............................................................................335

Importing an Image to Trace..................................................................................................................... 336
Matching the Floor Plans Drawing Scale ............................................................................................... 336
Tracing the Imported Floor Plan .............................................................................................................. 336
Deleting a Project Trace Image ................................................................................................................. 337
Importing Custom Objects into Your Drawing...................................................................................... 337

Chapter 51: Exporting...............................................................................341

Exporting the Current View to a 2D Image File..................................................................................... 342
Exporting the 2D Drawing to a 2D AutoCAD File ................................................................................ 342
Exporting the 3D Model............................................................................................................................. 342

Customization

345

Chapter 52: Screen Settings ....................................................................347

Displaying/Hiding Toolbars .................................................................................................................... 348
Displaying Toolbars in Tabbed Format ................................................................................................... 348
Displaying Toolbars in a Non-tabbed Format ........................................................................................ 348
Changing the Background Color of Toolbars ......................................................................................... 348
Changing the Color of Toolbar Areas ...................................................................................................... 348
Moving Toolbars ......................................................................................................................................... 348
Displaying/Hiding the Catalog Panel..................................................................................................... 349

xix

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Resizing the Catalog Panel ........................................................................................................................ 349
Moving the Catalog Panel ......................................................................................................................... 349
Displaying/Hiding the Status Bar............................................................................................................ 350
Changing the Background Color of the Drawing Window.................................................................. 350
Hardware Acceleration .............................................................................................................................. 350
Improving Graphics Display..................................................................................................................... 350
Changing the Quality Level of Interactive Lighting.............................................................................. 351
Disabling Interactive Lighting .................................................................................................................. 351

Chapter 53: Managing View Windows .................................................... 353

Using the View Manager ........................................................................................................................... 354
Creating New View Windows .................................................................................................................. 354
Turning View Tabs On............................................................................................................................... 355
Making a View Window the Current View Window............................................................................ 355
Switching Between View Windows ......................................................................................................... 355
Tiling View Windows................................................................................................................................. 355
Cascading View Windows......................................................................................................................... 355
Returning to a Maximized View............................................................................................................... 356
Restoring the Previous Arrangement of View Windows ..................................................................... 356
Closing View Windows ............................................................................................................................. 356
Opening View Windows that You Have Closed.................................................................................... 356
Renaming a View Window........................................................................................................................ 356
Deleting View Windows............................................................................................................................ 357

Chapter 54: Custom Viewing ................................................................... 359

Creating New 3D Camera Views.............................................................................................................. 360
Changing a 3D Camera View.................................................................................................................... 360
Turning Cameras On and Off ................................................................................................................... 360
Changing Your Viewpoint......................................................................................................................... 360
Changing the Camera Height ................................................................................................................... 361
Changing the Target of Your View .......................................................................................................... 361
Changing the Target Height...................................................................................................................... 361
Changing the Viewing Field Angle.......................................................................................................... 361
Walking Around in a 3D Camera View................................................................................................... 362
Flying Around Your 3D Model................................................................................................................. 362
Sliding in a 3D Camera View .................................................................................................................... 363
Spinning the View Using the Look Around Tool .................................................................................. 363
Resetting the Camera in a 3D View.......................................................................................................... 363
Viewing Elevations ..................................................................................................................................... 364
Turning Elevation Marks On and Off...................................................................................................... 364
Moving Elevation Marks ........................................................................................................................... 364

xx

Table of Contents

Changing the Target of an Elevation ....................................................................................................... 364

Editing Elevation Properties ..................................................................................................................... 365
Deleting an Elevation ................................................................................................................................. 365
Creating a Custom Elevation .................................................................................................................... 365
Creating a Section View ............................................................................................................................. 366
Viewing Section Views............................................................................................................................... 366
Turning Section Marks On and Off.......................................................................................................... 366
Editing a Section View ............................................................................................................................... 367
Editing Section Properties ......................................................................................................................... 367
Deleting a Section View ............................................................................................................................. 367
Selecting a Background for 3D Views...................................................................................................... 368

Chapter 55: Catalogs & Elements............................................................369

Using the Catalog Manager....................................................................................................................... 370
Adding a Group to a Catalog .................................................................................................................... 370
Renaming a Group in a Catalog ............................................................................................................... 371
Deleting a Group in a Catalog................................................................................................................... 371
Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog ............................................................................................ 371
Saving Edited Elements in Your Drawing to a Catalog ........................................................................ 372
Importing Custom Objects into Your Catalog........................................................................................ 372
Simplifying an Element.............................................................................................................................. 374
Controlling What Parts of an Element are Displayed ........................................................................... 374
Working with Property Pages................................................................................................................... 375
Using Automatic Name Generation......................................................................................................... 375
Editing the Name Generation Formula ................................................................................................... 376
Basic Page..................................................................................................................................................... 376
Changing an Elements Orientation......................................................................................................... 377
Appearance Page ........................................................................................................................................ 377
Quantity Page .............................................................................................................................................. 378
Behavior Page .............................................................................................................................................. 379
Adding Notes to an Elements
Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 379
Adding Hyperlinks to an Elements Properties ..................................................................................... 379
Opening an Elements Hyperlink............................................................................................................. 380
Making a Hyperlink Current .................................................................................................................... 380
Creating a New Catalog............................................................................................................................. 381
Creating a Copy of a Catalog .................................................................................................................... 382
Importing Elements into Catalogs............................................................................................................ 382
Deleting Elements from a Catalog............................................................................................................ 383
Opening a Catalog ...................................................................................................................................... 383
Closing a Catalog ........................................................................................................................................ 383
Viewing Catalog Properties....................................................................................................................... 383

xxi

Chapter 56: Materials, Colors & Patterns ............................................... 385

Things You Should Know About Editing Materials.............................................................................. 386
Customizing the Materials Library .......................................................................................................... 386
Editing Material Properties ....................................................................................................................... 387
Using Textures from Outside Sources ..................................................................................................... 389
Saving Customized Materials to a Materials Library File..................................................................... 389
Importing Materials from a Materials Library File................................................................................ 390
Specifying the Location of the Textures Directory................................................................................. 390
Customizing the Patterns Library ............................................................................................................ 390

Chapter 57: Manufacturers ...................................................................... 393

Setting Up the Manufacturers Library..................................................................................................... 394
Attaching Manufacturer Information to an Element............................................................................. 394
Attaching Manufacturer Information to a Material............................................................................... 395
Displaying Manufacturer Logos in the Catalog and Property Pages ................................................. 395

Chapter 58: Line Styles ............................................................................ 397

Things You Should Know About Editing Line Styles ........................................................................... 398
Customizing the Line Styles Library........................................................................................................ 398
Saving Line Styles to a Line Styles Library File...................................................................................... 400
Importing Line Styles from a Line Styles Library File........................................................................... 401
Customizing the Linetypes Library ......................................................................................................... 401

Chapter 59: Text & Dimension Styles ..................................................... 403

Customizing the Text Styles Library........................................................................................................ 404
Saving Customized Text Styles to the Text Styles Library File ............................................................ 405
Importing Text Styles from a Text Styles Library File........................................................................... 406
Customizing the Dimension Styles Library ............................................................................................ 406
Dimension Style Properties ....................................................................................................................... 407
Anatomy of a Dimension................................................................................................................... 407
Lines and Arrows................................................................................................................................ 407
Dimension Text ................................................................................................................................... 408
Line Styles ............................................................................................................................................ 408
Saving Customized Dimension Styles to the Dimension Styles Library File..................................... 409
Importing Dimension Styles from Dimension Styles Library File ...................................................... 409

Chapter 60: Light Sources ....................................................................... 411

Things You Should Know About Editing Light Sources ...................................................................... 412
Customizing the Light Source Library .................................................................................................... 412
Saving Customized Light Sources to the Light Source Library File.................................................... 413

Table of Contents

Importing Light Sources from a Light Source Library File................................................................... 414

Specifying the Location of the Light Source Directory.......................................................................... 414

Glossary .....................................................................................................417
Catalog Index.............................................................................................425
Index ...........................................................................................................439

xxiii

Welcome

page 1

Screen Layout

page 5

House Builder Wizard

page 9

Building Locations

page 15

Drawing & Editing Basics

page 19

Congratulations on purchasing 3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe! We guarantee you are
going to enjoy creating your dream design projects.
Design Suite Deluxe is for anyone who wants to design, renovate, decorate or landscape a home.
This multi-functional tool is easy to use and delivers the results you want completely and
accurately. It eliminates the monotonous labor involved in creating building plans, and frees you
to devote your energy to the creative and enjoyable aspects of building and landscape
design.
Whether you are just playing around with different design ideas, or preparing drawings for a
building professional, Design Suite Deluxe makes it fun and easy.
Possible uses include:
Home design

3D visualization and animation

Floor plans

Photorealistic rendering

Interior design

Landscaping

Exterior design

Budget and materials list

Remodeling

Export to other file formats

Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the contents of this guide so you can quickly find
the answers you need while working on your project.

Chapter 1 Welcome

Package Contents

To install the program if installation does not

begin automatically:

Your 3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

package comes with everything you need to
install and use the software. The package includes
the following:

1.

Make sure the installation CD is in your

CD-ROM drive.

2.

At the Windows desktop, click the Start

button, then select Run.

3.

Type D:\setup.exe in the Open edit box. The

letter D represents your CD-ROM drive. If
you are installing from a different drive,
substitute the correct letter for the letter D.

4.

Click OK, then follow the on-screen

instructions to complete the installation.

Installation CD
Users Guide

System Requirements
In order to run Design Suite Deluxe, your system
should include the following:

Microsoft

Windows

98SE/2000 SP4/XP
SP1/ME
500Mhz or higher processor
256 MB RAM (512 MB recommended)
300MB free hard-disk space (750MB
recommended if you are installing the Plant
Encyclopedia on your hard drive)
4X CD-ROM drive or faster
Video Card with OpenGL driver and a
minimum of 32MB RAM (64MB
recommended)
Color monitor with 1024x768 resolution or
higher
Mouse
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher to
access online features (optional).

Starting the Program

You can start your program from your Windows
desktop by selecting Start > Programs > 3D
Home Architect > Design Suite Deluxe 8, or by
double-clicking the 3D Home Architect Design
Suite Deluxe 8 icon on your desktop.

Starting a New Project

When you start the program, a new, blank
drawing is opened, so you can start creating your
design right away.
If you have another project open, you can
start a new project by selecting File > New
or clicking the New button on the Standard
toolbar.

Installing the Program

Using the House Builder Wizard

To install Design Suite Deluxe, just insert the

installation CD in your CD-ROM drive. Make
sure you exit all other programs, applications and
screensavers before installing.

Every time you start a new project, the House

Builder Wizard launches automatically. Simply
enter information on each screen, and the wizard
will build a basic house for you instantly! For
more information about the House Builder
Wizard, see Chapter 3, House Builder Wizard on
page 9.

To install the program:

1.

Begin at the Windows desktop.

2.

Insert the installation CD into your

CD-ROM drive. The InstallShield Wizard
screen appears and loads the setup.

3.

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete

the installation.

Note: If the install screen does not appear

automatically, you must install the program
manually.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Starting a Drawing from Scratch

If you prefer to design from scratch, just click
Cancel on any House Builder Wizard screen. If
you want you can prevent the House Builder
Wizard from launching when you start new
projects. See Preventing the House Builder
Wizard from Launching on page 12.

Viewing Sample Projects

Viewing Sample Projects

To get help for a specific part of your drawing:

To give you an idea of the things you can do with

the program, you may want to view some sample
projects created in Design Suite Deluxe. These
projects are located in the programs Samples
directory.

1.

Select the element you want help with.

2.

Right-click and select the Tool Help option

for that element (e.g. Walls Help). Help for
the element is displayed.
You can also access the Tool Help from the
Edit > Modify Elements menu.

To view sample projects:

1.

Select File > Open Samples.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the project you

would like to view, then click Open.

Adjusting Your Display Settings

You can control program performance by
ensuring your Windows display settings are set
correctly.

Tool Help

To adjust your display settings:

To get help in a dialog:

1.

From the Windows Start menu, select

Settings > Control Panel.

1.

2.

In the Control Panel window, double-click

Display.

3.

In the Display Properties dialog, select the

Settings tab.

4.

From the Color drop box, select

True Color (32 bit).

Click the Dialog Help button in the dialog. A

window is displayed that describes the
content of the dialog.

Note: If 32-bit is unavailable, select 24-bit.

5.

In the Screen area section, move the slider to

display at least 1024 x 768 pixels.

6.

Click OK.

Dialog
Help

Online Help

Electronic Users Guide

Design Suite Deluxe includes a comprehensive

online help system that includes all of the
information found in this Users Guide. You can
browse through all help topics, or get help for a
specific element, tool or dialog while you are
designing.

You can access a PDF version of the 3D Home

Architect Design Suite Deluxe Users Guide right
from your Help menu.
To view the Users Guide:
1.

Select Help > Users Guide.

To access the online help file:

Select Help > Program Help, or

Press F1, or
Click the Program Help button on the
Standard toolbar

Users Guide

Chapter 1 Welcome

Glossary of Terms
You can instantly access a glossary of technical
and construction terms from the Help menu.
To view the Glossary of Terms:
1.

Select Help > Glossary of Terms.

Online Self-Support
You can access troubleshooting guides, FAQs and
downloads for 3D Home Architect Design Suite
Deluxe 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
To access free online software help:
1.

Select Help > Online Software Help.

Technical Support
Please visit Encore's technical support
knowledgebase at
http://support.encoreusa.com and have the
following information available:

Product name
Type of computer, amount of RAM, video
card and system information
A description of the problem, including any
error messages
A list of steps that lead to the problem

If you are unable to resolve your issue using the

knowledgebase articles, you may contact us
through email via our web form support section
by clicking on the link to submit an Online
Support Request.
If you contact us using our web form, please
remember to include the basic hardware details
and we would also ask that you attach your
"dxdiag" file.
To do this please:
1.

Click Start.

2.

Click Run.

3.

Type dxdiag and click OK.

4.

The DirectX diagnosis program should now

start up. (This may take a few minutes.)

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

5.

Click below on "save all information" and a

file by the name of dxdiag.txt will be created.

You should save this to your desktop. While

using our web form, you will be prompted to
attach the file to your request. This will allow us
to provide the best possible support regarding
your system.
Unfortunately, we do not provide game play or
"how-to" support on the products we distribute.
Our tech support is limited to ensure that your
software runs on your computer as designed.
Many of our products have built in readme files
or help files that accompany them. There is often
helpful information and tips in these files. Beyond
that, the Internet is a great resource for
information.

Customer Service
To obtain information regarding refunds and
replacements, please visit
http://support.encoreusa.com to view our
policies. Please be advised that we do not
provide product functionality or technical
support.

3D Home Architect Online

Visit the 3D Home Architect web site to view a
complete listing of 3D Home Architect products
and services.
To access the 3D Home Architect web site:
1.

Select Help > 3D Home Architect Online, or

go to http://www.3dhaonline.com in your
Internet browser.

The 3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe screen contains a variety of user-friendly features that
make it easy to create precise home plans. This chapter describes everything you see on the screen
so you can become familiar and comfortable with your work environment.
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Tabbed
Toolbars

Catalog Panel
Building Toolbar

Basic View Control

Toolbar

Help String

Zoom and
Navigate Toolbar

Status Bar

Drawing Aids

Chapter 2 Screen Layout

Title Bar
The title bar runs across the top of the screen. It
displays the name of your program, the name of
the current project, and the name of the current
view.
You can minimize, maximize, restore or close the
application window using the buttons at the right
end of the title bar, or by clicking the Control
menu button at the left end of the title bar. You
can also maximize or restore the window by
double-clicking the title bar. If the application
window is not maximized, you can move the
entire window around on your desktop by
dragging the title bar.

Menu Bar
The menu bar is located directly below the title
bar. You can select menu items using either the
mouse or keyboard.
To use the mouse, simply click a menu name, then
select an item from the menu that pops down.
Menu items that have an arrow to the right
display cascading menus when you place your
pointer over them. When you highlight a menu
item, a brief description is displayed on the status
bar.
To use the keyboard, press the ALT key and type
the underlined letter in the menu name, then type
the underlined letter in the menu item name. If
the menu item has a cascading menu, you need to
type an additional letter. You can also use the
arrow keys on your keyboard to move through
menu items and press ENTER to select one. You
can use the ESC key to back out of the menu items
one level at a time.

Toolbars and Toolbar Tabs

By default, four tabs are located just beneath the
menu bar: Building, Interiors, Landscape and
Terrain. These are actually toolbars displayed in
tabbed format.
The view in the drawing window does not change
when you switch to a different tab. The tabs
simply provide you with instant access to the
specific toolbars you need, when you need them.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

In addition to the four toolbar tabs, there are two

free-standing toolbars displayed just below the
drawing area: Basic View Control and Zoom and
Navigate. Free-standing toolbars can be moved
around on the screen. There are more toolbars
available for display in your workspace options.
Each one can be displayed in tabbed or nontabbed format the choice is yours.
Note that you still have access to a complete set of
Insert features on the Insert menu regardless of
what tab you are on.

Building Toolbar
The Building toolbar contains the tools you need
to build a home or any architectural structure. It
includes tools such as Walls, Doors, Windows,
and Roofs.

Interiors Toolbar
The Interiors toolbar contains the tools you need
to furnish, decorate and equip the interior of your
home. It contains tools such as Cabinets,
Appliances, Furniture, Lighting and Plumbing
Fixtures.

Landscape Toolbar
The Landscape toolbar contains all the tools you
need to create a complete landscape plan for the
exterior of your home. Tools include Plants, Fills,
Edging, Fences/Gates, Decks, Exterior Furniture,
and more.

Catalog Panel

Terrain Toolbar

Catalog Panel

The Terrain toolbar contains tools that you can

use to design a realistic terrain for your model,
which is especially important in 3D views. Tools
include Hills/Valleys, Slopes, Paths, Pads,
Retaining Walls, and more.

The catalog panel, located on the right side of the

screen, displays the elements contained in the
programs Master Catalog, or whatever catalog is
currently open. This is where you select elements
to insert into your drawing.

Basic View Control Toolbar

The Basic View Control toolbar contains several
essential view-related tools. The toolbars
building location drop box displays the current
building location, which is important when
inserting elements in your drawing. The toolbar
also lets you quickly switch between 2D view and
3D view, create dynamic cutaway views, and
access the View Filter. A display mode button lets
you choose the current display type for the view
(wireframe, hidden line, etc.).

Zoom and Navigate Toolbar

Zoom tools on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar
include Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Realtime,
Zoom Window, Zoom Previous, and Pan. The
navigation features on the toolbar (Walk Around,
Fly Around, Look Around, Slide) are only active
when you are in a 3D view. These tools let you
change the view in real time using your mouse.

The content of the catalog panel changes

depending on which Insert tool is currently
selected, or was last selected. For example, if you
select the Doors tool, you will see doors displayed
in the catalog panel.
The top window of the catalog panel displays a
list of groups specific to the current element type.
For example, if Doors is the current tool, you will
see groups such as Hinged, Entry and Bi-Fold.
The middle window of the catalog panel displays
all the element types available in the currently
selected group. For example, if the Hinged door
group is currently selected, you will see a list of
hinged door sizes in the element window.
The lower window of the catalog panel displays a
3D rendered preview of the currently selected
Users Guide

Chapter 2 Screen Layout

element. You can rotate the image around by
clicking and dragging with your mouse. Note,
however, that the preview is for viewing
purposes only within the catalog panel. The
orientation of the element in the preview window
has no effect on the orientation of the element
when you insert it in your plan. You can change
an elements orientation after you have inserted it
in the plan.
You can also right-click in the preview window
and select a different display mode for the image,
or switch the preview to a 2D plan view.

Status Bar
The Status bar is located at the bottom of the
screen. It displays helpful prompts while you are
working on your design project. For example, if
you are inserting a wall, it may display Pick first
insertion point. The Status bar also includes a
selection of drawing aid buttons such as ORTHO
and OBJSNAP.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

The first question many people ask when they sit down with a new piece of software is,
Where do I start? Design Suite Deluxes House Builder Wizard is the perfect way to start a
project, because it builds a house for you instantly! All you need to do is specify how many
stories you want to create, select a general house shape, define the building dimensions, then
select the general style for the walls, roof, floors and foundation. In a few mouse clicks, youll
have a basic structure that you can edit and add to.
Once your basic model is built you can add things like interior walls, doors, windows, stairs and
furnishings.
If you would prefer to start your project from scratch, some of the following chapters can help
you get started:
Chapter 8: Foundation (page 43)
Chapter 9: Support Elements (page 49)
Chapter 10: Walls (page 55)

Chapter 3 House Builder Wizard

Using the House Builder Wizard

2.

Click OK in the warning dialog. The House

Builder Wizard launches.

3.

On the House Builder screen, click Next.

4.

From the Number of Floors drop box, select

the number of floors you would like the
house to have (not including the basement
level).

5.

In the Floor to Ceiling Height edit box, type

the desired wall height for each floor level.

6.

In the Foundation Type area, select the type of

foundation you want to create. Choose from
Concrete Slab, Full Basement, or Foundation
Walls w/ Crawl Space.

7.

If you selected the Full Basement or

Foundation Walls w/Crawl Space, specify
the elevation of the ground floor relative to

The House Builder Wizard is a handy, easy-to-use

tool that instantly builds a basic house for you
based on factors that you specify while stepping
through the Wizard. These factors include:

number of floors
wall height
foundation type
building shape
building dimensions
garage type and size
materials used for walls, roof, floors, etc.

The resulting house includes exterior walls,

footings and foundation walls (or concrete slab), a
roof, and a floor.
Once the house has been created in your drawing
area, you can edit all aspects of it and add to it to
suit your needs.
To use the House Builder Wizard:
1.

Select Tools > Design Wizards > House

Builder. The following dialog appears:

Note: Running the House Builder Wizard

will delete all existing building elements in
the current project. It will not, however,
remove the terrain or any landscaping
elements you have inserted.

10

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Using the House Builder Wizard

the ground in the Ground Floor Height
above Terrain edit box.
8.

Click Next.

13. In the Garage area, select either Single,

Double or Triple from the Type drop box.
Then, using the dimensioned graphic as an
aid, specify the desired offset of the garage
from the exterior wall corner.
14. Click Next.

9.

Select the general house shape by clicking

one of the graphics in the House Shape pane.

10. Once youve selected a house shape, make a

selection in the Garage Position pane to
specify where you want to put the garage. If
you dont want a garage, select the first
option.
11. Click Next.

15. From the Building Configuration drop box,

select the general style for your home
(contemporary, country or traditional). The
pre-set material selections for the elements in
your house are displayed in the lower pane.
You can select different materials if you want
just click the button of the element you
want to change and make a selection from
the catalog.
16. Click Next.

12. In the Building Size area, specify the desired

dimensions for the house by entering values
in the edit boxes. The edit box labels
correspond to the labels on the image in the
left pane.
Users Guide

11

Chapter 3 House Builder Wizard

17. Click Finish to build the house.

2.

Tip: You can create your own custom

configuration of element styles that can be saved
for use in any project. See Creating a Custom
House Builder Wizard Configuration on page 12.

In the Catalog Manager dialog, select

Libraries > Building Configuration.

Preventing the House Builder

Wizard from Launching
By default, the House Builder Wizard launches
every time you start a new project. You can
prevent the House Builder Wizard from
launching if you want. If you do, a blank drawing
will open instead when you start new projects.

To add a new configuration to the list:

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

Click the Add Item button below the

left pane, or right-click in the left pane
and select Add Item. An entry is added
to the list.

2.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

Type a name for the configuration, then press

ENTER.

3.

In the Startup area, uncheck the Launch

wizard when starting new project check
box.

To edit a building configuration:

4.

Click OK.

To prevent the House Builder Wizard from

launching:
1.

Creating a Custom House Builder

Wizard Configuration
A House Builder Wizard configuration
determines what elements are used for exterior
walls, roofs, floors, ceilings, foundation walls and
footings. You are asked to select a configuration
for your house when you run the House Builder
Wizard.
You can edit any of the existing configurations
that are available in the House Builder Wizard, or
create your own. Customized configurations are
saved automatically and will be available when
you run the House Builder Wizard in the current
project, or any other project.
To access the building configuration library:
1.

12

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click any element in the catalog
panel and select Catalog Manager.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Select the configuration in the list. The

element selections for the configuration are
listed in the center pane.

2.

In the center pane, select an element type you

want to specify a style for.

Creating a Custom House Builder Wizard Configuration

3.

Click the Select button.

4.

In the catalog dialog, select the specific style

you want to apply to the selected element
type, then click OK.

5.

Continue selecting styles for the remaining

element types.

To delete a configuration from the list:

1.

Select the configuration in the list.

2.

Click the Delete button below the left pane,

or right-click in the left pane and select
Delete.

Users Guide

13

When you insert an element in your drawing, it is inserted on the current building location. It is
important to define your building locations before inserting elements, since building locations are
the key to organizing elements and inserting them at the correct height in your model.
If you are drawing from scratch, the programs default drawing templates have three pre-defined
building locations: Foundation, Ground Floor, and Second Floor. You can change the settings for
existing building locations as well as add and delete locations.
If you use the House Builder Wizard to start your project, your main building locations are set up
for you when you run the House Builder Wizard.
This chapter describes how to define your building locations, and identify the current building
location when adding elements to your design.

15

Chapter 4 Building Locations

Defining Building Locations

When you define building locations, you are
basically doing two things:

setting the wall height for each floor (level) in

your model
specifying where each floor is positioned
relative to the ground (zero)

To view building location settings:

1.

Select Settings > Building Locations,

or click the Building Locations button
on the Basic View Control toolbar.

Below is a brief description of each building

location property.
Number. A reference number for the location.
Name. The locations name (e.g. Ground Floor).
Floor Level. Height of floor base above ground
level (0).

These are typical settings for someone who isnt

interested in creating a basement. If you wanted
to create a full basement, you could change the
Floor Level to -8 and the Wall Height to 8, for
example.
By default, the Ground Floor and Second Floor
locations each have their Wall Height set to 8.
The Floor Level of the Ground Floor is set to 1.
This means the top of the ground floor walls will
be 9 above the ground. The Floor Level of the
Second Floor location is set to 10. This leaves a
12 gap between the Ground Floor walls and
Second Floor walls, which is needed to fit the
floor structure of the ground floor. All of the
exterior walls in the catalog have their Drop
Exterior Face variable set to 12, which extends the
base of exterior walls down by 12 to cover this
gap.
To change the properties of a building
location:
1.

In the Building Locations dialog, click on

the property you want to change. You can
change location names or any of the
numerical settings.

2.

Type the value you want.

3.

Press Enter.

To add a new building location:

1.

Note: By default the new location will adopt

the numerical settings of the currently
selected location.

Head Height. Height of tops of windows and

wall openings relative to the floor level.
Ceiling Height. Height of underside of ceiling
surface relative to the floor level.
Wall Height. Physical height of the walls on the
location.
By default, if you are drawing from scratch, the
Foundation location has a Floor Level of -1,
meaning the base of the foundation is positioned
1 below ground level. (In other words, it is not a
full basement.) The Wall Height of the
Foundation location is 1. Therefore, the top of the
foundation wall will be situated at ground level.

16

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

In the Building Locations dialog, click the

Add Location button. A new location is
added to the bottom of the list.

2.

Specify the locations properties. To specify a

property, click on the current value, type the
new value, then press Enter.

Note: When you add a location to your list, it

does not become the current location unless you
select it in the list or edit its properties.
To delete a building location:
1.

In the Building Locations dialog, click on

one of the locations fields to make it the
current location.

Current Building Location

2.

Click Delete Location.

Note: You cannot delete a location if it contains

any elements. Also, you cannot delete a location if
it is the only one in the list.

Location Dimming

Current Building Location

When a particular location is current, elements on

all other visible locations are dimmed. This makes
it easier to insert and edit elements on the current
location because it is more obvious which
elements are part of the current location.

Before inserting an element in your drawing you

should make sure that the building location you
want to insert the element on is the current
building location.

By default, elements on other locations are

dimmed by 90%. You can adjust the dimming so
that it is lighter or darker according to your
preference.

To identify the current building location:

To change the dimming percentage:

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Workspace tab.

3.

Type the desired dimming percentage in the

Dimming Percentage edit box, or use the
arrows to scroll up or down through a list of
values.

4.

Click OK.

Take a look at the building locations drop box

on the Basic View Control toolbar.

or

See which location is checked in the Building

Locations dialog.
Check mark identifies
the current location

To make a different location current within the

current view:

Click on the building locations drop box on

the Basic View Control toolbar and select the
desired location.
or

In the Building Locations dialog, click in the

far left field of the location you want to make
current. A check mark indicates the location
is now current.

Users Guide

17

Whether you have automatically built a house using the House Builder Wizard, or have started a
drawing from scratch, you will insert a variety of elements to create your home design.
Everything is point-and-click in Design Suite Deluxe, making it extremely simple to use and
leaving you free to be as creative as you like. All elements are intelligent and know what they are
in relation to other elements. For example, a door can only be inserted in a wall. Design Suite
Deluxe automatically displays dimensions as you draw, making it even easier to create accurate
drawings right from the start.
While working on your project, you will probably want to edit it as you go. You can select
elements by clicking on them, or by drawing a selection window around them.
This chapter describes the basics of inserting elements, and selecting them for editing.

19

Chapter 5 Drawing & Editing Basics

Inserting Elements
When you select a tool from the Insert menu or
one of the insertion toolbars, you are in Insertion
mode. To insert an element, you select it in the
catalog panel, then click in your drawing area.
Many elements can be inserted with a single
mouse click. Single-click elements include doors,
windows, stairs, columns, cabinets, furniture,
appliances, light fixtures, electrical elements,
plumbing fixtures, and plants. Line-drawn
elements, like walls, railings, edging and fences,
require that you select two points to define the
elements start point and end point. The points
you pick determine the elements length and
angle. Area-drawn elements, such as pads and fills,
are drawn by picking a series of points to define
their outline.
In many cases, on-screen dimensions are
displayed as you draw, making it easy to create
line-drawn and area-drawn elements at the
correct length or size, and insert elements like
doors and windows precisely where you want
them in a wall.
Once you insert an element in your drawing area,
you can:

Continue inserting the same element

Select a different element in the catalog to
insert
Right-click and select Finish to end the
command and return to Selection mode

Tip: When an Insert tool is active, double-clicking

inserts the element and finishes the command at
the same time. Note, however, that doubleclicking after youve already inserted an element
will, in most cases, insert another element.
Tip: If you are in Selection mode, you can insert
any element currently accessible in the catalog by
simply selecting the element in the catalog, then
moving your pointer into the drawing area.
Note: If you dont see the exact element you want
to insert in the catalog, you can create custom
elements to suit your needs. See Adding and
Editing Elements in a Catalog on page 371.

20

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Selecting an Insertion Method for

Line-Drawn Elements
Line-drawn elements are elements that are drawn
by picking two or more points. They include
walls, railings, edging and fences. By default,
line-drawn elements use the Pick Points
insertion method. With this method you do not
have to keep your mouse button depressed to
draw the element (i.e. you do not have to click
and drag the mouse). Once youve selected the
first point, you can simply move your mouse in
the direction you want the element to run, then
click to select the next point.
If you are more comfortable with the click-anddrag method, you can select the Pick and drag
insertion method. With this method, you keep the
mouse button depressed after clicking the first
point, drag the mouse to draw the element, then
release your mouse button to select the next point.
To select an insertion method for line-drawn
elements:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Insertion Method area, select either Pick

Points or Pick and drag.

4.

Click OK.

Repeating the Insertion of

Line-Drawn Elements
When drawing elements such as walls, railings,
edging and fences, new segments are continually
added as you pick more points. You can use the
Repeat tool to finish drawing the current linedrawn element and start a new one if you want,
without having to restart the tool.
To repeat the insertion of a line-drawn
element:
1.

When you are ready to finish the current

element and start a new one, right-click and
select Repeat, or select Edit > Modify

Going into Selection Mode for Editing

2.

Elements > Repeat. The current element is

finished.

To select multiple elements by clicking:

1.

Click the first element you want to select.

Pick a start point for the new element and

continue drawing.

2.

Hold down the Shift key and click on the rest

of the elements you want to select. The most
recent selection is green and prior selections
are blue.

Note: The Repeat tool is available for line-drawn

elements only.

Going into Selection Mode for

Editing

To select a group of elements by creating a

selection window:

When you have finished using an insertion tool,

either by double-clicking or selecting Finish from
the right-click menu, you automatically go into
Selection mode. When in Selection mode, you can
select elements in your drawing area and edit
them.

1.

You can also go into Selection mode by

clicking the Select/Edit button on any
insertion toolbar, or by selecting
Select/Edit from the Edit menu.

1.

Selecting Elements for Editing

When in Selection Mode, you can select elements
for editing. You can select individual elements, a
group of elements, or all elements.
When an element is selected, it is highlighted in a
different color (usually light green). One or more
handles are also displayed on the element.
When you are in 3D view, all elements on all
locations are selectable. When you are in 2D plan
view, only elements on the current building
location are selectable. However, you can change
this if you want. See Making Elements on All
Locations Selectable in 2D Plan View on page 21.
If you are having trouble selecting the element
you want, you may want to use the View Filter to
make other elements non-selectable. This makes
selection of the element much easier. See Selection
Filtering on page 37.
Note: Floors cannot be selected in 2D. They can
only be selected in 3D.
To select a single element:
1.

Going from either left to right, or right to left,

drag a selection window around the elements
you want to select. Any elements touching
the selection window will be selected (they
do not need to be totally enclosed).

To select all elements on the current location:

Select Edit > Select All.

To re-select the elements you last selected:

1.

Select Edit > Select Previous.

Deselecting Elements
When you select elements, you can remove
individual elements from your selection set. You
can also deselect everything that is currently
selected.
To deselect individual elements:
1.

Hold down your Shift key.

2.

Click the element you want to deselect.

To deselect everything in your selection set:

1.

Select Edit > Deselect All, or right-click in

the drawing area and select Deselect All, or
simply click in a blank spot somewhere else
in the drawing area.

Making Elements on All Locations

Selectable in 2D Plan View
By default, only elements on the current building
location can be selected in 2D plan view, even if
elements on other locations are visible. If you
want to make elements on all locations selectable,
you need to change one of your program settings.

Click on the element.

Users Guide

21

Chapter 5 Drawing & Editing Basics

To make elements on all locations selectable
in 2D plan view:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Drawing Assistance area, uncheck the

Select elements on current location only
while in plan view check box.

4.

Click OK.

Disabling Pre-Selection
When pre-selection is turned on, tooltips are
displayed when you hover over elements, telling
you what the elements are. This can help you
when selecting elements, as it lets you know what
you are about to select. By default, pre-selection is
enabled. On some systems, disabling
pre-selection can help improve program speed.
To disable pre-selection:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Visual Aids area, uncheck the Enable

Pre-Selection check box.

4.

Click OK.

Accessing Edit Tools

Most elements can be moved once they are
selected by simply clicking and dragging them.
Some can also be stretched or rotated. You can
access a full menu of edit tools by right-clicking in
the drawing area, or by selecting Edit > Modify
Elements.
Menus vary depending on the element selected.
Typical tools are Properties, Move, Rotate,
Duplicate, and Delete. If two types of elements
are selected (such as a floor and a wall), only tools
that are common to both element types are
available.

22

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Each chapter includes editing instructions specific

to the contents of that chapter. For information
about general editing, see Editing Your Design
on page 271.

2D and 3D Viewing

page 25

View Filter

page 33

Design Suite Deluxe offers a variety of options for viewing your design in 2D and 3D.
By default, your design is displayed in 2D wireframe view. You can use the 2D Designers View
tool to instantly view a rendered version of your 2D plan.
When working in 2D plan view, you can magnify or reduce the view using the Zoom In, Zoom
Out and Zoom Realtime tools. You can also magnify a selected area using the Zoom Window tool.
The Zoom to Fit tool magnifies your design so it fills the drawing area, creating the largest view
possible. The Pan tool lets you pan the view in any direction by simply clicking and dragging.
You can instantly switch to 3D view by simply selecting a view from the 3D Camera Views menu
or toolbar flyout. Choose one of the pre-defined camera views, or create new views to suit your
needs.
While viewing in 3D you can choose from a variety of display modes, including Wireframe,
Patterned and Rendered.
Using the Framing Visibility options you can view your house frame, which consists of wall, roof,
floor and ceiling framing.
This chapter describes all basic 2D and 3D viewing features. For information about advanced
viewing features, see page 359. For information about 3DTrueView rendering, see page 307. For
information about creating animations, see page 315.

25

Chapter 6 2D and 3D Viewing

Viewing the 2D Plan

Viewing a 2D Designers View

When you start a drawing, the default view is a

2D plan view. It shows your model in a "flat"
view, as if you were looking at it from above. 2D
Plan view is ideal for creating a floor plan.

By default, your design is displayed in a

wireframe 2D plan view. You can use the 2D
Designers View tool to quickly display a
rendered version of the 2D plan view. In a
rendered view, materials are applied to the
elements and terrain, creating a more realistic
view. For example, if you have a shingled roof on
your model, you will actually see the shingles in
2D Designers View.

To display your model in 2D plan view:

Select View > 2D Plan View, or

Click the 2D Plan View button on the
Basic View Control or Advanced View
Control toolbar, or

Right-click in the drawing area and select 2D

Plan View

By default, all locations are visible at the same

time. However, any locations other than the
current location are dimmed. You can control
which elements and locations are displayed by
using the View Filter. See Filtering the Display on
page 34.
While in 2D plan view you can zoom in and out,
and pan your drawing.

26

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

2D Designers View
To view a 2D Designers View:
1.

Select View > 2D Designers View, or

click the 2D Designers View button on
the Basic View Control or Advanced
View Control toolbar.

Note: If you want to be able to see inside the

model, you can use the View Filter to hide
elements like the roof or ceilings. See Filtering the
Display on page 34.

Displaying 3D Camera Views

Displaying 3D Camera Views

A camera view is a 3D perspective view. In a
perspective view, the scale of an element
decreases according to its distance from the
viewer, creating a more real-world view.

Note: By default, 3D views are displayed in

Rendered mode. For information about changing
the display mode, see Changing the Display
Mode on page 29. For information about moving
around in a 3D view, or creating or customizing
3D views, see Custom Viewing on page 359.

Zooming In
The Zoom In tool magnifies the entire view in
increments. Zooming is possible in both 2D and
3D view.
To zoom in:

3D Perspective View
Design Suite Deluxe offers two pre-defined camera
views for your convenience: 3D Perspective and
3D Overview. The 3D Perspective lets you view
your design from a Southwest viewpoint. The 3D
Overview looks at your design from an elevated
position, creating an overhead view. You can
change each 3D view by editing camera
properties, as well as create new views.
To view a 3D camera view:
1.

Select View > 3D Camera Views, then select

the camera view you want to display. Or,
click the 3D Camera Views button on the
Basic View Control or Advanced View
Control toolbar and select the camera view to
display.

1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Zoom In, or click the Zoom In button
on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

2.

To zoom in more, select the Zoom In tool

repeatedly until the view is sufficiently
magnified.

See Also: Zooming in Realtime on page 27.

Zooming Out
The Zoom Out tool reduces the size of the current
view in increments.
To zoom out:
1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Zoom Out, or click the Zoom Out
button on the Zoom and Navigate
toolbar.

2.

To zoom out more, select the Zoom Out tool

repeatedly until the desired zoom level is
achieved.

See Also: Zooming in Realtime on page 27.

Zooming in Realtime
Tip: If you have your cameras turned on in 2D,
you can switch to a 3D view by selecting a
camera, right-clicking it, then selecting Look
Through.

The Zoom Realtime tool continuously magnifies

or shrinks the view as you click and drag with
your mouse. You can zoom in and out in 2D plan
view or any 3D view.
To zoom in and out:
1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Zoom Realtime, or click the Zoom

Users Guide

27

Chapter 6 2D and 3D Viewing

Realtime button on the Zoom and Navigate
toolbar.
2.

To zoom in, click and drag toward the top of

the screen. To zoom out, click and drag
toward the bottom of the screen.

3.

When the view is the desired size, release

your mouse button.

Tip: You can also zoom in and out using the scroll
button on your mouse.

Zooming a Selected Area

Using the Zoom Window tool you can magnify a
particular area of your design by drawing a
selection window around it.
To zoom a selected area:
1.

2.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Zoom Window, or click the Zoom
Window button on the Zoom and
Navigate toolbar. Your cursor becomes a
magnifying glass.
Click and drag a selection window around
the area you want to magnify.

To zoom the drawing to fit the drawing area:

1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Zoom to Fit, or click the Zoom to Fit
button on the Zoom and Navigate
toolbar.

Note that the terrain is considered part of your

drawing. If you want to zoom your model to fit
the drawing area, you need to turn the terrain off
before using Zoom to Fit.
Note: The Zoom to Fit tool is not available in 3D
camera views.

Panning Across a Drawing

Using the Pan tool you can move the current view
of your design to bring a particular part of your
design into view. This is especially useful when
the area you want to view is currently not visible
because you have zoomed in on your drawing.
To pan the current view:
1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Pan, or click the Pan button on the
Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

2.

Click in the drawing.

3.

Hold your mouse button down.

4.

Drag the view in the direction you want to

pan.

5.

Release the mouse button.

Note: The Pan tool is not available in 3D camera

views.

Note: The Zoom Window tool is not available in

3D camera views.

Zooming to Fit the Drawing Area

The Zoom to Fit tool instantly extends your
drawing to the edges of the drawing area. This
ensures your entire drawing is visible at the most
maximized view possible, and makes full use of
the drawing area.

28

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Zooming Back to the Previous

View
If you have used a zoom or pan tool, you can use
the Zoom Previous tool to instantly return the
view to its previous state.
To zoom back to the previous view:
1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Zoom Previous, or click the Zoom
Previous button on the Zoom and
Navigate toolbar.

Changing the Display Mode

Changing the Display Mode

Displaying a Hidden Line View

By default, your design is displayed in Wireframe

mode when you are in 2D plan view. When you
switch to a 3D view, the default display mode is
Rendered mode. There are five display modes
you can choose from.

In a hidden line view, all lines that you would

normally not see are removed from the view,
creating an opaque view.

To access display modes:

1.

Select View > Display Mode, or click the

Display Mode button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control toolbar to
views Display Mode menu.

See the following topics:

Displaying a Wireframe View on page 29

Displaying a Hidden Line View on page 29
Displaying a Rendered View on page 29
Displaying a Rendered Outline View on page 30

To display a hidden line view:

1.

Displaying a Patterned View on page 30

Displaying a Wireframe View

In wireframe display mode, each line in your
design is visible, creating a see-through view.
Wireframe display mode is available for both 2D
and 3D views.

To display a wireframe view:

1.

Select View > Display Mode > Wireframe, or

click the Display Mode button on the Basic
View Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar and select Wireframe.

Select View > Display Mode > Hidden Line,

or click the Display Mode button on the Basic
View Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar and select Hidden Line.

Displaying a Rendered View

In Rendered display mode, textures and colors
are applied to the elements and terrain, creating a
very realistic view.

To display a rendered view:

1.

Select View > Display Mode > Rendered, or

click the Display Mode button on the Basic
View Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar and select Rendered.
Users Guide

29

Chapter 6 2D and 3D Viewing

Note: The Rendered display mode should not be
confused with a 3DTrueView rendered view.

Displaying a Rendered Outline

View
In the Rendered Outline display mode, textures
and colors are applied to the elements and terrain,
and surface edges are outlined in a single, dark
line for increased surface definition.

Displaying a Patterned View

In Patterned display mode, patterns of lines
(hatching) are applied to the surfaces of elements.
Patterns are part of a materials definition.
Therefore, the materials applied to your elements
determine what patterns you will see.

To display a patterned view:

1.
To display a rendered outline view:
1.

30

Select View > Display Mode > Rendered

Outline, or click the Display Mode button on
the Basic View Control or Advanced View
Control toolbar and select Rendered
Outline.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Select View > Display Mode > Patterned, or

click the Display Mode button on the Basic
View Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar and select Patterned.

Displaying Framing
Walls, floors, ceilings and roofs have a framing
configuration assigned to them in their
properties. You can instantly view your house
frame using the Display Framing tool, then return
to a regular view of your model at any time.

Displaying Framing
To display framing:
1.

Select View > Framing Visibility > Display

Framing.

Note: You can also use the View Filter to display

framing. However, the framing will not be
displayed on its own unless you turn everything
else off.
Note: Framing cannot be selected for editing. It is
available for viewing purposes only.
To return to a non-framed view:
1.

Select View > Framing Visibility > Display

All But Framing.

To change framing members or member

spacing, see the following topics:

Specifying Framing Members for Walls on

page 62

Specifying Framing Members for Floors on

page 79

Specifying Framing Members for Ceilings

on page 85

Editing a Roofs Frame Details on page 106

Users Guide

31

The programs unique View Filter feature lets you decide which elements or locations you want
displayed at any given time. For example, you may want to hide your roof and ceilings to be able
to see inside the model. It also lets you make selected elements non-selectable, which is
sometimes necessary when trying to select a particular element in your drawing, like a floor or
ceiling.

33

Chapter 7 View Filter

Filtering the Display

The View Filter provides precise control over
what elements and locations are displayed in a
view at any given time.
You can display/hide:

an entire location, or multiple locations

elements on a specific location or multiple
locations
elements on the terrain
notation elements such as text and
dimensions

The Notation tab contains text, dimensions,

project trace images, electrical wiring, and other
items.
The icons in the Display column indicate whether
or not that location or element is currently
displayed. Clicking an icon toggles the icon to the
opposite state (on or off).
Location or element is turned on
Location or element is turned off
If sorting by element on the Elements on
Location tab, this means that the
element is displayed on some locations
and not on others. If sorting by location,
it means that some elements on the
location are displayed and some are not.

Note: Using the View Filter does not delete

elements from your drawing. It just hides them
from view.
To access the View Filter:

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.
Elements

Tabs

Display Filter

Clicking Display All turns on all locations and

elements on the current tab. Clicking Display
None turns off all locations and elements on the
current tab.
The View Filter dialog also lets you control
whether or not individual locations and elements
can be selected. See Selection Filtering on
page 37.

Displaying/Hiding Elements on
Locations
You can use the View Filter to display or hide
selected element types on all or selected building
locations. This applies to building elements such
as walls and doors, as well as landscaping
elements that were inserted using the Insert on
Location option.
To display or hide building elements:
The View Filter dialog contains three tabs:
Elements on Location, Elements on Terrain, and
Notation. The Elements on Location tab lists all
elements types that are associated with building
locations. If you expand an element, a list of
building locations is displayed below the element
name. If you choose to sort by location, a list of
building locations is displayed with a list of
elements under each one. The Elements on
Terrain tab lists primarily landscaping elements.

34

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements

on Location tab.

3.

In the Sort By area, make sure the Element

radio button is selected.

4.

If you want to change the visibility of an

element on all locations, click the elements

Displaying/Hiding Building Locations

eye icon in the Display column. If you want to
filter an element on a specific location, click
the elements plus sign (+) to display a list of
building locations. Then, click the locations
eye icon in the Display column.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements

on Location tab.

3.

In the Sort By area, enable the Location radio

button. A list of building locations is
displayed in the window.

4.

Click the eye icon next to the name of the

location you want to display or hide.

Eye
Icon

Element is turned on
Element is turned off
You can also filter elements by location. If
you enable the Location radio button in the
Sort By area, a list of building locations is
displayed. You can then expand the location
you want to filter elements on to display a list
of elements. Toggling the eye icons of
elements in this list filters elements on the
selected location.

Location is turned on
Location is turned off
5.

Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Elements on the

Terrain
You can use the View Filter to display or hide
landscaping elements or any elements associated
with the terrain. You can also hide the terrain
itself if you want.
To filter elements on the terrain:

If you want to make all elements on all

locations visible, click the Display All button.
If you want to make all elements on all
locations non-visible, click Display None.
5.

Once youve selected what you want to filter,

click OK.

1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements

on Terrain tab.

Displaying/Hiding Building
Locations
You can turn individual locations on or off. When
you turn a location off, all elements on that
location are hidden from view.
To display or hide entire locations:
1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

Users Guide

35

Chapter 7 View Filter

3.

Click the eye icons in the Display column to

turn elements on or off.

Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation

tab.

3.

In the Dimensions row, click the eye icon in

the Display column to turn dimensions on or
off.

Element is turned on
Element is turned off
4.

Click OK.

Note: The visibility of landscape lighting, exterior

furniture or exterior accessories that were
inserted using the Insert on Location option is
controlled on the Elements on Location tab.

Displaying/Hiding Text
Using the View Filter you can display or hide text
in your drawing.

Dimensions are turned on

Dimensions are turned off

To filter text from view:

1.

2.

3.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.
In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation
tab.

4.

Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Electrical Wiring

Using the View Filter you can display or hide
electrical wiring in your drawing.
To filter electrical wiring from view:
1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation

tab.

3.

In the Electrical Wiring row, click the eye

icon in the Display column to turn wiring on
or off.

In the Text row, click the eye icon in the

Display column to turn text on or off.
Text is turned on
Text is turned off

4.

Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Dimensions
Using the View Filter you can display or hide
dimensions in your drawing.

Wiring is turned on
Wiring is turned off

To filter dimensions from view:

1.

36

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

4.

Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images

Displaying/Hiding Project Trace

Images
If you have used the Project Trace Image tool to
import a plan into your project, you can hide the
image if you want using the View Filter. This is an
alternative to deleting the image.

To access the View Filter:

1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.
Elements

Tabs

Selection Filter

To filter project trace images from view:

1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation

tab.

3.

In the Project Trace Images row, click the

eye icon in the Display column to turn project
trace images on or off.
Project trace image is turned on
Project trace image is turned off

4.

Click OK.

Selection Filtering
When your model contains a number of elements,
it can sometimes be difficult to select certain ones
because of proximity or overlapping edges.
Floors, for example, can be very difficult to select
because floor edges are typically right up against
your walls. Also, small elements can be hard to
select in an extreme zoomed out view, even in
2D.
You can use the View Filter to stop certain
elements from being selected. You can even
prevent entire building locations from being
selected.

The View Filter dialog contains three tabs:

Elements on Location, Elements on Terrain, and
Notation. The Elements on Location tab lists all
elements types that are associated with building
locations. If you expand an element, a list of
building locations is displayed below the element
name. If you choose to sort by location, a list of
building locations is displayed with a list of
elements under each one. The Elements on
Terrain tab lists primarily landscaping elements.
The Notation tab contains text, dimensions,
project trace images, electrical wiring, and other
items.
The icons in the Selection column indicate whether
or not that location or element is currently
selectable. Clicking an icon toggles the icon to the
opposite state (selectable or non-selectable).
Element or location is selectable
Element or location is not selectable

Users Guide

37

Chapter 7 View Filter

Making Elements on Locations

Selectable or Non-Selectable
You can use the View Filter to control the
selectability of element types on all or selected
building locations. This applies to building
elements such as walls and doors, as well as
landscaping elements that were inserted using the
Insert on Location option.
To change the selectability of elements on
locations:
1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

If you want to make all elements on all

locations selectable, click the Select All
button. If you want to make all elements on
all locations non-selectable, click Select
None.
5.

Once youve selected what you want to filter,

click OK.

Making Building Locations

Selectable or Non-Selectable

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements

on Location tab.

3.

In the Sort By area, make sure the Element

radio button is selected.

4.

If you want to change the selectability of an

element on all locations, click the elements
filter icon in the Selection column. If you want
to filter an element on a specific location,
click the elements plus sign (+) to display a
list of building locations. Then, click the
locations filter icon in the Selection column.
Filter
Icon

When you make a location non-selectable, no

elements on that location can be selected in any
view.
To make a location selectable or
non-selectable:
1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements

on Location tab.

3.

In the Sort By area, enable the Location radio

button. A list of building locations is
displayed in the window.

4.

Click the filter icon next to the name of the

location you want to make selectable or nonselectable.

Element is selectable
Element is not selectable
You can also filter elements by location. If
you enable the Location radio button in the
Sort By area, a list of building locations is
displayed. You can then expand the location
you want to filter elements on to display a list
of elements. Toggling the filter icons of
elements in this list filters elements on the
selected location.

38

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Location is selectable
Location is not selectable
If you want to make all locations selectable,
click the Select All button. If you want to
make all locations non-selectable, click
Select None.

Making Elements on the Terrain Selectable or Non-Selectable

5.

Once youve made your selections, click OK.

Making Elements on the Terrain

Selectable or Non-Selectable
You can use the View Filter to control the
selectability of landscaping elements or any
elements associated with the terrain.

Making Text Selectable or NonSelectable

Using the View Filter you can make text selectable
or non-selectable.
To make text selectable or non-selectable:
1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation

tab.

3.

In the Text row, click the filter icon in the

Selection column to toggle selectability on or
off.

To make elements on the terrain selectable or

non-selectable:
1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements

on Terrain tab.

Text is selectable
Text is not selectable
4.
3.

Click the filter icons in the Selection column

to toggle selectability on or off.
Element is selectable
Element is not selectable

4.

If you want to make all landscape elements

selectable, click the Select All button. If you
want to make all landscape elements nonselectable, click Select None.

5.

Click OK.

Click OK.

Making Dimensions Selectable or

Non-Selectable
Using the View Filter you can make dimensions
selectable or non-selectable.
To make dimensions selectable or nonselectable:
1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

Note: The selectability of exterior lighting,

exterior furniture or exterior accessories that were
inserted using the Insert on Location option is
controlled on the Elements on Location tab.

Users Guide

39

Chapter 7 View Filter

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation

tab.

Making Project Trace Images

Selectable or Non-Selectable
If you have used the Project Trace Image tool to
import a plan into your project, you can use the
View Filter to make the image selectable or
non-selectable.
To make project trace images selectable or
non-selectable:

3.

In the Dimensions row, click the filter icon in

the Selection column to toggle selectability on
or off.
Dimensions are selectable

1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation

tab.

3.

In the Project Trace Images row, click the

filter icon in the Selection column to toggle
selectability on or off.

Dimensions are not selectable

4.

Click OK.

Making Electrical Wiring

Selectable or Non-Selectable
Using the View Filter you can make electrical
wiring selectable or non-selectable.
To make electrical wiring selectable or nonselectable:
1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control
toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation

tab.

3.

In the Electrical Wiring row, click the filter

icon in the Selection column to toggle
selectability on or off.
Wiring is selectable
Wiring is not selectable

4.

40

Click OK.
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Project trace image is selectable

Project trace image is not selectable
4.

Click OK.

House Builder Wizard

page 9

Foundation

page 43

Support Elements

page 49

Walls

page 55

Doors, Windows & Openings

page 65

Floors & Ceilings

page 77

Stairs, Ramps & Railings

page 87

Roofs

page 99

If you have decided to create your project from scratch, you can do what builders do in the real
world build from the ground up. Design Suite Deluxe offers the versatility of creating a variety
of foundation types. You can create a full basement, crawl space foundation, or a slab on grade.
First you need to define the foundations building location, if you havent already done so. The
building locations Floor Level variable determines how far below the ground the foundation
floor will be positioned, and the Wall Height variable determines how tall the walls will be. See
Defining Building Locations on page 16.
To create a basement or crawlspace foundation, you start by drawing your foundation walls. A
floor is created for you automatically. You can then add support columns where needed and
quickly create footings beneath walls and columns.
If you are not creating a basement or crawlspace foundation, you can use the Pads tool to quickly
create a slab on grade. The slab can have any thickness you want, and by drawing its outline, you
control its precise size and shape.
To begin, set your current building location on the Basic View Control toolbar to the Foundation
location, or whatever location you have set up for your foundation.

43

Chapter 8 Foundation

Creating a Basement or
Crawlspace Foundation

dimension is displayed to indicate the length

of the wall.

The first step in creating a basement or

crawlspace foundation is drawing the foundation
walls, which are typically made of poured
concrete or concrete blocks. You can draw the
entire perimeter in seconds by just pointing and
clicking with your mouse.
A floor is automatically inserted when you create
a closed foundation wall layout. You can change
the floor type after it has been inserted if you
want.

Note: By default, drawing is constrained to

15 angles. To release this constraint, turn off
your Angle Snap.

To draw the foundation walls:

1.

Make sure the current location in the

Building Locations drop box is the
Foundation location, or whatever location
you have set up for your foundation
elements. Make sure that you have defined
the correct Floor Level and Wall Height for
that location in the Building Locations dialog.

6.

When the wall is the length you want, click to

set its endpoint.

7.

Continue drawing walls until the perimeter

is complete. You can add walls to the interior
of the foundation layout if you want (if you
are creating a cold cellar, for example).

8.

Right-click and select Finish from the

shortcut menu.

To move the foundation:

2.

Select Insert > Walls, or click the Walls

button on the Building toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the
Foundation Walls
category, then select
the type of wall you
want to insert.

4.

In the drawing area,

select a start point
for the first wall.

5.

Move your pointer

in the direction you
want your wall to
run. A dynamic

1.

Click on one of the foundation walls to select

it, then Shift+click to select the remaining
walls.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

grab handle on the currently selected
wall to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the foundation to where you

want it, then release your mouse button.

To resize the foundation by stretching:

1.

Select the foundation wall you want to move.

All attached walls will stretch along with it
when you move it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the wall to resize the wall

layout, then release your mouse button.

Note: If you have footings attached to your walls,

the footings will stretch along with the walls.

44

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Editing the Size of a Wall

To resize the foundation by editing its
dimensions:
1.

2.

3.

Select one of the foundation walls. If you

want to stretch the layout left or right, select a
vertical wall. If you want to stretch the layout
up or down, select a horizontal wall.
Dimensions are displayed on the foundation.
Positioning your cursor over one of the
dimensions changes your cursor to a
pointing finger.

2.

You can edit the height or thickness of a wall by

making changes on the walls Basic property
page.
To edit the size of a wall:
1.

Select the wall whose properties you want to

change. You can select multiple walls using
Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Walls dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

To edit the thickness of the wall, enter the

desired thickness in the Width edit box. If the
wall is a composite wall, enter the thickness
of the framed structural wall only.

5.

To edit the physical height of the wall, enter

the desired height in the Wall Height edit
box.

6.

Click OK.

Click the dimension you want to edit. The

Edit Dimension dialog appears.

Enter the new value in the Enter Distance

edit box, then press Enter or click OK. The
walls update automatically.

To remove the foundation:

1.

Editing the Size of a Wall

Select the foundation by dragging a selection

window around it, or by clicking on one wall
and using Shift+click to select the remaining
walls.
Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or
right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Lengthening and Shortening Walls

You can lengthen or shorten an individual wall by
clicking and dragging one of the walls ends.
To lengthen or shorten a wall:
1.

Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at

each wall end.

Users Guide

45

Chapter 8 Foundation
2.

Hover your pointer over the wall end

you want to stretch. The Lengthen
cursor is displayed.

3.

Click and drag the wall end until it has

reached the desired length.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Rotating a Wall
You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a wall about
a selected point.
To rotate a wall:
1.

Select the wall.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Position your pointer over the point you

want to rotate the wall around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the wall, then release

your mouse button.

Curving a Wall
You can curve a wall using the Curve tool. Once
the tool is active, you can click and drag the wall
to curve it, or select a point to curve to.
To curve a wall by clicking and dragging:

Breaking a Wall
You can break a wall into two or more segments
using the Break tool. The segments can then be
edited individually.
To break a wall:
1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select

Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements >
Break.

3.

Double-click the point where you want to

break the wall. This divides the wall into two
segments that can be moved, stretched or
manipulated individually.

Deleting a Wall
You can delete a wall in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a wall:
1.

Select the wall to delete. You can select

multiple walls using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Note: The floor will be deleted if the wall you are

deleting opens up the wall layout.

1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

Applying a Different Material to the

Foundation Floor

3.

Click and drag the wall to the desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly

apply a different material such as poured concrete
to the foundation floor.

To curve a wall to a selected point:

1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The

wall automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

46

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To apply a material to the floor:

1.

Display your model in 3D view and make

sure the floor is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

Creating a Slab Foundation

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply.

5.

4.

Click on the floor

surface. The material is
immediately applied.

You can move a slab by selecting all of its sides,

then clicking and dragging it.

5.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To move the entire slab:

Moving a Slab

Creating a Slab
Foundation
You can use the Pads tool to
insert a concrete slab directly on your terrain. By
drawing the outline of the pad, you control the
precise size and shape of the slab.
Note: Slabs created with the Pads tool are
considered landscape elements that are associated
with the terrain. When using the View Filter, pads
are listed on the Landscape tab.
To create a slab on grade:
1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Pads, or click

the Pads button on the Terrain toolbar.

2.

In the catalog panel, select

the type of slab you want
to insert.

3.

Select a start point for the

slab.

4.

Continue selecting points

to define the outline of
the slab. Note that the last
point picked always
closes back to the start
point, so you dont have
to pick the start point again.
1

Right-click and select Finish from the

shortcut menu.

1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element,

or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move
Whole Element.

3.

Click and drag the slab to move it, then

release your mouse button.

Rotating a Slab
You can rotate a slab easily using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a slab:
1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Position your pointer over the corner grab

handle you want to rotate the slab around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the slab, then release

your mouse button.

Resizing a Slab
You can resize a slab by stretching one of its
edges.
To resize the slab by stretching it:

1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it.

2.

Click on the edge you want to stretch.

3.

Hover your pointer over the grab

handle to display the Move cursor.

4.

Click and drag to stretch the slab.

5.

Release your mouse button.

Users Guide

47

Chapter 8 Foundation

Reshaping a Slab

5.

You can change the shape of a slab by clicking and

dragging its corners.

Deleting a Slab

To reshape a slab:
1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it. A

grab handle is displayed at each corner.

2.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to

stretch the slab.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Curving a Slab
You can curve the edge of a slab using the Curve
tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and
drag the edge to curve it, or select a point to curve
to.
To curve a slab edge by clicking and dragging:
1.

Click on the slab edge that you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the edge to the desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

To curve a slab edge to a selected point:

1.

Click on the edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The

edge automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

Editing the Thickness of a Slab

You can edit the thickness of a slab on the slabs
Basic property page.
To edit the thickness of a slab:
1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Pads dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

Enter the desired thickness in the Thickness

edit box.

48

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Click OK.

You can delete a slab in a couple of easy steps.

To delete a slab:
1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

A structures support system is an extremely important consideration during all phases of a

design project. Support elements carry the load of walls, floors and other bearing elements in
your model, and can also be a factor in the interior design of your home. Design Suite Deluxe
provides the tools to accurately place columns and footings in your design.
Columns come in a variety of shapes and sizes, and are inserted with point-and-click simplicity.
You can customize them on the fly to achieve the precise result you want.
You can automatically attach strip footings to selected walls, as well as automatically insert mono
(pad) footings beneath columns.
This chapter covers the insertion and editing of columns, strip footings, and mono footings.

49

Chapter 9 Support Elements

Attaching Strip Footings to Walls

3.

Select the Basic tab, then click on the

appropriate graphic in the Type area.

Strip footings are easy to insert just click on a

wall and a footing is automatically inserted
underneath the wall.

4.

Click OK.

To insert strip footings under walls:

Editing the Size of Strip Footings

1.

Select Insert > Footings > Strip

Footings Attached to Walls, or click
the Footings button on the Building
toolbar and select Strip Footings Attached
to Walls.

You can edit the dimensions of a footing on the

footings Basic property page.

1.

Select the footing.

In the catalog panel,

select the footing you
want to insert.
Typically you would
choose one that is
wider than the wall
you are attaching it to.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Strip Footing dialog, select the Basic

tab.

4.

Edit the dimensions of the footing.

5.

Click OK.

Since foundation walls bear the weight of exterior

walls above them, you need to insert footings
beneath the foundation walls to transfer support
for the vertical load.

2.

3.

Click on the wall you

want to attach the
footing to. The footing
is inserted
automatically. In plan
view, strip footings are usually shown using
a dashed line.

4.

Continue inserting footings underneath each

exterior foundation wall.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Editing the Strip Footing Type

Strip footing types include rectangular, tapered
and filleted. The footing type determines the
footings general appearance.
To edit the footing type:
1.

Select the footing whose properties you want

to change. You can select multiple footings
using Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

50

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To change the footing size:

Moving/Stretching Strip Footings

When you move a strip footing, all footings
attached to it move with it for a stretching effect.
You can move strip footings by just clicking and
dragging.
To move/stretch strip footings:
1.

Select the footing to move. You may need to

make walls non-selectable to be able to select
the footing.

2.

Position your pointer over the center

grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the footing to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Note: When you move a strip footing, it becomes

detached from the wall. Therefore, if you move or
stretch the wall, the footing will not go with it. If
you want to re-attach a footing to a wall, you will
need to delete the footing, then insert a new one.

Lengthening and Shortening Strip Footings

Lengthening and Shortening Strip

Footings
You can lengthen or shorten an individual footing
by clicking and dragging one of the footings
ends.
To lengthen or shorten a footing:
1.

Select the footing. A grab handle is displayed

at each end.

2.

Hover your pointer over the end you

want to stretch. The Lengthen cursor
is displayed.

3.

Click and drag the footing end until it has

reached the desired length.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Inserting Columns
Columns are an important consideration when
designing your basement, especially if you intend
to finish it.
When inserting columns, you can choose from a
variety of wood, concrete, steel, brick and
gypsum columns in various shapes and sizes.
To insert a column:
1.

Select Insert > Columns, or click the

Columns button on the Building
toolbar.

2.

In the catalog panel,

select the column
you want to insert.

Breaking Strip Footings

3.

You can break a footing into two or more

segments using the Break tool. The segments can
then be edited individually.

Position the column

where you want it,
then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish from the
shortcut menu.

To break a footing:
1.

Click the footing to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select

Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements >
Break.

3.

Double-click the point where you want to

break the footing.

Deleting Strip Footings

You can delete a strip footing in a couple of easy
steps.
To delete strip footings:
1.

Select the footing to delete. You can select

multiple footings using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Editing the
Column Type
Columns come in a variety of materials and
shapes.
To edit the column type:
1.

Select the column whose properties you want

to change. You can select multiple columns
using Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select the Basic tab, then click on the

appropriate graphic in the Type area.

4.

Click OK.

Users Guide

51

Chapter 9 Support Elements

Editing the Size and Elevation of a

Column

Attaching Mono Footings to

Columns

You can edit the dimensions of a column (e.g.

height, width and depth) as well as its elevation
height.

Since support columns in your basement bear

loads at a concentrated point, the load should be
transferred to a proper footing.

To edit the size properties of a column:

Using the Mono Footings Attached to Columns

tool you can insert a single pad footing beneath a
selected column. All you have to do is select the
column.

1.

Click on the column to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the properties as desired. Different

column shapes will have different dimension
variables. If you want to offset the base of the
column from the floor (so it sits higher or
lower), enter a value in the Base Offset edit
box.

4.

Click OK.

To insert a footing under a column:

1.

Select Insert > Footings > Mono

Footings Attached to Columns, or
click the Footings button on the
Building toolbar and select Mono Footings
Attached to Columns.

2.

In the catalog panel,

select the footing you
want to insert.
Typically you would
choose one that is
wider than the column
you are attaching it to.

3.

Click on the column

you want to attach the
footing to. The footing
is inserted
automatically.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Moving Columns
You can move a column by simply clicking and
dragging it.
To move a column:
1.

Click on the column to select it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the column to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Note: If you have a mono footing attached to the

column, the footing will remain attached to the
column and move with it.

Deleting a Column
You can remove a column in a couple of quick
steps.

Editing the Mono Footing Type

Mono footing types include rectangular, tapered,
cylinder and cylinder tapered. The footing type
determines the footings general appearance.
To edit the footing type:
1.

Select the footing whose properties you want

to change. You can select multiple footings
using Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

To remove a column:
1.

Click on the column to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

52

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Editing the Size of Mono Footings

3.

Select the Basic tab, then click on the

appropriate graphic in the Type area.

Rotating a Mono Footing

You can rotate a mono footing by simply clicking
and dragging it.
To rotate a mono footing:

4.

Click OK.

Editing the Size of Mono Footings

You can edit the dimensions of a footing on the
footings Basic property page.
To change the footing size:
1.

Select the footing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Mono Footing dialog, select the Basic

tab.

4.

Edit the dimensions of the footing.

5.

Click OK.

Moving Mono Footings

1.

Select the footing.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the footing.

4.

When the footing is at the desired rotation,

release your mouse button.

Deleting Mono Footings

You can delete a mono footing in a couple of easy
steps.
To delete mono footings:
1.

Select the footing to remove. You can select

multiple footings using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

You can move a mono footing by clicking and

dragging it.
To move a mono footing by clicking and
dragging:
1.

Select the footing to move.

2.

Position your pointer over the center

grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the footing to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Note: When you move a mono footing, it becomes

detached from the column. Therefore, if you
move the column, the footing will not go with it.
If you want to re-attach a footing to a column, you
will need to delete the footing, then insert a new
one.

Users Guide

53

Once youve created your foundation, the next step is to create the ground floor exterior walls as
well as the exterior walls of any additional stories. You can then add interior walls on all stories.
Drawing walls is easy just point and click. Design Suite Deluxe automatically displays
dimensions as you draw, and connects corners for you. If the Object Snap is turned on, which by
default it is, interior walls snap to other existing walls and create clean intersections with them.
Once inserted, any wall can be moved, rotated, lengthened, shortened, broken, curved or deleted.
This lets you create the exact wall layout that you want.
The catalog contains exterior, interior and foundation wall types. Once your walls are drawn, you
can add paint, wallpaper, baseboards and other types of trim to them for a truly customized look.
Walls also have a framing configuration in their properties which you can customize if you want.

Walls

55

Chapter 10 Walls

Drawing the Ground Floor Exterior

Walls

want the new wall to run. When it is the right

length, click to set its endpoint.

You can draw your ground floor exterior walls by

simply pointing and clicking with your mouse. If
you have created a foundation, you can just trace
around the foundation.
A floor is automatically inserted when you create
a closed wall layout. You can change the
properties of the floor after it has been inserted if
you want.
To draw the ground floor exterior walls:
1.

Make sure the current location is the Ground

Floor location, or whatever location you have
set up for your ground floor elements.

8.

When the wall layout is complete,

right-click and select Finish.

To move the entire wall layout:

1.

Click on one of the exterior walls to select it,

then Shift+click to select the remaining walls.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

grab handle on the currently selected
wall to display the Move cursor.
Click and drag the layout to where you want
it, then release your mouse button.

2.

Select Insert > Walls, or click the Walls

button on the Building toolbar.

3.

3.

In the catalog, select

the wall type you want
to insert.

To resize the wall layout by moving a wall:

4.

Select a start point for

the first wall.

5.

Move your cursor in

the direction you want
your wall to run. Its
length is shown as you
draw the wall.
Note: By default,
drawing is constrained
to 15 angles. To release this constraint, turn
off your Angle Snap.

6.

When the wall is the length you want, click to

set its endpoint.

7.

To add another wall to the one you have just

drawn, move the mouse in the direction you

56

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Select the exterior wall you want to move. All

attached walls will stretch along with it when
you move it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the wall to resize the wall

layout, then release your mouse button.

To resize the wall layout by editing its

dimensions:
1.

Select one of the exterior walls. If you want to

stretch the layout left or right, select a vertical
wall. If you want to stretch the layout up or
down, select a horizontal wall. Dimensions
are displayed on the wall layout.

Adding a Story
2.

3.

Click the dimension you want to edit. The

Edit Dimension dialog appears.

3.

In the catalog, select

the wall type you want
to insert.

4.

Select a start point for

the first wall.

5.

Move your cursor in

the direction you want
your wall to run. Its
length is shown as you
draw the wall.

Enter the new value in the Enter Distance

edit box, then press Enter or click OK. The
walls update automatically.

Note: By default,
drawing is constrained
to 15 angles. To release this constraint, turn
off your Angle Snap.

To remove the wall layout:

1.

Click on one of the walls, then Shift+click to

select the remaining walls.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Adding a Story

6.

When the wall is the length you want, click to

set its endpoint. Your cursor will snap to the
dimmed image of the walls below for ease.

7.

To add another wall to the one you have just

drawn, move the mouse in the direction you
want the new wall to run. When it is the right
length, click to set its endpoint.

8.

When the wall layout is complete,

right-click and select Finish.

Once you have created your ground floor exterior

walls, adding more levels to your design is easy.
You can draw the layout just like you did to create
the ground floor, or you can use the Duplicate to
Locations tool to copy the ground floor exterior
walls to the second floor location.
To create a new story by drawing the walls:
1.

2.

Make sure the current location is the Second

Floor location, or whatever location you have
set up for the story you are creating.

Select Insert > Walls, or click the Walls

button on the Building toolbar.

To create a new story by duplicating walls on

the ground floor:
1.

Make sure the current location is the Ground

Floor, or whatever location that contains the
walls to copy.

2.

Click one of the walls to copy, then

Shift+click to select the remaining walls.

3.

Right-click and select Duplicate to

Locations, or select Edit > Modify Elements
> Duplicate to Locations.

Users Guide

57

10

Chapter 10 Walls
4.

In the Duplicate to Locations dialog, select

the Second Floor (or whatever location you
are copying to).

3.

Enter the new value in the Enter Distance

edit box, then press Enter or click OK. The
walls update automatically.

To remove the wall layout:

1.

Click on one of the walls, then Shift+click to

select the remaining walls.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Applying Different Finishes to

Exterior Walls

5.

Click OK. The walls are copied, and you now

have a new story.

Note: When you copy a closed wall layout, a floor

with the default material is automatically created
on the location you are copying to.
To resize the wall layout by moving a wall:
1.

Select the exterior wall you want to move. All

attached walls will stretch along with it when
you move it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the wall to resize the wall

layout, then release your mouse button.

You can apply different finishes to your exterior

walls using the handy Materials Paintbrush. The
materials catalog contains an excellent selection of
brick, concrete, stone and siding.
To apply a finish to an exterior wall:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

wall face you want to apply the material to is
visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply.

4.

Click on the wall face

that you want to apply
the material to. The
material is immediately
applied. You can
continue applying the
material to other walls
if you want.

5.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To resize the wall layout by editing its

dimensions:
1.

2.

58

Select one of the exterior walls. If you want to

stretch the layout left or right, select a vertical
wall. If you want to stretch the layout up or
down, select a horizontal wall. Dimensions
are displayed on the wall layout.
Click the dimension you want to edit. The
Edit Dimension dialog appears.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Drawing Interior Walls

Drawing Interior Walls

Editing the Size of a Wall

Once youve created your exterior walls, you can

start drawing interior walls. Walls snap to other
walls automatically, creating clean corners and
intersections.

You can edit the height or thickness of a wall by

making changes on the walls Basic property
page.

As you create rooms in your model, the floor is

split up into separate floors that you can edit
individually.
To draw interior walls:
1.

From the location drop box, select the

location where you want to draw interior
walls.

2.

Select Insert > Walls, or click the Walls

button on the Building toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the wall type
you want to insert.

4.

Select a start point for

the first wall.

5.

Move your cursor in

the direction you
want your wall to run.
Its length is shown as
you draw the wall.
Note: By default,
drawing is constrained to 15 angles. To
release this constraint, turn off your Angle
Snap.

6.

When the wall is the length you want, click to

set its endpoint.

7.

When you are done, right-click and select

Finish.

To edit the size of a wall:

1.

Select the wall whose properties you want to

change. You can select multiple walls using
Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Walls dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

To edit the thickness of the wall, enter the

desired thickness in the Width edit box.

5.

To edit the physical height of the wall, enter

the desired height in the Wall Height edit
box.

6.

Click OK.

Dropping an Exterior Wall Face

You can extend the exterior face of a wall below
floor level by editing the walls properties.
To drop the exterior face of a wall:
1.

Select the wall whose properties you want to

change. You can select multiple walls using
Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Walls dialog, select the Basic tab.

Users Guide

59

10

Chapter 10 Walls
4.

5.

Edit the value in the Drop Exterior Face edit

box. The value you enter is the distance that
the exterior wall face will be extended down
below floor level.
Click OK.

Raising or Lowering a Wall

3.

Position your pointer over the point you

want to rotate the wall around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the wall, then release

your mouse button.

Curving a Wall

You can raise or lower a wall using the Elevate

tool on the walls right-click menu.

You can curve a wall using the Curve tool. Once

the tool is active, you can click and drag the wall
to curve it, or select a point to curve to.

To edit the elevation of a wall:

To curve a wall by clicking and dragging:

1.

1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the wall to the desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

2.

3.

Select the wall whose elevation you want to

edit.
Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit
> Modify Elements > Elevate. The value
shown in the Elevate dialog is the current
elevation of the wall.
In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired
elevation of the bottom of the wall above the
floor.

To curve a wall to a selected point:

1.

Click the wall to select it.

Click OK.

2.

Lengthening and Shortening Walls

Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

You can lengthen or shorten an individual wall by

clicking and dragging one of the walls ends.

Select the point you want to curve to. The

wall automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

To lengthen or shorten a wall:

Breaking a Wall

1.

Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at

each wall end.

2.

Hover your pointer over the wall end

you want to stretch. The Lengthen
cursor is displayed.

You can break a wall into two or more segments

using the Break tool. The segments can then be
edited individually. You may, for example, want
to apply different materials to each new
individual wall.

3.

Click and drag the wall end until it has

reached the desired length.

4.

Release your mouse button.

4.

Rotating a Wall
You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a wall about
a selected point.
To rotate a wall:
1.

Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at

each wall end.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

60

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To break a wall:
1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and click

Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements >
Break.

3.

Click the point where you want to break the

wall. This divides the wall into two segments
that can be moved, stretched or edited
individually.

Deleting a Wall

Deleting a Wall

Adding Trim to Walls

You can delete a wall in a couple of easy steps.

Trim types include baseboards, crown molding,

chair rails, door and window trim, door and
window sills, cove molding, wainscoting and
decorative wallpaper borders. You can add as
many types of trim to a wall as you want, and
even add different materials to either side of the
wall.

To delete a wall:
1.

Select the wall to delete. You can select

multiple walls using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Note: If a floor was inserted automatically when

you created your wall layout, the floor will be
deleted if the wall you are deleting opens up the
wall layout.

Adding Paint and Wallpaper

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly
apply custom paint, wallpaper or wood paneling
to a wall.

Trim selections are made on a walls Trim

property page.
To add trim to walls:
1.

Select the wall you want to add trim to.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Walls dialog, select the Trim tab.

4.

From the Application drop box, select the wall

side you want to add trim to.

To apply paint or wallpaper to walls:

1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

wall face you want to apply the paint or
wallpaper to is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply. Paint
colors are located in the
Paint category, and
wallpaper can be found
in three Wallpaper
categories. You can
apply any material in
the catalog that you
want.

4.

Click on the wall face

that you want to apply
the paint or wallpaper
to. The material is immediately applied. You
can continue applying the material to other
walls if you want.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Exterior Side. The exterior side of an

exterior wall.
Left Interior Side. If a wall was drawn left to
right, this is the north side of the wall, or the
side closest to the top of the screen. If a wall
was drawn right to left, this is the south side
of the wall, or the side closer to the bottom of
the screen. If a wall was drawn vertically
from the top downward, the left side is the
eastern side of the wall, or the side closest to
the right side of the screen. If a wall was
drawn vertically from the bottom up, the left

Users Guide

61

10

Chapter 10 Walls
side is the western side of the wall, or the
side closest to the left side of the screen.

baseboards and chair rails, this is the offset of

the member from the bottom of the wall.

Right Interior Side. If a wall was drawn left

to right, this is the south side of the wall, or
the side closest to the bottom of the screen. If
a wall was drawn right to left, this is the
north side of the wall, or the side closest to
the top of the screen. If a wall was drawn
vertically from the top downward, the right
side is the western side of the wall, or the
side closest to the left side of the screen. If a
wall was drawn vertically from the bottom
up, the right side is the eastern side of the
wall, or the side closest to the right side of the
screen.

Offset from wall. If creating custom trim,

this determines where the member is offset
from when an offset is specified. Choose
from Wall Bottom, Wall Top, Ceiling or Floor.

5.

In the list of trim types, select the trim you

would like to select a member for (Crown,
Chair Rail, Baseboard, etc.).

6.

Click Add.

7.

In the catalog,
select the trim you
want to use, then
click OK. The trim
list displays the
member you
selected.

8.

9.

If you want to edit

the properties of
the selected
member, such as
the height or
width, click Edit,
then make your changes in the Trim dialog.
To delete the member from the trim list,
select it, then click Delete.

10. In the Apply to area, specify how you would

like the trim applied to the wall. Different
variables are available depending on the trim
type.
Gap. For trim around door and window
openings, this is the offset of the trim from
the opening. For crown moldings,
baseboards and chair rails, this is the offset of
the trim from the wall face.
Offset. For crown moldings, this is the offset
of the molding from the top of the wall. For

62

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Trim basepoint. If creating custom trim, this

determines which edge of the trim is used to
measure the offset. Choose either Top of Trim
or Bottom of Trim.
11. Once youve selected your trim, click OK.
The walls are updated automatically.

Specifying Framing Members for

Walls
Walls have a framing configuration assigned to
them which you see when you display framing.
You can specify a custom framing configuration if
you want. The configuration consists of stud and
header member selection, and spacing between
the studs. Framing can be displayed using the
Display Framing tool, and is included in the
project estimate.
To specify framing members for walls:
1.

In non-framed view, select the wall you want

to change. You can also specify framing
members for walls in the catalog.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

On the Basic property page, click the Specify

Framing button.

Specifying Framing Members for Walls

4.

To select a stud member, select Stud in the

list, then click Select. Then, select the desired
member from the Catalog Access dialog.

5.

To select a header member, select Header, then

click Select. Then, select the desired member
from the Catalog Access dialog.

6.

In the Stud Spacing edit box, specify the

desired spacing between studs.

7.

Click OK.

Users Guide

63

10

!
Once youve drawn walls, you can insert a variety of doors, windows and openings in them to
create the exact design you want.
Like all elements in Design Suite Deluxe, doors, windows and openings are intelligent. They know
that they can only be inserted in walls. As soon as your pointer gets close to a wall, they snap into
place. All you have to do is position it where you want it along the wall, then click to insert it.
Dimensions are displayed as you are positioning the element so you can get the precise
placement you want.
Even though doors, windows and openings automatically become associated with the walls they
are inserted in, you can edit them independently if you want.

Doors

Windows

Openings

65

Chapter 11 Doors, Windows & Openings

Inserting Doors
The catalog contains a wide variety of doors for
you to insert, including hinged, bi-fold, pocket,
sliding glass and garage doors. You can point and
click to insert a door anywhere inside a wall,
automatically center the door in the wall, or offset
the door a specific distance from the end of the
wall.
Doors are inserted at floor level. You can raise or
lower a door after you have inserted it if you need
to.

Dimensions are displayed that show you the

distance on either side of the door.
7.

With your door positioned where you want

it, click to insert it.

8.

Right-click and select Finish.

Editing Door Types

Door types include hinged, bi-fold, pocket, face
slider, track slider, fold-up, tilt, and roller. You can
edit a doors type on the doors Basic property
page.

To insert a door:

To edit a door type:

1.

Make sure the location you want to insert

doors on is the current location in the
building locations drop box.

1.

Select the door whose properties you want to

change.

2.

2.

Select Insert > Doors, or click the

Doors button on the Building toolbar.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

In the Type area, click on the desired door

type to select it.

5.

Click OK.

3.

In the catalog, select the

door you want to insert.

4.

If you want the door to

be automatically
centered on the wall,
right-click and select
Center on wall. Go to
step 6.

5.

If you want to offset the

door a specific distance
from the end of the wall,
right-click and select Enter insertion offset.

Editing the Size and Shape of a

Door
You can edit the shape of a door, its height and
width, and swing type.

Enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog, then click OK.

6.

66

Position the door in the receiving wall. If you

are using an insertion offset, position the
door close to the end you want to offset it
from. The door will snap inside the wall.
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To edit the size of a door:

1.

Select the door whose properties you want to

change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Editing a Doors Sidelites and Highlites

3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Basic tab.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

To display a highlite over the door, enable the

Display Highlite check box.

5.

To display a sidelite on the left side of the

door, enable the Display Left Sidelite check
box.

6.

To display a sidelite on the right side of the

door, enable the Display Right Sidelite
check box.

To edit sidelites and highlites:

4.

Edit the shape and dimensions as desired.

Clicking a dimension marked with an
alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights
the corresponding dimension in the door
graphic, and vice versa.

1.

Select the door whose properties you want to

change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Lites tab.

4.

In the Type window, select the lite you want

to specify settings for. Note that the lite must
be enabled on the Basic property page before
it can be edited.

5.

To select a specific window type for the

currently selected lite, click on the
appropriate graphic in the Type area.

6.

Edit the dimensions of the lite in the

Properties area if desired. Clicking a
dimension marked with an alphabetical
character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the

Shape. Choose from Rectangular, Arched or

Apexed.
Width. The width of the door leaf.
Height. The height of the door leaf.
Swing Type. Choose from Left, Right or Double. A door with a left door swing will have
its hinges on the right.
3D % Open. How much the door is shown
swung open in 3D view. By default, doors are
shown closed in 3D view.
2D % Open. How much the door is swung
open in 2D plan view.

Editing a Doors Sidelites and

Highlites
A sidelite is a glass panel set on one or both sides
of a door (usually an entry door). A highlite is a
glass panel above a door. You can create a custom
configuration of sidelites and/or highlights for a
door.
To display lites on a door:
1.

Select the door.

Users Guide

67

11

Chapter 11 Doors, Windows & Openings

3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Leaf tab.

Height. The overall height of the lite.

4.

# of Horizontal Panels. The number of panels across the lite. If you specify more than
one panel, vertical dividers are added inside
the lites frame.

In the Type area, click on the leaf type you

want.

5.

If you want to change the thickness of the

leaf, enter the thickness in the Leaf Depth
edit box.

6.

Each door leaf type has its own set of

dimensions that you can define. These
dimensions vary according to how many
panels the leaf has. Clicking a dimension
marked with an alphabetical character (a, b,
c, etc.) highlights the corresponding
dimension in the door leaf graphic, and vice
versa.

7.

Click OK.

corresponding dimension in the sidelite/

highlite graphic, and vice versa.
Shape. Choose from Rectangle, Arched or
Trapezoid.
(highlite) Adjust Width. Selecting Opening
adjusts the width of the highlite to match the
width of the opening (including any
sidelites). Selecting Door adjusts the width of
the highlite to match the width of the door
(excluding any sidelites). Selecting User
Defined lets you specify a precise width for
the highlite in the Width edit box.
Width. The total width of the lite.
(sidelites) Adjust Height to Door. Automatically adjusts the height of a sidelite to match
the height of the door.

# of Vertical Panels. The number of panels

running vertically along the lite. If you specify more than one panel, horizontal dividers
are added inside the lites frame.
# of Horizontal Panes. The number of panes
of glass across each panel.
# of Vertical Panes. The number of panes of
glass running vertically along each panel.
7.

Click OK.

Editing a Door Leaf

You can choose from a variety of door leaf types
and change the thickness of the leaf.
To edit a doors leaf:
1.

Select the door whose properties you want to

change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

68

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Editing Door Details

You can specify precise dimensions and offsets for
the door frame, sash, mullions and transoms.
To edit door details:
1.

Select the door whose properties you want to

change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Flipping a Door
3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Details tab.

Width. The width (left-to-right distance) of

the mullion as seen from an overhead view.
Transom
Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the
transom member as seen from an overhead
view. The transom is the member between
the door and the sidelite or highlite frame.
Width. The width of the transom as seen
from an overhead view.
5.

Click OK.

Flipping a Door
You can use the Flip Opening tool to flip an entire
door around. If the door originally opened out, it
now opens in; if it was hinged on the left, it is now
hinged on the right (and vice versa).
4.

Edit the dimensions as desired. They are

described below.
Frame
Depth. The depth of the frame members as
seen from an overhead view.
Width. The width of the frame members as
seen from an overhead view.
Offset. The offset of the door frame from the
wall face.
Sash
Depth. The depth of sash members (sidelite/
highlite frame) as seen from an overhead
view.
Width. The width of sash members as seen
from an overhead view.
Offset. The offset of the sash from the front of
the door frame, i.e. how far back it sits in the
door frame.
Mullion
Vertical Separation. If a lite has two or more
panels running across it, this adds vertical
dividers between the panels.
Horizontal Separation. If a lite has two or
more stacked panels, this adds horizontal
dividers between them.
Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the
mullion as seen from an overhead view.

To flip a door:
1.

Click the door to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select

Flip Opening, or select Edit > Modify
Elements > Flip Opening.

Flipping a Door Swing

Use the Flip Swing tool to flip only the swing of a
door. The door will be hinged on the opposite
side, but it will still open in the same direction,
either in or out.
To flip a door swing:
1.

Click the door to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select

Flip Swing, or select Edit > Modify
Elements > Flip Swing.

Moving a Door
You can move a door by clicking and dragging it
inside the wall, or by editing the dynamic
dimensions on either side of the door.
To move a door by clicking and dragging:
1.

Click on the door to select it.

2.

Click and drag the door to move it, then

release your mouse button.

Users Guide

69

11

Chapter 11 Doors, Windows & Openings

To move a door by editing dimensions:

Deleting a Door

1.

Click on the door. Dimensions appear on

either side of the door.

You can delete a door with a couple of mouse

clicks.

2.

Click on the dimension you want to edit.

3.

In the Edit Dimension dialog, enter the new

value, then press Enter or click OK. The door
position updates automatically.

Raising or Lowering a Door

You can raise or lower a door in a wall using the
Elevate tool on the doors right-click menu. You
may, for example, want to lower your garage door
if your ground floor sits above the ground.
To raise or lower a door:

To delete a door:
1.

Select the door to delete. To select multiple

doors, use Shift+click.

2.

Click the Delete button on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Inserting Windows
The catalog contains a wide variety of windows
for you to insert, including fixed, casement,
double casement, hopper, awning, sliding,
double-hung, single-hung, bay, bow and louvered
windows.
You can point and click to insert a window
anywhere in a wall, automatically center the
window on the wall, or offset the window a
specific distance from the end of the wall.
Windows are inserted at the Head Height defined
for the building location you insert the window
on. You can raise or lower a window after you
have inserted it if you need to.
Note: If you want to insert a skylight, see

1.

Select the door whose elevation you want to

edit.

Inserting Skylights on page 109.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate.

To insert a window:

The value currently shown in the Elevate

dialog is the current elevation of the door
above or below the floor level.
3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the door base above the floor.
You can enter a negative value to move the
door down.

4.

Click OK.

70

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Make sure the location you want to insert

windows on is the current location in the
building locations drop box.

2.

Select Insert > Windows, or click the

Windows button on the Building
toolbar.

Editing Window Types

3.

In the catalog, select the

window you want to
insert.

4.

If you want the window

to be automatically
centered on the wall,
right-click and select
Center on wall. Go to
step 6.

5.

If you want to offset the

window a specific
distance from the end of the wall, right-click
and select Enter insertion offset.

Enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog, then click OK.

3.

In the Windows dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

In the Type area, click on the desired window

type to select it.

5.

Click OK.

Editing a Windows Size

Properties
You can edit the height and width of a window.
You can also control the number of horizontal and
vertical panes in the window. Some window
types have additional properties that define their
geometry.
To edit the size of a window:

6.

Position the window in the receiving wall. If

you are using an insertion offset, position the
window close to the end you want to offset it
from. The window will snap inside the wall.
Dimensions are displayed that show you the
distance on either side of the window.

7.

With your window positioned where you

want it, click to insert it.

8.

Right-click and select Finish.

1.

Select the window whose properties you

want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Windows dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

Edit the dimensions as desired. Most

windows have the common dimensions
listed below. Some have additional settings to
define their geometry. Clicking a dimension
marked with an alphabetical character (a, b,

Editing Window Types

Window types include fixed, casement, hung,
sliding, awning, hopper, vent, bay, bow and
louvre. You can edit a windows type on the
windows Basic property page.
To edit a window type:
1.

Select the window whose properties you

want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Users Guide

71

11

Chapter 11 Doors, Windows & Openings

c, etc.) highlights the corresponding
dimension in the window graphic, and vice
versa.

7.

To display a sidelite on the right side of the

window, enable the Display Right Sidelite
check box.

Window Width. The width of the window,

not including the frame.

8.

Click OK.

Window Height. The height of the window.

To edit a windows lites:

# of Horizontal Panels. The number of window panels running horizontally across the
window frame. If you specify more than one
panel, vertical dividers are added inside the
window frame.

1.

Select the window whose properties you

want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Windows dialog, select the Lites tab.

4.

To display a highlite, sidelite or lowlite, check

the appropriate box in the Type area
(Highlite, Lowlite, Sidelite - left,
Sidelite - right). You can select as many as
you want.

# of Vertical Panels. The number of window

panels running vertically along the window
frame. If you specify more than one panel,
horizontal dividers are added inside the window frame.
# of Horizontal Panes. The number of panes
of glass across each window panel.
# of Vertical Panes. The number of panes of
glass running vertically along each window
panel.
5.

Click OK.

Editing a Windows Sidelites,

Highlites and Lowlites
A sidelite is a glass panel set on one or both sides
of a window. A highlite is a glass panel above a
window. A lowlite is a glass panel below a
window. You can create a custom configuration of
sidelites, highlites and lowlites for a window.
To display lites on a window:
1.

Select the window.

5.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

In the Type window, select the lite you want

to specify settings for.

6.

To select a specific window type for the

currently selected lite, click on the
appropriate graphic in the Type area.

7.

Edit the dimensions of the lite in the

Properties area if desired. Clicking a
dimension marked with an alphabetical
character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the
corresponding dimension in the sidelite/
highlite graphic, and vice versa.

3.

In the Windows dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

To display a highlite over the window, enable

the Display Highlite check box.

5.

To display a lowlite under the window,

enable the Display Lowlite check box.

6.

To display a sidelite on the left side of the

window, enable the Display Left Sidelite
check box.

72

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Shape. Choose from Rectangle, Arched or

Trapezoid.

Editing Window Details

(highlite/lowlite) Adjust Width. Selecting
Opening adjusts the width of the highlite to
match the width of the opening (including
any sidelites). Selecting Window adjusts the
width of the highlite to match the width of
the window (excluding any sidelites). Selecting User Defined lets you specify a precise
width for the highlite/lowlite in the Width
edit box.

3.

In the Windows dialog, select the Details tab.

4.

Edit the dimensions as desired. They are

described below.

Width. The total width of the lite.

(sidelites) Adjust Height to Window. Automatically adjusts the height of a sidelite to
match the height of the window.
Height. The overall height of the lite.
# of Horizontal Panels. The number of panels across the lite. If you specify more than
one panel, vertical dividers are added inside
the lites frame.
# of Vertical Panels. The number of panels
running vertically along the lite. If you specify more than one panel, horizontal dividers
are added inside the lites frame.
# of Horizontal Panes. The number of panes
of glass across each panel.
# of Vertical Panes. The number of panes of
glass running vertically along each panel.
8.

Click OK.

Editing Window Details

You can specify precise dimensions and offsets for
the window frame, sash, mullions and transoms.
To edit window details:
1.

Select the window whose properties you

want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Frame
Depth. The depth of the frame members as
seen from an overhead view.
Width. The width of the frame members as
seen from an overhead view.
Offset. The offset of the window frame from
the wall face.
Sash
Depth. The depth of sash members (sidelite/
highlite/lowlite frame) as seen from an overhead view.
Width. The width of sash members as seen
from an overhead view.
Offset. The offset of the sash from the front of
the window frame, i.e. how far back it sits in
the window frame.
Post (for Bays and Bows)
Depth: The thickness of posts in bay and bow
windows.
Width: The width of posts in bay and bow
windows.

Users Guide

73

11

Chapter 11 Doors, Windows & Openings

Mullion

2.

Click on the dimension you want to edit.

3.

In the Edit Dimension dialog, enter the new

value, then press Enter or click OK. The
window position updates automatically.

Vertical Separation. If a lite has two or more

panels running across it, this adds vertical
dividers between the panels.
Horizontal Separation. If a lite has two or
more stacked panels, this adds horizontal
dividers between them.
Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the
mullion as seen from an overhead view.
Width. The width (left-to-right distance) of
the mullion as seen from an overhead view.
Transom (for Lites)
Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the
transom member as seen from an overhead
view. The transom is the member between
the window and the sidelite, highlite or
lowlite frame.
Width. The width of the transom as seen
from an overhead view.
5.

Click OK.

Flipping a Window
You can use the Flip Opening tool to instantly flip
a window around in the wall. If the window has a
swing, the swing is also flipped.

Raising or Lowering a Window

You can raise or lower a window in a wall using
the Elevate tool on the windows right-click
menu.
To raise or lower a window:
1.

Select the window whose elevation you want

to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate.

To flip a window:
1.

Select the window.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select

Flip Opening, or select Edit > Modify
Elements > Flip Opening.

Moving a Window
You can move a window by clicking and dragging
it inside the wall, or by editing the dynamic
dimensions on either side of the window.
To move a window by clicking and dragging:

The value currently shown in the Elevate

dialog is the current elevation of the window
top above the floor level.
3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the top of the window above the
floor.

4.

Click OK.

Deleting a Window
You can delete a window with a couple of mouse
clicks.

1.

Click on the window to select it.

To delete a window:

2.

Click and drag the window to move it.

1.

Select the window to delete. To select

multiple windows, use Shift+click.

2.

Click the Delete button on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

To move a window by editing dimensions:

1.

74

Click on the window. Dimensions appear on

either side of the window.
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Inserting Wall Openings

Inserting Wall Openings

Enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog, then click OK.

An opening is a cutout in a wall of a specific

shape, width and height. Openings can be
rectangular, round, arched, octagonal or
trapezoidal.
You can point and click to insert an opening
anywhere in a wall, automatically center the
opening on the wall, or offset the opening a
specific distance from the end of the wall.

6.

Position the opening in the receiving wall. If

you are using an insertion offset, position the
opening close to the end you want to offset it
from. The opening will snap inside the wall.
Dimensions are displayed that show you the
distance on either side of the opening.

7.

With your opening positioned where you

want it, click to insert it.

8.

Right-click and select Finish.

Openings are inserted at the Head Height defined

for the building location you insert the opening
on. You can raise or lower an opening after you
have inserted it if you need to.
To insert an opening:
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Make sure the location you want to insert

openings on is the current location in the
building locations drop box.
Select Insert > Openings, or click the
Openings button on the Building
toolbar.
In the catalog, select the
opening you want to
insert.
If you want the opening
to be automatically
centered on the wall,
right-click and select
Center on wall. Go to
step 6.
If you want to offset the
opening a specific
distance from the end of
the wall, right-click and select Enter
insertion offset.

Editing the Shape of a Wall

Opening
Openings can be rectangular, round, arched,
octagonal or trapezoidal.
To change the shape a wall opening:
1.

Select the opening whose properties you

want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Type area, click on the shape you want.

4.

Click OK.

Editing the Size of a Wall Opening

You can edit the dimensions of a wall opening by
changing the properties on the openings Basic
property page.
To edit the size of a wall opening:
1.

Select the opening whose properties you

want to change.

Users Guide

75

11

Chapter 11 Doors, Windows & Openings

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Properties area, edit the dimensions of

the opening. Dimensions vary according to
the shape of the opening.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: If you want the bottom of your opening to be

level with the floor, change the height of opening
to match the Head Height of the building location
it is inserted on. Alternatively you can lower the
opening using the Elevate tool.

Raising or Lowering a Wall

Opening
You can raise or lower an opening in a wall using
the Elevate tool on the openings right-click
menu.
To raise or lower a wall opening:
1.

Select the opening whose elevation you want

to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate.

Moving a Wall Opening

The value currently shown in the Elevate

dialog is the current elevation of the opening
top above the floor level.

You can move a wall opening by clicking and

dragging it inside the wall, or by editing the
dynamic dimensions on either side of the
opening.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the top of the opening above the
floor.

To move an opening by clicking and dragging:

4.

Click OK.

1.

Click on the opening to select it.

2.

Click and drag the opening to move it.

Deleting a Wall Opening

To move an opening by editing dimensions:

You can delete a wall opening with a couple of

mouse clicks.

1.

Click on the opening. Dimensions appear on

either side of the opening.

To delete an opening:

2.

Click on the dimension you want to edit.

3.

76

In the Edit Dimension dialog, enter the new

value, then press Enter or click OK. The
opening position updates automatically.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Select the opening to delete. To select

multiple openings, use Shift+click.

2.

Click the Delete button on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

"
A floor is inserted automatically when you connect three or more walls to create a closed wall
layout. When you insert interior walls, the floor is split as new rooms are created. If you want
different flooring types in different rooms, you can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply
different types of carpet, tiles, wood flooring, vinyl flooring, linoleum, or concrete to individual
floors.
You can point and click to insert ceilings using one of the handy Ceiling tools: Ceiling by Room,
Ceiling by Perimeter, and Ceiling by Picking Points. Any ceiling surface can easily be made into a
tray or cathedral ceiling by simply editing the ceilings properties.

77

Chapter 12 Floors & Ceilings

How Floors are Created

points are permitted anywhere on the floor

surface.

A floor is automatically inserted throughout your

model when you connect three or more walls to
create a closed exterior wall layout.

The material applied to the floor depends on the

house style you selected when using the House
Builder Wizard. If you created your model from
scratch, a nylon carpet was applied.
When you draw interior walls, the floor is split
into individual floors as new rooms are created
provided the rooms walls are all connected. You
can also manually split automatic floors using the
Room Division tool.
Floors can only be selected in 3D view. The only
exception are floor edges that have been defined
using the Room Division tool. Such edges are
marked with a dashed line in 2D plan view, and
can be moved if necessary.
Floors are directly associated with the walls that
contain them. If you stretch your wall layout, the
floor stretches with it. If you open up your wall
layout by deleting a wall, the floor will be deleted.

Dividing a Floor
You can use the Room Division tool to manually
split a floor into individual areas. You may, for
example, want to create two different floor areas
in one room. You can also use the Room Division
tool to define an opening in your floor. Floor
edges defined with the Room Division tool can be
moved to increase or decrease the size of the
individual floor area. They can also be deleted if
necessary.
To divide a floor:
1.

2.

78

Select Insert > Room Division, or

click the Room Division button on the
Building toolbar.
Select points to define the division line. If you
are dividing a floor surface into two
segments, the end points of the line must be
on the floor edge, although intermediate

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

If you are creating a floor within a floor, the

split line must form a closed shape.
3.

Right-click and select Finish.

To move a division line:

1.

Click on the dashed division line in 2D plan

view. Blue grab handles are displayed along
the line.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab

handle, then click and drag to move the line.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Note: When you divide a floor, the division lines

are also created on the ceiling above.

Raising or Lowering a Floor

You can raise or lower a floor using the Elevate
tool.
To raise or lower a floor:
1.

Select the floor in 3D view.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the floor above the floor level
defined for the current building location.

4.

Click OK.

Editing the Thickness of a Floor

You can edit the thickness of a floor on its Basic
property page.
To edit the thickness of a floor:
1.

Select the floor in 3D view.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Specifying Framing Members for Floors

3.

Edit the value in the Thickness edit box on

the Basic page.

4.

Click OK.

Specifying Framing Members for

Floors
Floors have a framing configuration assigned to
them which you see when you display framing.
You can specify a custom framing configuration if
you want. The configuration consists of a joist
member selection, joist spacing and joist
direction. Framing can be displayed using the
Display Framing tool, and is included in the
project estimate.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply.
Categories that contain
flooring include Wood,
Concrete, Carpet, Tile
and Linoleum.

4.

Click on the floor

surface you want to
apply the material to.
The material is
immediately applied.
You can continue
applying the material to
other floor surfaces, or select another
material in the catalog.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

To specify framing members for floors:

1.

In non-framed view, select the floor in 3D

view. You can also specify framing members
for floors in the catalog.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

On the Basic property page, click the Specify

Framing button.

4.

To select a joist member, select Joist in the list,

then click Select. Then, select the desired
member from the Catalog Access dialog.

5.

In the Joist Spacing edit box, specify the

desired spacing between joists.

6.

In the Joist Direction edit box, specify the

direction in which you want the joists to run
in degrees of an angle.

7.

Click OK.

Applying Different Materials to

Floors
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly
apply different types of materials to floors, such
as different colors or patterns of carpet, tile or
linoleum.
To apply a material to a floor:
1.

Display your model in 2D Designers View

or 3D view and make sure the floor is visible
in the view. You may need to use the View
Filter to hide the roof and ceilings.

Deleting a Floor
You can delete a floor in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a floor:
1.

Select the floor in 3D view.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Cutting an Opening in a Floor

You can insert an opening of any shape and size
in a floor by defining the area to be cut out, then
deleting it. You may need to do this to
accommodate a staircase.
To insert an opening in a floor:
1.

Select Insert > Room Division, or

click the Room Division button on the
Building toolbar.

2.

Select points to define the outline of the

opening, ensuring the outline forms a closed
shape.

3.

Right-click and select Finish. An outline is

created on the floor surface. You can stretch,

Users Guide

79

12

Chapter 12 Floors & Ceilings

move and curve the outline if necessary to
get the exact size and shape you want.

2.

Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Curve.

4.

Go into 3D view and make sure the floor is

visible in the view.

3.

5.

Click inside the outline you drew. The outline

is selected.

Select the point you want to curve to. The

opening edge automatically curves to the
point.

4.

Click to finish.

6.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Removing an Opening from a

Floor

Resizing or Reshaping a Floor

Opening

If you have inserted an opening in a floor, you can

remove it by deleting all of the opening edges.

If you have created an opening in a floor, you can

resize or reshape the opening by clicking and
dragging its edges or corners.

To remove an opening from a floor:

1.

To resize or reshape a floor opening:

In 2D plan view, click on one of the openings

edges, then Shift+click to select the
remaining edges.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

1.

In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge

you want to move.

2.

Right-click and select Move, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Move.

3.

To resize the opening, hover your pointer

over the center of the currently selected
opening edge, then click and drag the edge to
adjust the opening size.

Curving a Floor Opening Edge

You can curve the edge of a floor opening using
the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can
click and drag the opening edge to curve it, or
select a point to curve to.
To curve an opening edge by clicking and
dragging:
1.

In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge

you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the opening edge to the

desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

To curve an opening edge to a selected point:

1.

80

In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge

you want to curve.
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

How Ceilings Are Created

You can insert ceilings using any of the handy
Ceiling tools Ceiling by Room, Ceiling by
Perimeter, or Ceiling by Picking Points.
You can edit the thickness and appearance of any
ceiling as well as lower it to create a suspended
ceiling, regardless of how you created it. You can
also use the Materials Paintbrush to apply
different colors or materials to individual ceilings.
As well, any ceiling can be converted into a tray
or cathedral ceiling by simply editing the ceilings
properties.
Tip: The underside of an upper-story floor can
also serve as a ceiling. Similarly, the top side of a
lower-story ceiling can serve as a floor.

Inserting a Ceiling Throughout a

Building Location
The Ceiling by Perimeter tool detects the
perimeter walls on the current building location
and inserts a ceiling of your choice throughout
the entire location. This option is ideal if you
would like to create ceilings as quickly as possible
throughout your model and do not have a need
for different ceilings in each room.

Inserting a Ceiling in a Room

To instantly add a ceiling to the entire
perimeter of a location:

3.

In the catalog, select the

ceiling type you want to
insert.

4.

Click inside the room that

you want to add the
ceiling to. The ceiling is
added automatically. (If
you want, you can
continue adding ceilings
to other rooms.)
Right-click and select
Finish from the shortcut
menu.

1.

Make sure the location you want to insert the

ceiling on is the current location in the
building locations drop box.

2.

Select Insert > Ceilings > Ceiling by

Perimeter, or click the Ceilings button
on the Building toolbar and select
Ceiling by Perimeter.

3.

In the catalog, select the

ceiling type you want to
insert.

5.

4.

Click anywhere inside

the perimeter of the
model. The ceiling is
added automatically.

Inserting a Ceiling by Picking

Points

5.

Right-click and select

Finish from the shortcut
menu.

Note: The Ceiling by

Perimeter tool does not take interior walls into
account. Only one large ceiling surface is created.
If you would prefer individual ceilings in each
room, use the Ceiling by Room tool.

Inserting a Ceiling in a Room

The Ceiling by Room option inserts a ceiling
inside the perimeter of a room provided all the
walls are connected. Adding ceilings by room
allows you to have different ceiling types in
different rooms.
To insert a ceiling inside a room:
1.

2.

Make sure the location you want to insert the

ceiling on is the current location in the
building locations drop box.

Using the Ceiling by Picking Points tool you can

insert a ceiling by picking points to define the
ceilings outline. This lets you create a ceiling of
any shape and size, anywhere in the drawing
area.
To create a ceiling by picking points:
1.

Make sure the location you want to insert the

ceiling on is the current location in the
building locations drop box.

2.

Select Insert > Ceilings > Ceiling by

Picking Points, or click the Ceilings
button on the Building toolbar and
select Ceiling by Picking Points.

3.

In the catalog, select the

ceiling type you want to
insert.

4.

Select a start point for

the ceiling outline.

5.

Continue selecting
points until the outline
is defined. (You do not
have to select the start
point again because the
last point you pick is
always closed back to
the start point.)

6.

Right-click and select Finish.

Select Insert > Ceilings > Ceiling by

Room, or click the Ceilings button on
the Building toolbar and select Ceiling
by Room.

Users Guide

81

12

Chapter 12 Floors & Ceilings

Creating a Tray Ceiling

6.

A tray ceiling slopes upward with one or more

steps prior to reaching a flat portion. This
decorative ceiling treatment is often used to add
volume or height to a room.

Click the Skirt Width option, then specify the

desired distance from the outer edge of the
ceiling to the edge of the tray.

7.

Click the Edge Shape option, then select

either Straight, Gable or Arched.
Straight. Creates straight tray edges that can
be angled.
Gable. Creates straight tray edges and leaves
one side open on the tray so that the tray can
fit up against a wall.
Arched. Creates curved tray edges.

You can create a tray ceiling by changing a

ceilings type to Tray in its properties, then
defining the tray height, skirt width and slope
angle.
To create a tray ceiling:

8.

If you selected the Straight edge shape,

specify the desired angle for the trays edges
in the Slope Angle edit box. You can choose
in the range of 1 to 90.

9.

If you selected the Arched edge shape, specify

the following values:
Start Angle. The angle of the start of the
curve, measured from the base of the ceiling
to the center of the starting curve. Choose a
value from 1 to 90.
End Angle. The angle of the upper portion of
the curve, measured from the center of the
ending curve to the top of the tray.

1.

If one is not present, create a regular flat

ceiling in the room that you want to have a
tray ceiling.

2.

Select the ceiling.

3.

Right-click and select Properties.

10. Click OK.

4.

In the Ceilings dialog, click the Tray option

in the Type area.

Creating a Cathedral Ceiling

5.

82

In the Properties area, click the Tray Height

option, then type the desired distance from
the base of the ceiling to the raised flat
portion. This defines the height of the tray.
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Radius. The distance from the base of the

ceiling to the center of the curved edge.

A cathedral ceiling is a high, vaulted, open ceiling

that can be arched or slant upward to a point.

Moving a Ceiling
Start Angle. The angle of the start of the
curve, measured from the base of the ceiling
to the center of the starting curve. Choose a
value from 1 to 90.

You can create a cathedral ceiling by changing a

ceilings type to Cathedral in its properties, then
defining the ceilings edge conditions.
To create a cathedral ceiling:
1.

If one is not present, create a regular flat

ceiling in the room that you want to have a
cathedral ceiling.

2.

Select the ceiling.

3.

Right-click and select Properties.

4.

In the Ceilings dialog, click the Cathedral

option in the Type area.

End Angle. The angle of the upper portion of

the curve, measured from the center of the
ending curve to the top of the ceilings peak.
Radius. The distance from the base of the
ceiling to the center of the curved edge.
Vert. Distance. The distance from the base of
the ceiling to the peak.
9.

Click OK.

Note: If you are creating a cathedral ceiling, you

need to make sure your roof is steep enough to
accommodate the ceiling. Otherwise, the ceiling
will go through the roof.

Moving a Ceiling
You can move a ceiling using the Move Whole
Element tool.
To move a ceiling:
5.

6.

Click the Skirt Width option, then specify the

distance from the edge of the ceiling at which
you want the ceiling to start sloping upward.
If you want the ceiling to start sloping
directly from the outer edges, specify a value
of 0.

1.

Select the ceiling by clicking on one of its

edges.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element,

or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move
Whole Element.

3.

Click the Edge Shape option, then select

either Straight, Gable or Arched to define the
shape of the ceilings sloping edges.

Click anywhere on the ceiling, then click and

drag the ceiling to the desired location in
your drawing.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Straight. Creates straight edges that can be

angled.

Resizing or Reshaping a Ceiling

Gable. Creates straight edges and leaves one

side open so that the ceiling can fit up against
a wall.

You can resize or reshape a ceiling by clicking and

dragging its edges and corners.

Arched. Creates curved edges.

7.

If you selected the Straight edge shape,

specify the desired angle for the sloping
edges in the Slope Angle edit box.

8.

If you selected the Arched edge shape, specify

the following values:

To resize or reshape a ceiling:

1.

Select the ceiling by clicking on one of its

edges. If you want to resize the ceiling, click
on the edge that you want to adjust. A solid
blue grab handle appears on the edge you
selected, and hollow blue grab handles
appear at each corner of the ceiling surface.

2.

To resize the ceiling, hover your pointer over

the solid blue grab handle, then click and
Users Guide

83

12

Chapter 12 Floors & Ceilings

drag the ceiling edge to adjust the ceiling
size.
3.

To reshape the ceiling, hover your pointer

over one of the corner grab handles, then
click and drag the corner to adjust the ceiling
shape.

4.

Click OK.

Cutting Openings in Ceilings

You can create an opening in a ceiling using the
Cut Opening tool. You create the opening by
picking points to define its size and shape.

Curving a Ceiling Edge

To insert an opening in a ceiling:

You can curve a ceiling edge using the Curve tool.

Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the
edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to.

1.

Select the ceiling by clicking on one of its

edges.

2.

To curve a ceiling edge by clicking and

dragging:

Right-click and select Cut Opening, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Cut Opening.

3.

Select a start point for the opening.

1.

Click on the edge you want to curve.

4.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the ceiling edge to the desired

curve.

Continue selecting points to define the

opening. As you select points, the opening is
created. The last point picked is always
connected back to the start point to form a
closed shape, so you dont have to select the
start point again.

4.

Release your mouse button.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

To curve a ceiling edge to a selected point:

1.

Click on the ceiling edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The

ceiling edge automatically curves to the
point.

4.

Click to finish.

Raising or Lowering a Ceiling

You can change the height of a ceiling using the
Elevate tool.
To raise or lower a ceiling:
1.

Select the ceiling you want to raise or lower

by clicking on the edge of it.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate.
The current value in the Elevate dialog is the
current elevation of the ceiling above the
floor level.

3.

84

In the Elevate dialog, specify the height you

want the ceiling to sit at above the floor.
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Resizing or Reshaping a Ceiling

Opening
If you created an opening in a ceiling, you can
resize or reshape the opening by clicking and
dragging its edges or corners.
To resize or reshape a ceiling opening:
1.

In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge

you want to move.

2.

To resize the opening, hover your pointer

over the center of the currently selected
opening edge, then click and drag the edge to
adjust the opening size.

Curving a Ceiling Opening Edge

3.

To reshape the opening, click and drag a

corner grab handle.

Curving a Ceiling Opening Edge

You can curve the edge of a ceiling opening using
the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can
click and drag the opening edge to curve it, or
select a point to curve to.

Applying Different Colors and

Materials to Ceilings
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly
apply different colors or materials to ceilings.
To apply a material to a ceiling:
1.

Display your model in 3D view and make

sure the ceiling is visible in the view. You
may need to use the View Filter to hide the
roof.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply. Paint
colors are located in the
Paint category, and
Stucco and Drywall can
be found in the Finishes
category.

4.

Click on the ceiling you

want to apply the
material to.

5.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To curve an opening edge by clicking and

dragging:
1.

In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge

you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the opening edge to the

desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

To curve an opening edge to a selected point:

1.

In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge

you want to curve.

2.

Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The

opening edge automatically curves to the
point.

4.

Click to finish.

Removing an Opening from a

Ceiling
You can remove an opening from a ceiling using
the Remove Opening tool.
Note: You cannot remove an opening from a
ceiling using Delete.
To remove an opening from a ceiling:
1.

Click on one of the openings edges.

2.

Right-click and select Remove Opening, or

select Edit > Modify Elements > Remove
Opening. The opening is removed instantly.

Specifying Framing Members for

Ceilings
Ceilings have a framing configuration assigned to
them which you see when you display framing.
You can specify a custom framing configuration if
you want. The configuration consists of a joist
member selection, joist spacing and joist
direction. Framing can be displayed using the
Display Framing tool, and is included in the
project estimate.
To specify framing members for ceilings:
1.

In non-framed view, select the ceiling you

want to change. You can also specify framing
members for ceilings in the catalog.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Users Guide

85

12

Chapter 12 Floors & Ceilings

3.

On the Basic property page, click the Specify

Framing button.

4.

To select a joist member, select Joist in the list,

then click Select. Then, select the desired
member from the Catalog Access dialog.

5.

In the Joist Spacing edit box, specify the

desired spacing between joists.

6.

In the Joist Direction edit box, specify the

direction in which you want the joists to run
in degrees of an angle.

7.

Click OK.

Deleting a Ceiling
You can delete a ceiling in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a ceiling:
1.

Select the ceiling.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

86

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

If your design has more than one floor, youll want to insert a staircase. The catalog contains a
variety of stair and ramp styles, including straight, spiral, fold-back, L-shaped and L-winder.
There are even stairs specifically for decks and porches. You can edit the composition and
dimensions of each component in your staircase to create the exact look you want.
Stairs and ramps are inserted as solid objects with point-and-click simplicity. Just select the
staircase or ramp you want to insert in the catalog, then click to insert it in your model.
The catalog also contains an excellent selection of railing types. A railing can be just a handrail, or
a balustrade with posts, top/bottom rails and newels. You can insert railings on a staircase
automatically. You can choose to put it on both sides, the left side, the right side, or the center. You
can also draw a horizontal railing by picking points.

Stairs/Ramps

Railings

87

Chapter 13 Stairs, Ramps & Railings

Inserting Stairs and Ramps

Editing Stair Size Properties

You can insert a staircase or ramp with a single

mouse click. If you place the staircase near a wall,
the staircase will automatically snap to the wall.
Once you have inserted a staircase, you can edit
its size, style and geometry.

By default, most stairs (except porch stairs) have

an overall height of 9 and have 18 steps. You can
edit the general dimensions of a staircase, such as
height, width, and number of steps.

To insert a staircase or ramp:

1.

Select the staircase whose stair properties

you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, edit the

dimensions in the Properties window.

1.

In the building locations drop box, select the

location where you want to insert the base of
the staircase.

2.

Select Insert > Stairs/Ramps, or click

the Stairs/Ramps button on the
Building toolbar.

3.

In the catalog, select the

staircase or ramp you
want to insert.

4.

Position the staircase

and click to insert it.

5.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To edit stair size properties:

Parts of a Staircase
Riser

Overall Height. The vertical distance from

the base of the staircase to the top of the staircase. Generally this is the distance from one
floor to the next.

Tread

Nosing
Stringer

Total Steps. The total number of steps in the

staircase including all treads and landings.
This value is controlled by the Overall Height
and Riser Maximum, so you can only go so
high or so low when specifying the total
number of steps.
Riser Height. The distance from the top of
one tread to the top of the next tread. The
riser height adjusts if you edit the Overall
Height or Total Steps, making this a readonly value.

88

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Editing a Staircase Layout

Tread Run. The width of a step from the nose
of the step to the riser of the next step.
Riser Maximum. The maximum height
allowed for risers. The riser height adjusts
when you change the Overall Height or Total
Steps variables.
Show Riser. Inserts vertical boards under
the treads. If turned off, the stairs are open
under the treads.

Editing a Staircase Layout

You can choose from a multitude of preset
staircase layouts and edit the dimensions of
individual segments to suit your needs.
To edit a staircase layout:
1.

Select the staircase whose stair properties

you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, select the Layout

tab.

4.

To change the layout of the staircase, make a

selection from the Preset Layouts drop box,
or click the graphic to display the available
layouts and select the one you want.

6.

Different layouts will have different

parameters. Common ones are described
below. Clicking a dimension marked with an
alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights
the corresponding dimension in the stair
graphic, and vice versa.
Stair Segments
Number of Steps. The number of steps in
the flight.
Position Offset. Shifts the base of the staircase left or right from the center line. A positive value shifts it right, a negative value
shifts it left. If the Upper Offset is set to 0, the
entire staircase is moved.
Lower Width. The width of the bottom step.
Upper Width. The width of the top step.
Upper Offset. Shifts the top of the stair segment left or right to create an angled flight. A
positive value shifts it right, a negative value
shifts it left.
Landing Connection. Choose from Front,
Bottom or Under to determine how the stairs
attach to the landing.
Adjust Width. If the staircase has multiple
segments, this adjusts the width of attached
landings and stair flights to match the width
settings of the current segment.
Adjust Height. When editing the number of
risers or height of a segment in a multi-segmented staircase, this determines which
other segments (or all others) are to be
adjusted to make up the overall height of all
segments.
Landing Segments (vary per style)

5.

To edit the dimensions of a particular

segment, select the segment in the Layout
Segments window. For example, an
L-shaped staircase will have three segments:
Stair 1, Landing 2 and Stair 3. The Stair 1
segment is the lower flight of stairs, Landing
2 is the central landing between the two
flights, and Stair 3 is the upper flight of stairs.

Position Offset. Shifts the landing left or

right. A positive value moves the landing
right. A negative value moves it left.
Width. The width of the landing along the
lower flight of stairs. By default this matches
the Upper Width setting of the lower stair
flight.
Depth 1. The width of the landing along the
upper flight of stairs. By default this matches
the Lower Width setting of the upper stair
flight.
Users Guide

89

13

Chapter 13 Stairs, Ramps & Railings

7.

Depth 2. The width of the exposed side of the

landing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Adjust Width. Adjusts the width of attached

stair flights to match the width of the landing.

3.

To change the stringer style or create a solid

stair, click the appropriate graphic in the Type
area.

4.

To edit tread, riser, stringer and landing

details, select the Details tab. Clicking a
dimension marked with an alphabetical
character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the
corresponding dimension in the stair
graphic, and vice versa.

To add a flight or landing to your staircase,

click Add in the Layout Segments area. Select
the segment you want to add in the Add/Edit
Segment dialog.

5.

Edit the properties in the Properties area.

Tread Thickness. The thickness of each step.
Nosing Depth. The distance the step extends
past the riser.

The segment is added to your list of

segments in the Layout Segments window.
Proceed with defining the parameters for the
new segment in the Parameters window.
8.

9.

To change an existing segment to another

type, select the segment in the Layout
Segments window, then click Edit. Select the
new segment type in the Add/Edit Segment
dialog.

Editing Stair Details

Editing stair details lets you precisely control the
size and position of treads, risers, stringers and
landing platforms.
To edit stair details:

90

20

To delete a segment from the staircase, select

the segment in the Layout Segments window,
then click Delete.

10. Once you are satisfied with your layout

settings, click OK.

1.

Riser Angle. The tilt of the riser board. A

value of 0 means the board is perpendicular
to the step (straight up and down). A value
above 0 tilts the riser down toward the back
of the staircase. The maximum angle allowed
is 20.

Select the staircase whose stair properties

you want to edit.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Stringer Side Offset. The distance the side

stringers are offset from the ends of the
treads.
Stringer Width. The distance from the bottom of the stringer to the underside of the
tread/riser intersection. Setting the stringer
width to match the height of your staircase

Editing the Appearance of the Cut Line

creates a stringer that runs from the staircase
right to the floor.

4.

Make your changes in the Cut Line area.

Show Cut Lines. Shows or hides the cut
lines in 2D plan view.
Extension. The distance the cut line extends
past the edge of the staircase in 2D plan view.
Angle. The angle of the cut line in 2D plan
view.

Width = 3 5/16

Spacing. If using the Double or Double Arch

style, this is the distance between the lines.

Width = 8

Stringer Thickness. The thickness of the

stringer member.
Max Stringer Spacing. The maximum distance allowed between stringers. If you
increase the width of the staircase, additional
stringers will be inserted if this spacing is
exceeded.
Landing Thickness. The thickness of the
landing platform.
6.

Click OK.

Editing the Appearance of the Cut

Line
When viewing a staircase in 2D plan view you
can see a cut line through the staircase. The cut
line is a standard drafting symbol for stairs.

Cut Line

Elevation. How high up the staircase the cut

line sits.
Style. Choose from Single, Single Architectural, Double and Double Architectural. The
default is Double Architectural.
5.

Once youve defined your cut line, click OK.

Editing General Ramp Properties

If editing a ramp, you can select a uniform or full
style, and edit the ramp thickness and landing
thickness. If you want to change the layout
(shape) of the ramp or edit properties such as the
height or slope, see Editing the Layout of a Ramp
on page 92.
To edit ramp properties:
1.

Select the ramp.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, select the Basic

tab.

4.

If you want to change the ramp type, click on

the type you want in the Type area. The first
type is a ramp with uniform thickness, while
the second is a full, wedge-style ramp.

5.

If you selected the uniform ramp style, you

can change its thickness by entering the
desired thickness in the Ramp Thickness
edit box.

You can change the cut lines position, size, angle

and style. You can also hide it from view if you
want.
To edit the appearance of the cut line:
1.

Select the staircase.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, select the Details

tab.

Users Guide

91

13

Chapter 13 Stairs, Ramps & Railings

6.
7.

To change the thickness of the landing, enter

a value in the Landing Thickness edit box.
Click OK.

6.

Edit the variables in the Parameters window.

Ramp segments
Slope. The angle of the ramps incline.

Editing the Layout of a Ramp

Length. The length of the ramps surface.

You can choose from a multitude of preset ramp

layouts as well as edit various layout properties
such as length and slope.

Position Offset. Shifts the base of the ramp

left or right from the center line. A positive
value shifts it right, a negative value shifts it
left. If the Upper Offset is set to 0, the entire
ramp is moved.

To edit the layout of a ramp:

1.

Select the ramp.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, select the Layout

tab.

4.

To change the layout of the ramp, make a

selection from the Preset Layouts drop box,
or click the graphic to display the available
layouts and select the one you want.

Lower Width. The width of the bottom of the

ramp.
Upper Width. The width of the top of the
ramp.
Upper Offset. Shifts the top of the ramp segment left or right to create an angled ramp. A
positive value shifts it right, a negative value
shifts it left.
Adjust Width. For ramps with multiple segments, this adjusts the width of attached
landings and ramp flights to match the width
settings of the current segment.
Adjust Height. When editing the height of a
segment in a multi-segmented ramp, this
determines which other segments (or all others) are to be adjusted to make up the overall
height of all segments.
Landing Segments (vary per style)

5.

92

To edit the dimensions of a particular

segment, select the segment in the Layout
Segments window. A straight ramp will have
one segment, named Ramp 1. Other ramp
styles will have more segments. For example,
an L-shaped ramp will have three segments:
Ramp 1, Landing 2 and Ramp 3. The Ramp 1
segment is the lower section of the ramp,
Landing 2 is the central landing between the
two sections, and Ramp 3 is the upper section
of the ramp. Clicking a dimension marked
with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.)
highlights the corresponding dimension in
the ramp graphic, and vice versa.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Position Offset. Shifts the landing left or

right from the center line. A positive value
moves it right, a negative value moves it left.
Width. The width of the landing along the
lower ramp section. By default this matches
the Upper Width setting of the lower ramp
section.
Depth 1. The width of the landing along the
upper ramp section. By default this matches
the Lower Width setting of the upper ramp
section.
Depth 2. The width of the exposed side of the
landing.
Adjust Width. Adjusts the width of attached
ramp segments to match the width of the
landing.

Moving a Staircase or Ramp

7.

To add a segment or landing to your ramp,

click Add in the Layout Segments area. Select
the segment you want to add in the Add/Edit
Segment dialog.

Rotating a Staircase or Ramp

You can rotate a staircase or ramp by simply
clicking and dragging it.
To rotate a staircase or ramp:
1.

Select the staircase or ramp.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the staircase or ramp.

4.

When the staircase or ramp is at the desired

rotation, release your mouse button.

Deleting a Staircase or Ramp

The segment is added to your list of
segments in the Layout Segments window.
Proceed with defining the parameters for the
new segment in the Parameters window.
8.

9.

To change an existing segment to another

type, select the segment in the Layout
Segments window, then click Edit. Select the
new segment type in the Add/Edit Segment
dialog.
To delete a segment from the ramp, select the
segment in the Layout Segments window, then
click Delete.

10. Once you are satisfied with your layout

settings, click OK.

Moving a Staircase or Ramp

You can move a staircase or ramp by clicking and
dragging it.
To move a staircase or ramp:
1.

Click on the staircase or ramp to select it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the staircase/ramp to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

You can delete a staircase or ramp in a couple of

easy steps.
To delete a staircase or ramp:
1.

Select the staircase or ramp.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Inserting Railings on Staircases

and Ramps
A railing can be just a handrail, or a balustrade
with posts, top/bottom rails and newels. You can
insert railings on both sides of a staircase or ramp
automatically. Or you can very easily draw one on
the left side, the right side, or the center.
To insert railings on both sides of a staircase
or ramp automatically:
1.

Select Insert > Railings > Railings on

Stairs Automatically, or click the
Railings button on the Building
toolbar and select Railings on Stairs
Automatically.

Users Guide

93

13

Chapter 13 Stairs, Ramps & Railings

2.

In the catalog, select the

railing type you want to
insert.

3.

Click on the staircase.

The railings are inserted
automatically on both
sides.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To insert a railing on the

right side of a staircase or ramp:
1.

Select Insert > Railings > Railing on

Stair Right, or click the Railings
button on the Building toolbar and
select Railing on Stair Right.

2.

In the catalog, select the

railing type you want to
insert.

3.

Select a point anywhere

along the bottom of the
staircase (or along the
tread where you want
the bottom of the railing
to sit) to define the level
of the railings bottom
post. Your cursor will
snap to the right side of the staircase as you
start to draw the railing.

4.

5.

94

Select a point anywhere along the top of the

staircase (or along the tread where you want
the top of the railing to sit) to define the level
of the railings top post.

To insert a railing on the left side of a staircase

or ramp:
1.

Select Insert > Railings > Railing on

Stair Left, or click the Railings button
on the Building toolbar and select
Railing on Stair Left.

2.

In the catalog, select the

railing type you want to
insert.

3.

Select a point anywhere

along the bottom of the
staircase (or along the
tread where you want
the bottom of the railing
to sit) to define the level
of the railings bottom
post. Your cursor will
snap to the left side of the staircase as you
start to draw the railing.

4.

Select a point anywhere along the top of the

staircase (or along the tread where you want
the top of the railing to sit) to define the level
of the railings top post.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

To insert a railing along the center of a

staircase or ramp:
1.

Select Insert > Railings > Railing on

Stair Center, or click the Railings
button on the Building toolbar and
select Railing on Stair Center.

2.

In the catalog, select the

railing type you want to
insert.

3.

Select a point anywhere

along the bottom of the
staircase (or along the
tread where you want
the bottom of the railing
to sit) to define the level
of the railings bottom
post. Your cursor will
snap to the center of the staircase as you start
to draw the railing.

4.

Select a point anywhere along the top of the

staircase (or along the tread where you want

Right-click and select Finish.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Inserting a Horizontal Railing

the top of the railing to sit) to define the level
of the railings top post.
5.

Parts of a Railing
Post

Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting a Horizontal Railing

Handrail

You can use the Railing by Picking Points tool to

create a horizontal railing anywhere in your
model. You may, for example, want to create a
railing around a stairwell, or insert a railing to
separate two rooms in your house. You create the
railing by picking the start point and end point of
the railing. Each point you pick serves as a main
post point.

Newels

Bottom Rail

To insert a railing along a floor:

1.

Make sure the building location that you

want to insert the railing on is current.

2.

Select Insert > Railings > Railings by

Picking Points, or click the Railings
button on the Building toolbar and
select Railings by Picking Points.

3.

In the catalog, select the

railing type you want to
insert.

4.

Select the start point for

the railing.

5.

Select an end point for

the railing. You can
continue adding
sections to the railing if
you want.

6.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Editing Railing Properties

When editing a railing, you can choose a different
railing type as well as control the dimensions and
settings of posts, rails and newels.
To edit railing properties:
1.

Select the railing. If the railing has multiple

segments, use Shift+click to select the
remaining segments.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Railings dialog, select the Basic tab.

Users Guide

95

13

Chapter 13 Stairs, Ramps & Railings

4.

To change the railing type, click on the type

you want in the Type area.

5.

To edit the settings of individual railing

components, make your changes in
parameters window. The available
parameters vary depending on the railing
type. Below is a brief description of typical
parameters you might see. Clicking a
dimension marked with an alphabetical
character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the
corresponding dimension in the railing
graphic, and vice versa.

Posts
Include Posts. Inserts a post at the railings
start point and endpoint, and at points in
between defined by the Post Spacing.
Include First Post. If disabled, eliminates
the post at the start point of the railing.
Include Last Post. If disabled, eliminates the
post at the end point of the railing.
Post Spacing. The distance between intermediate posts in your railing.
Post Position. Choosing From Start measures the intermediate posts from the start
point of the railing. Choosing
Centered inserts an intermediate post at the
center of the railing and measures other
intermediate posts from there.
Post Height. This value is determined by the
handrail and bottom rail heights.
Post Style. Choose either Rectangle or Round
for the post shape.
Post Width. The width of the post.
Post Depth. The depth of the post.
Post Rotation. Determines the rotation of
the connecting post where two railings connect. Choosing Half Way rotates the connecting post half way between the angle.
Choosing None leaves the connecting post
aligned to the first railing.
Handrail
Handrail Height. The height of the handrail
above the insertion surface.

96

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Make Continuous. Makes the handrail cut

through all posts, creating a continuous, solid
member.
Handrail Style. Choose either a Rectangle or
Round shape.
Handrail Width. The width of the handrail
(as seen in 2D plan view).
Handrail Depth. The depth (thickness) of the
handrail.
Bottom Rail
Bottom Rail Height. The height of the bottom rail from the insertion surface.
Bottom Rail Style. Choose either a Rectangle
or Round shape for the rail.
Bottom Rail Width. The width of the bottom
(as seen in 2D plan view).
Bottom Rail Depth. The depth (thickness) of
the bottom rail.
Newels
Newel Spacing. The horizontal distance
between newels.
Newel Style. Choose either Rectangle or
Round for the newel shape.
Newel Width. The width of the newel.
Newel Depth. The depth (thickness) of the
newel.
Stair Insertion
Post Offset. The horizontal offset of the first
post from the bottom of the staircase. Only a
positive value can be specified, which moves
the post further back along the stairs.
Side Offset. Offset of railing from the sides
of the treads.
Connection. Determines how railings are
connected to the staircase. Connection 2
maintains the distance from the nosing to the
railing at all times. Connection 1 breaks this
rule to create a nicer-looking railing.

Changing the Length of a Railing

Changing the Length of a Railing

You can lengthen or shorten a railing by clicking
and dragging one of its end points.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

To change the length of a railing:

1.

Select the railing. A grab handle is displayed

at each railing end.

2.

Hover your pointer over the railing

end you want to stretch. The
Lengthen cursor is displayed.

3.

Click and drag to lengthen or shorten the

railing, then release your mouse button.

Stretching a Railing
You can use the Stretch tool to lengthen or shorten
a railing and re-position it at the same time.
To stretch a railing:
1.

Select the railing.

2.

Right-click and select Stretch.

3.

Click and drag the railing end you want to

adjust, then release the mouse button.

Rotating a Railing
You can rotate a railing using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a railing:
1.

Select the railing.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Click on the point you want to rotate around,

then move your mouse to rotate the railing
around the selected point.

4.

When the railing is at the desired rotation,

click to finish.

Deleting Railings
You can delete a railing in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a railing:
1.

Select the railing. If a railing has multiple

segments you can Shift+click to select all the
segments you want to remove.

Users Guide

97

13

To complete your structural model, you want to insert a roof over it. The design of your roof can
be a major factor in the overall look and feel of your home. Inserting a roof in Design Suite Deluxe
is incredibly simple. Just click inside your model and the roof is inserted.
Roofs are inserted by location. Therefore, if you have a two-story house, each story may require
its own roof if the levels are split. The great thing about roofs in Design Suite Deluxe is that you can
edit each roof edge individually to achieve the precise geometry, dimensions and appearance you
want. This means that virtually any roof configuration is possible, including multiple pitch,
multiple plate height roofs. And with a wide selection of roof styles to choose from, including
hip, gable, mansard and arched, you can be as creative as you want.
To give your roof design that extra edge, you can add things like dormers, skylights and
openings, all of which are completely customizable to suit your needs.

99

Chapter 14 Roofs

Inserting an Automatic Roof Over

Perimeter Walls
You can use the Roof by Perimeter tool to
automatically insert a roof over the perimeter
wall layout of a selected building location. If you
have a two-story home where the ground floor
wall layout is different than the upper story wall
layout, and you want each story to have its own
roof, you will need to insert a roof on each
location.

To insert a roof over an entire wall layout:

1.

Make sure the current location is the location

containing the walls you want to insert the
roof over.

2.

Select Insert > Roofs > Roof by

Perimeter, or click the Roofs button on
the Building toolbar and select Roof
by Perimeter.

3.

In the catalog, select the

roof type you want to
insert. Note that the
catalog does not contain
gable roofs. If you want
to create a gable roof,
insert a hip roof first,
then convert it to a
gable. (See Converting a

Upper Story

Lower
Story

Hip Roof to a Gable

Roof on page 101.)
4.
Roof

Click inside the wall

perimeter. The roof is inserted automatically.

Note: If the roof you are inserting runs up against

any upper-story walls, the roof will cut around
the walls. You can adjust the roof to avoid saddle
situations, or to ignore the walls. See Changing
the Way a Lower-story Roof is Created on
page 101.

Inserting a Roof by Picking Points

You can use the Roof by Picking Points tool to
create a roof of a custom size and shape by
drawing the basic outline of the roof. This option
is ideal when you want the roof to cover only a
specific area, such as a porch.
To create a roof by picking points:
By default, the roof is inserted directly on top of
the walls of the current building location. You can
edit the support height as well as change the
roofs style and dimensions after it has been
inserted.

100

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Make sure the current location is the location

containing the walls you want to insert the
roof over.

2.

Select Insert > Roofs > Roof by

Picking Points, or click the Roofs
button on the Building toolbar and
select Roof by Picking Points.

Changing the Way a Lower-story Roof is Created

3.

In the catalog, select the

roof type you want to
insert. Note that the
catalog does not contain
gable roofs. If you want
to create a gable roof,
insert a hip roof first,
then convert it to a
gable. (See Converting a

Hip Roof to a Gable

Roof on page 101.)
4.

Select a start point for the roof boundary.

Typically you would select an exterior wall
corner. Continue selecting points until the
boundary is defined. (You do not have to
select the start point again because the last
point you pick is always closed back to the
start point.)

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

4

To change the way a lower-story roof is

created:
1.

If you haven't inserted the roof yet, select in

the catalog, then right-click and select
Catalog Manager. In the Catalog Manager
dialog, select Catalog > Element Properties.
If you have already inserted the roof, select
the roof, then right-click and select Properties.

2.

In the Roofs dialog, click the Solution Type

button.

3.

In the Solution Type dialog, click on the

solution you want.

4.

Click OK in the Roofs dialog.

Converting a Hip Roof to a Gable

Roof
1

If the roof you are inserting runs up against any

upper-story walls, the roof will cut around the
walls. You can adjust the roof to avoid saddle
situations, or to ignore the walls. See Changing
the Way a Lower-story Roof is Created on
page 101.

Changing the Way a Lower-story

Roof is Created
By default, a lower-story roof cuts around upperstory walls where it runs up against upper-story
walls. You can adjust the roof to avoid saddle
situations if you want. A saddle situation is one
where rain or snow runs down the roof slope and
collects in areas where the roof meets a wall. You
can also have the roof ignore the upper-story
walls completely.

To convert a hip roof to a gable roof, you need to

select two hip ends, then select the gable roof type
in the roof properties.
To convert a hip roof to a gable roof:
1.

Click on the roof edge of one of the ends you

want to convert. A blue grab handle appears
on the plate line of that hip end. Holding
down your Shift button, click on the plate
line on the opposite side of the roof.

Roof
Edge

Plate
Line

Grab
Handle

Users Guide

101

14

Chapter 14 Roofs
2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Roofs dialog,

click the Hip button in
the Roof Shape area of
the Basic page.

4.

In the Roof Shape dialog, click the Gable

graphic.

5.

Changing the Appearance of

Raked Surfaces Under Gable Ends
If you have created a gable roof, you can change
the appearance of the raked surfaces beneath the
pitched ends of the roof by editing the material
selection for the roofs Gable End component.
To change the appearance of raked surfaces
under gable ends:
1.

Click on a roof edge to select the roof.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Roofs dialog, select the Appearance

tab.

Click OK in the Roofs dialog. The roof is

converted.

Note: When you create a gable roof, the areas

beneath the pitched ends of the roof are filled in
with a surface, such as siding. This surface is not
an actual element it is there for appearance
only. You can change the appearance of the
surface (see Changing the Appearance of Raked
Surfaces Under Gable Ends on page 102), or
extend your exterior walls to meet the pitched
ends of the gable roof (see Extending Walls
Beneath Gable Ends on page 102).

4.

In the Components list, select Gable End.

5.

In the Material area, click the Select button.

6.

In the Materials dialog, select the material

you would like to use, then click OK.

7.

Click OK in the Roofs dialog.

Extending Walls Beneath Gable

Ends
When you create a gable roof, a false surface such
as siding is created beneath the pitched ends of
the gable roof. You can get rid of this false surface
by raking your exterior walls so that they extend
to the roofs pitch.

102

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Creating a Porch Roof

To extend gable end walls to the roof:
1.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Walls dialog, select the Behavior tab.

4.

space (away from the model), then move it

into place later.

Select the wall beneath the gable end. You

can select additional gable end walls using
Shift+click.

To rake the external side of the wall, check

the Exterior Wall Tops to Roof check box. If
you want to offset the wall a specific distance
from the roof surface, enter a value in the
Offset below roof surface edit box.

5.

To rake the internal side of the wall, check the

Interior Wall Tops to Roof check box. If you
want to offset the wall a specific distance
from the roof surface, enter a value in the
Offset below roof surface edit box.

6.

Click OK. The walls are adjusted.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

5.

Click on the roof edge that will be attached to

the wall, or that will be the high side of the
roof. The roof is selected.

6.

Hold down the Shift key, then click on the

plate line at each end of the roof. Blue grab
handles appear on each of the three selected
sides.

Plate
line

Creating a Porch Roof

A typical porch roof is a simple roof having only
one slope. Also known as a shed roof or lean-to
roof, this type of roof can be attached to a wall
face and be completely independent from the
main roof. You create a porch roof by inserting a
hip roof, then converting three sides to gables.
To create a porch roof:
1.

Select Insert > Roofs > Roof by

Picking Points, or click the Roofs
button on the Building toolbar and
select Roof by Picking Points.

2.

In the catalog, select a hip roof to insert.

3.

Select four points to define the outline of the

roof. It may be easier to draw the roof out in

7.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

8.

In the Roofs dialog,

click the Hip button in
the Roof Shape area of
the Basic page.

Users Guide

103

14

Chapter 14 Roofs
9.

In the Roof Shape dialog, click the Gable

graphic.

Modify Elements > Move Whole Element.

Click and drag the roof into position. If you
need to you can adjust the length and width
of the roof by stretching it. Just remember to
select the appropriate edge first.

10. Next you need to turn off the surfaces

displayed beneath the gable ends of the roof.
On the Basic property page, disable the
Display Gable check box in the Parameters
window.

If you want to insert support columns under the

porch roof, see Inserting Columns on page 51.
11. Click OK.

12. Deselect the roof by clicking in the drawing

area.
13. Click on the front edge (low side) of the roof.
14. Right-click and select Properties, or select
Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Selecting a Roof for Editing

A roof can be edited as one unit, or by one or
more of its segments. When you click on a roof
edge, the entire roof becomes selected. This is
indicated by the plate line being highlighted in
green. Youll also notice a small blue grab handle
on the green line. This handle indicates the
currently selected roof segment. In the figure
below, the blue handle on the right side indicates
that the user clicked on the right hip end to select
the roof.
Green line indicates roof is selected

15. If you want to change the elevation of the

roof at this point, select the Support and
Details tab, then edit the value in the
Support Height edit box.
16. On the Support and Details page, enable the
Raked radio button in the Soffit area.
17. Click OK.
18. Now all thats left is to move the roof into
place. With the roof selected, right-click and
select Move Whole Element, or select Edit >

104

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Blue handle
indicates
currently
selected
segment

Stretching a Roof
At this point, general editing tools like Move
Whole Element and Rotate will affect the roof as
a whole, as will editing the roofs Support Height,
Support Type (rafters or trusses), and framing
configuration. However, changes to other roof
properties, such as the roof type, slope, and
overhang distance, affect only the currently
selected roof segment (which is marked by the
blue handle).
You can select additional roof segments by
holding down your Shift key and clicking on a
segments plate line. When you select a segment,
it is marked with a blue handle. If you do select
multiple segments, changes to most roof
properties affect all selected segments.

Stretching a Roof
You can stretch a roof by clicking and dragging
one of its edges. Note that if you stretch your
exterior wall layout, the roof stretches with it,
eliminating the need to stretch the roof separately.
To stretch a roof:
1.

Click on the roof edge you want to stretch.

2.

Hover your pointer over the blue grab

handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to stretch the roof segment,

then release your mouse button.

Rotating a Roof
You can rotate an entire roof about a selected
point using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a roof:
1.

Click on one of the roofs edges to select the

roof.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Hover your pointer over the point you want

to rotate around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the roof, then release

your mouse button.

Editing a Roofs Shape and Size

You can change a roofs shape, slope, overhang
distance, fascia distance, etc. You can specify
different settings for different segments if you
want.
To edit a roofs shape or size:
1.

Click on the roof edge whose properties you

want to edit. You can select additional
segments using Shift+click.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To convert the currently selected segments to

a different roof type, click the graphical

Moving a Roof
To move an entire roof you need to select all roof
segments, then click and drag it to where you
want it. You can do this quickly using the Move
Whole Element tool. Note that if you move your
exterior wall layout, the roof will go with it,
eliminating the need to move it separately.
To move an entire roof:
1.

Click on one of the roofs edges to select the

roof.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element,

or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move
Whole Element.

3.

Click and drag to move the roof, then release

your mouse button.

Users Guide

105

14

Chapter 14 Roofs
button in the Roof Shape area, then select a
roof type in the Roof Shape dialog.

Editing the Height of a Roof

You can raise or lower a roof by editing its
Support Height variable.
To edit the height of a roof:

4.

To edit the general dimensions and geometry

of the roof, edit the values on the Basic page.
These are described below. Note that a gable
roof will have fewer properties.
Thickness. The combined thickness of all
roofing materials, such as shingles and
sheathing.
Slope Type. The method used to measure
the pitch of the roof. Choose from Degrees,
? in 12, 1 in ?, or Percent.
Slope Value. The pitch of the roof measured
using the Slope Type method selected above.
Overhang. The distance from the side wall to
the fascia.

1.

Click on a roof edge to select the roof.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Roofs dialog, select the Support and

Details tab.

4.

Edit the value in the Support Height edit

box.

5.

Click OK.

Editing a Roofs Frame Details

You can choose to frame with rafters or trusses.
You can also select the members you want to use
and edit the precise dimensions of your roofs
framing configuration.
To edit a roofs framing details:
1.

Click on a roof edge to select the roof.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To select a member type for your rafters or

trusses, click the Specify Framing button on
the Basic page. In the Roof Framing dialog,
click Select to select a member from the
catalog, then specify the spacing between the
members in the Member Spacing edit box.
Click OK.

4.

In the Roofs dialog, select the Support and

Details tab.

Overhang Drop. The distance measured vertically from the support point to the underside of the fascia.
Horiz. Distance. The maximum horizontal
distance allowed from the support point the
uppermost point of the underside of the
rafter. This is a calculated result from the
Slope Value and Vert. Distance variables.
Vert. Distance. The maximum vertical distance allowed from the support point to the
uppermost point of the underside of the
rafter.
Fascia Distance. The distance from the
ground to the top edge of the fascia board.
5.

106

Click OK.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Applying a Different Roofing Material

5.

Edit the parameters as desired. They are

described below.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply. You can
find a wide selection of
shingles and tiles in the
Roofing category.

4.

Click anywhere on the

roof surface. The
material is immediately
applied to the entire
roof.

5.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Support Type. Choose Truss or Rafter.

Raised Heel. The portion of the rafter that
rests on the wall plate.
Birds Mouth. The notch cut in the lower end
of a rafter to fit it to the top plate of a wall.
Seat. The horizontal cut that is made when
cutting a bird's mouth in a rafter.
Fascia
Depth. The thickness of the fascia board.
Plumb. The ends of the rafters are cut vertically resulting in a 90
fascia board.
Raked. the ends of the rafters have an angled
cut.

Cutting an Opening
in a Roof

Soffit

Once you have created a roof, you can create a

custom opening in it of virtually any shape and
size using the Cut Opening tool.

Plumb. Creates a flat soffit that is parallel

with the ground.

You create the opening by picking points to define

its outline.

Raked. Creates a soffit that is angled to

match the roof slope.

To insert an opening in a roof:

Gable

1.

Select the roof by clicking on one of its edges.

Type. Choose either Plain, Squared, Full Hip

or Half Hip for the gable return.

2.

Right-click and select Cut Opening, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Cut Opening.

Horizontal. The horizontal distance of the

return when looking at the gable end face on.

3.

Select a start point for the opening.

4.

Continue selecting points to define the

opening. As you select points, the opening is
created. The last point picked is always
connected back to the start point to form a
closed shape, so you dont have to select the
start point again.

5.

When you have selected your final point,

right-click and select Finish.

Depth. The depth of the return.

6.

Once you have set your properties, click OK.

Applying a Different Roofing

Material
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly
apply different shingles or tiles to a roof.
To apply a different material to a roof:
1.

Display your model in 3D view and make

sure the roof is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

Removing Roof Openings

You can remove an opening from a roof using the
Remove Opening tool.
Note: You cannot use Delete to remove a roof
opening.
To remove a roof opening:
1.

Click on one of the openings edges.

Users Guide

107

14

Chapter 14 Roofs
2.

Right-click and select Remove Opening, or

select Edit > Modify Elements > Remove
Opening. The opening is removed instantly.

Deleting a Roof
You can delete a roof in a couple of easy steps.

To create a dormer:
1.

In the building locations drop box, select the

location containing the roof you want to add
the dormer to.

2.

Select Insert > Roofs > Dormer Roof,

or click the Roofs button on the
Building toolbar and select Dormer
Roof.

3.

In the Dormers dialog, specify the desired

width for the dormer in the Dormer Width
edit box.

4.

Click the Dormer Roof button, then select

the desired roof type for the dormer. By
default, the roof will have a gable front,
regardless of the roof type. If you do not
want it to have a gable front, uncheck the
Gable Front check box.

5.

If you want your dormer to have walls, check

the Include Walls check box. Then, click the
Dormer Wall button and select the desired
wall type from the catalog. If you do not
want your dormer to have walls, disable the
Include Walls check box.

To delete a roof:
1.

Click on one of the roofs edges to select the

roof.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Inserting Dormers
A dormer is a small structure that projects from a
roof slope. Dormers are often used to extend the
usable floor area of a second story that is under a
moderate to steeply pitched roof. They can be
quite effective in opening up cramped rooms
under the roof. A typical dormer consists of a roof
and three walls. One of the most common dormer
types is the gable dormer, characterized by the
front gable in the roof.

You can also create a dormer without walls. In

this case the dormer roof sits on top of the main
roof. Its purpose is usually to add character to an
otherwise plain roof or to make your roof design
more complex. For example, you can insert a
dormer roof on your main roof and stretch it to
create a porch roof or gable extension.
Dormers are easy to insert - just point and click.
You can control the dormers width, roof type,
wall type, and wall height.

108

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Note that dormer walls extend only to the

surface of the main roof. As well, an opening
is cut in the main roof surface to open the
dormer up to the space below.
6.

In the Support height above main roof edit

box, type the height of the dormers front
wall, not including the raked portion
between the two roof slopes. You can use this
option even if you are not inserting walls to
control the position of the bottom of the
dormer roof.

Moving a Dormer Roof

7.

Click OK. The dormers wall footprint is

attached to your cursor.

4.

8.

Position the dormer where you want it, then

click to insert it. In most cases you would
place the front dormer wall directly on top of
the exterior wall.

Note: If the dormer has walls, you need to move

the walls separately. To move the dormer walls,
click on one wall, Shift+click to select the
remaining walls, right-click and select Move, then
click and drag the walls into place.

When the dormer roof is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

Stretching a Dormer Roof

You can stretch the front or sides a dormer roof by
clicking and dragging the appropriate roof edge.
To stretch a dormer roof:
1.

Click on the roof edge you want to stretch. A

blue grab handle appears on the footprint
line of the selected roof edge.

2.

Position your pointer over the grab

handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to stretch the roof, then

release your mouse button.

Note: If your dormer has walls, the dormer roof

will not adjust if you stretch the dormer walls.

Deleting a Dormer
9.

Right-click and select Finish.

Note: If you cant seem to insert the dormer, it

means that the dormer is too large for the surface
you are inserting it on. You may want to try
decreasing the wall height before inserting it.

Moving a Dormer Roof

You can use the Move Whole Element tool to
move a dormer roof to another spot on your roof.
To move a dormer roof:
1.

Click on the edge of the dormer roof to select

it.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element,

or select Edit > Modify Element > Move
Whole Element.

3.

Click anywhere on the screen, then drag to

move the dormer roof.

You can delete a dormer roof in a couple of easy

steps. If the dormer has walls, they need to be
deleted separately.
To delete a dormer:
1.

Click on the edge of the dormer roof to select

it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Element > Delete.

3.

If the dormer has walls, select one of the

walls, then Shift+click to select the remaining
walls. Use the Delete tool to delete the
selected walls.

Inserting Skylights
You can insert a skylight in your roof with pointand-click simplicity. The catalog contains a long
list of skylights in a variety of sizes.

Users Guide

109

14

Chapter 14 Roofs
To insert a skylight:
1.

Select Insert > Roofs > Skylights, or

click the Roofs button on the Building
toolbar and select Skylights.

2.

In the catalog, select

the skylight you
want to insert.

3.

Position the skylight

on the roof.

4.

Click to insert the

skylight.

5.

Right-click and select

Finish.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Moving a Skylight
You can move a skylight by clicking and dragging
it.

3.

To move a skylight:
1.

Click on the skylight to select it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the skylight to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Edit the properties in the Properties window.

Height. The overall height of the skylight
window opening.
Width. The overall width of the skylight
window opening.
Frame Depth. The depth of the window
frame.
Frame Width. The thickness of the window
frame.

Rotating a Skylight

Frame Offset. The offset of the window

frame from the roof surface.

You can rotate a skylight using the Rotate tool.

1.

Click on the skylight to select it.

Sash Offset. The distance the sash sits back

in the window frame. The sash is the frame
that holds the glass.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

Sash Depth. The thickness of the sash in

plan view.

3.

Hover your pointer over the point you want

to rotate around.

Sash Width. The width of the sash in

elevation.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the skylight, then

release your mouse button.

To rotate a skylight:

Editing the Properties of a Skylight

Skylight properties include height and width, as
well as dimensions for the frame and sash.
To edit the properties of a skylight:
1.

110

Click on the skylight to select it.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

4.

Once youve set your properties, click OK.

Deleting a Skylight
You can delete a skylight in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a skylight:
1.

Select the skylight.

Deleting a Skylight
2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Users Guide

111

14

Kitchen Builder Wizard

page 115

Cabinets

page 119

Appliances

page 123

Furniture, Electronics & Accessories

page 127

Equipment

page 131

&

The structural elements of your home are built now its time to start designing the interior. One
of the best places to start is the kitchen, since it is generally the room thats used the most in a
house.
Design Suite Deluxes Kitchen Builder Wizard creates a kitchen for you in a few easy steps. All you
have to do is select the general shape and layout you want. Then, just point and click to insert all
of your cupboards and appliances in one shot. It couldnt be easier!
Once youve inserted the kitchen you can move things around and edit individual elements to
create a look thats customized to your taste and needs.

115

Chapter 15 Kitchen Builder Wizard

Creating a Kitchen with the

Kitchen Builder Wizard
Using the Kitchen Builder Wizard you can
quickly create a kitchen layout that includes
upper and lower cabinets, a sink, refrigerator and
stove. There are a number of layouts and styles to
choose from.

3.

Click on the general style of kitchen you

want L-Shape, Galley or U-Shape.

4.

Click Next.

5.

Select the layout that most closely resembles

the layout you want. Remember that you can
move and edit things later.

6.

Click Next.

7.

Select a general style for your kitchen. The

selection you make mainly determines the
materials and colors used for the cupboards
and countertops.

To create a kitchen with the Kitchen Builder

Wizard:
1.

2.

116

Select Tools > Design Wizards > Kitchen

Builder.

Click Next.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Launching the Kitchen Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup

8.

Click Next.

are displayed to show you the size of the

layout.
13. If you want you can stretch the layout by
simply moving your pointer in the direction
you want to stretch.
14. Once the dimensions are correct, click to
finish the insertion.

15. Click Yes to finish the task. If you click No

you can reposition and reinsert the kitchen.
Tip: You can create your own custom
configuration that can saved for use in any
project. See Creating a Custom Kitchen Builder
Wizard Configuration on page 117.
9.

Select the desired rotation for the kitchen

layout by clicking the appropriate graphic.
This is how it will be attached to your cursor
prior to insertion.

10. Click Next.

Launching the Kitchen Builder

Wizard Automatically at Startup
If you want you can choose to launch the Kitchen
Builder Wizard automatically every time you
start a new project.
To launch the Kitchen Builder Wizard
automatically at startup:

11. Click Finish. The kitchen configuration is

attached to your cursor.
12. Position the kitchen layout in your kitchen
area. It will automatically snap to the walls
when you get close to them. Click to anchor
the kitchen elements. Dynamic dimensions

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

In the Startup area, check the Launch wizard

when starting new project check box.

4.

Select Kitchen Builder from the adjacent

drop box.

5.

Click OK.

Creating a Custom Kitchen Builder

Wizard Configuration
A Kitchen Builder Wizard configuration
determines what types of cabinets and appliances
are used in your kitchen. You are asked to select a
configuration for your kitchen when you run the
Kitchen Builder Wizard.

Users Guide

117

15

Chapter 15 Kitchen Builder Wizard

You can edit any of the existing configurations
that are available in the Kitchen Builder Wizard,
or create your own. Customized configurations
are saved automatically and will be available
when you run the Kitchen Builder Wizard in the
current project, or any other project.

3.

Click the Select button.

4.

In the catalog dialog, select the specific style

you want to apply to the selected element
type, then click OK.

5.

Continue selecting styles for the remaining

element types.

To access the kitchen configuration library:

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click any element in the catalog
panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager dialog, select

Libraries > Kitchen Configuration.

To add a new configuration to the list:

1.

2.

Click the Add Item button below the

left pane, or right-click in the left pane
and select Add Item. An entry is added
to the list.
Type a name for the configuration, then press
ENTER.

To edit a kitchen configuration:

1.

Select the configuration in the list. The

element selections for the configuration are
listed in the center pane.

2.

In the center pane, select an element type you

want to specify a style for.

118

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To delete a configuration from the list:

1.

Select the configuration in the list.

2.

Click the Delete button below the left pane,

or right-click in the left pane and select
Delete.

" '
Cabinets are essential for storage and can also contribute to the overall look and feel of a room.
The catalog contains a huge selection of cabinet types, styles and sizes, all customizable to suit
your taste and needs.
Cabinet types include base cabinets, corner cabinets, upper cabinets, islands, pantry cabinets and
bathroom vanities.
You can insert cabinets in any room in your house with just a click of your mouse. Cabinets are
designed to snap to walls and other cabinets, making insertion even easier.

Cabinets

119

Chapter 16 Cabinets

Inserting Cabinets

3.

Click and drag to rotate the cabinet.

You can insert a wide variety of cabinets in your

design by simply pointing and clicking with your
mouse. Cabinets automatically snap to walls and
other elements when you get close to them
provided Collision Control is turned on.

4.

When the cabinet is at the desired rotation,

release your mouse button.

To insert a cabinet:

Raising or Lowering a Cabinet

You can raise or lower a cabinet using the Elevate
tool on the cabinets right-click menu.

Select Insert > Interiors > Cabinets,

or click the Cabinets button on the
Interiors toolbar.

To edit a cabinets elevation:

1.

Select the cabinet whose elevation you want

to edit.

2.

In the catalog, select the

cabinet you want to
insert.

2.

3.

Position the cabinet

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate. The value
shown in the Elevate dialog is the current
elevation of the cabinet.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the bottom of the cabinet above
the floor.

4.

Click OK.

1.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Moving Cabinets
You can move individual or
multiple cabinets by clicking and dragging them.
To move cabinets:
1.

Select the cabinet you want to move. If you

want to move multiple cabinets, use
Shift+click to select the additional cabinets.

2.

Hover your pointer over the cabinets

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the cabinet.

4.

When the cabinet is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

Rotating Cabinets
You can rotate cabinets by clicking and dragging
them.
To rotate a cabinet:
1.

Select the cabinet you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

120

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Tip: You can also change a cabinets elevation by

changing the Distance above current location
or terrain variable on the cabinets Behavior
property page.

Editing Cabinet Properties

Cabinet properties include cabinet type, size, and
leaf style, as well as settings for the counter,
shelves, toe space and hardware.
To edit cabinet properties:
1.

Select the cabinet whose properties you want

to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To change the cabinet type or dimensions,

select the Basic tab. Cabinet types include
Base, Upper and Pantry. Cabinet styles and
size properties will vary depending on the
cabinet type selected. Use the graphics as
guides when determining the cabinets
properties. Clicking a dimension marked
with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.)

Editing Cabinet Properties

highlights the corresponding dimension in
the cabinet graphic, and vice versa.

4.

To change the cabinets leaf style, select the

Leaf tab.

5.

To edit the counter, shelving, toe space or

hardware details, select the Details tab.

Show Counter. Displays a counter on the

cabinet.
Thickness. The thickness of the counter
material.
Show Backsplash. Displays a backsplash on
the cabinet. The backsplash is a vertical surface designed to protect the wall behind a
countertop.
Thickness. The thickness of the backsplash
material.
Height. The distance from the countertop to
the top of the backsplash.
Show Nosing. Displays nosing (moulded
projection) on the front edge of the counter.
Thickness. The depth of the nosing.
Height. The height of the nosing.

To select a leaf style for the door, select Door

from the Apply to drop box, then make your
selections. To select a leaf style for the drawers, if applicable, select Drawer from the
Apply to drop box.
Leaf properties vary depending on the leaf
style selected. Use the graphics as guides
when setting these properties.

Radius. The radius of the curve.

Show Shelves. Displays shelves inside the
cabinet. The shelves would be visible if the
cabinet door is glass.
Number of Shelves. The number of shelves
you would like to display inside the cabinet.
Show Toe Space. Causes the bottom of the
cabinet to recess so you can stand close to the
cabinet without contacting it with your toes.
Toe Depth. The depth of the recess.
Users Guide

121

16

Chapter 16 Cabinets
Toe Height. The height of the recess.

Inserting a Sink into a Cabinet

Show Handle. Displays handles on the cabinet door and drawers, if present.

You can insert a kitchen or bathroom sink into a

cabinet that you have inserted in your drawing by
simply pointing and clicking. The sink
automatically snaps itself into place at the center
of the cabinet top.

Handle Style. Choose from Box, Circle or

Cylinder. A box style creates a rectangular
handle. A circle style creates a round knob.
The cylinder style creates a cylindrical handle.
Distance a. For pantry cabinets, this is the
distance from the bottom of the upper cabinet portion to the top of the door handle.
Distance b. The distance from the bottom of
the cabinet to the top of the door handle.
6.

1.

Select Insert > Interiors > Plumbing

Fixtures, or click the Plumbing
Fixtures button on the Interiors
toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the

Sinks category, then
select the sink you want
to insert.

3.

Position the fixture inside

the cabinet, then click to
insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

When youre finished editing properties,

click OK.

Applying Different Finishes to

Cabinets
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly
apply a different finish to a cabinet, such as a
different type of wood, or another type of
material altogether.
To apply a different finish to a cabinet:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

cabinet is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply.

4.

Click on the cabinet

component you want to
apply the material to.
Materials are applied
separately to the
individual parts of the
cabinet (frame, door,
counter, handles, etc.).

5.

When you are finished

applying materials,
right-click and select
Finish.

122

To insert a sink into a cabinet:

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Deleting a Cabinet
You can delete a cabinet in a
couple of easy steps.
To delete a cabinet:
1.

Select the cabinet.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

(
Most home plans usually show the location of appliances in the kitchen and laundry room.
Inserting appliances in your project can obviously enhance the design of a room, and can also
help identify where electrical outlets are needed.
The Design Suite Deluxe catalog offers an excellent selection of kitchen and laundry appliances,
including refrigerators, dishwashers, ovens, ranges, washers, dryers even toasters. And of
course, just like everything else, you can customize appliances to create the exact look you want.
Inserting appliances is easy just point and click. Most major appliances are set to snap to walls
and other elements when you get close to them.

Appliances

123

Chapter 17 Appliances

Inserting Appliances

Rotating Appliances

You can insert a wide variety of kitchen and

laundry appliances in your design by simply
pointing and clicking with your mouse.
Appliances automatically snap to walls and other
elements when you get close to them provided
Collision Control is turned on.

You can rotate appliances by clicking and

dragging them.
To rotate an appliance:
1.

Select the appliance you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the appliance.

4.

When the appliance is at the desired rotation,

release your mouse button.

To insert an appliance:
1.

Select Insert > Interiors >

Appliances, or click the Appliances
button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the

appliance you want to
insert.

3.

Position the appliance

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Note: If you are inserting a

built-in oven, just position it
where you want it in the wall
and it will snap into place correctly with only the
oven door and controls protruding from the wall.

Raising or Lowering an Appliance

You can raise or lower an appliance using the
Elevate tool on the elements right-click menu.
For example, you might want to place a
microwave on the kitchen counter.
To raise or lower an appliance:
1.

Select the appliance whose elevation you

want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate. The value in
the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of
the appliance.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the bottom of the appliance
above the floor.

To move an appliance:

4.

Click OK.

1.

Select the appliance you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the

appliances center grab handle to
display the Move cursor.

Tip: You can also change an appliances elevation

by changing the Distance above current
location or terrain variable on the appliances
Behavior property page.

Moving Appliances
You can move individual appliances by clicking
and dragging them.

3.

Click and drag to move the appliance.

4.

When the appliance is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

Editing Appliance Size Properties

You can edit the height, width and depth of most
appliances. Some appliances have additional
properties that define their size and style.
To edit appliance properties:
1.

124

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Select the appliance whose properties you

want to edit.

Applying a Different Color or Finish to Appliances

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To change the size or style of the appliance,

select the Basic tab. Appliance styles and size
properties will vary depending on the
appliance. Use the graphics as guides when
determining the appliances properties.
Clicking a dimension marked with an
alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights
the corresponding dimension in the
appliance graphic, and vice versa.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the color or finish
you want to apply. You
can find an assortment
of colors in the Paint
category. For the
stainless steel look you
may want to try the
Silver material in the
Finishes category.

4.

Click on the appliance

component you want to
apply the material to.
Materials are applied
separately to the individual parts of the
appliance. For example, you can select a
different color just for a knob or handle.

5.

When you are finished applying materials,

right-click and select Finish.

Deleting an Appliance
You can delete an appliance in a couple of easy
steps.
To delete an appliance:

4.

Once youve specified the properties, click

OK.

1.

Select the appliance.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Applying a Different Color or

Finish to Appliances
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly
change the color or finish of an appliance.
To apply a color or finish to an appliance:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

appliance is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

Users Guide

125

17

(
Once youve got your cabinets and appliances in place, you can start with furnishing and
decorating your home. The catalog contains so many different types of furniture, electronics and
decorative accessories, the possibilities are endless. And with easy, point-and-click insertion, you
can play around with different design ideas and quickly decorate every room of your home, just
the way you want it.

Electronics

Furniture

Accessories

127

Chapter 18 Furniture, Electronics & Accessories

Inserting Interior Furniture

The catalog contains a variety of furnishings for
every room in your home everything from
beds to CD stands. Furnishings automatically
snap to walls and other elements when you get
close to them provided Collision Control is
turned on.
To insert furniture:
1.

2.

Select Insert > Interiors > Interior

Furniture, or click the Interior
Furniture button on the Interiors
toolbar.
In the catalog, select the
element you want to
insert.

3.

Position the element

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

medicine cabinets, plates, bowls, cups, mirrors

and pictures.
To insert accessories:
1.

Select Insert > Interiors > Interior

Accessories, or click the Interior
Accessories button on the Interiors
toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the

element you want to
insert.

3.

Position the element

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Moving Furnishing
Elements
You can move furniture, electronics and
accessories by clicking and dragging them.

Inserting Electronics

To move an element:

Electronics include televisions, computers, clocks

and telephones.

1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the elements

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

To insert electronics:
1.

Select Insert > Interiors >

Electronics, or click the Electronics
button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the

element you want to
insert.

3.

Position the element

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Inserting Interior
Accessories
Accessories are those small, personal touches that
really pull a room together. They are things like
curtains, blinds, towel racks, shower curtains,

128

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Rotating Furnishing Elements

You can rotate furniture, electronics and
accessories by clicking and dragging them.
To rotate an element:
1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

4.

When the element is at the desired rotation,

release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering a Furnishing Element

Raising or Lowering a Furnishing

Element

3.

To change the dimensions of the element,

select the Basic tab. Size properties will vary
depending on the element.

4.

Once youve specified the properties, click

OK.

You can raise or lower furniture, electronics and

accessories using the Elevate tool on the elements
right-click menu. For example, you might want to
adjust the height of a picture on the wall.
To edit the elevation of a furnishing element:
1.

Select the element whose elevation you want

to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate. The value
shown in the Elevate dialog is the current
elevation of the element.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the bottom of the element above
the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: You can also change a furnishing elements

elevation by changing the Distance above
current location or terrain variable on the
elements Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of Furnishing

Elements
You can edit the height, width and depth of most
furnishing elements. Some elements have
additional properties that define their size and
style.
To edit the size of furnishing elements:
1.

Select the element whose properties you

want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Applying Different Colors, Fabrics

and Finishes to Furnishing
Elements
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly
apply a color, fabric or finish to any furnishing
element.
To apply a material to a furnishing element:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

furnishing element is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

Users Guide

129

18

Chapter 18 Furniture, Electronics & Accessories

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the color or
material you want to
apply. You can find an
assortment of colors in
the Paint category.

4.

Click on the component

you want to apply the
material to. Materials are
applied separately to the
individual parts of the
element. For example,
you can apply a specific
fabric to the bedspread
on a bed.

5.

When you are finished applying materials,

right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Furnishing Elements

You can delete furniture, electronics or accessories
in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a furnishing element:
1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

130

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

)
Design Suite Deluxe offers a variety of elements that can make your home more functional and
enjoyable, such as exercise equipment, satellite dishes, and garbage disposal equipment. All can
be inserted with a simple mouse click.

Equipment

131

Chapter 19 Equipment

Inserting Equipment

Raising or Lowering Equipment

The catalog contains a wide range of functional

equipment, including exercise equipment, central
vac units, utility boxes and meters, satellite
dishes, and garbage disposal units.

You can raise or lower equipment to suit your

needs.

To insert equipment:
1.

Select Insert > Interiors >

Equipment, or click the Equipment
button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the

element you want to insert.

3.

Position the element where

you want it, then click to
insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Moving Equipment
You can move equipment by
clicking and dragging it.
To move equipment:

To edit the elevation of an element:

1.

Select the element whose elevation you want

to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate. The value
shown in the Elevate dialog is the current
elevation of the element.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the bottom of the element above
the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: You can also change an equipment elements

elevation by changing the Distance above
current location or terrain variable on the
elements Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of Equipment

You can edit the height, width and depth of most
equipment elements.

1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the elements

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

To edit the size of equipment elements:

1.

3.

Select the element whose properties you

want to edit.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Rotating Equipment
You can rotate equipment by clicking and
dragging it while in rotation mode.
To rotate an element:
1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

4.

When the element is at the desired rotation,

release your mouse button.

132

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Applying Different Colors or Materials to Elements

3.

To change the dimensions of the element,

select the Basic tab.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the color or
material you want to
apply. You can find an
assortment of colors in
the Paint category.

4.

Click on the component

you want to apply the
material to. Materials are
applied separately to the
individual parts of the
element.

5.

When you are finished

applying materials, rightclick and select Finish.

Deleting Equipment
4.

Once youve specified the properties, click

OK.

Applying Different Colors or

Materials to Elements
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly
apply a different color or finish to any element.

You can delete an element in a couple of easy

steps.
To delete an element:
1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

To apply a material to an element:

1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

element is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

Users Guide

133

19

Interior Lighting

page 137

Electrical

page 143

Plumbing

page 149

HVAC

page 153

&

Interior lighting can drastically change the look and atmosphere of a room. Light fixtures also
play an important part when you create interior 3DTrueView renderings. Design Suite Deluxe
provides an excellent selection of ceiling lights, wall lights, track lights, recessed lights and lamps
for you to insert. You can even turn them on and off!
Lights are inserted at a logical height in your plan depending on their type, making accurate
placement easy. Also, ceiling lights snap to ceilings, and wall lights snap to walls. Just point and
click!
If working in Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode, real-time lighting effects are
displayed as you insert light fixtures in your design, allowing you to see how much light will be
produced.

Interior Lighting

137

Chapter 20 Interior Lighting

Inserting Interior Light Fixtures

Design Suite Deluxe offers a good selection of
lighting fixtures for the interior of your home.
Interior light fixtures include ceiling lights, wall
lights, track lighting, recessed lights, and lamps.

them anywhere in a room. You can change a light

fixtures snap setting on the fixtures Behavior
property page.
To change the way a light snaps on insertion:
1.

In the catalog, select the light fixture whose

snap setting you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Catalog Manager. You

can also access the Catalog Manager by
selecting File > Catalogs > Catalog
Manager.

3.

In the Catalog Manager dialog, make sure

the correct fixture is selected, then select
Catalog > Element Properties.

4.

In the Lights dialog, select the Behavior tab.

Note: If you want to insert exterior light fixtures,

use the Exterior Lighting tool.

5.

From the Snap Light to drop box, select

either Ceiling, Wall or None.

To insert a light fixture:

6.

Click OK in the Lights dialog.

7.

Click OK.

Each lighting fixture has a light source in its

property definition, such as an incandescent light
bulb. Lights are particularly important if you plan
to create a 3DTrueView of your model, since the
program uses light to calculate and create the
rendered view.
With the exception of lamps, light fixtures are set
to snap to either ceilings or walls depending on
what kind of fixture they are.

1.

Select Insert > Interiors > Interior

Lighting, or click the Interior Lighting
button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the

light fixture you want to
insert.

3.

Position the light where

you want it, then click to
insert it. If you want the
light to snap to a ceiling or
wall and it isnt, or you
want to stop the light from
snapping, see Changing the
Way a Light Snaps on
Insertion below.

4.

You can raise or lower a light fixture using the

Elevate tool on the fixtures right-click menu.
To raise or lower a light fixture:
1.

Select the fixture whose elevation you want

to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate. The value
shown in the Elevate dialog is the current
elevation of the light fixture.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the fixture above the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Right-click and select Finish.

Tip: If you switch to Rendered or Rendered

Outline display mode, you can see instant
lighting effects as you position and insert light
fixtures.

Changing the Way a Light Snaps

on Insertion
By default, ceiling lights are set to snap to
ceilings, and wall lights are set to snap to walls.
Lamps have no snap setting so that you can place

138

Raising or Lowering a Light

Fixture

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Tip: You can also change a light fixtures elevation

by changing the Distance above current
location or terrain variable on the fixtures
Behavior property page.

Moving Light Fixtures

Moving Light Fixtures

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select the Basic tab. Size properties will vary

depending on the type of fixture. Use the
diagram as a guide when determining the
fixtures properties. Clicking a dimension
marked with an alphabetical character (a, b,
c, etc.) highlights the corresponding
dimension in the light fixture diagram, and
vice versa.

4.

Click OK.

You can move light fixtures by clicking and

dragging them.
To move a light fixture:
1.

Select the light fixture you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the fixtures

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the light fixture.

4.

When the light fixture is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

Rotating Light Fixtures

You can rotate light fixtures by clicking and
dragging them.
To rotate a light fixture:
1.

Select the light fixture you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the light fixture.

4.

When the light fixture is at the desired

rotation, release your mouse button.

Editing the Size of Light Fixtures

You can edit the dimensions of a light fixture on
its Basic property page.
To edit the size of a light fixture:
1.

Select the light fixture whose properties you

want to edit.

Editing a Light Fixtures Light

Source
A light source is usually a type of light bulb. You
can edit a light fixtures light source to achieve a
different lighting effect.
To edit a light fixtures light source:
1.

Select the light fixture whose properties you

want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Users Guide

139

20

Chapter 20 Interior Lighting

3.

Select the Lights tab.

Selecting Middle positions the light in the

center of the fixture, and selecting Minimum
or Maximum positions it on the left or right
side. If you select Custom you can enter a
specific value in the adjacent edit box which
is relative to the center position. For example,
entering -3 moves the light source 3 left
from the center. Changing the Y value moves
the light source forward or backward.
Selecting Minimum brings the light source all
the way forward, and selecting Maximum
moves it to the back of the fixture. Changing
the Z value moves the light source up or
down. Selecting Minimum positions the light
source at the bottom of the fixture, while
selecting Maximum positions it at the top of
the fixture.
7.

4.

To replace the currently selected light source

with another type, click Edit, then select a
light source from the Light Sources dialog.
To add a light source to the fixture, click Add,
then select a light source from the Light
Sources dialog.

Once youve specified the properties, click

OK.

Turning a Light On or Off

By default, lights are on when you insert them.
You can virtually turn a light off by disabling its
light source.
To turn a light on or off:
1.

Select the light fixture you want to turn on or

off.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select the Lights tab.

eye icon

5.

To delete a light source from the light fixture,

click Delete.

6.

To edit the position of the light source in

relation to the light fixture, specify the X, Y
and Z coordinates in the Light Position area.
Coordinates are measured from the bottom
center of the fixture. The small red box in the
preview window indicates the current
position of the light source. Changing the X
value moves the light source left or right.

140

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Changing the Look of a Light Fixture

4.

To turn the light on or off, click the eye icon

next to the light source name.

5.

Click OK.

Changing the Look of a Light

Fixture
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply
different colors or materials to different parts of a
light fixture. For example, you may want to
change the color of a lamp shade.
To change the look of a light fixture:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

light fixture is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply.

4.

Click on the component

you want to apply the
material to. Materials
are applied separately
to the individual parts
of the light fixture.

5.

When you are finished

applying materials,
right-click and select
Finish.

Deleting Light Fixtures

You can delete a light fixture in a couple of easy
steps.
To delete a light fixture:
1.

Select the fixture.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Users Guide

141

20

Design Suite Deluxe makes it easy to insert electrical outlets, switches, thermostats and smoke
detectors in your plan just point and click. Electrical elements automatically snap to walls and
are inserted at a logical height depending on their type, making it easy to place them accurately.
Once youve inserted electrical elements you may want to draw wiring in your 2D plan. All it
takes is a few clicks of the mouse.

143

Chapter 21 Electrical

Inserting Outlets and Switches

You can insert electrical outlets and light switches
in your plan with a single mouse click. The backs
of these elements automatically snap to walls and
are inserted at a logical height on the wall,
making accurate placement effortless. You can
move, raise and lower these elements after you
have inserted them.

button on the Interiors toolbar and select

Electrical Elements.

2.

In the catalog, select the

Sensors and Controls
category, then select the
element you want to
insert.

3.

Position the element

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To insert outlets and switches:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Select Insert > Interiors > Electrical >

Electrical Elements, or click the Electrical
button on the Interiors toolbar and select
Electrical Elements.

In the catalog, select the

element you want to
insert.
Position the element
where you want it, then
click to insert it.
Right-click and select
Finish.

Inserting Thermostats and Smoke

Detectors
To insert a thermostat or smoke detector, all you
need to do is point and click. Thermostats are set
to automatically snap to walls and are inserted at
a default height of 5. Smoke detectors insert a
default height of 8. You can move, raise or lower
thermostats and smoke detectors after you have
inserted them.
To insert thermostats and smoke detectors:
1.

144

Select Insert > Interiors > Electrical >

Electrical Elements, or click the Electrical

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Raising or Lowering an Electrical

Element
You can raise or lower an outlet, switch,
thermostat or smoke detector using the Elevate
tool.
To raise or lower an electrical element:
1.

Select the element whose elevation you want

to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate. The value
shown in the Elevate dialog is the current
elevation of the element.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the bottom of the element above
the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: You can also change an elements elevation

by changing the Distance above current
location or terrain variable on the elements
Behavior property page.

Moving an Electrical Element

Moving an Electrical Element

You can move outlets, switches, thermostats and
smoke detectors in plan view by simply clicking
and dragging them.
To move an element:
1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the elements

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

Applying a Different Color or

Material to an Electrical Element
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a
different color or material to an electrical element.
To apply a color or material to an electrical
element:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

electrical element is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the color or
material you want to
apply. You can find an
assortment of colors in
the Paint category.

4.

Click on the electrical

element. The color or
material is applied
immediately.
Right-click and select
Finish.

Editing the Size of an Electrical

Element
You can edit the height, width and depth of most
electrical elements. Some elements have
additional dimensions for individual components
in the element.
To edit the size of an electrical element:
1.

Select the element whose size you want to

edit.

5.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Deleting Electrical
Elements
You can delete an outlet, switch, thermostat or
smoke detector in a couple of easy steps.
To delete an electrical element:

3.

Edit the properties as desired.

4.

Click OK.

1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Users Guide

145

21

Chapter 21 Electrical

Inserting Electrical Wiring

Once youve inserted electrical elements, you can
use the Wiring tool to indicate the location of
electrical wiring in your 2D plan. By default,
wiring lines have arched segments and use a
dashed linestyle. You can stretch and reshape
individual segments after youve inserted the
line. You can also edit the linestyle. Wiring is only
visible in 2D plan view.
To add electrical wiring:
1.

Select Insert > Interiors > Electrical >

Wiring, or click the Electrical button on the
Interiors toolbar and select Wiring.

2.

Select a start point for the wiring line.

3.

Select the next point for the wiring line. An

arched line segment is created between the
two points.

4.

Continue selecting points to add more

segments.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

You can stretch individual segments in a wiring

line by clicking and dragging their grab handles.
Stretching wiring segments can change their
length or shape.
To stretch a wiring segment:
1.

Select the segment you want to stretch. Grab

handles are displayed along the segment.

2.

Hover your pointer over the grab handle you

want to grab and stretch.

3.

Click and drag to stretch the line, then release

your mouse button.

Changing the Line Style of Wiring

4

Note: You can change the line style of individual

wires if you want. See Changing the Line Style of
Wiring on page 146. You can also mark your
wiring lines with text. See Adding Text to Your
Drawing on page 290.

146

Stretching and Reshaping Wiring

Segments

By default, electrical wiring is displayed using the

Electrical Power Distribution line style, which is a
brown, dashed line. You can select a different line
style for selected wiring segments if you want.
For example, you may want to select the
Telephone line style for your telephone lines.
To change the line style of wiring:
1.

Select one of the line segments you want to

change. Use Shift+click to select the
remaining segments in the line.

Deleting Wiring
2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Line Styles dialog, select the line style

you want to use.
If you want to edit a line style, click one of
the swatches to access the Edit Line Styles
dialog. To add a new line style to the list,
select Line Style > Add Line Style. For more
information, see the Line Styles chapter
page 397.

4.

Click OK. The line style is updated in your

drawing.

Deleting Wiring
You can delete individual wiring segments or an
entire wire in a couple of easy steps.
To delete wiring:
1.

Select the wiring segment you want to delete.

To select an entire wire, drag a selection
window around it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Users Guide

147

21

'

Design Suite Deluxe offers a complete selection of sinks, faucets, tubs, showers, toilets and bidets
to help you properly equip your home. Plumbing fixtures are inserted with a single mouse click
and will automatically snap to walls if Collision Control is turned on. You can control which edge
of a fixture snaps to the wall, as well as edit the fixtures size, style and elevation.

Plumbing

149

Chapter 22 Plumbing

Inserting Plumbing Fixtures

4.

Placing plumbing fixtures in your plan is easy

just select what you want to insert, then point and
click. With Collision Control turned on, fixtures
will automatically snap to walls when you get
close to them. Also, fixtures will insert at a logical
height. For example, a toilet will insert on the
floor, while a sink may insert 3 off the floor. You
can edit a fixtures size and elevation, as well as
move and rotate it.

Tip: You can also change a plumbing fixtures

elevation by changing the Distance above
current location or terrain variable on the
fixtures Behavior property page.

Note: The first four sinks in the Sinks category

(kitchen and bathroom sinks) can only be inserted
into a cabinet. Also, the cabinet must be large
enough to house the sink.

To move a plumbing fixture:

Moving Plumbing Fixtures

You can move plumbing fixtures by clicking and
dragging them.

1.

Select the plumbing fixture you want to

move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the fixtures

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the fixture.

4.

When the fixture is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

To insert plumbing fixtures:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Select Insert > Interiors > Plumbing

Fixtures, or click the Plumbing
Fixtures button on the Interiors
toolbar.
In the catalog, select the
fixture you want to
insert.
Position the fixture where
you want it, then click to
insert it.
Right-click and select
Finish.

Raising or Lowering a Plumbing

Fixture
You can raise or lower a plumbing fixture using
the Elevate tool on the fixtures right-click menu.
To edit a plumbing fixtures elevation:
1.

Select the fixture whose elevation you want

to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate. The value
shown in the Elevate dialog is the current
elevation of the element.

3.

150

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the bottom of the fixture above
the floor.
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Click OK.

Rotating Plumbing Fixtures

You can rotate plumbing fixtures by clicking and
dragging them.
To rotate a plumbing fixture:
1.

Select the fixture you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the fixture.

4.

When the fixture is at the desired rotation,

release your mouse button.

Editing the Size of a Plumbing

Fixture
You can edit the height, width and depth of a
plumbing fixture.
To edit the properties of a plumbing fixture:
1.

Select the plumbing fixture whose properties

you want to edit.

Applying a Different Color or Finish to Plumbing Fixtures

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the properties as desired.

4.

Click OK.

Applying a Different Color or

Finish to Plumbing Fixtures
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply
different colors or finishes to different parts of a
plumbing fixture.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the color or finish
you want to apply. You
can find an assortment
of colors in the Paint
category.

4.

Click on the component

you want to apply the
material to. Materials
are applied separately
to the individual parts
of the plumbing fixture.
For example, you can
select a different color
just for a tap or handle.

5.

When you are finished applying materials,

right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Plumbing Fixtures

You can delete a plumbing fixture in a couple of
easy steps.
To delete a plumbing fixture:
1.

Select the fixture.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

To apply a color or finish to a plumbing

fixture:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

fixture is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

Users Guide

151

22

("
The correct placement of heating and ventilation elements is an important part of the home
design process. Laying out HVAC elements in Design Suite Deluxe is quick and easy - just point
and click.
The catalog contains just about anything youd need furnaces, fireplaces, wood stoves,
chimneys, central air units, water heaters, floor registers and cold air returns. Of course, just like
anything else, you can move, rotate and edit these elements if you change your mind.

HVAC

153

Chapter 23 HVAC

Inserting Heating and Cooling

Elements
You can insert heating and cooling elements with
a click of your mouse. Heating and cooling
elements include fireplaces, wood stoves,
furnaces, water heaters, and central air units. By
default, heating elements are inserted on the floor
and will snap to walls if Collision Control is
turned on. Central air units are inserted on the
terrain.
To insert a heating element:
1.

Select Insert > Interiors > HVAC

Elements, or click the HVAC Elements
button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the

Heating or Cooling
category, then select the
element you want to
insert.

3.

Position the element

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Inserting Floor Registers and Cold

Air Returns
Registers and air returns come in a variety of
sizes, but you can create a different size if you
need to. Wall air returns will insert directly onto
walls. You can change the height of them later if
you want.
To insert a ventilation element:
1.

154

Select Insert > Interiors > HVAC

Elements, or click the HVAC Elements
button on the Interiors toolbar.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

2.

In the catalog, select the

Ventilation category, then
select the element you
want to insert.

3.

Position the element

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Inserting a Chimney
Chimneys by default are 12 tall, but you can
change this before or after you insert the chimney
to create the correct height needed for your house.
By default, the chimney in the catalog has a brick
base and concrete cap. You can edit the
appearance of the chimney to match the exterior
of your home if you are inserting the chimney on
the outside.
To insert a chimney:
1.

Select Insert > Interiors > HVAC

Elements, or click the HVAC Elements
button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the

Ventilation category, then
select the Chimney
element.

3.

Position the chimney

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To edit the height of the

chimney:
1.

Select the chimney.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

On the Basic property page, change the value

in the Base Height edit box.

4.

Click OK.

Moving HVAC Elements

To apply different materials to the chimney:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

chimney is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

4.

5.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply.
Click on the component
you want to apply the
material to. You can
apply different
materials to the base,
cap and flue.
When you are finished
applying materials,
right-click and select
Finish.

Moving HVAC Elements

You can move HVAC elements by clicking and
dragging them.
To move an HVAC element:
1.

Select the HVAC element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the elements

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

4.

When the element is at the desired rotation,

release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering an HVAC

Element
You can raise or lower an HVAC element using
the Elevate tool on the elements right-click menu.
To edit an HVAC elements elevation:
1.

Select the element whose elevation you want

to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate. The value
shown in the Elevate dialog is the current
elevation of the element.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the bottom of the element above
the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: You can also change an HVAC elements

elevation by changing the Distance above
current location or terrain variable on the
elements Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of an HVAC

Element
You can edit the dimensions of an HVAC element.
The more complex an element is, the more
variables it will have. A chimney, for example, has
separate variables for the base, cap and flue, so
you can create the exact look and size you want.
To edit the size of an HVAC element:

Rotating HVAC Elements

1.

You can rotate HVAC elements by clicking and

dragging them.

Select the HVAC element whose properties

you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

To rotate an HVAC element:

3.

Edit the properties as desired.

1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

4.

Click OK.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

Users Guide

155

23

Chapter 23 HVAC

Deleting HVAC Elements

You can delete an HVAC element in a couple of
easy steps.
To delete an HVAC element:
1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

156

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Terrain Modeling

page 159

Sidewalks, Pathways & Driveways

page 167

Pads & Patios

page 171

Retaining Walls

page 175

Property Lines

page 179

Design Suite Deluxe goes well beyond home design by letting you recreate the topography of the
lot your home will be built on.
By default, a basic 150 x 150 grass terrain is displayed in the drawing area, making your 3D
views more attractive and realistic. You can adjust various terrain settings, such as the size and
base level of your terrain, and even import your own textures. You can also add hills, berms,
plateaus and slopes to your terrain to create an incredibly realistic-looking building site.

159

Chapter 24 Terrain Modeling

Defining How the Terrain Cuts

Around the Building
By default, the terrain cuts around the Ground
Floor of your building. You can select a different
location to cut around, or prevent cutting around
altogether.
To define how the terrain cuts around the
building:

2.

In the Terrain Settings dialog, edit the

values in the Length and Width edit boxes to
suit your needs.

3.

Click OK.

Editing the Grid Mesh Spacing of

the Terrain
When viewing in Wireframe, Hidden Line or
Patterned display mode in 3D, the terrain is
displayed using a mesh pattern. You can adjust
the spacing between the grid lines of the mesh
pattern.

1.

Select Settings > Terrain Settings, or

click the Terrain Settings button on the
Settings toolbar.

2.

If you do not want the terrain to cut around

the building, disable the Auto-cut terrain
around building check box. Note that the
terrain will then go right through the
building if one is present.

To edit the grid mesh spacing of the terrain:

1.

Select Settings > Terrain Settings, or

click the Terrain Settings button on the
Settings toolbar.

3.

To change the location the terrain cuts

around, select the location from the Select
Building Location to cut around drop box.

2.

In the Terrain Settings dialog, edit the value

in the Grid Mesh Spacing edit box.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Click OK.

Selecting a Texture for the Terrain

Editing the Elevation of the Terrain

By default, the base level of the terrain is 0. You
can raise or lower the terrain to suit your needs.
To edit the elevation of the terrain:
1.

Select Settings > Terrain Settings, or

click the Terrain Settings button on the
Settings toolbar.

2.

3.

In the Terrain Settings dialog, edit the value

in the Terrain Base Level edit box. This
value is measured from 0.

Select Settings > Terrain Settings, or

click the Terrain Settings button on the
Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Terrain Settings dialog, click the

Select button in the Material area.

Click OK.

3.

In the Materials dialog, select the texture you

want to use, then click OK.

4.

Click OK in the Terrain Settings dialog.

By default, a basic 150 x 150 grass terrain is

displayed in the drawing area. You can edit its
size by changing your terrain settings.
To edit the size of the terrain:

160

To select a texture for the terrain:

1.

Editing the Size of the Terrain

1.

By default, a grass texture is used for the terrain

in Rendered and Rendered Outline display mode.
You can select a different grass texture, or any
texture available in the materials library.

Select Settings > Terrain Settings, or

click the Terrain Settings button on the
Settings toolbar.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Creating Hills and Valleys

You can add hills to your terrain with a single
mouse click. You can control the height of a hill as
well as its peak shape. Generally, the diameter of
the hill base is the same as the hill height. You can
insert multiple hills together to create one larger
hill. Also, if you insert hills next to other terrain

Creating Berms and Trenches

elements, like plateaus or slopes, the elements
will automatically blend together.

2.

Click and drag the center grab handle to

move the hill, then release your mouse
button.

To edit the height or peak shape of a hill:

1.

Click in the center of the hill to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the properties in the Hills/Valleys

dialog.

4.

Click OK.

To remove a hill/valley:

To create a hill or valley:

1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Hills /

Valleys, or click the Hills/Valleys
button on the Terrain toolbar.

1.

Click in the center of the hill to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Creating Berms and Trenches

A berm is a mound or bank of soil without formal
sides. You often see large berms on the sides of
highways, which are used for noise control. On a
reduced scale, a natural berm can provide some
interesting benefits in a backyard landscape.
These include:
Climate control. Berms act as windbreaks,
channeling air flow. Berms can create a warmer
microclimate or direct cooling breezes.
Privacy. A berm can be a "friendly fence" in the
back yard or between your house and a sidewalk.

2.

In the Hills / Valleys dialog, specify the

height of the hill in the Height edit box.
Entering a negative value will create a valley.

3.

Using the Zenith slider control, select a peak

shape for the hill.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Click to insert the hill. You can insert

multiple hills if you like.

6.

Right-click and select Finish.

To move a hill/valley:
1.

Vertical interest. You can add variety and texture

to your gardens with berms, change the view
from your outdoor sitting areas, or even hide
eyesores with them.
Noise control. A berm can cut down on traffic
noise if you live on a busy street or near a
schoolyard.
Berms may be shored with stone, bricks, or
timbers, and planted with groundcovers,
perennials, annuals, trees, etc.

Click in the center of the hill to select it.

Users Guide

161

24

Chapter 24 Terrain Modeling

You can control the height of a berm as well as its
peak shape.

5.

Select two points to define the length of the

top of the berm. The berm will be created
downward and outward from this line.

6.

Right-click and select Finish.

To stretch a berm/trench:
To create a berm/trench:
1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Berms/

Trenches, or click the Berms/
Trenches button on the Terrain
toolbar.

1.

Click in the center of the berm to select it.

2.

Grab handles are displayed at either end of

the berms central line.

3.

Click and drag an end grab handle to stretch

the berm, then release your mouse button.
You can move the end point to any position
on the screen.

To move a berm/trench:

2.

In the Berms/Trenches dialog, specify the

height of the berm in the Height edit box.
Entering a negative value creates a trench.

3.

Using the Zenith slider control, select a peak

shape for the berm.

4.

Click OK.

1.

Click in the center of the berm to select it. A

blue grab handle is displayed in the middle
of the berms central line.

2.

Click and drag the central blue grab handle

to move the berm, then release your mouse
button.

To rotate a berm/trench:
1.

Click in the center of the berm to select it.

Grab handles are displayed along the berms
central line.

2.

Click and drag a grab handle to rotate the

berm around the selected point.

3.

Release your mouse button.

To edit the height or peak shape of a berm:

162

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Click in the center of the berm to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Creating Plateaus
3.

Edit the properties in the Berms/Trenches

dialog.

4.

Click OK.

start point again. The plateau will be created

downward and outward from your outline.

To delete a berm/trench:
1.

Click in the center of the berm to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Creating Plateaus
A plateau is a relatively large, flat area of land
situated above the adjacent land. Adding a
plateau to your terrain involves clicking a few
points to define the shape of the plateau. You can
control the height of the plateau as well as its
peak shape. Note that if you insert a plateau in
close proximity to other terrain elements, such as
hills, the elements automatically blend together.
To create a plateau:
1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Plateaus, or

click the Plateaus button on the
Terrain toolbar.

6.

Right-click and select Finish.

To stretch a plateau:
1.

Click in the center of the plateau to select it.

2.

Click on the edge of the central outline that

you want to stretch. A blue grab handle is
displayed on the selected edge.

3.

Click and drag the edge to stretch the

plateau, then release your mouse button.

To reshape a plateau:
1.

Click in the center of the plateau to select it.

Corner grab handles are displayed on the
central outline of the plateau.

2.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to

stretch the shape, then release your mouse
button.

To move a plateau:

2.

In the Plateaus dialog, specify the height of

the plateau in the Height edit box. Entering a
negative value creates an excavated area.

3.

Using the Zenith slider control, select a

general shape for the plateau. The pointier
the shape, the steeper the sides will be.

4.

Click OK.

5.

In the drawing area, select points to define

the outline of the top of the plateau. Note that
the last point picked always closes back to
the start point, so you dont have to pick the

1.

Click in the center of the plateau to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element,

or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move
Whole Element.

3.

Click and drag to move the plateau, then

release your mouse button.

To edit the height or peak shape of a plateau:

1.

Click in the center of the plateau to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the properties in the Plateaus dialog.

4.

Click OK.
Users Guide

163

24

Chapter 24 Terrain Modeling

To delete a plateau:
1.

Click in the center of the plateau to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

sides of the slope will extend to the very

edges of the terrain.
8.

Move your cursor in the direction you want

the slope to run. A stretchable arrow is
displayed.

9.

When the arrow is pointing in the right

direction and is the desired length, click to
insert the slope. The longer the arrow, the
more gradual the slope will be. A shorter
arrow will result in a steeper slope. Note that
if the point you pick is not on the edge of the
terrain, the land will level off at the top of the
slope.

Creating Slopes
A slope is an area of land with a natural incline. It
is often common practise to slope the land away
from the sides of a house so that water drains
away from it rather than towards it. When you
create a slope, you select two points: the first
point is the starting point of the slope, and the
second point determines the length and direction
of the slope. If the slope comes into contact with
other terrain elements, like hills and plateaus, the
elements automatically blend together.
To create a slope in your terrain:
1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Slopes, or

click the Slopes button on the Terrain
toolbar.

2.

In the Slopes dialog, enable the Height

button.

3.

In the Height edit box, enter the desired

height for the top of the slope. Note that
slopes are built from the top surface of the
terrain up.

4.

Enable the Angle button.

5.

In the Angle edit box, enter an angle (in

degrees) for the slope. The higher the value,
the steeper the slope.

6.

Click OK.

To stretch a slope:

7.

Select a start point for the slope. The slope

will incline from this point. Note that the

1.

164

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

10. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: If you insert another slope, and that slope
comes into contact with an existing slope, the new
slope will insert on top of the existing slope.

Click in the center of the slope. The central

arrow is displayed, and grab handles are
displayed at either end of it.

Turning the Terrain On and Off

2.

Click and drag an end grab handle to stretch

the arrow, then release your mouse button.
Note that you can also rotate the arrow by
selecting a different position for it while
clicking and dragging. This changes the
direction of the slope.

To move a slope:
1.

Click in the center of the slope. The central

arrow is displayed.

2.

Click and drag the arrows center blue grab

handle to move the slope, then release your
mouse button.

Turning the Terrain On and Off

You can hide the terrain from view and display it
again whenever you want using the View Filter.
To turn the terrain on or off:
1.

Select View > View Filter or click the

View Filter button on the Basic View
Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements

on Terrain tab.

3.

Click the eye icon next to the Terrain option.

The eye closes.

4.

Click OK.

To edit the height of a slope:

1.

Click in the center of the slope to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Slopes dialog, enable the Height radio

button.

4.

Edit the height in the Height edit box.

5.

Click OK.

To edit the angle (steepness) of a slope:

1.

Click in the center of the slope to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Slopes dialog, enable the Angle radio

button.

4.

Edit the height in the Angle edit box.

5.

Click OK.

To delete a slope:
1.

Click in the center of the slope to select it. The

central arrow is displayed.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Users Guide

165

24

&

/
Sidewalks, pathways and driveways add to the overall aesthetics of your landscape and provide
access to different areas of your property. Drawing them is easy just select a start point, then
point and click in the direction you want the pathway to run. Continue picking points to add
segments if you want.
The Design Suite Deluxe catalog includes an excellent selection of pathway materials including
wood, sand, gravel, concrete, brick and asphalt. You can even create a forest path! A number of
different widths are available, but you can create a custom width if you want.

Paths

167

Chapter 25 Sidewalks, Pathways & Driveways

Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways and

Driveways

5.

Double-click to finish, or right-click and

select Finish.

The catalog contains a wide variety of path types,

including boardwalks, sand paths, gravel paths,
brick paths, and driveways. The width and
thickness of a path is determined by the paths
properties in the catalog. You control the length
and direction of the path as you draw it.
Dimensions are displayed as you draw each
segment.

Double-click
after last point

To create a path:
1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Paths, or

click the Paths button on the Terrain
toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the

path type you want to
insert.

3.

Select a start point for

your path. Note that your
insertion point is on the
center line of the path.

4.

Move your cursor in the

direction you want the
path to run, then select an
endpoint for the path.
You can continue selecting points in any
direction to add more sections to the path if
you want.
Tip: To create a smooth curve in the path,
click several points with a short distance
between each point.

Next
Point

Start Point

Next Point

Moving a Path Element

You can move an entire path using the Move
Whole Element tool.
To move a path:
1.

Click on the path to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element,

or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move
Whole Element.

Click and drag the path to where you want it,

then release your mouse button.

Stretching a Path Element

You can lengthen, shorten or rotate a sidewalk,
pathway or driveway by clicking and dragging its
end or corner grab handles.
If the path has multiple segments, you can also
stretch the path layout by moving one of its
segments.

168

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Curving a Path Element

To stretch a path by clicking and dragging:
1.

2.

Select the path. If the path has multiple

segments and you want to stretch the whole
path layout by moving a segment, click on
the segment you want to move.
Click and drag one of the paths end or
corner grab handles to stretch or reshape the
path, then release your mouse button. If you
are moving a segment to stretch the entire
layout, hover your pointer over the
segments center blue handle, then click and
drag to stretch the path.

Curving a Path Element

You can curve a path segment using the Curve
tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and
drag the path to curve it, or select a point to curve
to.
To curve a path by clicking and dragging:

Editing the Thickness or Width of

a Path Element
You can edit the thickness of your path material
or the paths overall width.
To edit the thickness or width of a path:
1.

Select the path. If the path has multiple

segments, you do not have to select them all.
Property changes affect the whole path.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To edit the thickness of the path, enter a

value in the Thickness edit box.

4.

To edit the width of the path, enter a value in

the Width edit box.

5.

Click OK.

Applying Different Materials to

Path Elements

1.

Click on the path to select it. If the path has

multiple segments, make sure you click on
the specific segment you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

To apply a material to a path element:

3.

Click and drag the path to the desired curve.

1.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

path is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply. The
Landscape category
contains a good selection
of pavers, flagstone,
gravel and sand.

4.

Click anywhere on the

path surface.

5.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To curve a path to a selected point:

1.

Click on the path to select it. If the path has

multiple segments, make sure you click on
the specific segment you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The

path automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

You can apply a different material to any path,

sidewalk or driveway using the quick and handy
Materials Paintbrush.

Users Guide

169

25

Chapter 25 Sidewalks, Pathways & Driveways

Deleting a Path Element

You can delete a sidewalk, pathway or driveway
in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a path:
1.

Click on the path to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

170

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

A great way to add functional living space to your home is to build a patio. Creating a pad or
patio involves clicking a few points to define the outline of the slab using the Pads tool.

Pads

171

Chapter 26 Pads & Patios

Creating a Pad

2.

You can use the Pads tool to insert a concrete or

brick pad directly on your terrain. By drawing the
outline of the pad, you control its precise size and
shape.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element,

or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move
Whole Element.

3.

Click and drag the pad to move it, then

release your mouse button.

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a

different color or material to the pad after it has
been inserted.

Rotating a Pad
You can rotate a pad using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a pad:

To create a pad:

1.

Click on the pad to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Hover your pointer over the point you want

to rotate around.

Select a start point for the

pad.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the pad, then release

your mouse button.

Continue selecting points

to define the outline of
the pad. Note that the last
point picked always
closes back to the start
point, so you dont have
to pick the start point again.

Resizing a Pad

1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Pads, or click

the Pads button on the Terrain toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the

type of pad you want to
insert.

3.
4.

You can resize a pad by stretching one of its

edges.
To resize a pad by stretching it:
1.
4

Click on the pad to select it.

2.

Click on the edge you want to stretch.

3.

Hover your pointer over the grab

handle to display the Move cursor.

4.

Click and drag to stretch the pad.

5.

Release your mouse button.

Reshaping a Pad
2
5.

Right-click and select Finish from the

shortcut menu.

Moving a Pad
You can move a pad by clicking and dragging it.

You can change the shape of a pad by stretching

its corners. You can do this by clicking and
dragging.
To reshape a pad:
1.

Click on the pad to select it. A grab handle is

displayed at each corner.

2.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to

stretch the pad.

3.

Release your mouse button.

To move a pad:
1.

172

Click on the pad to select it.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Curving a Pad

Curving a Pad

To apply a material to a pad:

You can curve the edge of a pad using the Curve

tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and
drag the edge to curve it, or select a point to curve
to.

1.

Display your model in 3D view and make

sure the pad is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply.

4.

Click on the pad surface.

The material is
immediately applied.

5.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To curve a pad edge by clicking and dragging:

1.

Click on the pad edge that you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the edge to the desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

To curve a pad edge to a selected point:

1.

Click on the edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The

edge automatically curves to the point.

To delete a pad:

4.

Click to finish.

1.

Click on the pad to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Editing the Thickness of a Pad

You can edit the thickness of a pad on the slabs
Basic property page.

Deleting a Pad
You can delete a pad in a
couple of easy steps.

To edit the thickness of a pad:

1.

Click on the pad to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Pads dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

Enter the desired thickness in the Thickness

edit box.

5.

Click OK.

Applying a Different Material to a

Pad
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly
apply a different color or material to your pad.
For example, you may want to change the pad to
stone.

Users Guide

173

26

#
A well-built retaining wall system can preserve the natural shape of your land, reinforce hills and
slopes, and protect your home from possible landslides or soil erosion. Retaining walls can also
be an attractive addition to a garden or the overall landscaping around your home.
Drawing retaining walls is easy just point and click. Design Suite Deluxe automatically displays
dimensions as you draw, and connects corners for you.
Once inserted, any wall can be moved, rotated, lengthened, shortened, broken, curved or deleted.
This lets you create the exact wall layout that you want.
The catalog contains wood, concrete and concrete block retaining walls in a variety of sizes. You
can change the properties of walls, such as their thickness and appearance, as well as create
custom walls.

175

Chapter 27 Retaining Walls

Drawing Retaining Walls

4.

Width. The thickness of the wall.

Just like regular walls, retaining walls are a snap

to draw just point and click.

Wall Height. The physical height of the wall.

Drop Exterior Face. The extension of the
walls exterior face below the terrain.

To draw a retaining wall:

1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Retaining

Walls, or click the Retaining Walls
button on the Terrain toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select

the wall type you want
to insert.

3.

Select a start point for

the wall.

4.

Move your cursor in

the direction you want
your wall to run. Its
length is shown as you
draw the wall.
Note: By default,
drawing is constrained to 15 angles. To
release this constraint, turn off your Angle
Snap.

5.

When the wall is the length you want, click to

set its endpoint.

6.

Continue selecting points to add on to the

wall if you want.

7.

When you are done, right-click and select

Finish.

Editing a Retaining Walls Height,

Width or Elevation
You can edit the size properties of a wall by
making changes on the walls Basic property
page.
To edit a retaining walls size properties:
1.

Select the wall whose properties you want to

change. You can select multiple walls using
Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Walls dialog, select the Basic tab.

176

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Edit the properties as desired:

5.

Once the properties are set, click OK.

Lengthening and Shortening

Retaining Walls
You can lengthen or shorten an individual wall by
clicking and dragging one of the walls ends.
To lengthen or shorten a retaining wall:
1.

Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at

each wall end.

2.

Hover your pointer over the wall end

you want to stretch. The Lengthen
cursor is displayed.

3.

Click and drag the wall end until it has

reached the desired length, then release your
mouse button.

Rotating a Retaining Wall

You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a wall about
a selected point.
To rotate a retaining wall:
1.

Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at

each wall end.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Position your pointer over the grab handle

you want to rotate the wall around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the wall, then release

your mouse button.

Curving a Retaining Wall

You can curve a retaining wall using the Curve
tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and
drag the wall to curve it, or select a point to curve
to.

Breaking a Retaining Wall

To curve a retaining wall by clicking and
dragging:
1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the wall to the desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply.

4.

Click on the wall face

that you want to apply
the material to. The
material is immediately
applied.

5.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To curve a retaining wall to a selected point:

1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The

wall automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

Breaking a Retaining Wall

You can break a retaining wall into two or more
segments using the Break tool. The segments can
then be edited individually.
To break a retaining wall:
1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and click

Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements >
Break.

3.

Click the point where you want to break the

wall. This divides the wall into two segments
that can be moved, stretched or manipulated
individually.

Deleting a
Retaining Wall
You can delete a retaining wall in a couple of easy
steps.
To delete a retaining wall:
1.

Select the wall to remove. You can select

multiple walls using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Applying Different Finishes to

Retaining Walls
You can apply different finishes to your retaining
walls using the handy Materials Paintbrush. The
materials catalog contains an excellent selection of
brick, concrete, wood and stone finishes.
To apply a material to a retaining wall:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

wall face you want to apply the material to is
visible in the view.

Users Guide

177

27

+
You may want to know where your property lines are, especially if you are working in a confined
or unusually-shaped area. Lot lines and setbacks can be found on a survey plan or surveyors
certificate.
Using the Site Boundary tool you can draw a custom site boundary, which shows your stakes and
property lines, and can show your building setbacks as well.

Site Boundary

179

Chapter 28 Property Lines

Defining Your Building Lot

You can use the Site Boundary tool to define your
building lot. A site boundary is a closed line that
shows the legal property boundary (lot lines), and
is annotated with bearing text, length text and
peg numbers. You can specify setbacks as well,
which define your building envelope. The site
boundary appears only in 2D wireframe view.
Peg (stake)

Lot Line

can also change the style of lines and text used in

the site boundary.
Tip: You can put a fence along your lot lines to
show where the lot lines are in 3D. See Inserting a
Fence on page 216.

Creating a Site Boundary Using

the Reference Angle Method
When creating a site boundary using the
Reference Angle Method, angles are measured
using compass bearings and a reference angle.
Each angle is measured within a given quadrant
(NE, NW, SE or SW). The angle is the acute (less
than 90) angle from the North or South meridian
as measured to the East or West. For example, the
bearing N 90d0000 E can be thought of as 90
east of North.
By default, the angle is specified using the
degrees/minutes/seconds format, but you can
choose to use decimal degrees if you prefer.

Setback
Line

To create a site boundary you just pick points to

define the outline of the lot. The Commander is
displayed as you draw, allowing you to enter
each bearing precisely.
When drawing your site boundary, there are two
ways of defining segment angles. The Reference
Angle Method lets you define the direction of
each segment by specifying an acute angle within
a given quadrant (NW, NE, SW, SE). See Creating

a Site Boundary Using the Reference Angle

Method on page 180. The Angle Bearing Method
lets you specify a forward or back bearing
measured clockwise from the North meridian. See

To create a site boundary using the Reference

Angle Method:
1.

Method of Angle Measurement When

Drawing a Site Boundary on page 184.
2.

In 2D plan view, select View > Zoom

and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click
the Zoom to Fit button on the Zoom
and Navigate toolbar. This will bring the
entire terrain into view so you can insert the
boundary easily and precisely.

3.

Select Insert > Terrain > Site

Boundary, or click the Site Boundary
button on the Terrain toolbar.

4.

Select a point for the first peg (stake). The

Commander becomes instantly active,
displaying options for defining the length
and direction of line segments.

5.

Move your mouse in the general direction

you want the first site boundary line to run.

Creating a Site Boundary Using the Angle

Bearing Method on page 181.

Once youve drawn your site boundary you can

edit each segment individually if necessary to
achieve the precise size and shape you need. You

180

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Make sure the Reference Angle format is

selected on the Units of Measure page in
your program settings. See Selecting a

Creating a Site Boundary Using the Angle Bearing Method

This determines the quadrant you are
working in, and the compass points used in
the bearing. Note that you can also select a
quadrant (NE, NW, SE or SW) from the drop
box in the Commander if you prefer just
remember to Tab over to the Distance edit
box when youre done.
6.

Type a length for the first boundary line. The

value appears in the Commanders Distance
edit box.

7.

To specify the direction of the line, either

move your mouse in the desired direction
(watching the resulting angle in the
Commanders Direction edit box), or press
the Tab key to move to the Direction edit
box, then enter the desired angle and press
ENTER. Remember that the angle is
measured from the North or South meridian,
and should be between 0 and 90 degrees.

Creating a Site Boundary Using

the Angle Bearing Method
When using the Angle Bearing Method to draw a
site boundary, each angle is calculated clockwise
from the positive Y axis, or North meridian. By
default, each bearing is entered as a forward
bearing, but you can choose to enter a back
bearing instead.
To create a site boundary with the Angle
Bearing Method:
1.

Method of Angle Measurement When

Drawing a Site Boundary on page 184.
2.

In 2D plan view, select View > Zoom

and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click
the Zoom to Fit button on the Zoom
and Navigate toolbar. This will bring the
entire terrain into view so you can insert the
boundary easily and precisely.

3.

Select Insert > Terrain > Site

Boundary, or click the Site Boundary
button on the Terrain toolbar.

4.

Select a point for the first peg (stake). The

Commander becomes instantly active,
displaying options for defining the length
and direction of line segments.

5.

If you want to enter a back bearing instead of

a forward bearing, select Back bearing from
the Commanders left drop box. Just
remember to Tab over to the Distance edit
box when youre done.

6.

Type a length for the first boundary line. The

value appears in the Commanders Distance
edit box.

7.

To specify the direction of the line, either

move your mouse in the desired direction
(watching the resulting angle in the
Commanders Direction edit box), or press
the Tab key to move to the Direction edit
box, then type the desired angle and press
ENTER. Remember that each angle is

N
0
90 E

S
By default, the unit used for angle
measurement is degrees/seconds/minutes.
If you would prefer to enter decimal degrees,
see Selecting a Method of Angle

Measurement When Drawing a Site

Boundary on page 184.
8.

Continue defining the remaining segments.

When you have defined all but the last
segment, right-click and select Finish. A
closing line segment will be created
automatically between the first and last peg,
forming a closed site boundary.

Make sure the Angle Bearing format is

selected on the Units of Measure page in
your program settings. See Selecting a

Users Guide

181

28

Chapter 28 Property Lines

calculated clockwise from the positive Y axis,
or North meridian.
N
0

270

90

180
8.

Continue defining the remaining segments.

When you have defined all but the last
segment, right-click and select Finish. A
closing line segment will be created
automatically between the first and last peg,
forming a closed site boundary.

solid blue grab handle appears at the center

of the lot line you selected.
2.

To resize the boundary, click and drag the

solid blue grab handle. To reshape the
boundary, click and drag one of the clear
blue corner grab handles.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Editing the Length or Direction of

Site Boundary Edges
You can edit the length or direction of a site
boundary edge by editing site boundary
properties.
To edit the length or direction of a site
boundary edge:
1.

Click on the lot line you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To edit the length of the current segment,

type the desired value in the Length edit
box.

4.

To edit the distance of the setback line from

the lot line, type the distance in the Setback
edit box.

5.

To edit the angle of the current segment,

make the appropriate changes in the
Direction area of the Site Boundary Edge
dialog. There are two methods of defining
direction. The method that is available is the
one that was used to draw the site boundary
initially, or whatever is current on the Units
of Measure page in your Program Settings.

Moving a Site Boundary

Once you have drawn a site boundary, you can
move it around using the Move Whole Element
tool.
To move a site boundary:
1.

Click on one of your lot lines to select the

entire site boundary.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element,

or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move
Whole Element.

3.

Click and drag the site boundary to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Stretching a Site Boundary

You can resize or reshape your site boundary by
simply clicking and dragging the site boundarys
grab handles.
To stretch a site boundary:
1.

182

Click on one of your lot lines to select the site

boundary. If you want to resize the
boundary, click on the specific lot line that
you want to move. Clear blue grab handles
appear at each corner of the boundary, and a

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Defining Building Setbacks

If the Reference Angle Method is current,
you can edit the direction of the segment by
editing the value in the Angle edit box. If the
Angle Bearing Method is current, you can
edit the direction of the segment by editing
the Forward Bearing or Back Bearing
value.
6.

In the When Editing area, select the

appropriate Peg No. to adjust, as editing the
length or angle of a segment will cause a peg
to move.

7.

Click OK.

Defining Building Setbacks

By default, setback lines are not included in your
site boundary, as all setback distances are set to 0.
You can specify a setback distance for each
individual site boundary edge.
To define setback distances:
1.

Click on the property line you want to

specify a setback distance for. Note that
setback distances are defined per site
boundary edge, one at a time.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Site Boundary Edge dialog, edit the

value in the Setback edit box.

4.

Click OK.

To curve an edge by editing site boundary

properties:
1.

Click on the lot line you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Site Boundary Edge dialog, enable

the Arc Radius check box, then enter the
desired arc radius in the adjacent edit box.
The arc radius is the distance from the lot line
(in its uncurved state) to the top of the
proposed arc.

4.

Select the desired direction of the arc from

the Arc Direction drop box. Selecting Inside
creates the arc toward the inside of the
boundary, while selecting Outside pushes it
outward.

5.

Click OK.

Editing a Site Boundarys Line,

Text and Peg Styles
You can edit site boundary settings before or after
a site boundary has been created. Settings include
line styles for lot lines and setback lines, text
styles for bearings, lengths and pegs, as well as
peg size and style. You can also control which
textual information you want to appear.
To edit site boundary settings:
1.

Select Settings > Site Boundary Settings.

Curving Site Boundary Edges

You can curve a site boundary edge using the
Curve tool, or by editing site boundary edge
properties.
To curve an edge with the Curve tool:
1.

Click on the site boundary edge you want to

curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the edge to the desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

If you have already drawn a site

boundary, you can also access site
boundary settings by clicking the
Settings button in the Site Boundary
Edge dialog.

Users Guide

183

28

Chapter 28 Property Lines

2.

To edit the line style of the outside boundary

line, click the Boundary button, then select
the desired line style from the Line Styles
dialog.

3.

To edit the line style of the setback line, click

the Setback button, then select the desired
line style from the Line Styles dialog.

4.

To edit the peg style, click on either the

Circle or Square option in the Peg area. To
edit the size of the peg symbol, enter the
desired value in the Width edit box.

5.

To edit the text style of bearing text, click the

Bearing Text button, then select the desired
text style from the Text Styles dialog. If you
do not want to include bearing text in the site
boundary, disable the adjacent Include check
box. By default, bearing text appears on the
inside of the site boundary. If you want it to
appear on the outside, select Outside Line
from the drop box next to the Include check
box. Note that if you are including both
bearing text and length text, one must be set
to the outside of the boundary, and one must
be set to the inside. You cannot have both on
the same side. Otherwise, one of them will be
disabled.

6.

To edit the text style of length text, click the

Length Text button, then select the desired
text style from the Text Styles dialog. If you
do not want to include length text in the site
boundary, disable the adjacent Include check
box. By default, length text appears on the
outside of the site boundary line. If you want
it to appear on the inside, select Inside Line
from the drop box next to the Include check
box.

7.

To edit the text style of peg text, click the Peg

Text button, then select the desired text style
from the Text Styles dialog. If you do not
want to include peg text in the site boundary,
disable the adjacent Include check box.

8.

9.

184

To edit the distance between text and the site

boundary line, enter the desired distance in
the Distance from line edit box. This applies
to all forms of text bearing, length and peg
text.
Click OK.
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Selecting a Method of Angle

Measurement When Drawing a Site
Boundary
There are two methods of angle measurement
available for creating a site boundary. With the
Reference Angle method, each angle is measured
from the North or South meridian within a given
quadrant (NE, NW, SE, SW). With the Angle
Bearing method, each angle is measured
clockwise from the positive Y axis, or North
meridian.
When specifying the angle of each site boundary
segment, you can use Degrees/Minutes/Seconds,
or Decimal Degrees with a specified level of
precision.
To select a method of angle measurement for
site boundary entry:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Units of Measure tab.

3.

In the Site Boundary Entry area, select the

desired entry method from the Angle
Format drop box (Reference Angle or Angle
Bearing).

4.

From the Angle Unit drop box, select the unit

you wish to use when specifying the angle of
each site boundary edge. Choose either the
Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, or Decimal
Degrees. If your choice is Decimal Degrees,

Deleting a Site Boundary

select the desired level of precision from the
adjacent Precision drop box.
5.

Click OK.

Note: Editing the Angle Unit after the site

boundary has already been created affects the
bearing text in the existing site boundary.

Deleting a Site Boundary

You can delete a site boundary in a couple of easy
steps.
To delete the site boundary:
1.

Click on one of your lot lines to select the

entire site boundary.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Users Guide

185

28

Trees, Shrubs & Plants

page 189

Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas

page 205

Edging

page 209

Irrigation

page 213

Fences & Gates

page 215

Decks

page 223

Shed Builder Wizard

page 235

Exterior Furniture

page 239

Exterior Structures

page 243

Exterior Lighting

page 247

Exterior Accessories

page 251

&

'

Nothing brings your landscape to life like trees, shrubs, plants and flowers. With 7500 plants to
choose from, Design Suite Deluxe lets you create the landscape of your dreams.
Inserting plants involves nothing more than a single mouse click, and once inserted, they can be
dragged and dropped anywhere you like. You can even make them grow!
If you need to learn more about a particular species of plant, you can view the plants light, water,
temperature and soil requirements in its properties. For even more detailed information you can
browse through Design Suite Deluxes comprehensive Plant Encyclopedia.

Plants

189

Chapter 29 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

Inserting Plants

Changing the Elevation of a Plant

Plants are inserted with a simple mouse click.

Once inserted, they can be dragged and dropped
anywhere in the drawing.

You can raise or lower a plant using the Elevate

tool. You may want to do this for hanging plants,
or plants in raised garden boxes.

To insert a plant:

To change the elevation of a plant:

1.

1.

Select the plant.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the plant above the ground.

4.

Click OK.

2.

Select Insert > Landscape > Plants,

or click the Plants button on the
Landscape toolbar.
In the catalog, select the
plant you want to insert.
If you want to view the
plants size or
requirements before
inserting it, right-click in
the catalog and select
Properties.

3.

Position the plant where

you want it, then click to
insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Note: Although the catalog contains a wide

variety of plants for you to insert, it does not
contain all the plants listed in the Plant
Encyclopedia. You can, however, insert plants
directly from the Encyclopedia. See Inserting
Plants from the Encyclopedia on page 202. You
can also add plants from the Encyclopedia to the
current catalog. For more information, see

Adding a Plant from the Encyclopedia to the

Catalog on page 202.

Editing the 2D Appearance of a

Plant
By default, plants are represented by a circle in
2D plan view. At the center of the circle is a
smaller circle that represents the trunk.

You can choose from three 2D plant styles. You

can also change the diameter of the trunk in 2D,
or hide the trunk altogether.
To edit the style of a plant in 2D:
1.

Select the plant whose properties you want to

edit.

Moving a Plant

2.

You can move a plant easily by just clicking and

dragging it.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Plants dialog, select the Size tab.

4.

To change the style of the circle shown in 2D

plan view, click the style you want in the
Type area.

To move a plant:
1.

Select the plant you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the plants

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the plant.

4.

When the plant is where you want it, release

your mouse button.

190

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Changing the Age of a Plant

5.

6.

To change the size of the trunk in 2D plan

view, edit the value in the Trunk Diameter
edit box. To hide the trunk from 2D view,
select No from the Show trunk in plan?
drop box.
Click OK.

Changing the Age of a Plant

The age of a plant determines its size at planting
time. You can increase or decrease the age of a
plant by making a change on the plants Plant
Info property page.
To change the age of a plant:
1.

Click on the plant whose planting age you

want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Plants dialog, select the Plant Info tab.

4.

Move the Planting Age slider left or right

until the desired planting age is displayed.
Planting age is measured in years.

5.

Click OK.

Forcing a Custom Plant Size

the plants size changes in both 2D and 3D

regardless of the Planting Age setting on the Plant
Info page.
Note: If you just want to see plants at a different
maturity level (i.e. change their age), you should
change their planting age instead. See Changing
the Age of a Plant on page 191. You can also
apply an overall age change to your landscape.
See Seeing Plant Growth Over Time on page 192.
To change the size of a plant:
1.

Select the plant whose properties you want to

edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Plants dialog, select the Size tab.

4.

Set the Size from encyclopedia option to

No.

5.

To change the width of the plant, enter a

value in the Width edit box.

6.

To change the height of the plant in 3D view,

edit the value in the Height edit box.

7.

Click OK.

The size of a plant is determined by properties in

the Plant Encyclopedia. You can specify a custom
height and width for a plant on the plants Size
property page. Note that if you do this, however,

Users Guide

191

29

Chapter 29 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

Deleting a Plant

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, change the

date. Select a month by clicking the arrows
on the month bar at the top of the calendar.
Select a day by clicking a number on the
calendar.

3.

Click OK. The plants in your drawing are

updated according to the time of year you
specified.

You can delete a plant in a couple of easy steps.

To delete a plant:
1.

Select the plant.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard,

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Seeing Plant Growth Over Time

Once you have inserted plants in your landscape
plan, you can see how they will look any specified
number of years down the road using the Plant
Growth Over Time feature.
To see plant growth over time:
1.

Select Tools > Gardening > Plant Growth

Over Time.

2.

Enter the number of years to add to your

landscape.

3.

Click OK.

Applying Seasonal Changes to

Plants
The Plant Seasonal Change feature updates the
appearance of the plants in your drawing to
reflect a particular season. Generally the change
applies to flowering plants and trees that have a
certain bloom time.
You specify the season by adjusting the time of
year on the Global Settings page of the Program
Settings dialog.
To apply seasonal changes to your plants:
1.

192

Select Tools > Gardening > Plant Seasonal

Change.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Note: Keep in mind that seasonal changes may

have different results depending on the plants
properties. Things to consider are the climate of
the region the plant is in, and the plants world
origin.

Using the Plant Encyclopedia

Using the Plant Encyclopedia

The Plant Encyclopedia contains comprehensive information on 7500 different varieties of plants. The
Encyclopedia has many uses related to the selection and care of plants. You can view information about
any plant, select plants based on certain criteria, research potential diseases, and learn how to care for
your plants.
To access the Plant Encyclopedia, select Tools > Gardening > Plant Encyclopedia.
You can also access the Plant Encyclopedia by clicking the Encyclopedia button on a plants Plant Info
property page.
Plant Photo

Usage Window

Plant Info

Profile
View

Season Color
Diagram

Plant
Height

Overhead
View

Plant
Width

Plant List

Scroll through the

list and select the
plant you want to
view

Search Edit Field

Type in the first

few letters of the
plant you are
looking for

Select Button

Inserts the current

plant in your
drawing

Latin/Common
Button

Switches between
Common and Latin
plant names

Users Guide

193

29

Chapter 29 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

The Encyclopedia Main Page

The Encyclopedias main page contains a
comprehensive plant list that you can scroll
through and select plants from. The page also
displays a photo and two previews of a selected
plant, as well as basic information about the plant
and its appropriate growing environment.

options to view a brief description of the usage in

the Plant Usage catalog.

Selecting a Plant to View

By default, the plant list contains all 7500 plant
species. If you have used the Plant Filter to filter
out certain plant types, the list is smaller. (For
more information about the Plant Filter, see
Filtering the Plant List on page 201).
To select a plant in the plant list, use the scrollbar
beside the plant list to scroll through the list of
plants, then click on the plant you want to view.
By default, common plant names are listed in the
plant list. You can switch to Latin names by
clicking the Latin button.
If you know the name of the plant you are looking
for, you can locate it more quickly by typing the
first few letters of the plants name in the Search
Edit field above the plant list. The list of plants
will move to the closest match as you type.

Soil/Zone/Lifetime. The window below the

Usage window indicates Soil Preference
(alkaline, acidic, heavy, etc.), Zone (ranging from
1 for Sub-Arctic to 10 for Sub-Tropical), and
Lifetime (the life span of the plant in years).

Plant Type and Needs. The window to the right

of the Usage window indicates the following:
Plant Type
Temperature Preference

Water Requirements

Scrollbar

Growth

Viewing Plant Information

The Encyclopedias main page displays images
and basic information about the currently
selected plant.
Usage. This window lists all the possible ways
you can use the plant. Click one of the usage

194

Lighting Preference

Search
edit
field

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Complexity of Care

Season Color Diagram. This circle gives you an

idea of what you can expect from the chosen plant
throughout the year. The outer circle shows the
months in which the plant blooms, and the color
of its flowers. Fruits are also indicated in this
circle, showing the period when they ripen, and
the color of their fruit. The inner circle indicates

The Encyclopedia Main Page

when the plant has foliage (including autumn
leaves), and the color of its leaves.

Note: The profile view shows the plants total

height. If the plant is a vegetable, this includes the
underground part. If the plant is a water plant,
the underwater part is included. The width of
bushes and flowers can be affected by how they
are pruned. The plant will reach optimum size at
maturity and under favorable conditions.

Plant Views
The main page has two views: overhead and
profile. The overhead view shows you a textured
view of the plant from above.

The profile view gives you an idea of the plants

height and spread, and shows you what your
plant will look like in 3D. The profile view is
shown in the lower right corner of the main page.

Users Guide

195

29

Chapter 29 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

Plant Care Calendar

The Plant Care Calendar page shows the required monthly care (planting, watering, fertilizing, etc.) for
the currently selected plant.

To see detailed information about each plant care task, click on the icon. A Care dialog appears
displaying helpful tips on how to complete a given task.

196

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

World Map Page

World Map Page

The World Map page displays a world map that indicates the region of the world where the currently
selected plant originates. Right-click on a highlighted region to see details about the climate and growing
conditions most favorable for plants indigenous to the region.

Users Guide

197

29

Chapter 29 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

Notebook Page
You can use the Notebook page to enter and view notes about the currently selected plant. To select a
plant, scroll through the list and click on it, or use the Search Edit field above the plant list to enter the
first few letters of the plant name and find a quick match. Click in the box on the right side of the page
and type your note. When you move to another page in the Encyclopedia, your text is saved
automatically.

198

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Picture Page

Picture Page
The Picture page contains a collage of thumbnail images of all the available plants in the plant list. You
can browse through the images manually or by using the arrows at the top of the page.
To view a large picture of a selected plant, click the Full Size button at the top of the page.
Click the Thumbnails button to return to the thumbnails.

Users Guide

199

29

Chapter 29 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

Diseases Page
The Diseases page lists the possible diseases that may affect a plant. By default, the disease list contains
the diseases that can affect the currently selected plant. If you want to view a comprehensive list of
diseases for all plants, click All in the bottom right corner of the page.
When you select a disease in the disease list, you will see a picture of the disease, details of its symptoms
in the Symptoms windows, and care information in the Control window.

If you want to search in reverse to find all plants affected by a specific disease, click the Filter button at
the bottom of the page. This opens the main Encyclopedia page. To restore your plant list, return to the
Diseases page and click the All button.

200

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Filtering the Plant List

Filtering the Plant List

originate. For example, if you wanted to find

plants for an Asian-themed water garden,
you would click on the Asian region of the
map to exclude any plants that arent
indigenous to Asia.

The Encyclopedias Plant Filter lets you filter out

unwanted plants from your plant list by
specifying various criteria.

The Notebook page lets you filter plants by

notes that youve entered previously on this
page. For example, you could enter the note
Front Yard for all plants that you want to
use in your front yard. When you are ready
to lay out the front yard of your landscape
plan you can go back to the Plant Filter and
limit your plant list to only the plants youve
pre-chosen for your front yard.

To use the Plant Filter:

1.

Select the Plant Filter tab on the left side of

the Encyclopedia window.

The Picture page lets you limit your plant

list by the part of the plant shown in its photo
(leaf, bark, fruit, etc.).
The filter option available on the Diseases
page is different, because it affects the
disease list, not the plant list. To use this
filter, click on the image that represents the
part of the plant affected or type of
infestation, then select the Encyclopedia tab
on the left side of the window to switch to the
regular Diseases page. For example, if you
are considering planting lilies or daffodils in
your garden, and want to know what type of
diseases these bulb plants may encounter,
click the Bulb image on the Diseases page (in
Plant Filter mode), then go into Encyclopedia
mode and select the Diseases page.

Plant
Filter
Tab

3.
2.

Each Encyclopedia page has different

filtering options. Click on the tabs along the
top of the Encyclopedia window to select the
page you want.
The main Encyclopedia page lets you select
the Plant Type, Watering Needs, Lighting
Preference, Soil Preference, Zone, Color
(for flower, leaf, autumn leaf, and fruit),
Height and Blooming Season.
The Plant Care Calendar page lets you
select the Complexity of Care required,
Speed of Growth (for both height and
spread), Life Expectancy and Usage.
The World Map page lets you select the
region of the world where the plants

Select the filter criteria. Each icon and scale

represents a specific plant criterion. As soon
as you click on an icon or move a slider,
filtering begins. To deselect an icon, click on
it again.
Note: If some of the icons disappear, it is
because no such plant is selectable within the
current criteria. For example, if you select
minimal water, the climber plant type icon
will disappear because there are no climbing
plants that will accept minimal watering.
If you select more than one icon within a
single group, then all plants with any of the
checked properties will be selected. For
example, selecting maximum light and
medium light will exclude all plants that
Users Guide

201

29

Chapter 29 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

flourish under minimal light (shade)
conditions. If icons/sliders of more than one
type are checked/moved, then plants that
satisfy all the chosen criteria will be selected.
For example, if you click on the deciduous
tree icon in the Type box, the full sun icon in
the Lighting Preference box, and the white
square on the Color box, then only hardwood
trees that flourish in full sunlight, require
minimal watering, and produce white
flowers will be selected.
4.

The total number of plants available based

on the filters you have applied is indicated
on the leaf in the upper right corner of the
window. If at any time you want to restore
the complete list of plants, click Reset.

Inserting Plants from the

Encyclopedia
The Plant Encyclopedia contains 7500 plant
species, not all of which are included in the
catalog. You can insert a plant directly from the
Encyclopedia if you want.
To insert a plant from the Encyclopedia:
1.

Select Tools > Gardening > Plant

Encyclopedia.

2.

In the Plant Encyclopedia, locate and select

the plant you want to insert. To select a plant
in the plant list, use the scrollbar beside the
plant list to scroll through the list of plants,
then click on the plant you want to view. By
default, common plant names are listed in
the plant list. You can switch to Latin names
by clicking the Latin button.
If you know the name of the plant you are
looking for, you can locate it more quickly by
typing the first few letters of the plants name
in the Search Edit field above the plant list.

202

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

The list of plants will move to the closest

match as you type.

Search
edit
field
Scrollbar

3.

Click the Select button. The Encyclopedia

closes, and the plant is attached to your
cursor.

4.

Insert the plant in your plan.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Adding a Plant from the

Encyclopedia to the Catalog
Although the catalog contains a vast array of
plants for you to insert, it does not contain all the
plants listed in the Plant Encyclopedia.
You can add any plant from the Plant
Encyclopedia to any catalog by following the
steps below.
To add a plant from the encyclopedia to the
current catalog:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager dialog, select Plants

from the Element drop box.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select or create

the group you want to add the plant to.

4.

Select Catalog > Add Element.

5.

In the Plants dialog, select the Plant Info tab.

6.

Click the Encyclopedia button to launch the

Plant Encyclopedia.

7.

On the Encyclopedias main page, select the

desired plant in the plant list.

Adding a Plant from the Encyclopedia to the Catalog

8.

Click Select. Notice that the Plant Info page

of the Plants dialog is now full with the
selected plants information.

9.

In the Name edit box, specify a name for

your plant (disable Auto Name if you want
to type in the name yourself).

10. Specify the remaining properties (Quantity

or Behavior) if desired, then click OK in the
Plants dialog. Note that the settings on the
Appearance page have no effect on the
plants appearance. The appearance of a
plant is determined by settings in the
Encyclopedia.
11. Click OK in the Catalog Manager dialog.
The plant is added to your catalog.

Users Guide

203

29

! &

(
In the real world, one of the first things you need to do to create a garden is to dig out a bed for
your plants. In Design Suite Deluxe, you can create a garden bed instantly by simply picking
points to define the outline of the bed. The bed is then automatically filled with a material of your
choice, such as soil or bark.
The versatile Fills tool is handy for more than just garden beds. Choose the Water fill to create a
pond, or the Sand fill to create a horseshoe pit. The possibilities are endless.

Fills

205

Chapter 30 Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas

Creating Filled Areas

You can use the Fills tool to define an area filled
with soil, sand, gravel, concrete, bark or water.
You define the area by picking points to draw its
outline. Filled areas automatically hug the terrain
they are inserted on.
To create a filled area:

Tip: If you want to create a raised garden you

may want to insert a raised garden box from the
catalog. See Inserting Exterior Structures on
page 244.
Note: You cannot insert a fill on top of another
fill.

Moving a Filled Area

1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Fills, or

click the Fills button on the Landscape
toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select

your fill material.

To move a filled area:

3.

Select a start point for

your filled area.

1.

Click on the filled area to select it.

2.

4.

Continue selecting
points to define the
boundary of the filled
area. Note that the last
point picked always
closes back to the start
point, so you dont have
to pick the start point
again.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element,

or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move
Whole Element.

3.

Click and drag the filled area to move it, then

release your mouse button.

5.

Rotating a Filled Area

You can rotate a filled area using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a filled area:

Right-click and select Finish.

1

You can move a filled area using the Move Whole

Element tool.

1.

Click on the filled area to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Hover your pointer over the corner you want

to rotate around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the fill, then release

your mouse button.

Resizing a Filled Area

You can resize a filled area by stretching one of its
edges.
To resize a filled area by stretching it:

206

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Click on the filled area to select it.

2.

Click on the edge you want to stretch.

3.

Hover your pointer over the solid blue

grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

4.

Click and drag to stretch the fill.

5.

Release your mouse button.

Reshaping a Filled Area

Reshaping a Filled Area

3.

You can change the shape of a filled area by

stretching its corners. You can do this by clicking
and dragging its grab handles.

Click and drag the fill edge to the desired

curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

To reshape a filled area by stretching:

1.

Click on the fill edge you want to curve.

1.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The fill

edge automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

Click on the filled area to select it. A grab

handle is displayed at each corner.

To curve a fill edge to a selected point:

Changing the Fill Material

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly
change the look of a fill.
2.

3.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to

stretch the filled area.

To change the fill material:

1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

path is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply. The
Landscape category
contains fill materials
like water, sand and
gravel.

4.

Click anywhere on the

surface of the fill. The
material is applied
immediately.

5.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Release your mouse button.

Curving a Filled Area

You can curve the edge of a fill using the Curve
tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and
drag the edge to curve it, or select a point to curve
to.
To curve a fill edge by clicking and dragging:
1.

Click on the fill edge that you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.
Users Guide

207

30

Chapter 30 Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas

Deleting a Filled Area

You can delete a filled area in a couple of easy
steps.
To delete a filled area:
1.

Click on the filled area to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Note: Deleting a fill returns the terrain to its

original state where the fill was located.

208

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Edging can be an attractive accent around gardens, ponds, sidewalks, driveways, and other
areas. It can also help retain fill materials and keep weeds out of your garden. You can choose
from PVC lawn edging, wood posts, or rails.
Drawing edging is easy just point and click to define the start and end point of the edging,
then keep clicking to add more segments.

Edging

209

Chapter 31 Edging

Inserting Edging

5.

Use the Edging tool to add PVC lawn edging,

wood posts, or wood, brick or concrete rails to
your landscape design. The width and height of
the edging is determined in the materials
properties. You insert edging by simply picking
points to define the end points and direction of
the edging.
To insert edging:
1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Edging,

or click the Edging button on the
Landscape toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select

your edging material.

3.

Select a start point for

the edging.

4.

Move your cursor in the

direction you want the
edging to run, then
select an endpoint for
the edging. You can
continue selecting
points in any direction
to add more sections to
the edging if you want.

Right-click and select Finish.

1

Tip: You can also insert decorative borders

around a garden. See Inserting Exterior
Accessories on page 252.

Cleaning Up Corners
If you edged around an area with posts or rails,
youll notice that the edging members connect on
center at the corners. You may want to lengthen
the members to form completely flush
intersections.

To clean up the corners of edging:

1.

210

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Click on one of the edging members. Blue

grab handles are displayed at the ends of the
member.

Changing the Length of Edging

2.

3.

Hover your pointer over the end grab

handle to display the Lengthen
cursor.
Click and drag the edging so that it meets up
with the outside of the member it is
connected to, then release your mouse
button.

Breaking Edging
When you create a break in edging, you can select
and edit the portions on either side of the break
independently.
To create a break in edging:
1.

Select the edging you want to break.

2.

Right-click and select Break, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Break.

3.

Click where you want to break the edging.

Moving Edging
4.

Select the other member.

5.

Click and drag the end so that it meets up

with the inside edge of the connecting
member, then release your mouse button.

You can move a piece of edging by clicking and

dragging it. If the member is attached to any other
edging members, the other members move along
with it.
To move edging:

Changing the Length of Edging

You can lengthen or shorten edging by clicking
and dragging its end points.
To change the length of edging:
1.

Select the edging you want to lengthen or

shorten. Grab handles are displayed at the
center and ends of the edging.

2.

Hover your pointer over the end you

want to stretch. The Lengthen cursor
is displayed.

3.

Click and drag to lengthen or shorten the

edging, then release your mouse button.

1.

Select the edging you want to move. If you

want to move multiple members, use
Shift+click to select the other members.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

blue grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the edging, then

release your mouse button.

Rotating Edging
You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a wall about
a selected point.
To rotate edging:
1.

Select the edging. A grab handle is displayed

at the center and ends of the edging.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Hover your pointer over the point you want

to rotate around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the edging, then

release your mouse button.

Users Guide

211

31

Chapter 31 Edging

Editing the Height or Width of

Edging
You can edit the height or width (thickness) of
edging on the edgings Basic property page.
To edit the height or width of edging:
1.

Click on the edging to select it. Use

Shift+click to select multiple segments if
necessary.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply.

4.

Click on the edging.

5.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Deleting Edging
You can delete edging in a
couple of easy steps.
To delete edging:

3.

To edit the height of the edging, change the

value in the Edge Height edit box.

4.

To edit the width (thickness) of the edging,

change the value in the Edge Width edit box.
Note that this variable is not available for
PVC edging.

5.

If the edging is post edging, you can control

the spacing between posts by editing the
value in the Approx. Edge Spacing edit box.

6.

Click OK.

Changing the Edging Material

You can apply a different color or material to
edging using the Materials Paintbrush.
To apply different materials to edging:
1.

212

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

edging is visible in the view.
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Select the edging to remove. You can select

multiple edging segments using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

*
You can insert pop-up sprinklers in your landscape plan with a single mouse click. When you
insert a sprinkler, the coverage of the spray is outlined with a dashed line in 2D plan view.

Irrrigation

213

Chapter 32 Irrigation

Inserting Irrigation
The catalog contains a wide selection of pop-up
sprinklers with varying ranges of spray. You
insert a sprinkler by simply pointing and clicking
with your mouse. When you insert a sprinkler,
the coverage of the spray is outlined with a
dashed line.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the sprinkler, then

release your mouse button.

Editing the Height of a Sprinkler

All sprinklers in the catalog are 3 tall. You can
edit the height of a sprinkler if you want.
To edit the height of a sprinkler:

To insert pop-up sprinklers:

1.

Select the sprinkler.

1.

Select Insert > Landscape >

Irrigation, or click the Irrigation
button on the Landscape toolbar.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

2.

In the catalog, select the

sprinkler you want to
insert.

3.

On the Basic page, edit the value in the

Height edit box.

4.

Click OK.

3.

4.

Position the sprinkler

where you want it, then
click to insert it. You can
continue inserting more
sprinklers if you want.

Editing a Sprinklers Spray

Coverage

Right-click and select

Finish.

To edit a sprinklers spray properties:

You can edit the distance covered by a sprinklers

spray.

1.

Select the sprinkler.

Moving Sprinklers

2.

You can move a sprinkler by simply clicking and

dragging it.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the size values on the Basic property

page. For most sprinklers you would edit the
Width and Depth values. The Adjustable
sprinkler in the catalog lets you specify a
custom radius and included angle for the
spray.

4.

Click OK.

To move a sprinkler:
1.

Select the sprinkler.

2.

Hover your pointer over the sprinklers

square grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

Deleting a Sprinkler

4.

When the element is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

You can delete a sprinkler in a couple of easy

steps.

Rotating Sprinklers
You can rotate a sprinkler (and its spray) by
simply clicking and dragging its rotation handle.
To rotate a sprinkler:
1.

Select the sprinkler.

2.

Hover your pointer over the sprinklers

triangular grab handle.

214

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To delete a sprinkler:
1.

Select the sprinkler.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

0
Fences can add beauty, privacy and security to your property. Fences are drawn with ease in
Design Suite Deluxe. Just point and click to fence off a yard in seconds!
The catalog contains an assortment of fences in a variety of materials, including concrete, stone
and wood. You can even add a white picket fence for that classic look.
Once youve drawn your fence you can easily pop a gate into it. You can choose a style that
matches your fence, or choose an entirely different style to create a stylish accent.

215

Chapter 33 Fences & Gates

Inserting a Fence

5.

To insert a fence, you draw it just like a wall by

selecting a start point and end point. This allows
you to create a fence of any length. You can
continue selecting points in other directions to
add on to the fencing (if you want to fence around
your yard, for example).

Select an end point for the fence. If you want

you can continue adding sections to the fence
in any direction by simply selecting points.
3

Tip: If you have inserted a site boundary in your

plan, you can draw your fence on top of the lot
lines for ease. The fence then acts as a visual
indicator of your property extents in 3D.
To insert a fence:
1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Fences/Gates

> Fences, or click the Fences/Gates button
on the Landscape toolbar and select Fences.
2

2.

In the catalog, select the

fence type you want to
insert.

3.

Select a start point for the

fence.

4.

216

Move your cursor in the

direction you want the
fence to run. The fence
stretches as you move
your cursor.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

6.

Right-click and select Finish.

Stretching a Fence Layout

Stretching a Fence Layout

Parts of a Fence

You can stretch a fence layout by clicking and

dragging one of the fence segments.

Post
Boards

To stretch a fence layout:

1.

Click on the fence segment you want to

move.

2.

Position your pointer over the center

blue grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to stretch the layout, then

release your mouse button.

Secondary Post
Rails

Changing the Length of a Fence

You can lengthen or shorten a fence by clicking
and dragging its end points.
To change the length of a fence:

Editing the Properties of a Fence

1.

Select the fence you want to lengthen or

shorten.

2.

Position your cursor over the fence

end that you want to stretch. The
Lengthen cursor is displayed.

You can change the height of a fence, specify

whether or not you want the fence to hug the
terrain, edit the size and position of fence posts,
and edit the dimensions of the rails and boards.

3.

Click and drag to lengthen or shorten the

fence, then release your mouse button.

To edit the properties of a fence:

Creating a Break in a Fence

When you create a break in a fence, you can select
the fence portions on either side of the break
independently. You may want to insert one or
more breaks in a fence so that you can then
remove certain segments of it.

1.

Click on the fence to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

To create a break in a fence:

1.

Select the fence you want to break.

2.

Right-click and select Break, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Break.

3.

Click where you want to break the fence.

Users Guide

217

33

Chapter 33 Fences & Gates

3.

To change the type of fence, click on the

appropriate graphic in the Type area. Choose
from General, Privacy, Picket or Ranch. The
General style just inserts a plain, flat surface.

4.

To change the height of the fence, edit the

values in the Fence Height edit box.

5.

If you want the bottom of the fence to hug the

terrain, check the Hug Terrain? check box,
then select either Raked or Stepped from the
Slope Type drop box.

spacing of intermediate posts from the first

main post.
Max. Post Spacing. The maximum
allowable spacing between posts. If you
stretch the fence, the spacing between posts
increases. More posts are added to prevent
the spacing from exceeding the maximum.
Post Width. The width (and depth) of fence
posts.
Post Extension. The distance the fence posts
extend past the top of the fence boards.
Post Rotation. Determines the rotation of
the connecting post where two fence
segments connect. Choosing Half Way rotates
the connecting post half way between the
angle. Choosing None leaves the connecting
post aligned to the first fence.

Raked

7.

To change the dimensions of the top, middle

or bottom rail, edit the parameters in the
Rails area.
Rail Width. The width of the rail members.
Rail Depth. The thickness of the rail
members.
Top Rail Height. The distance from the
bottom of the fence to the top rail.
Middle Rail Height. The distance from the
top rail to the middle rail.
Bottom Rail Height. The distance from the
middle rail to the bottom rail.

Stepped

8.

To change the dimensions of the boards in a

privacy or picket fence, edit the parameters
in the Boards area.
Board Style. Choose either Squared or
Pointed. You would typically see pointed
boards on a picket fence.
Board Width. The width of one fence board.

6.

To change the dimensions or position of the

fence posts, edit the parameters in the Posts
area.
Secondary Post Position. Choosing
Centered starts the spacing of intermediate
posts from the middle of the fence to create a
balanced look. Choose From Start starts the

218

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Board Depth. The thickness of one fence

board.
Board Spacing. The distance from the center
of one board to the center of the next board.
Board Offset. The offset of the bottom of the
fence boards from the ground.

Changing the Fencing Material

9.

When youre done editing properties, click

OK.

Changing the Fencing Material

You can apply a different color or material to the
boards, posts or rails of a fence. For example, you
can select a different type of wood for a wood
fence.
To apply different materials to a fence:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

fence is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply.

4.

Click on the fence

component you want to
apply the material to.
Materials are applied
separately to the
individual parts of the
fence (fence boards,
posts and rails).
Clicking on one
component will apply
the material to all
components of the same type. For example,
clicking on one post will apply the material
to all posts.

5.

Inserting a Gate
The catalog contains a variety of gate types,
including wood, picket and ranch style gates.
Gates just pop themselves right into fences.
Naturally, if you are inserting a gate in a fence,
you want to choose a gate size that corresponds to
the fence size. For example, if your fence is a 6
wood privacy fence, you would likely choose the
6 wood privacy gate. Gates are shown slightly
open so you can identify them easily in 2D and
3D views.
To insert a gate:
1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Fences/Gates

> Gates, or click the Fences/Gates button on
the Landscape toolbar and select Gates.

2.

In the catalog, select the

gate you want to insert.

3.

Position the gate where

you want it, then click to
insert it. The gate will
automatically pop itself
into the fence when you
position it in the fence.

When you are finished applying materials,

right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Fence
You can delete a fence in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a fence:
1.

Select the fence. You can select multiple fence

segments using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Users Guide

219

33

Chapter 33 Fences & Gates

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select

Flip Swing, or select Edit > Modify
Elements > Flip Swing.

Editing the Properties of a Gate

You can change the height and width of a gate as
well as the dimensions of the rails and boards.
You can also control how far the gate is open in
2D and 3D views.
To edit the properties of a gate:
1.

Click on the gate to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To change the type of gate, click on the

appropriate graphic in the Type area. Choose
from General, Privacy, Picket or Ranch. The
General style just inserts a plain, flat door.

4.

To change the overall size of the gate, edit the

values in the Gate Width and Gate Height
edit boxes.

Flipping a Gates Swing

5.

Use the Flip Swing tool to flip only the swing of a

gate. The gate will be hinged on the opposite side,
but it will still open in the same direction, either
in or out.

To change the swing type, select either Left

or Right from the Swing Type drop box. This
determines which side the gate is hinged on.

6.

If you want to change how far the gate is

open in 3D views, edit the percentage in the
3D Percent Open edit box. To change how
far the gate is open in 2D views, change the
percentage in the 2D Percent Open edit box.

Moving a Gate
You can move a gate back and forth inside a fence
by simply clicking and dragging it.
To move a gate:
1.

Click on the gate to select it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the gate, then release

your mouse button.

Flipping a Gate
You can use the Flip Opening tool to flip an entire
gate around. If the gate originally opened out, it
now opens in; if it was hinged on the left, it is now
hinged on the right (and vice versa).
To flip a gate:
1.

Click the gate to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select

Flip Opening, or select Edit > Modify
Elements > Flip Opening.

To flip a gate swing:

1.

220

Click the gate to select it.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Deleting a Gate
7.

To change the dimensions of the top, middle

or bottom rail, edit the parameters in the
Rails area.
Rail Width. The width of the rail members.
Rail Depth. The thickness of the rail
members.
Top Rail Height. The distance from the
bottom of the gate to the top rail.
Middle Rail Height. The distance from the
top rail to the middle rail.
Bottom Rail Height. The distance from the
middle rail to the bottom rail.

8.

To change the dimensions of the boards in a

privacy or picket fence, edit the parameters
in the Boards area.
Board Style. Choose either Squared or
Pointed. You would typically see pointed
boards on a picket fence.
Board Width. The width of one fence board.
Board Depth. The thickness of one fence
board.
Board Spacing. The distance from the center
of one board to the center of the next board.
Board Offset. The offset of the bottom of the
gate boards from the ground.

9.

When youre done editing properties, click

OK.

Deleting a Gate
You can delete a gate in a couple of easy steps.
When you delete a gate, the fence returns to its
original state.
To delete a gate:
1.

Select the gate.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Users Guide

221

33

.
Building a deck is a great way to add more living space to your home without building an
addition. With outdoor living spaces becoming more and more desirable, Design Suite Deluxe
gives you all the tools you need to create the exact look you want, quickly and easily.
The Deck Builder Wizard makes building a deck so simple just select the material and shape
you want, and the deck is built for you automatically. Or if you prefer, you can create the precise
size and shape you want using the Deck tool. You can even add levels to your deck if you want
for a truly customized look. Once youve got the main platform up, you can point and click to
insert stairs of your choice.

223

Chapter 34 Decks

Using the Deck Builder Wizard

3.

In the Deck Wizard dialog, click Next.

4.

Select the decking material you would like to

use.

5.

Click Next.

6.

In the Shape area, click on the shape that most

closely resembles the shape you want to
create. Remember that you can edit the shape
after the deck has been inserted.

7.

In the Size area, specify the desired

dimensions for the deck.

The Deck Builder Wizard takes all the work out of

building a deck because it does it all for you! Just
select the decking material and deck shape, enter
the dimensions you want, then point and click to
insert the deck.
Decks are inserted on the current building
location rather than the terrain. This ensures your
deck is created at the correct height, and makes it
possible to create multi-level decks.
After inserting a deck you can move, stretch,
rotate, raise or lower it if needed, as well as edit
its properties, which include settings for posts,
railings and skirting.
To build a deck using the Deck Builder
Wizard:
1.

2.

224

In the Building Locations drop box, select the

location you want to associate the deck with.
The height of a deck is determined by the
Height above current location variable in
the deck properties. You can edit this value
after the deck has been inserted if necessary.
Select Tools > Design Wizards > Deck
Builder.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Launching the Deck Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup

8.

Click Next.

Launching the Deck Builder

Wizard Automatically at Startup
If you want you can choose to launch the Deck
Builder Wizard automatically every time you
start a new project.
To launch the Deck Builder Wizard
automatically at startup:

9.

In the Deck Rotation area, select the desired

rotation for your deck. This is how the deck
will be oriented when it is attached to your
cursor.

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

In the Startup area, check the Launch wizard

when starting new project check box.

4.

Select Deck Builder from the adjacent drop

box.

5.

Click OK.

Building a Deck with the Deck Tool

10. In the Decking Direction area, select the

direction you want the deck boards to run.

You can use the Deck tool to build a deck of

virtually any shape and size.

11. Click Next.

Decks are inserted on the current building

location rather than the terrain. This ensures your
deck is created at the correct height, and makes it
possible to create multi-level decks.
Once youve inserted a deck you can move,
stretch, rotate, raise or lower it if needed, as well
as edit its properties, which include settings for
posts, railings and skirting.
To create a deck:
1.

In the Building Locations drop box, select the

location you want to associate the deck with.
The height of a deck is determined by the
Height above current location variable in
the deck properties. You can edit this value
after the deck has been inserted if necessary.

12. Click Finish. The Deck Wizard closes, and

the deck is attached to your cursor, ready to
be inserted.
13. Position the deck where you want it, then
click to insert it.
Users Guide

225

34

Chapter 34 Decks
2.

Select Insert > Landscape > Decks >

Decks, or click the Decks button on the
Landscape toolbar and select Decks.

Rotating a Deck
You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a deck about
a selected point.
To rotate a deck:

3.

In the catalog, select the

decking material you
want to use.

4.

Select a start point for the

deck outline. Continue
selecting points until the
outline is defined. (You
do not have to select the
start point again because
the last point you pick is
always closed back to the start point.)
2

1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its

edges. A grab handle is displayed at each
corner.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Hover your pointer over the point you want

to rotate around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the deck, then

release your mouse button.

Note: When you rotate a deck, the direction of the

deck boards does not change. You can change the
decking direction if you want.

Changing the Direction of Deck

Boards
You can use the Set Decking Direction tool to
change the direction of your deck boards.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Deck
You can move a deck using the Move Whole
Element tool.
To move a deck:
1.

Click on one of the decks edges to select the

deck.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element,

or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move
Whole Element. Alternatively you can
Shift+click to select the remaining edges.

3.

Click and drag the deck to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

226

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To change the direction of deck boards:

1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its

edges.

2.

Right-click and select Set Decking

Direction, or select Edit > Modify Elements
> Set Decking Direction.

3.

Select two points to define a line that runs in

the direction you want the deck boards to
run. The deck boards update to match the
direction of the line.

Stretching a Deck
You can stretch a deck in any direction by clicking
and dragging one of its edges.
To stretch a deck:
1.

Click on the deck edge you want to stretch.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

blue grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

Reshaping a Deck
3.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

You can change the shape of a deck by stretching

any of its corners.

On the Support property page, edit the value

in the Height above current location edit
box.

4.

Click OK.

To reshape a deck:

Editing Deck Post Properties

Click and drag to stretch the deck, then

release your mouse button.

Reshaping a Deck

1.

Click on the deck to select it. A grab handle is

displayed at each corner.

2.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to

stretch the deck.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Curving a Deck Edge

You can curve a deck edge using the Curve tool.
Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the
deck edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to.
To curve a deck edge by clicking and
dragging:
1.

Click on the deck edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the deck edge to the desired

curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

To curve a deck edge to a selected point:

1.

Click on the deck edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The

deck edge automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

By default, the support system of a deck consists

of 4x4 wood posts spaced 8 apart. Posts are
sunken 3-6 into the ground for adequate
support. You can edit the post type, post spacing
and post depth. You can also disable posts
altogether if you want.
To edit deck post properties:
1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its

edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Decks dialog, select the Support tab.

4.

If you want to remove posts from the deck,

uncheck the Include Posts check box in the
Supports area.

5.

To select a different member to use for deck

posts, click the Select button next to the
Include Posts edit box, then make your
selection from the catalog.

6.

To edit the properties of the currently

selected member, click the Edit button, then
make the desired changes in the Columns
dialog.

7.

To change the spacing between posts along

beams, edit the value in the Spacing along
Beam edit box.

8.

To change the depth of the posts in the

ground, edit the value in the Depth below
ground level edit box. This effectively
changes the overall height of the post, but
does not affect the portion shown above
ground.

9.

Click OK.

Changing the Height of a Deck

By default, decks are inserted at the floor level of
the current building location.
To change the height of a deck:
1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its

edges.

Users Guide

227

34

Chapter 34 Decks

Displaying and Editing Footings

Under Deck Posts

3.

In the Decks dialog, select the Frame tab.

4.

To change the way the beams are

constructed, click on the desired
configuration in the Construction area. Beams
are the vertical members that rest on or are
attached to the posts, and that support the
deck joists.

5.

To select a different material for the deck

boards, click the Select button in the Decking
area, then make your selection from the
catalog.

6.

To edit the properties of the currently

selected deck board member, click Edit in the
Decking area, then make the desired changes
in the Decking dialog.

7.

To edit the spacing between deck boards,

edit the value in the Spacing edit box in the
Decking area.

8.

To change the amount the deck boards hang

over the deck frame, edit the value in the
Overhang edit box in the Decking area.

9.

To adjust the angle of the deck boards in

relation to the joists, edit the value in the
Angle from Joists edit box.

You can control the display of footings by editing

deck properties. You can also choose the footing
material you want to use.
To create footings under deck posts:
1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its

edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

On the Support property page, check the

Include Footings check box in the Supports
area.

4.

Click the Select button next to the Include

Footings edit box, then select the desired
footing type from the catalog.

5.

To edit the properties of the currently

selected footing type, click the Edit button,
then make the desired changes in the Mono
Footings dialog.

6.

Click OK.

Editing the Deck Frame

You have complete control over the way a deck is
constructed. You can specify the way you want
the beams constructed in relation to the posts.
You can also select specific materials to use for
deck boards, beams and joists, as well as edit the
spacing and overhang of these members.
To edit the deck frame:
1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its

edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

10. To select a different material for the deck

joists, click the Select button in the Joists
area, then make your selection from the
catalog.
11. To edit the properties of the currently
selected joist member, click Edit in the Joists

228

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Changing the Railing Style

area, then make the desired changes in the
Members dialog.

3.

In the Decks dialog, select the Accessories

tab.

4.

In the Railings area, click the Select button.

5.

Select the desired railing type from the

catalog.

6.

Click OK.

12. To edit the spacing between joists, edit the

value in the Spacing edit box in the Joists
area.
13. To change the amount the joists hang over
the beams, edit the value in the Overhang
edit box in the Joists area. The general rule of
thumb is to limit the extension to 1/3 of their
length.
14. To select a different material for the deck
beams, click the Select button in the Beams
area, then make your selection from the
catalog.
15. To edit the properties of the currently
selected beam member, click Edit in the
Beams area, then make the desired changes in
the Members dialog.
16. To change the amount the beams extend past
each other, edit the value in the Overhang
edit box in the Beams area.
17. Once youve specified the deck frame
properties, click OK.

Changing the Railing Style

You can change a decks railing type by making a
selection on the Accessories property page.
To change a decks railing style:
1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its

edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Controlling the Display of Deck

Railings
You can delete railings from selected deck edges
to provide access to the deck. If you want to
remove all the railings on a deck, you need to
select all of the decks edges first.
To control the display of deck railings:
1.

Click on the deck edge you want to remove a

railing from, or add a railing to. A blue grab
handle is displayed at the center of the
selected deck edge. If you want to remove
railings from other edges as well, use
Shift+click to select the additional edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Decks dialog, select the Accessories

tab.

4.

Disable the Include railing on selected

edges check box.

5.

Click OK.

Note: If you add stairs to your deck, an opening

will be automatically created in the railing.
Users Guide

229

34

Chapter 34 Decks

Controlling the Display of Deck

Skirting
Skirting is basically screening along the bottom of
a deck that conceals the underside of the deck
frame. It can also keep out animals and debris.
Most decks display skirting. You can choose to
turn skirting off if you want. If displaying
skirting, you can select the skirting material you
want to use, such as lattice.

Inserting Openings in a Deck

Once you have created a deck, you can insert a
custom opening in it of virtually any shape and
size using the Cut Opening tool.
You create the opening by picking points to
define its outline.
To insert an opening in a deck:
1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its

edges.

To display skirting on your deck:

1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its

edges.

2.

Right-click and select Cut Opening, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Cut Opening.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select a start point for the opening.

4.

3.

In the Decks dialog, select the Accessories

tab.

Continue selecting points to define the

opening. As you select points, the opening is
created. The last point picked is always
connected back to the start point to form a
closed shape, so you dont have to pick the
start point again.

5.

When you have selected your final point,

right-click and select Finish.

Resizing a Deck Opening

You can resize a deck opening by clicking and
dragging one of its edges.
To stretch a deck opening:
1.

Click on the opening edge you want to move.

The entire opening is highlighted, and a blue
grab handle appears at the center of the
opening edge you selected.

4.

If you want to display skirting on your deck,

check the Include skirting on selected
edges check box.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

5.

Click the Select button in the Skirting area,

then select the desired skirting material from
the catalog.

3.

Click and drag in the direction you want to

stretch.

6.

Click OK.

4.

When the opening is the correct size, release

your mouse button.

Reshaping a Deck Opening

You can change the shape of a deck opening by
stretching its corners. You can do this by clicking
and dragging.

230

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Curving a Deck Opening Edge

To reshape a deck opening by stretching:

Deleting a Deck

1.

Click on the opening to select it. A grab

handle is displayed at each corner.

You can remove a deck completely in a couple of

easy steps.

2.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to

stretch the opening.

To remove a deck:

3.

Release your mouse button.

1.

Curving a Deck Opening Edge

Click on one of the decks edges to select the

deck.

2.

You can curve an opening edge using the Curve

tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and
drag the opening edge to curve it, or select a point
to curve to.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Note: If you added stairs to your deck, you need

to remove them separately.

To curve an opening edge by clicking and

dragging:

Adding Stairs to a Deck

1.

Click on the opening edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the opening edge to the

desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

To curve an opening edge to a selected point:

You can add a staircase to your deck with a single

mouse click. Stairs automatically snap to your
deck for easy insertion, and the railings on the
deck are automatically removed to allow for the
stair opening. By default, stairs extend from the
deck platform to down to the terrain, so theres
absolutely nothing you need to calculate. You can
control how far they extend down if needed.
Also, deck stairs have a railing on both sides by
default, but you can remove one or both of them
if you want after the stairs have been inserted.

1.

Click on the opening edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The

opening edge automatically curves to the
point.

To add stairs to a deck:

Click to finish.

1.

4.

Removing Deck Openings

You can choose either pressure treated or cedar

stairs, and edit the stair dimensions to get the
exact result you want.

Select Insert > Landscape > Decks > Deck

Stairs, or click the Decks button on the
Landscape toolbar and select Deck Stairs.

You can remove an opening from a deck using the

Remove Opening tool.
Note: You cannot remove an opening using
Delete.
To remove a deck opening:
1.

Click on one of the openings edges.

2.

Right-click and select Remove Opening, or

select Edit > Modify Elements > Remove
Opening. The opening is removed instantly.

Users Guide

231

34

Chapter 34 Decks
2.

3.

4.

Editing the Size of Deck Stairs

In the catalog, select the

type of stairs you
would like to insert.

You can edit the overall height and width of deck

stairs, the width of the steps, and the riser height.

Move your pointer

close to the deck edge.
Position the stairs
where you want them,
then click to insert
them.

To edit the size of deck stairs:

Right-click and select

Finish.

1.

Click on the staircase to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the properties on the Basic tab.

Moving Deck Stairs

You can move a deck staircase by clicking and
dragging it along the deck edge. Note that you
cant move deck stairs away from the deck, but
you can move them to another deck edge. Also,
the opening in the deck railing adjusts with the
move of the deck stairs.
To move a staircase by clicking and dragging:
1.

Click on the staircase to select it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center

grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag the staircase along the deck

edge to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Parts of a Staircase

Extend Stair. The option selected determines

where the base of the stairs sit. You can either
change where they extend to, or specify an
explicit height. By default, the deck stairs are
inserted at deck level and run down to the
terrain.
Down to terrain. Extends the stairs down to
the ground.

Riser

Down to previous location. Extends the stairs to

the floor level of the building location below
the current one.

Tread

Nosing
Stringer

Down to deck location. Extends the stairs down

to the floor level of the building location the
deck is associated with. You might use this if
you have raised your deck above the floor
level of the current location and want to
extend the stairs down.
Explicit Height. Extends the stairs down a
specific distance that you define in the
Overall Height edit box.

232

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Controlling the Display of Railings on Deck Stairs

Overall Height. Available only if Explicit
Height is selected in the Extend Stair drop
box, this lets you define a fixed height for the
stairs.
Max. Riser Height. The maximum distance
allowed between individual steps. Note that
if your riser height exceeds the width of the
member you are using for your riser boards,
two or more boards will be inserted for each
riser.
Tread Run. The width of each step. The
width of a step is measured from the nose of
the step to the riser of the next step. Note that
if your tread run exceeds the width of the
member you are using for your treads, two or
more boards will be inserted for each step.

Editing Stringers, Risers and

Treads
You can specify detailed settings for the stringers,
risers and treads on your deck stairs.
To edit stringer, riser or tread details:
1.

Click on the staircase to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Deck Stairs dialog, select the Details

tab.

4.

To change the stringer style, click the

appropriate graphic in the Stringer area.
Choose from Notched, Under and Side.

5.

Edit the remaining properties as desired.

They are described below.

Overall Width. The width of the stairs

measured from one end of a step to the other
end of the step.

Controlling the Display of Railings

on Deck Stairs
By default, deck stairs have a railing on both
sides. You can choose to have a railing on the left
side only or right side only, or remove them
altogether.
To remove railings from deck stairs:
1.

Click on the staircase to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Railings area, uncheck the Include

Railings check box if you dont want any
railings on your deck stairs. If you want one
or more railings on the stairs, leave this check
box enabled.

4.

If you want a railing on the left side of the

stairs, select Railing on left side from the
drop box. If you want a railing on the right
side of the stairs, select Railing on right side
from the drop box. If you want a railing on
both sides of the stairs, select Railing on
both sides.

5.

Click OK.

Stringer
Spacing. The spacing between the outside
stringers and intermediate stringers.
Height. The distance from the bottom of the
stringer to the underside of the tread/riser
intersection. Specifying a stringer height that
is the same as the overall height of the
staircase creates a staircase that is completely

Users Guide

233

34

Chapter 34 Decks
closed on the sides. In other words, the
stringers go right to the ground.

6.

Click OK.

Deleting Deck Stairs

You can delete a set of stairs in a couple of easy
steps.
To delete deck stairs:

Height = 12

Height = 4

Width. The thickness of the stringer

members.
Riser
Closed Riser. Inserts riser boards under the
steps. If you leave this disabled, the staircase
will be open under the treads.
Select. Click this button to select a riser
board to use.
Spacing. When the riser comprises two or
more boards, this is the spacing between the
boards.
Angle. The tilt of the riser boards. A value of
0 means the board is perpendicular to the
step (straight up and down). A value above 0
tilts the riser down toward the back of the
staircase. The maximum angle allowed is 20.
0

20

Tread
Select. Click this button to select the type of
wood to use for your steps.
Spacing. When each step comprises two or
more boards, this is the spacing between
those boards.
Nosing. The distance the step extends past
the riser.
Overhang.The distance the ends of the steps
extend past the outer stringers.

234

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Click on the stairs.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

&
The Shed Builder Wizard steps you through the creation of a custom shed, then builds it for you
instantly!
Simply select the shed style you want, then enter the dimensions you would like it to have. Next,
define the desired door/window combination, and then select custom materials for the roof,
walls, floor, door and window. Finally, just click to insert your new shed where you want it!
Once inserted, you can further edit the sheds individual components if needed.
Note: If you would like to insert a pre-made shed from the catalog, use the Exterior Structures
tool. You can find sheds in the Storage and Enclosures category of the catalog.

235

Chapter 35 Shed Builder Wizard

Building a Shed with the Shed

Builder Wizard

5.

Click Next.

6.

On the Door and Window Configuration

screen, click on the door/window
combination that you would like for the front
of the shed. If you would like a window on
the left side of the shed, enable the Include
Window on left side check box. If you would
like a window on the right side of the shed,
enable the Include Window on right side
check box.

7.

Click Next.

8.

On the Shed Elements screen you can select a

custom materials to use for the sheds roof,
walls, floor, door and window. Just click the
desired elements button, then make a
selection from the catalog. If you have
defined your own Shed Configuration in the
Catalog Manager, you can simply select it
from the Shed Configuration drop box. For
more information about shed configurations,
see Creating a Custom Shed Builder Wizard
Configuration on page 237.

The Shed Builder Wizard will create a custom

shed for you in a few easy steps. All you need to
do is select a shed style, enter the desired
dimensions, and specify the door and window
placement. You can even select what materials
you would like to use for the roof, walls, floor,
door and window.
Once youve inserted the shed in your plan, you
can further edit its individual components to
achieve the exact size and appearance you want.
To build a shed:
1.

2.

Select Tools > Design Wizards > Shed

Builder.

On the Welcome screen, click Next.

3.

On the next screen, click on the graphic that

most closely resembles the style of shed you
would like to build.

4.

Enter the desired dimensions for the shed in

the Length and Width edit boxes.

236

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Moving a Shed
9.

Click Next.

4.

Without holding your mouse button down,

move your mouse to rotate the element. The
element will rotate in the direction you move
the mouse.

5.

When the shed is at the desired rotation, click

to anchor it in its new position.

Editing a Shed

10. On the final screen, click Finish. The shed is

attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted.
11. Position the shed where you want it, then
click to insert it.

Moving a Shed
You can move a shed that you have created by
creating a selection window around it, then using
the Move tool.
To move a shed:
1.

In 2D plan view, click and drag a selection

window around the entire shed.

2.

Right-click and select Move, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Move. The
Move cursor is displayed.

If you have created and inserted a shed with the

Shed Builder Wizard, you can edit its roof, walls,
floor, door and window individually. Just click on
the element you want to edit, then edit it as you
would if it were part of a house. For example, you
can stretch the walls to make the shed bigger or
smaller, or select a different window size.

Launching the Shed Builder

Wizard Automatically at Startup
If you want you can choose to launch the Shed
Builder Wizard automatically every time you
start a new project.
To launch the Shed Builder Wizard
automatically at startup:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

In the Startup area, check the Launch wizard

when starting new project check box.

Rotating a Shed

4.

Once you have inserted your shed, you may find

that you need to rotate it. You can do this easily
using the Rotate tool.

Select Shed Builder from the adjacent drop

box.

5.

Click OK.

3.

Click and drag the shed to move it, then

release your mouse button.

To rotate a shed:
1.

In 2D plan view, click and drag a selection

window around the entire shed.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate. The
Rotate cursor is displayed.

3.

Select a base point for the rotation, such as a

corner of the shed.

Creating a Custom Shed Builder

Wizard Configuration
A Shed Builder Wizard configuration determines
what elements are used for a sheds roof, walls,
floor, door and window. You are asked to select a
configuration for your shed when you run the
Shed Builder Wizard.
You can edit any of the existing configurations
that are available in the Shed Builder Wizard, or
create your own. Customized configurations are
saved automatically and will be available when
Users Guide

237

35

Chapter 35 Shed Builder Wizard

you run the Shed Builder Wizard in the current
project, or any other project.

4.

To access the shed configuration library:

In the catalog dialog, select the specific style

you want to apply to the selected element
type, then click OK.

5.

Continue selecting styles for the remaining

element types.

1.

2.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click any element in the catalog
panel and select Catalog Manager.
In the Catalog Manager dialog, select
Libraries > Shed Configuration.

To add a new configuration to the list:

1.

Click the Add Item button below the

left pane, or right-click in the left pane
and select Add Item. An entry is added
to the list.

2.

Type a name for the configuration, then press

ENTER.

To edit a shed configuration:

1.

Select the configuration in the list. The

element selections for the configuration are
listed in the center pane.

2.

In the center pane, select an element type you

want to specify a style for.

3.

Click the Select button.

238

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To delete a configuration from the list:

1.

Select the configuration in the list.

2.

Click the Delete button below the left

pane, or right-click in the left pane and
select Delete.

1
The Design Suite Deluxe catalog includes a great selection of exterior furniture so you can relax,
eat and entertain outdoors. Furniture types include patio tables, patio chairs, picnic tables,
loungers and benches.
Exterior furniture can be inserted on the terrain, or on a building location.

Exterior Furniture

239

Chapter 36 Exterior Furniture

Inserting Exterior Furniture

To rotate exterior furniture:

Inserting exterior furniture is easy just point

and click. When inserting exterior furniture, you
have the option of inserting it on the terrain, or on
a building location.

1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

4.

When the element is at the desired rotation,

release your mouse button.

To insert exterior furniture:

1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Furniture, or click the Exterior
Furniture button on the Landscape
toolbar. Then, select either Exterior
Furniture on Terrain or Exterior Furniture
on Location, depending on where you want
to insert the element. The Exterior Furniture
on Location option lets you insert the
element on a deck, or on anything that is
associated with a building location.

2.

In the catalog, select the

element you want to
insert.

3.

Position the element

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Editing the Size of Exterior

Furniture
You can edit the height, width and depth of most
exterior furniture.
To edit the size of exterior furniture:
1.

Select the element.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the values on the Basic page. The

Uniform Scale option ensures that the
element scales uniformly when you change
one of its dimensions.

4.

Click OK.

Moving Exterior
Furniture
You can move exterior furniture in plan view by
simply clicking and dragging it.
To move exterior furniture:
1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the elements

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

Rotating Exterior Furniture

You can rotate exterior furniture by clicking and
dragging it.

240

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Applying Different Colors or Finishes to Exterior Furniture

Applying Different Colors or

Finishes to Exterior Furniture
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly
apply a color, fabric or finish to any exterior
furnishing element.
To apply materials to exterior furniture:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

furnishing element is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the color or
material you want to
apply. You can find an
assortment of colors in
the Paint category.

4.

Click on the component

you want to apply the
material to. Materials
are applied separately
to the individual parts
of the element. For
example, you can apply
a specific color to a
tabletop, and a different color to the legs of
the table.

5.

When you are finished applying materials,

right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Exterior Furniture

You can delete any piece of exterior furniture in a
couple of easy steps.
To delete exterior furniture:
1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Users Guide

241

36

1
Design Suite Deluxe offers an excellent selection of exterior structures to make your outdoor living
space more functional. These include play gyms, swings, sandboxes, trampolines, tennis and
volleyball courts, detached garages, sheds, gazebos, arbors, garden boxes, greenhouses, pools
and hot tubs.
If you are creating a landscape plan and do not have a model in your project, you can insert a
house template to create your landscape plan around.
All structures are inserted with a single mouse click and can be easily moved, rotated and edited.

Exterior Structures

243

Chapter 37 Exterior Structures

Inserting Exterior Structures

Inserting exterior structures is easy just point
and click.
To insert an exterior structure:
1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Structures, or click the Exterior
Structures button on the Landscape
toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the

structure you want to
insert.

3.

Position the structure

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

4.

This can interfere with the selection of other

elements near the house. If you have inserted
elements around the house, such as plants, and
want to select them, you may want to use the
View Filter to make the house template nonselectable for ease of editing your landscape plan.
Another thing to note is that the house templates
exterior walls are not visible in 2D. You only see
the roof line. If you want to insert things like fills
up against the exterior walls of the house, you
will need to either draw them in 3D, or draw
them in 2D and then move them into place in 3D.

Moving Exterior Structures

You can move exterior structures in plan view by
simply clicking and dragging them.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To move an exterior structure:

1.

Select the element you want to move.

A Note About House

Templates

2.

Hover your pointer over the elements

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

A house template is basically the exterior shell of

a finished home. If you are creating a landscape
plan and your project does not contain a model,
you can insert a house template to serve as the
focal point of your plan.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

Although a house template looks like a real

house, it cant be edited like a real model can. It is
considered a single-click element, so clicking on
any part of the template selects the entire house.
It is important to note that when you select the
house template, the invisible bounding box is
always square or rectangular, and does not
necessarily follow the shape of the house outline.

Bounding
Box

244

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Rotating Exterior Structures

You can rotate exterior structures by clicking and
dragging them.
To rotate an exterior structure:
1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

4.

When the element is at the desired rotation,

release your mouse button.

Editing the Size of an Exterior Structure

Editing the Size of an Exterior

Structure
You can edit the height, width and depth of most
exterior structures.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the color or
material you want to
apply.

4.

Click on the component

you want to apply the
material to. Some
structures can have
different materials
applied to individual
parts. For example, the
roof of a shed can be
different from the
sheds walls.

5.

When you are finished applying materials,

right-click and select Finish.

To edit the size of an exterior structure:

1.

Select the structure.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the values on the Basic page. The

Uniform Scale option ensures that the
element scales uniformly when you change
one of its dimensions.

Deleting an Exterior Structure

You can delete an exterior structure in a couple of
easy steps.
To delete an exterior structure:

4.

1.

Select the structure.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Click OK.

Applying Different Colors or

Materials to Exterior Structures
You can change the look of an exterior structure
by applying different colors or materials to it.
To apply different colors or materials to an
exterior structure:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

structure is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

Users Guide

245

37

&

Outdoor lighting can beautify any landscape and offers security and visibility at night. Lighting
can also play an important part when you create exterior 3DTrueView renderings. Design Suite
Deluxe offers both light posts and ground lighting to enhance the exterior design of your home.
You can even turn them on and off!
Exterior lighting can be inserted on the terrain, or on a building location. Just point and click!

Exterior Lighting

247

Chapter 38 Exterior Lighting

Inserting Exterior Lighting

Editing the Size of a Light Fixture

Inserting exterior light posts and ground lighting

is easy just point and click. When inserting
exterior lighting, you have the option of inserting
it on the terrain, or on a building location.

You can edit the overall height, width and depth

of light fixtures.

To insert an exterior light fixture:

1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Lighting, or click the Exterior Lighting
button on the Landscape toolbar.
Then, select either Exterior Lighting on
Terrain or Exterior Lighting on Location,
depending on where you want to insert the
element. The Exterior Lighting on Location
option lets you insert the element on a deck,
or on anything that is associated with a
building location.

2.

In the catalog, select the

light you want to insert.

3.

Position the light where

you want it, then click to
insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

Tip: If you switch to

Rendered or Rendered
Outline display mode, you
can see instant lighting effects as you position and
insert light fixtures.

Moving a Light Fixture

You can move light fixtures in plan view by
simply clicking and dragging them.
To move a light fixture:
1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the elements

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

248

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To edit the size of a light fixture:

1.

Select the light fixture.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the values on the Basic page. The

Uniform Scale option ensures that the
element scales uniformly when you change
one of its dimensions.

4.

Click OK.

Editing a Light Fixtures Light

Source
A light source is usually a type of light bulb. You
can edit a light fixtures light source to achieve a
different lighting effect.
To edit a light fixtures light source:
1.

Select the light fixture whose properties you

want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Turning a Light On or Off

3.

Select the Lights tab.

Selecting Middle positions the light in the

center of the fixture, and selecting Minimum
or Maximum positions it on the left or right
side. If you select Custom you can enter a
specific value in the adjacent edit box which
is relative to the center position. For example,
entering -3 moves the light source 3 left
from the center. Changing the Y value moves
the light source forward or backward.
Selecting Minimum brings the light source all
the way forward, and selecting Maximum
moves it to the back of the fixture. Changing
the Z value moves the light source up or
down. Selecting Minimum positions the light
source at the bottom of the fixture, while
selecting Maximum positions it at the top of
the fixture.
7.

4.

To replace the currently selected light source

with another type, click Edit, then select a
light source from the Light Sources dialog.
To add a light source to the fixture, click Add,
then select a light source from the Light
Sources dialog.

Once youve specified the properties, click

OK.

Turning a Light On or Off

By default, lights are on when you insert them.
You can virtually turn a light off by disabling its
light source.
To turn a light on or off:
1.

Select the light fixture you want to turn on or

off.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select the Lights tab.

eye icon

5.

To delete a light source from the light fixture,

click Delete.

6.

To edit the position of the light source in

relation to the light fixture, specify the X, Y
and Z coordinates in the Light Position area.
Coordinates are measured from the bottom
center of the fixture. The small red box in the
preview window indicates the current
position of the light source. Changing the X
value moves the light source left or right.

Users Guide

249

38

Chapter 38 Exterior Lighting

4.

To turn the light on or off, click the eye icon

next to the light source name.

5.

Click OK.

Changing the Look of a Light

Fixture
You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply
different colors or materials to different parts of a
light fixture.
To change the look of a light fixture:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

light fixture is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the color or
material you want to
apply.

4.

Click on the component

you want to apply the
material to. For some
fixtures, materials are
applied separately to
the individual parts of
the fixture.

5.

When you are finished

applying materials,
right-click and select
Finish.

Deleting a Light Fixture

You can delete an outdoor light fixture in a couple
of easy steps.
To delete a light fixture:
1.

Select the light fixture.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

250

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Its always those small touches that really pull a design together. Design Suite Deluxe makes
adding decorative accents and accessories a breeze - just point and click to insert a vast array of
items, including fireplaces, fountains, wind chimes, decorative columns, corner accents, garden
borders, weather vanes, door mats, patio umbrellas, trellises, bird baths, mailboxes, cars and
planters.

Exterior Accessories

251

Chapter 39 Exterior Accessories

Inserting Exterior Accessories

Rotating Exterior Accessories

Exterior accessories include everything from bird

baths to weather vanes. Inserting exterior
accessories is easy just point and click. You can
insert exterior accessories on the terrain, or on a
building location.

You can rotate exterior accessories by clicking and

dragging them.

To insert an exterior accessory:

1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories, or click the Exterior
Accessories button on the Landscape
toolbar. Then, select either Exterior
Accessories on Terrain or Exterior
Accessories on Location, depending on
where you want to insert the element. The
Exterior Accessories on Location option
lets you insert the element on a deck, or on
anything that is associated with a building
location.

2.

In the catalog, select the

accessory you want to
insert.

3.

Position the element

where you want it, then
click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select

Finish.

To rotate an exterior accessory:

1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

4.

When the element is at the desired rotation,

release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering an Exterior

Accessory
You can raise or lower an outdoor element using
the Elevate tool.
To change the elevation of an exterior
accessory:
1.

Select the element.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate. The value in
the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of
the element.

3.

You can move exterior accessories in plan view by

simply clicking and dragging them.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the bottom of the element above
the terrain or location (depending on which
insertion option you used).

4.

Click OK.

To move an exterior accessory:

Editing the Size of an Exterior

Accessory

Moving Exterior
Accessories

1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the elements

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

1.

Select the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it,

release your mouse button.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the values on the Basic page. The

Uniform Scale option ensures that the

252

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

You can edit the height, width and depth of most

exterior accessories.
To edit the size of an exterior accessory:

Changing the Look of an Exterior Accessory

element scales uniformly when you change
one of its dimensions.

right-click and select Finish.

Deleting an Exterior Accessory

You can delete an exterior accessory in a couple of
easy steps.
To delete an exterior accessory:

4.

1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Click OK.

Changing the Look of an Exterior

Accessory
You can change the look of an exterior accessory
by applying different colors or materials to it.
To apply different colors or materials to an
exterior accessory:
1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the

accessory is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel,

select the color or
material you want to
apply.

4.

Click on the component

you want to apply the
color or material to.
Some accessories can
have different materials
applied to their
individual parts.

5.

When you are finished

applying materials,

Users Guide

253

39

Drawing Aids

page 257

Measurement

page 261

Commander

page 265

Editing Your Design

page 271

(
Design Suite Deluxe offers a variety of powerful drawing tools that help you insert elements easily
and precisely where you want them in your drawing.
If you want you can display a drawing grid in your drawing area, as well as set up a snap grid so
that your cursor snaps to the grid when you are inserting elements. The Object Snap feature
automatically snaps your pointer to existing objects, and the Angle Snap snaps your pointer to
specified angles. The Collision Control feature prevents you from inserting elements where they
do not fit.
You can set up drawing aids in your program settings, and toggle them on and off using the
buttons on the Status bar.

257

Chapter 40 Drawing Aids

Setting Up a Drawing Grid

A drawing grid is simply a set of horizontal and
vertical lines that can help you orient objects to
one another. By default, the spacing between grid
lines is 1, but you can change this if you want.
Note that the drawing grid is a visual aid only,
and will not be included in printouts.

want. If you enable the Match Grid option, the

invisible snap grid becomes the same size as the
drawing grid. This will make it seem like you are
snapping to the drawing grid while drawing.
To set up a snap grid:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Drawing Aids tab.

3.

If you want the snap grid to be the same size

as the drawing grid, check the Match Grid
check box in the Grid Snap area.

To set up a drawing grid:

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Grid area, specify the desired distance

between vertical grid lines in the X Spacing
edit box.

4.

To specify a custom distance between

vertical grid lines, enter a value in the X
Spacing edit box.

4.

Specify the desired distance between

horizontal grid lines in the Y Spacing edit
box.

5.

To specify a custom distance between

horizontal grid lines, enter a value in the Y
Spacing edit box.

5.

By default, the grid is 150 x 150, which is the

default size of the terrain. To change the
overall size of the grid, enter the desired
width in the X Limit edit box, and the desired
height in the Y Limit edit box.

6.

If you want to turn the grid snap on, check

the Enable (F4) check box.

7.

Click OK.

Turning the Grid Snap On and Off

6.

If you want to turn the grid on, check the

Enable (F7) check box.

You can toggle the grid snap on and off in one of

two ways:

7.

Click OK.

Turning the Drawing Grid On and

Off

Press F4 on your keyboard

Click the GRIDSNAP button on the Status
bar

You can toggle the drawing grid on and off in one

of two ways:

Press F7 on your keyboard

Click the GRID button on the Status bar

Using the Grid Snap

The Grid Snap feature snaps your pointer to an
invisible grid when inserting elements. By
default, the spacing between the grid lines in the
invisible grid is 1, but you can change this if you

258

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Using the Object Snap

The Object Snap feature makes elements that you
are currently inserting automatically snap to
existing elements in your drawing. For example,
if you are drawing a wall and hover your pointer
near an existing wall, your pointer will snap to
the existing wall, making it easy to create a wall
layout with cleanly intersecting walls.
You can set the pixel search distance for the object
snap, which determines how close your pointer

Using Ortho
needs to be to an element for it to snap to the
element.
By default, the Object Snap is enabled, but you
can turn it off whenever you want. There are
three ways to turn the Object Snap on or off.
To turn the Object Snap on or off:

Press F5 on your keyboard

Click the OBJSNAP button on the Status bar

Select Settings > Program Settings, then on

the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the
Enable (F5) check box in the Object Snap area

To set the pixel search distance:

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Object Snap area, type the desired

number of pixels in the Pixel Search
Distance edit box, or use the arrows to scroll
up or down through a list of values.

4.

Click OK.

Using Ortho
The Ortho feature restricts your cursor movement
to 90-degree angles when you are inserting
elements. This can be especially helpful when
drawing elements like walls.
By default, Ortho is enabled. You can toggle it on
and off using one of three methods.
To turn Ortho on or off:

Press F8 on your keyboard

Click the ORTHO button on the Status bar

Select Settings > Program Settings, then on

the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the
Ortho (F8) check box

Using Angle Snap

When the Angle Snap feature is turned on, your
cursor snaps to specific angles when rotating an
element. If you set your snap angle to 10, for
example, your cursor will snap at 10 intervals as
you rotate the element.
By default, the Angle Snap is on. You can turn the
Angle Snap on and off using one of three
methods.
To turn the Angle Snap on or off:

Press F6 on your keyboard

Click the ANGLESNAP button on the Status
bar

Select Settings > Program Settings, then on

the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the
Angle Snap (F6) check box

To change the snap angle:

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Ortho / Angle Snap area, type the

desired snap angle in the Snap Angle edit
box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down
through a list of values.

4.

Click OK.

Disabling/Enabling Collision
Control
The programs intelligent Collision Control
feature prevents objects from being inserted
where they do not fit. By default, Collision
Control is on, but you can turn it off whenever
you like using one of three methods.

Users Guide

259

40

Chapter 40 Drawing Aids

To turn Collision Control on or off:

Press F9 on your keyboard

Click the COLLISION button on the Status
bar

Select Settings > Program Settings, then on

the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the
Enable Collision Control (F9) check box

Note: Collision Control affects building elements

on the current building location only. It does not
affect landscape elements.

260

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

You can change the unit of measure used in a drawing, or select a different level of precision for
your measurements.
Once youve drawn something, you can measure it using the Measure tool. You can also use the
Area/Perimeter tool to instantly calculate the area of a room or building.

261

Chapter 41 Measurement

Changing the Unit of Measure

The units of measure used in your project are
determined by a template, which by default is
either a feet/inches template or millimeters
template.
Once youve opened a new project, you can
change the units of measure and levels of
precision used in that project by making
selections on the Units of Measure page of the
Program Settings dialog.

Suppressing Metric Units in

Dialogs
If you have chosen to work in Metric units, you
can choose to suppress units for length/distance,
volume, and area measurements shown in
dialogs. For example, 1200 mm would appear as
simply 1200.
To suppress units:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Units of Measure tab.

3.

With Metric Units selected, enable the

Suppress metric units from dialogs check
box.

To set your units of measure:

4.

Click OK.

1.

Measuring Distances

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Units of Measure tab.

3.

Select either Imperial Units or Metric Units,

then select the desired units to use.
Measure

Units Available

Imperial

Feet-Inches
Inches

Metric

Millimeters
Centimeters
Meters

4.

Select a level of precision for each unit of

measure. For example, selecting #-# #/16
sets the level of precision to 1/16th of an inch
when working in feet and inches.

5.

Once youve set your units of measure, click

OK.

262

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Use the Measure tool to measure the distance

between any two points in your 2D plan.
To use the Measure tool:
1.

Select Tools > Measure.

2.

Click your first point on the screen.

3.

Move your cursor in the direction you want

to measure. A ruler is displayed that
stretches as you move your cursor.

4.

Click your second point on the screen. The

distance is shown on the ruler as well as on
the Status bar at the bottom of the screen.

5.

Once you have measured your first distance,

you can keep selecting points to measure

Measuring Area and Perimeter

additional distances from the last point
selected. A running total is displayed on the
Status bar.

6.

4.

When you are done viewing the area

calculations, click OK.

When you have finished measuring, rightclick and select Finish.

Measuring Area and Perimeter

The Area/Perimeter Calculator displays the area
(e.g. square footage) and perimeter length of each
location in your model. It also displays the total
area and total perimeter (of all locations). You can
use the calculator at any given point in time. The
values in the calculator update automatically as
your model increases or decreases in size.
Note the calculations are taken from the exterior
side of the buildings walls.
To measure area:
1.

Select Tools > Calculate/Estimate > Area/

Perimeter.

2.

To turn the grid lines off, uncheck the Show

Grid check box.

3.

To print the calculations, click Print.

Users Guide

263

41

"
For very precise control when inserting or editing elements, Design Suite Deluxe offers a helpful
tool called the Commander, which lets you view or enter exact values for distance, direction and
angles. It is especially handy for users with some CAD experience.
This chapter tells you how to turn the Commander on, and how to use it.

265

Chapter 42 Commander

Displaying the Commander

The Commander is a multi-functional tool that
lets you enter precise values when inserting or
editing elements. Even if you dont need a high
level of precision, you may want the Commander
displayed so you can see lengths and angles as
you draw or edit elements.

By default, the Commander is turned off. You can

turn the Commander on or off as needed. When it
is turned on, it is displayed in the lower part of
the screen, just above the Status Bar. Initially the
Commander will look grayed out because it is
inactive. It will become active when you insert or
edit elements.
To turn the Commander on or off:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Workspace tab.

3.

Check or uncheck the Commander check

box.

4.

Click OK.

Using the Commander

The Commander can be a very useful tool when
inserting or editing elements. Using the
Commander you can:

Specify the insertion height of an element

before it is inserted
Select a precise insertion point for an element
Specify a precise length and direction for
elements like walls and railings
Specify a precise distance and direction when
stretching or moving an element
Specify a precise angle when rotating an
element
Specify a precise radius/included angle
when curving a wall, deck or opening

Even if you dont want to enter precise values,

you can still use the Commander to view

266

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

measurements as you draw and edit elements.

The values in the Commander are linked to your
cursor movement and update as you proceed
through a command.
The Commander becomes instantly active when
inserting elements. It is most useful for things like
walls and railings, because it lets you enter a
precise length for the element.
The Commander also becomes active when you
are moving, stretching or rotating elements. If
you have started moving, stretching or rotating
an element using your mouse, the Commander
displays the move distance or rotation angle as
you move your mouse. If you want to be able the
enter values in the Commander when moving,
stretching or rotating an element, you need to first
select an appropriate editing tool from the rightclick menu or Edit > Modify Elements menu such
as Move, Stretch, Lengthen, or Rotate.

Displaying the Coordinate Icon

The Coordinate Icon marks the current
point from which an action will be
performed. In other words, it identifies
the current reference point when using the
Commander. By default, this icon is turned off. If
you plan to use the Commander while working,
you should turn on the Coordinate Icon.
To display the Coordinate Icon:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Visual Aids area, check the Show

Coordinate Icon check box.

4.

Click OK.

Specifying the Insertion Height of an Element Before You Insert It

Specifying the Insertion Height of

an Element Before You Insert It
If you have the Commander turned on, it will
display a Base Height edit box as soon as an
insertion tool becomes active.

The value shown in the Base Height edit box is

the height at which the element will insert in your
drawing. You can change the insertion height
before selecting an insertion point for the element
by typing a value in the Base Height edit box and
pressing ENTER. If the element is a building
element, the height is measured from the floor
level of the current building location to the
elements insertion point. If the element is a
landscape element, the distance is measured from
the terrain to the elements insertion point. Most
elements have their insertion point at the bottom
of the element. Exceptions are windows and wall
openings, in which the insertion point is located
at the top of the element. In the case of windows
and wall openings, the edit box reads Head
Height.

Selecting a Reference Point When

Inserting and Editing Elements
To use the Commander, you must first specify a
reference point, or base point, from which values
can be measured. If you are drawing a wall, for
example, the first point you click on the screen is
considered the reference point. The Commander
then becomes active, and you can enter a Distance
and Direction (or X and Y values) for the wall.

Entering Values in the Commander

The Commander is intelligent and changes
depending on the tool you are using. For
example, if you are drawing walls, the
Commanders edit boxes become Distance and
Direction. If you are curving walls, however, the
edit boxes change to Radius and Included Angle.
You can move easily from one edit box to the next
using your Tab key. Pressing ENTER after typing
a value completes the current action.
When entering values in the Commander,
especially when inserting or moving elements, it
is important to be aware of the current coordinate
system in the Commander.
The Commander offers two coordinate systems:
Polar and Cartesian. The system you select
determines how values are entered in the
Commander when you are specifying points or
distances.
Note that you can switch between the Polar and
Cartesian coordinate system once you have
selected a reference point to draw from or move
from. You do this by making a selection from the
coordinate system drop box on the left side of the
Commander.
Note: If moving, stretching or rotating elements,
and you want to enter values in the Commander,
you need to first select an appropriate editing tool
from the right-click menu or Edit > Modify
Elements menu such as Move, Stretch, Lengthen
or Rotate.

If you want to use the Commander to edit an

element (e.g. move or rotate it), you must select a
point from which to measure the move distance/
direction, or rotation angle. Most often you would
select one of the elements grab handles, which
are the small blue squares that appear on the
major points of an element when you select the
element.

Users Guide

267

42

Chapter 42 Commander

Direction and Angle of Rotation

Direction in a drawing is specified in degrees of
an angle. The angle is calculated
counterclockwise from the positive X axis.

The Four Primary Drawing Directions

Z. Enter the distance you want to move the

element vertically. You can enter a positive or
negative value to move the element up or down.
If the element is a building element, the Z value is
measured from the floor level of the current
building location. If the element is a landscape
element, the Z value is measured from the terrain.
Note that the Z field is not always available. It is
displayed primarily when editing tools are active.

Specifying X, Y and Z Coordinates

While using the Commander to insert or edit
elements, you may choose to work in the
Cartesian coordinate system instead of the Polar
coordinate system. This lets you specify a precise
reference point to draw or move from by entering
X, Y and Z coordinate values.
To switch to the Cartesian coordinate system,
select Cartesian from the drop box at the left end
of the Commander.
Although the four primary drawing directions
are the ones you will probably be working with
the most, any angle is possible. If you disable
Ortho and Angle Snap, and move an element
randomly in your drawing area, there is no
restriction on angles at all. Even if Ortho and
Angle Snap are enabled, you can enter any angle
you want in the Commander.

Specifying Distance and Direction

By default, the Polar coordinate system becomes
active once you have selected a reference point to
draw from, or start a move from.
In the Polar coordinate system, you specify a
distance and direction (angle) when drawing or
moving an element.

Distance. Enter a positive value to specify the

length of the element, or the move distance.
Direction. Enter the direction you want the
element to run, or the direction in which you
want to move an element. For information about
how direction is specified, see Direction and
Angle of Rotation on page 268.

268

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

X. Enter an X coordinate to specify a horizontal

(left/right) distance in 2D plan view.
Y. Enter a Y coordinate to specify a vertical (up/
down) distance in 2D plan view.
Z. Enter a Z coordinate to indicate elevation, or
height. If the element is a building element, the Z
value is measured from the floor level of the
current building location. If the element is a
landscape element, the Z value is measured from
the terrain.
Remember that the coordinates are measured
from the current reference point, which is marked
by the Coordinate Icon. (See Displaying the
Coordinate Icon on page 266.)
In the Cartesian system, you can enter both
positive and negative values for any of the
coordinates.

Using the Commander When Rotating Elements

Using the Commander When

Rotating Elements
When you select the Rotate tool from the rightclick menu or Edit > Modify Elements menu, then
select a base point for the rotation, the
Commander displays a Rotation Angle edit box.

To specify the desired angle of rotation for the

element, type the angle in the Rotation Angle
edit box and press ENTER. For information on
how angles are measured, see Direction and
Angle of Rotation on page 268.

Using the Commander When

Curving Elements
When curving an element such as a wall or floor
opening, you can use the Commander to specify a
precise curve angle.

Radius. The distance from the element (in its

uncurved state) to the center point of the curve.

Radius

Included Angle. The angle formed between two

radius lines extending from the center of the circle
implied by the curve out to the endpoints of the
arc. The larger the angle, the rounder and larger
the curve.

Included
Angle

It is not necessary to enter both the Radius and

Included Angle values. If you enter one, the
program automatically supplies the other. Also, if
you enter a value and nothing happens after you
press ENTER, then the value is not valid in
relation to the dimensions of your element.

Users Guide

269

42

2
When you double-click after inserting an element or select Finish from the right-click menu, you
automatically go into Selection Mode, meaning you can select elements in your drawing area and
edit them.
Most elements can be moved, rotated, copied, replaced and deleted. Some elements have
additional editing commands available. For example, you can lengthen, break and curve walls.
All elements have a property sheet where you can change the size or appearance of the element.
To access a menu of editing commands for a selected element, just right-click in the drawing area
or select Edit > Modify Elements. Certain functions can be performed without selecting any
commands at all. For example, you can move and rotate most elements by simply clicking and
dragging your mouse.
This chapter describes how to select elements, and use general editing commands like Move,
Rotate, Elevate, Duplicate, Replace and Delete. It also describes how to access and edit element
properties. For information about editing a specific type of element, see the chapter about that
element.

271

Chapter 43 Editing Your Design

Undoing the Previous Action

The Undo tool cancels your most recent action.
You can undo as many actions as you have taken
since your last save.
To undo an action:

Select Edit > Undo, or

Click the Undo button on the Standard
toolbar, or
Press Ctrl+Z

Tip: You can use the Redo tool to reapply an

action you have canceled using the Undo tool.

Redoing an Undo
The Redo tool reapplies a tool that you have
reversed using Undo. Redo will only work
directly following an Undo.
To redo a task:

Select Edit > Redo, or

Click the Redo button on the Standard
toolbar, or
Press Ctrl+Y

Accessing Edit Commands

When you have an element selected, you can
access a menu of edit commands by right-clicking
in the drawing area, or by selecting Edit > Modify
Elements.
Menus vary depending on the element selected.
Typical commands are Properties, Move, Rotate,
Duplicate, and Delete. If two types of elements
are selected (such as a floor and a wall), only
commands that are common to both element
types are available.
Certain functions can be performed without
selecting any commands at all. For example, you
can move and rotate most elements by simply
clicking and dragging your mouse.

Moving Elements
When you select an element, you are
automatically in Drag and Drop mode. If the
element is a singular, one-click object, like a

272

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

cabinet or plant, you can move the element by

simply clicking and dragging it. If you want to
move an area-drawn element, such as a roof, you
need to select the Move Whole Element tool
before clicking and dragging Otherwise, doing a
straight drag-and-drop will only stretch it. If you
click and drag a wall, all walls attached to it move
with it.
If you have your Commander turned on and
would like to be able to enter precise values for
the move, you need to select the Move tool
instead of doing a straight drag-and-drop.
Note: Elements associated with walls, such as
doors and windows, can only be moved within
the wall they are in. You cannot move them to
another wall.

Doing a Straight Drag-and-Drop

The straight drag-and-drop method is ideal for
singular, one-click elements like cabinets and
plants.
To move an element using drag-and-drop:
1.

Select the element you want to move. You are

now in Drag and Drop mode.

2.

Hover your pointer over the elements

center grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it,

release the mouse button.

Using the Move Tool

Use the Move tool when you want to be able to
specify a precise distance and direction for the
move in the Commander.
To move an element using the Move tool:
1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Right-click and select Move, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Move.

3.

Select a base point for the move. The move

distance and direction will be measured from
this point.

Raising or Lowering an Element

4.

Without holding your mouse button down,

move your mouse to move the element.
Select the point you want to move the
element to, or enter a distance and direction
in the Commander.

Raising or Lowering an Element

Most elements can be raised or lowered using the
Elevate tool on the elements right-click menu.
Some elements, such as roofs, do not provide
access to the Elevate tool. In the case of a roof, you
can raise or lower it by changing the Support
Height variable in its properties.
Many block elements (like furniture and plants)
also have a Distance above current location or
terrain variable in their properties that you can
use to raise or lower the element. Walls have a
Drop Exterior Face variable, and columns have a
Base Offset variable in their properties that you
can edit.
To raise or lower an element using the Elevate
tool:
1.

Select the element you want to raise or lower.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The
value shown in the Elevate dialog is the
current elevation of the element.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the element above the floor. If
the element is a landscaping element, the
value you specify is relative to the terrain.
The distance you enter is the distance from
the floor or terrain to the insertion point of
the element. For most elements, the insertion
point is at the base of the element. For
windows and wall openings, however, the
insertion point is at the top of the element.
Therefore, if you are raising or lowering a
window or wall opening, specify the desired
distance from the floor to the top of the
window or opening.

4.

Click OK.

To raise or lower a block element by editing its

properties:
1.

Select the element you want to raise or lower.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the properties dialog, select the Behavior

tab. If there is no Behavior tab, you will need
to use the Elevate tool to raise or lower the
element.

4.

Edit the value in the Distance above

current location or terrain edit box.

5.

Click OK.

Rotating Elements in 2D Plan View

Singular, one-click elements like cabinets and
furniture can be rotated on the spot by simply
clicking and dragging them while in Rotation
mode.
Railings can be rotated by clicking and dragging
their end points.
For most other elements such as walls, floors,
ceilings or roofs, you need to use the Rotate tool.
You also need to use the Rotate tool if you want to
be able to enter a precise rotation angle in the
Commander, or you want to rotate the element
about a point other than the center point of the
element.

Doing a Simple, On-the-Spot Rotation

If you see a triangular grab handle on an element
when it is selected, it can be rotated by simply
clicking and dragging it. Using this method, the
element is rotated about its center point.
Rotation handle

. . . .

Center

90

180

Users Guide

270

273

43

Chapter 43 Editing Your Design

If your Angle Snap is on, the element will rotate
in increments of whatever angle is set for the
Angle Snap. If the Angle Snap is off, the element
will rotate in increments of 1.

through the point at 180. You can rotate fullcircle around this baseline.

To rotate an element by clicking and dragging:

1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular

grab handle to display the Rotate
cursor. If you do not see the triangular
grab handle, the element can only be rotated
with the Rotate tool.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

When the element is at the desired rotation,
release your mouse button.

270 rotation
Tip: If you want to align an element with
another element that may be lying at an odd
angle, select a base point on the other element, then line up your rotation line with
that element.
4.

Using the Rotate Tool

Using the Rotate tool you can rotate an element
about any selected base point. You should also
use the Rotate tool if you want to be able to enter
a precise rotation angle in the Commander.
If your Angle Snap is on, the element will rotate
in increments of whatever angle is set for the
Angle Snap. If you are using the Commander,
you can override the Angle Snap by entering the
desired angle in the Commander. If the Angle
Snap is off, the element will rotate in increments
of 1.
To rotate an element using the Rotate tool:
1.

Select the element to rotate.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Select a base point for the rotation. The base

point can be any point on the element (e.g.
center point or corner point), or any point in
the drawing area. The point you pick
establishes an automatic baseline that runs

274

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Base Point

Tip: If the square grab handle is in close

proximity to the triangular grab handle, you
may want to zoom in on the element to
distinguish between the two grab handles.
4.

Baseline

Without holding your mouse button down,

move your mouse to rotate the element. The
element will rotate from the defined base
point in the direction you move the mouse. If
the Commander is turned on, you can view
the angle of rotation as you rotate, or enter a
precise angle. Positive angle values are read
in a counter-clockwise direction, while
negative values are read in a clockwise
direction.

Changing an Elements
Orientation
Symbol elements, such as furniture and light
fixtures, are oriented in a logical fashion when
you insert them in your drawing. For example,
tables are inserted in a flat, upright position on
the floor, and electrical outlets are inserted in a
vertical position on the face of walls. You can edit
the orientation of most symbol elements. For
example, you may want to flip an air register so
that you can insert it on the ceiling in your
basement.
To change an elements orientation:
1.

Select the element.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Copying Elements on the Same Location

3.

On the Basic property page, click the

appropriate arrow keys in the Orientation
area to rotate the element.

2.

Select the elements you want to copy.

3.

X Axis: Rotates the element front to back,

and vice versa.

Right-click and select Duplicate to

Locations.

4.

Y Axis: Rotates the element towards its left

or right side in 3D.

Select the target location(s) you want to copy

the elements to.

5.

Click OK.

Z Axis: Rotates the element left or right in 2D

plan view.

Copying Elements on the Same

Location
The Duplicate tool creates a copy of a selected
element that you can then position where you like
on the current location.
To duplicate an element:
1.

Select the element to copy.

2.

Right-click and select Duplicate, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Duplicate.

3.

Select a base point for the copy movement.

Typically you would select one of the
element's grab handles, but you can click
anywhere in the drawing. The base point is
simply a reference point used to define the
move distance.

4.

Select the point you are copying the element

to. You can do this by moving your mouse
and then clicking to insert the copy, or by
typing a distance and direction in the
Commander.

Copying Elements to Other

Locations
The Duplicate to Locations tool lets you copy
existing elements to other locations. This is useful
if the elements you have already drawn will have
the same layout on another location. For example,
you can copy the exterior walls on the Ground
Floor to the Second Floor and instantly create
another story.

Note: The location you are copying to must exist

in the Building Locations dialog. For more
information see Defining Building Locations on
page 16.

Arraying Elements
When you array elements, you create multiple
copies of an element at the same time. You can
create an array in a single row or column, or a
layout of rows and columns. You can also control
the spacing between elements in the array, and
the array's rotation angle.
Columns

Rows

Sample array of posts

To array an element:
1.

Select the element you want to array.

2.

Right-click and select Array, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Array.

To copy elements to other locations:

1.

Make sure the location you want to copy

elements FROM is current.

Users Guide

275

43

Chapter 43 Editing Your Design

3.

In the Number of Rows box, type the

number of horizontal rows you want or use
the arrows to select a value.

4.

In the Number of Columns box, type the

number of vertical columns you want.

5.

In the Distance Between Rows box, type

the spacing you want between rows. This
determines the distance between elements
appearing in columns (vertical spacing).

6.

In the Distance Between Columns box,

type the spacing you want between columns.
This determines the distance between
elements appearing in rows (horizontal
spacing).
Note: If you are working in Imperial, make
sure you include the feet symbol (e.g. 4) if
the value is in feet. Otherwise, the value is
taken as inches.

7.

In the Array Rotation Angle box, type the

degree of rotation for the array.

8.

Click OK. The array is created.

3.

Click two points to define a mirror line. The

element is mirrored.

Mirror Line

Editing the Size and Composition

of an Element
You can edit the physical make-up of an element
as well as its dimensions by accessing the
elements Basic property page. Some elements
have additional property pages that control its
composition. For example, cabinets have Leaf and
Details property pages.

Note: The Array tool is only available for certain

elements.

Mirroring Elements
You can create a mirror image of selected
elements using the Mirror tool. You mirror the
elements by specifying a mirror line an
imaginary line about which the elements are
flipped.
Tip: You can use the Mirror tool to reverse an
entire floor plan.
To mirror elements:
1.

Select the elements you want to mirror.

2.

Right-click and select Mirror, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Mirror.

276

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

When you edit the properties of elements that

exist in your drawing, only selected elements are
changed. Other occurrences of the element in
your drawing remain unchanged. You can,
however, select and edit multiple elements at the
same time provided they share the same
properties.

Changing an Elements Material or Color

To edit the properties of an inserted element:
1.

Select the element you want to edit. To select

multiple elements, use
Shift + click.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Adjust the properties as desired. Clicking a

dimension marked with an alphabetical
character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the
corresponding dimension in the element
graphic, and vice versa, if one exists.

4.

Click OK. The selected elements are updated

in the drawing.

Note: Editing the properties of an element in your

drawing has no effect on the elements property
definition in the catalog it came from. If you want
to edit an element in a catalog, see Adding and
Editing Elements in a Catalog on page 371.
Editing an element in a catalog affects all future
insertions of that element in your drawing.

Changing an Elements Material or

Color

The Materials Paintbrush is best used in 3D view.

It lets you select a material or color in the catalog,
then apply it to parts of an element. For example,
if you want your table legs to be blue, you can
select the Blue Paint material, then click on of the
tables legs. All table legs will update
automatically. When you use the Materials
Paintbrush on an element, the settings on the
elements Appearance property page update to
match the selections you made with the Materials
Paintbrush.
If you choose to edit an elements material
through its Appearance property page, you can
select different materials for each of the elements
parts, rather than just a selected part. It doesnt
matter if youre in a 2D view or 3D view.
To use the Materials Paintbrush:
1.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or

click the Materials Paintbrush button
on any tabbed toolbar.

2.

In the catalog panel,

select the material you
want to apply. There is
an incredible selection
to choose from,
including Wood, Brick,
Marble, Concrete, Steel,
Carpet, Tile, Roofing
and Fabric. If you want
to apply a solid color
select something from
the Paint category.

3.

In 3D view, click on the

element part that you
want to apply the material to. The material is
immediately applied.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

When you view your design in Rendered or

Patterned mode, elements are displayed using
materials that are defined in the elements
properties. A material can be a texture, such as
brick, or a color. Materials also have a pattern
assigned to them, which is what you see when
you view in Patterned view. You can select a
different material for each of an elements
components.
Note: You cant change the way an element looks
in 2D plan view.
There are two ways to change an elements
material settings: using the Materials Paintbrush,
or through the elements Appearance property
page.

To change an elements material through the

Appearance property page:
1.

Select the element you want to edit. To select

multiple elements, use Shift + click.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Users Guide

277

43

Chapter 43 Editing Your Design

3.

Select the Appearance tab.

angles. This rotates the material in a

clockwise direction.
10. To shift the material on the
element (left, right, up or
down), use the Position
arrows.
11. To specify a custom tile size for the material,
enable the Override tile size check box, then
enter the desired tile height and width in the
Height and Width edit boxes.

4.

In the Components pane, select the component

whose material you want to change.

5.

In the Material area, click the Select button.

Tile height refers to the height of one bitmap

tile. The program uses tiled rendering to
display images, meaning images are
generated in pieces (tiles) vertically and
horizontally. Changing the tile height of a
brick material, for example, would make the
bricks look taller. Changing the tile width
would make the bricks look wider.
Note that the Override tile size option lets
you customize the tile size for this instance
only without creating a new material.
12. Select another component in the Components
pane and select a material for that
component.
13. When all your materials are defined, click
OK.

6.

In the Materials dialog, select the group

containing the desired material. If you want
to choose a solid color, select the Paint group.

7.

Select the material you want to use. The

swatches in the preview windows update
automatically. If you want to edit the
material, click on one of the swatches to
access the Edit Materials dialog. For
information about editing materials, see
Editing Material Properties on page 387.

8.

Click OK to return to the Appearance page.

9.

If you want to rotate the

material on the element,
enter an angle in the Rotation edit box, or
use the arrows to scroll through a list of

278

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Note: When you edit the material of an element in

your drawing, the elements material definition in
the catalog does not change. The change only
applies to the selected element. If you want to
change the elements properties in the catalog, see
Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog on
page 371.

Replacing Elements
You can use the Replace tool to quickly replace an
element with another element from the catalog.
To replace an element:
1.

Select the element.

2.

Right-click and select Replace, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Replace.

3.

In the Catalog Access dialog, select the

element you want to replace the existing one
with. Note that you can only use an element

Deleting Elements
of the same type (for example, you cant
replace a door with a window).
4.

Click OK. The element is replaced.

Deleting Elements
You can delete an element from your drawing in
two quick steps.
To delete an element:
1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Users Guide

279

43

Photo Boards

page 283

Text & Dimensions

page 289

Project Estimate

page 301

3DTrueView

page 307

Animation

page 315

+&
Design Suite Deluxe lets you import digital photographs or scanned images into your work space.
The image is oriented vertically in 3D view, much like a billboard. You could, for example,
import a picture of your backyard, so when you look out the window, it feels like youre home.
A photo board can be stationary or set to rotate with the camera so its always facing you. You
can also control the height and width of the photo board.
The handy Photo Board Wizard steps you through the process quickly and easily.

283

Chapter 44 Photo Boards

Importing a Photo Board

4.

A photo board is simply a digital image that is

oriented vertically in your 3D workspace. You
can import any image you want your family,
pets, neighbors house the only limit is your
imagination. The handy Photo Board Wizard
does it all in a few quick steps.

Click the Select button, then select the image

you want to import. You can import BMP,
JPG and TGA files. The image is displayed in
the preview window.

5.

Define the size of the image by entering

values in the Height and Width edit boxes.
Generally you should specify a size that is as
close to reality as possible. For example, if the
image is of a person who is six feet tall, you
should enter a value close to 6 in the Height
edit box.

6.

Click Next.

7.

Specify whether you want the photo board to

be stationary or active. If Stationary is
selected, the board will always remain
oriented the same way, regardless of changes
in your camera angle. If Billboard is selected,
the photo board will rotate toward the
camera so it will always face you in 3D.

To import a photo board:

1.

2.

3.

284

Select File > Import > Photo Board Wizard.

Click Next.

Type a name for your photo board.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Adding an Imported Photo Board to Your Catalog

8.

Click Next.

Inserting a Photo Board from the

Catalog
The catalog contains a collection of photo boards
containing pictures of people, animals, flags and
miscellaneous objects. If you have saved your
imported photo board to the catalog, it is also
displayed with the existing photo boards in the
catalog.
To insert a photo board from the catalog:

9.

Click Finish. The photo board is attached to

your cursor, ready to be inserted.

10. Position the photo board where you want it,

then click to insert it.

1.

Select Insert > Photo Board.

2.

In the catalog panel, select the photo board

you want to insert.

3.

Position the photo board where you want it,

then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Photo Board

You can move a photo board easily by just
clicking and dragging it.

11. Right-click and select Finish.

To move a photo board:

Adding an Imported Photo Board

to Your Catalog

1.

Select the photo board.

2.

Hover your pointer over the board to

display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the board.

4.

When the board is where you want it, release

your mouse button.

You can save a photo board that you have

imported using the Photo Board Wizard to your
catalog so you can insert it again in any project.
To save your photo board to the current
catalog:
1.

2.

3.

Select File > Catalogs > Save

Element to Catalog. Your pointer
changes to a catalog cursor.
Click on the photo board in your drawing.

Click Yes to save the photo board. The photo

board is added to the current catalog.

Rotating a Photo Board in 2D Plan

View
You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a photo
board about a selected point in 2D plan view.
To rotate a photo board:
1.

Select the photo board.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Hover your pointer over the point you want

to rotate the photo board around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the photo board,

then release your mouse button.

Users Guide

285

44

Chapter 44 Photo Boards

Changing the Elevation of a Photo

Board
You can raise or lower a photo board using the
Elevate tool on the right-click menu.

Editing the Size of a Photo Board

You can edit the height and width of a photo
board after it has been inserted.
To edit the size of a photo board:

To raise or lower a photo board:

1.

Select the photo board.

1.

Select the photo board.

2.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Elevate. The value
shown in the Elevate dialog is the current
elevation of the photo board.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the Height or Width in the Properties

area. If Maintain Aspect Ratio is checked,
the height will automatically change if you
edit the width, and vice versa. This ensures
the image doesnt get distorted.

4.

Click OK.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired

elevation of the photo board above the
terrain.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: You can also change a photo boards

elevation by changing the Distance above
current location or terrain variable on the photo
boards Behavior property page.

Changing a Photo Board from

Stationary to Rotating and Vice
Versa
You can choose whether a photo board is
stationary or rotating after it has been inserted. A
stationary board keeps the same orientation
regardless of changes in the camera angle. A
rotating board always rotates towards the
camera.
To change a photo boards type:
1.

Select the photo board.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Type area, click Stationary for a

stationary photo board, or Billboard for a
rotating photo board.

4.

Click OK.

286

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Deleting a Photo Board

You can delete a photo board in a couple of easy
steps.
To delete a photo board:
1.

Select the photo board.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard,

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Creating Transparency in Photo

Board Images
You may find that you want to make portions of
your photo board image transparent for a more
realistic effect. If the image is of a person, for
example, you may want to make the background
in the image transparent so that when you insert
the photo board in your drawing, you see just the
person in your 3D view.
To create transparency in your photo board
image, you need to use a graphic editing program

Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images

such as Microsoft Paint to apply a magenta color
to those portions you want to make transparent.
Magenta
background

The RGB color settings for magenta are as

follows:
Red: 255 Green: 0 Blue: 255
Once you have finished editing the image in the
graphic editing program, you can re-import the
image into Design Suite Deluxe using the Photo
Board Wizard.

Photo board with no transparency

Photo board with transparency

Users Guide

287

44

, 1
Using text tools you can add text to any area of your drawing. You may want to add a title to the
plan, or label rooms or specific elements. You can use whatever fonts and colors you want.
Dimensions are used to convey precise measurements. You can dimension the exterior of your
design instantly, and quickly insert interior dimensions with a few simple mouse clicks.
This chapter describes all text and dimension tools.

289

Chapter 45 Text & Dimensions

Adding Text to Your Drawing

You can add text of varying size, color and font to
your drawings. Text can be moved and rotated
after it has been inserted, just like most other
elements.
If you want to add text with a leader, see
page 291.
To add text to your drawing:
1.

Select Tools > Text > Add Text, or

click the Add Text button on the
Notation toolbar.

insert different pieces of text in your drawing

without having to select the Add Text tool
again.
6.

Click OK. The text is attached to your cursor.

7.

Position the text where you want it, then click

to insert it.

Moving Text
You can move text by simply clicking and
dragging it.
To move text:
1.

Select the text you want to move.

2.

Position your pointer over the blue

grab handle to display the Move
cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the text, then release

your mouse button.

Rotating Text
You can change the angle of text using the Rotate
tool.
To rotate text:
1.

Select the text you want to rotate.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit >

Modify Elements > Rotate.

2.

In the Text dialog, type the text you want to

add. If you want to import a text (*.txt) file,
click Import, then select the file to import.

3.

3.

To select a style for the text, click the Text

Style button and select or create a text style
in the Text Styles dialog.

Hover your pointer over the point you want

to rotate around typically the blue grab
handle.

4.

Move your mouse to rotate the text in the

desired direction.

5.

When the text is at the desired rotation, click

to set the position.

4.

By default, text is left justified. For multi-line

text, this means that text lines will line up on
the left, and be ragged on the right. If you
want to change the justification of the text,
click the appropriate button in the bottom left
corner of the dialog.
Left Justified

Right Justified
Centered

5.

290

If you want to automatically return to the

Text dialog after you have inserted the
current text, enable the Multiple text insert
check box. This is ideal when you want to
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Editing Text Content

You can edit the content of a text element by
accessing its properties.
To edit text:
1.

Select the text you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Changing the Style of Text

3.

In the Text dialog, edit the text in the text

window.

6.

4.

Click OK.

Note: Text styles that are edited or added through

inserted text are saved with the current project
only. If you want to save them in the text styles
library file, so that they can be made available in
other projects, see Saving Customized Text Styles
to the Text Styles Library File on page 405.

Changing the Style of Text

Text style settings include font, font style, size,
and color. You can select a different text style for
selected text, or edit individual text style
properties.
To change the style of text:

Click OK in the Text dialog. The text is

changed automatically.

Changing the Justification of

Multi-line Text

1.

Select the text whose style you want to

change.

You can change the way multiple lines of text are

aligned.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

To change the justification of text:

3.

In the Text dialog, click Text Style.

1.

Select the text you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Text dialog, click the appropriate

justification button below the editing
window.
Left Justified

Right Justified
Centered

4.

Click OK.

Deleting Text
4.

In the Text Styles dialog, select a new text

style, or edit the individual properties of the
current text style.
You can also create a new text style by
clicking the Add Item button.
Font. A set of text characters in a specific
style and size.
Font Style. The style of text. Choices can
include Regular, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic.

5.

You can delete selected text from your drawing in

a couple of easy steps.
To delete text:
1.

Select the text you want to remove. You can

select multiple entries using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Text Height. The size of text.

Adding Text with a Leader

Text Color. The color of text. Click the

swatch to access the Color dialog and select a
color.

You can insert text with an arrow attached to it

that points to a particular element or area in your
drawing. The leader has two segments and can be
oriented in any fashion.

Click OK in the Text Styles dialog.

Users Guide

291

45

Chapter 45 Text & Dimensions

To add a text with leader:

Changing the Leader Arrow Style

1.

The leader arrow style is determined by the

current dimension style, which by default is the
Standard dimension style. You can change the
style of the leader arrow by editing the properties
of the dimension style, or by selecting a
dimension style with the desired arrow style
setting.

Select Tools > Text > Add Text with

Leader, or click the Add Text with
Leader button on the Notation toolbar.

To change the style of a leader arrow:

2.

In the Leader Text dialog, type the text you

want to appear with the leader, then click
OK.

3.

In the drawing area, select the point where

you want the arrowhead to appear.

4.

Move your pointer to stretch the leader, then

select the middle point of the leader.

5.

Select a third point for the leader. The text is

inserted.
2

1.

Click on the text with leader to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Dimension Styles dialog, click the

Edit button. (Alternatively, if you have
imported a dimension style with the desired
arrow style setting, just select it in the
dimension style list.)

4.

In the Edit Dimension Styles dialog, enable

the Leaders radio button on the Lines and
arrows page.

5.

Select the desired arrow style in the Arrow

type area. You can change the dimensions of
the arrow in the parameters window.

6.

Click OK in the Edit Dimension Styles

dialog.

7.

Click OK in the Dimension Styles dialog.

Moving and Stretching a Leader

You can move or stretch a leader by clicking and
dragging its grab handles.
To move/stretch a leader:
1.

Click on the text with leader to select it. Grab

handles appear on the leader.

2.

Click and drag a grab handle to move the

handle, then release your mouse button.

292

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Moving Leader Text

Moving Leader Text

If you have inserted text with a leader, you can
move the text independently of the leader.
To move leader text:
1.

Click on the text with leader to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Move Text, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Move Text.

3.

Click and drag the text to move it, then

release your mouse button.

Editing Leader Text

If you have inserted text with a leader, you can
change the text to whatever you want.

measurements of your floor plan. You can control

the style of these dimensions, and move and
stretch them if you need to.

Setting the Current Dimension

Style
When you add dimensions to your drawing, they
use the current dimension style, which by default
is the Standard dimension style. To view the
properties of the current style, or select a different
style to use, you need to access the Dimension
Styles library for the current drawing.
To set the current dimension style:
1.

Select Settings > Dimension Styles.

2.

Select the style you want to use. To view or

edit the properties of the style, click Edit. See
Dimension Style Properties on page 298 for
more information.

To edit leader text:

1.

Click on the text with leader to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Edit Text, or select Edit

> Modify Elements > Edit Text.

3.

In the Leader Text dialog, edit the text as

desired, then click OK.

Deleting Text with a Leader

You can delete text with a leader in a couple of
easy steps.
To delete a leader with text:
1.

Click on any part of the leader or text. The

entire leader with text is selected.

3.

Click Set Current to set the selected style as

current.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

4.

Click OK.

Dimensioning
Design Suite Deluxe automatically displays onscreen dimensions as you draw, making it easy to
draw walls at correct lengths, and insert elements
like doors and windows precisely where you
want them. These dimensions are drawing aids
only that disappear once you have inserted the
element.
Using Design Suite Deluxes selection of
Dimension tools, you can add fixed dimensions to
your drawing to convey the precise
Users Guide

293

45

Chapter 45 Text & Dimensions

Creating Automatic Exterior

Dimensions

To specify exterior dimension settings:

1.

Select Settings > Auto Dimension Settings.

2.

In the Auto Dimension Settings dialog,

specify your settings on the Auto Exterior
page. They are described below.

The Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions tool

automatically dimensions the exterior walls of
your home. By default, three dimension strings
are created: one for openings, one for wall
segments, and an overall dimension for each side
of the model.

Openings
Walls
Overall

Include Dimension String for:

Overall. The outermost dimension string that
dimensions the overall length of each exterior
wall.

Note: You can control which dimension strings

are created, as well as how walls and wall
elements are dimensioned. You must specify
these settings before the dimensions are created.
See Specifying Exterior Dimension Settings on
page 294.
To create automatic exterior dimensions:
1.

Select Tools > Dimensions > Apply

Auto Exterior Dimensions, or click
the Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions
button on the Notation toolbar.

Projections. String that dimensions all projecting

points along an exterior wall. If a wall has no
projections, this string will be identical to the
overall dimension string.

Specifying Exterior Dimension

Settings
Before using the Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions
tool to create automatic exterior wall dimensions,
it is a good idea to specify the settings for the
exterior dimensions. These settings control how
the walls and wall elements (doors, windows,
openings, etc.) are dimensioned.

294

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Openings: String that dimensions all major

projections and all openings in the exterior walls,
including door and window openings. Openings

Creating Auto Interior Dimensions

can be dimensioned on center, or to the outside
edges (see the Openings area of the dialog).

Interior Walls
If you are including the Interior Walls dimension
string, you can specify whether you want the
walls to be dimensioned on center, or to the walls
outside edges.

Creating Auto Interior Dimensions

The Auto Interior Dimensions tool automatically
dimensions interior walls in your model.
Interior Walls: String that dimensions to all major
projections and each interior wall that projects
into the exterior wall. Interior walls can be
dimensioned on center, or to the walls outside
edges (this is specified in the Interior Walls area
of the dialog).

To create automatic interior wall dimensions, you

draw a base line through your model.
Dimensions are created for any walls along that
line (running in the same direction as the line).
Before creating automatic interior dimensions,
you may want to specify the interior dimension
setting, which determines exactly how the walls
are dimensioned. See Specifying Interior
Dimension Settings on page 296.
To create automatic interior dimensions:
1.

Select Tools > Dimensions > Auto

Interior Dimensions, or click the Auto
Interior Dimensions button on the
Notation toolbar.

2.

Select a start point for the base line that is

outside of the model.

Dimension Line Distances

Dim Line Spacing: The spacing between successive
dimension lines (when two or more strings are
used).
Dimension Offset: The distance between the first
dimension string and the walls.
Openings
If you are including a dimension string for
openings, you can specify whether you want the
openings to be dimensioned on center, or to the
edges of the openings.
Extension Lines
Extension lines extend from the dimension line
toward the walls being dimensioned. In situations
where dimension points are not parallel with each
other, you can specify whether you want the
extension lines to extend all the way to the
dimension points, or whether you want them to
line up with the shortest dimension point.

Users Guide

295

45

Chapter 45 Text & Dimensions

3.

Select an end point for the base line that is

outside of the model. Dimensions are created
along that line.

2.

In the Auto Dimension Settings dialog,

select the Auto Interior tab.

3.

Select the desired dimension option.

4.

Click OK. You can now proceed with

creating auto interior dimensions.

Creating Linear Dimensions

A linear dimension is a horizontal or vertical
dimension with extension lines going vertically
(for a horizontal linear dimension) or horizontally
(for a vertical linear dimension) to the origins of
the extension lines, which define the endpoint of
the dimension.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Specifying Interior Dimension

Settings
If you are using the Auto Interior Dimensions tool
to create automatic interior wall dimensions, you
can specify how you want the walls dimensioned
before creating the dimensions. By default, walls
are dimensioned on center. If you prefer you can
dimension walls to one side or both sides.
To specify the auto interior dimension setting:
1.

296

Select Settings > Auto Dimension Settings.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

This tool is ideal for creating interior dimensions,

or dimensions on a landscape plan.

Creating Aligned Dimensions

To create linear dimensions:
1.

Select Tools > Dimensions > Linear

Dimensions, or click the Linear
Dimensions button on the Notation
toolbar.

2.

Click a point in your drawing to begin the

dimension line.

3.

Move your mouse (you do not have to hold

the mouse button down) to a second point
and click. A dimension line including offsets,
arrows and a numerical value is added to
your drawing.

4.

Move your mouse away from the dimension

line to stretch your extension lines. When the
extension lines are the desired length, click to
finish the dimension.

Creating Aligned Dimensions

An aligned dimension is similar to a linear
dimension, except it tilts to the same angle as the
element you are dimensioning, making it the
ideal choice for elements that are not horizontal or
vertical.

arrows and a numerical value is added to

your drawing.
4.

Move your mouse away from the dimension

line to stretch your extension lines. When the
extension lines are the desired length, click to
finish the dimension.

Moving a Dimension Line

You can move a dimension line using the Move
Dimension Line tool. When you move a
dimension line, the extension lines stretch to
accommodate the move.
To move a dimension line using the Move
Dimension Line tool:
1.

Select the dimension.

2.

Right-click and select Move Dimension

Line, or select Edit > Modify Elements >
Move Dimension Line.

3.

Click any point to serve as the base point for

the move.

4.

Move your mouse in the direction you want

to move the dimension line.

5.

Click to finish the move.

Stretching Dimensions
You can make a dimension longer or shorter, or
stretch either of its extension lines. When you
stretch the length of a dimension, the dimension
value updates automatically to reflect the new
length.
To adjust the length of a dimension:
1.

Select the dimension.

2.

Click on one of the lower extension grab

handles, then drag the dimension to stretch
it. Note that it is possible to stretch the
extension line at the same time.

To create aligned dimensions:

1.

Select Tools > Dimensions > Aligned

Dimensions, or click the Aligned
Dimensions button on the Notation
toolbar.

2.

Click a point in your drawing to begin the

dimension line.

3.

Move your mouse (you do not have to hold

the mouse button down) to a second point
and click. A dimension line including offsets,

Grab
handle

3.

Release your mouse button.

Users Guide

297

45

Chapter 45 Text & Dimensions

To adjust the length of extension lines:
1.

Select the dimension.

2.

Click the grab handle at the end of the

extension line, then drag to stretch the
extension line.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Changing the Style of a Dimension

You can change a dimensions line, arrow and
text style by applying a different dimension style
to it, or by editing dimension style properties.
To change the style of a dimension:
1.

Select the dimension. You can select multiple

dimensions using Shift+click.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Customized Dimension Styles to the Dimension

Styles Library File on page 409.

Deleting a Dimension
You can delete a dimension in a couple of easy
steps.
To delete a dimension:
1.

Select the dimension.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

Dimension Style Properties

You can control a dimensions line, arrow and
text style properties.

Anatomy of a Dimension
Dimension
Line

Text
Arrow,
Tick or
Dot

Extension
Line

Lines and Arrows

3.

In the Dimension Styles dialog, select the

style you want to apply to the dimension.
To create a new dimension style, click
the Add Item button, then type a name
for the style and press ENTER.
To edit the properties of the currently
selected dimension style, click Edit, then
make your changes in the Edit Dimension
Styles dialog. See Dimension Style
Properties on page 298.

4.

With the desired style selected, click Set

Current.

5.

Click OK.

Note: Dimension styles that are edited or added

through inserted dimensions are saved with the
current project only. If you want to save them in
the dimension styles library, so they can be made
available in other projects, see Saving

298

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Arrow Type
You can specify an arrow type for dimensions
and leaders (leaders are used with the Text with
Leader tool). Choose an arrow, dot or tick for
your arrow type.

Dimension Style Properties

The properties below the Arrow Type selection
window (Extension Offset, Dimension Offset,
etc.) vary depending on the arrow type selected.
As you make different selections, the dimension
updates in the preview window.

Dimension Text

Horizontal Text: Forces the dimension text to

always be horizontal, regardless of the dimension
line's angle.
Above Dimension Line: Text is placed above the
dimension line.
Distance: Distance between the text and the
dimension line when placing text above the
dimension line.

Horizontal Text Position

This is the position of the dimension text relative
to the ends of the dimension line.
Centered: Centers the text inside the dimension
line.
Distance from first end: Places the text a specific
distance from the first end of the dimension.
Specify the distance in the Distance edit box.

Units
The units (e.g. feet and inches) and precision used
to display the dimension value.
Override system units: Uses the unit of measure
specified in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog
instead of the unit of measure specified in the
program settings.
Type: Choose from Feet-Inches, Millimeters,
Centimeters, Meters or Inches.

Distance from the second end: Places the text a

specific distance from the second end of the
dimension. Specify the distance in the Distance
edit box.

Line Styles
You can select a different line style for the
dimension line, extension lines and arrows. A line
style determines the pattern, color and weight of
a line.

Precision: For Feet-Inches, the choices are whole

units (0, 1/2, 1/4 and so on). For metric units, the
choices are number of decimal places you can use.

Text Style
Refers to the font, font style, text height and color
of the dimension text. Click Text Style to select a
style.

Vertical Text Position

This is the vertical position of the dimension text
relative to the dimension line.
Vertically Centered: Text is placed inside the
dimension line.

To assign a different line style to a dimension

component, select the component in the left pane,
then click Select in the center pane to access the
Line Styles dialog.
For information about creating custom line styles,
see the Line Styles chapter on page 397.
Users Guide

299

45

Design Suite Deluxe keeps track of all the materials you use to build your home as you design it
right down to the very last nail. You can generate a project estimate with a single mouse click.
The project estimate lists all of the materials used to build your house, as well as the quantity,
unit price and total cost of each material.
You can choose either the Standard Report Form template, which generates a TXT file, or the
Excel XLS template, which generates an XLS file. Both templates are available in both Imperial
and Metric versions.
Sample unit prices are provided for your convenience, but you can specify custom pricing
directly from your suppliers. The grand total is calculated for you automatically, making
estimating simple, quick and accurate.

301

Chapter 46 Project Estimate

Generating a Project Estimate

To turn grid lines off:

You can view an accurate project estimate at any

time during a design session. The estimate is
always up-to-date and reflects your project in its
current state.

1.

The project estimate, or bill of materials, lists all of

the materials used to build your house, as well as
the quantity, unit price and total cost of each
material. It also lists assemblies (parts), which are
built into an elements properties. For example, a
wall may have assemblies such as studs, drywall,
insulation, vapor barrier, and drywall screws.
To generate a project estimate:
1.

Select Tools > Calculate/Estimate >

Generate Project Estimate.

In the Generate Project Estimate dialog,

select View > Show Grid.

Selecting a Report Template

By default, the project estimate uses the Standard
Report Form template, which generates a TXT file.
You can select an Excel XLS template if you want
the report to be compatible with Microsoft Excel.
Both templates are available in Imperial and
Metric versions.
To select a report template:
1.

In the Generate Project Estimate dialog,

select the template you want to use from the
template drop box.

Filtering Locations from a Project

Estimate
By default, all building elements on all locations
are included in your estimate, as well as all
landscaping elements. You can omit a location
from your estimate if you want.
The Generate Project Estimate dialog acts as a
viewer for your project estimate. You can print
and save the estimate directly from this dialog.
By default, materials are grouped by location, and
there is a terrain category for landscaping
materials. You can choose to omit selected
locations and elements from the estimate if you
want. Estimates are based on report templates
that determine what type of file is generated.

Hiding Grid Lines in the Report

Window
When you generate a project estimate, grid lines
are displayed in the Generate Project Estimate
dialog. You can turn grid lines off if you want.

302

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Excluding Elements from a Project Estimate

To filter locations from an estimate:

Editing Material Pricing

1.

Most elements have a default unit price set for

them in their properties. These prices are used in
the project estimate.

In the Generate Project Estimate

dialog, click the Filter Report button
beside the report template drop box.

If you have already created your design, you can

edit the prices of inserted elements by selecting
them in the drawing, then editing their
properties. Alternatively you can generate and
save a project estimate, then edit the pricing in the
estimates associated editor, such as Excel or
Notepad (depending on the report template used).
If you edit the price of any element in the catalog,
the price change will affect all new insertions of
the element.
To edit the price of an inserted element:

2.

To omit a location and its elements from the

report, click the locations filter icon. You can
omit landscaping elements from the report
by filtering the terrain out.

3.

Click OK. The estimate is updated.

1.

Select the element in your drawing. You can

select multiple elements of the same type
using Shift+click.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the properties dialog, select the Quantity

tab.

4.

Edit the value in the Price edit box. Note that

prices are unit prices. For a carpet, for
example, you would enter the price per
square foot, not the price of the entire carpet.

5.

Click OK in the properties dialog.

Excluding Elements from a Project

Estimate
You can prevent an element from appearing in
the project estimate by changing a setting on the
elements Quantity property page.
To prevent an element from appearing in a
project estimate:
1.

Select the element in your drawing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties.

3.

In the properties dialog, select the Quantity

tab.

4.

Disable the Include Element in Quantities

check box.

5.

Click OK.

Note: You can also apply this change to elements

in the catalog. The change will affect all new
insertions of the element.

Users Guide

303

46

Chapter 46 Project Estimate

To edit material pricing in the catalog:

2.

In the Report Filename dialog, select the

location where you want to save the report.

3.

In the File name edit box, type the name you

want to save under.

From the Element drop box, select the

element type you want to edit.

4.

Click Save. The report is saved under the

specified name and location.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group

containing the element you want to edit.

4.

In the Select an Element window, select the

element to edit.

Opening a Project Estimate in its

Associated Editor

5.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or

right-click and select Properties.

6.

In the properties dialog, select the Quantity

tab.

7.

Edit the value in the Price edit box. Note that

prices are unit prices. For a carpet, for
example, you would enter the price per
square foot, not the price of the entire carpet.

8.

Click OK in the properties dialog.

9.

Click OK.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog and
select Catalog Manager.

2.

You can choose to open your project estimate in

its associated editor. You can do this directly from
the Generate Project Estimate dialog, or by
using the View Project Estimate tool.
To open an estimate from the Generate
Project Estimate dialog:
1.

In the Generate Project Estimate dialog,

select File > Open with Associated Editor.
You are prompted to save the report.

2.

Click Yes to save the report. The report is

opened in the associated editor. For example,
a report that is using the Standard Report
Form template, which generates a TXT file,
will open in Notepad.

Saving a Project Estimate

The Generate Project Estimate acts like a
viewer for your project estimate. If you want to
save the estimate to a file, you need to use the
Save and Close tool. By default, estimates are
saved in the same directory where the project is
saved. The file extension depends on the
currently selected report template.

To open a saved quantity report:

1.

Select Tools > Calculate/Estimate > View

Project Estimate.

2.

Click the Browse button, then locate

the file to open.

3.

Click Open.

To save the current project estimate:

1.

In the Generate Project Estimate dialog,

select File > Save and Close, or click the
Save and Close button at the bottom of the
dialog.

To save a project estimate using a different

file name or save location:
1.

Click the Browse button next to the Quantity

Report File edit box at the bottom of the
Generate Project Estimate dialog.
Browse button

304

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Tip: If you have already saved your estimate, an

alternative way of opening it is to double-click the
file in Windows Explorer, or to open the associated
editor and use that programs Open function.

Printing a Project Estimate

Printing a Project Estimate

You can print the project estimate directly from
the Generate Project Estimate dialog.
Alternatively you can open the report in its
associated editor and print it there.
To print a project estimate:
1.

In the Generate Project Estimate

dialog, select File > Print, or click the
Print button to the left of the report
template drop box.

2.

In the Print dialog, select the printer you

want to use, then click Print.

Users Guide

305

46

Design Suite Deluxe incorporates powerful 3DTrueView rendering technology. 3DTrueView

rendering adds light, shadow and reflection to a textured 3D view to achieve photo-realistic
images of both the interior and exterior of your home. These images can be printed directly from
the screen. By default, rendered images are also saved to a bitmap (BMP) or JPG file that you can
then open in most graphic editing applications.
Once youve set up your scene, creating a 3DTrueView rendering involves only a mouse click
or two. In a short time youll have a vivid, life-like view to enjoy!

307

Chapter 47 3DTrueView

How 3DTrueView Rendering

Works

Setting the Viewpoint for the

Scene

A rendered view is a photo realistic view that

includes light and shadows. When you render a
3D scene, the program performs a series of
lighting calculations to determine the lighting in a
scene. These are also called radiosity calculations.
Once a final result is met, the scene is ray traced, or
rendered. Ray tracing works by tracing the path
taken by a ray of light through the scene, and
calculating the rays reflection, refraction, or
absorption whenever it intersects an element in
the scene.

When you create a 3DTrueView rendering, your

model is captured at the angle currently shown
on the screen. For information about 3D viewing,
see Displaying 3D Camera Views on page 27.
Specific topics you might want to look at:

Material properties define how light reflects off a

surface. Direct light and ambient light levels
define the light that is reflected. Direct light is
light that is emitted from light fixtures. It has a
specific color, intensity and direction. Ambient
light can be thought of as a general level of light
that is everywhere in the scene. Every light in a
scene contributes to the overall ambient light in a
scene.
The first part of the radiosity process involves
finding those element surfaces that are visible to
direct light and calculating how much light is
transferred to each element. Some elements will
receive more light than others depending on their
surface properties, and different surfaces will
reflect different amounts of light. Still, each
element will absorb some of the light, so the total
amount reflected back into the scene will be less
than that emitted by the light fixtures.
The next part of the process involves finding the
element that reflects the most light, and repeating
the process. The element is considered a
secondary light source, so we need to calculate
how much of its light is transferred to other
elements in the scene. The process is repeated,
one step at a time, until the amount of light
remaining in the scene is negligible in comparison
to the light originally emitted by the light fixtures.
We then say that the radiosity calculations have
converged to a solution, and thats when ray
tracing can begin.

Changing Your Viewpoint on page 360

Changing the Camera Height on page 361
Changing the Viewing Field Angle on

page 361

Setting the Scene

Even though creating a 3DTrueView rendering
involves nothing more than a mouse click, there
are a few things you should consider beforehand.
Note: It doesnt matter what display mode
(wireframe, patterned, etc.) youre currently in.
3DTrueView renderings will always be
textured.

Exterior Shots
If you want to do an exterior shot, the most
important factor to consider is sunlight. This is
determined by your global position and time of
day. By adjusting these settings, you control how
much sunlight is in the scene, and from what
angle it shines. See Defining Your Location and
Time of Day on page 309.

Night Shots
To create a night shot, you need to first set your
background to a night scene. See Selecting a
Background for 3D Views on page 368. Once
your background is set, all you need to do is set
the time to a time of day when there is no sun. If
you do want to create a night shot, you will
probably want to insert some exterior lighting in
your design. See Inserting Exterior Lighting on
page 248.

Interior Shots
When creating interior shots, light comes from
light fixtures that you have inserted in the room,
and can also come through the windows if it is

308

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Defining Your Location and Time of Day

daytime. You can turn lights on and off as well as
change their light bulbs for different light
intensity and effect. For information about
interior light fixtures, see Interior Lighting on
page 137. To speed up the rendering process, you
may want to turn off daylight temporarily so that
only light from light fixtures is considered in the
calculation. This is ideal when a room has small
or covered windows, or no windows at all. See
Turning Daylight Off on page 311.

You can save new or edited cities to the city

template for use in other projects if you want.

Defining Your Location and Time

of Day

4.

You can define where your model is located in the

world, as well as set the time of day. This
determines how much daylight there will be in
the scene.

To set the month and day, select a month by

clicking the arrows on the month bar at the
top of the calendar, then click a number on
the calendar.

5.

To set the time of day, enter a time in the

Time edit box, or use the slider to select a
time. Enable either the am or pm radio
button. Clicking Set Current Time reads the
current time set in your computer system
and defaults to the next smallest 5-minute
increment of time. For example, 12:04
becomes 12:00.

6.

To keep track of changes in time due to

daylight savings, enable the Daylight Saving
check box.

7.

To set the angle from True North, enter a

value in the Angle from True North edit box.
This is the geographic North, as opposed
to the magnetic North which you see on a
compass. The value you specify determines
where North is on your screen, and affects
the angle of the sun for daylight rendering.
The number in degrees that you enter is in
relation to the 90 perpendicular orientation
of your drawing. A value of 1 makes the top
of the screen North. A value of 90 makes the
top of the screen East, and the left side of the
screen North.

To define your location and time of day:

1.

Select View > 3DTrueView >

3DTrueView Options, or click the
3DTrueView Options button on the
3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Global Settings tab.

3.

Select a country and city from the

appropriate drop boxes. You can add or edit
a city if needed. Just click the Add City or
Edit City button. You will need to know the
longitude, latitude and time zone of the city.

For more information, see Specifying the

Angle of True North in the Online Help
(enter the keywords true north).
It is assumed that information regarding
building orientation to True North can be
taken from, or calculated from, a surveyor's
certificate. However, True North can be calculated from a Magnetic North reading taken
Users Guide

309

47

Chapter 47 3DTrueView
at your building site. For more information,
see Calculating True North from Magnetic
North in the Online Help (enter the keywords true north).
8.

Click OK.

To create a 3DTrueView rendering:

1.

Make sure you have set the 3D scene exactly

how you want it.

2.

Select View > 3DTrueView > Render

3DTrueView, or click the Render
3DTrueView button on the
3DTrueView toolbar. The solution begins.
Before the rendered view is generated, the
program goes through a process of
calculating light in the scene. These are called
radiosity calculations. Basically, it determines
how much light is given off by the sun or by
lighting fixtures, and how much light is
reflected off the surface of elements. The
view is updated at regular intervals during
these calculations. A dialog appears on the
screen that shows you the progression of the
radiosity calculations.

To save new or edited cities:

1.

On the Global Settings page of the Program

Settings dialog, click the Save button below
the city list.

2.

In the Save As dialog, select the timezone.cty

file in the programs templates folder.

3.

Click Save.

4.

Click Yes to replace the original city

template.

To load a saved city template into other

projects:
1.

On the Global Settings page of the Program

Settings dialog, click the Load button below
the city list.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the timezone.cty file

in the programs Templates folder.

3.

Click Open. The city list is updated

automatically.

Creating a 3DTrueView
Rendering

If you click Stop during the solution stage,

radiosity calculations will stop, and the scene
will be instantly raytraced. You may want to
do this if the process seems to be taking a
long time, but you may not get the result you
want. (The image may turn out too dark.)
3.

Creating a photo realistic 3DTrueView

rendering involves only a simple menu selection
or mouse click. Rendering is a two-step process.
First, the lighting in the scene is calculated (these
is called the radiosity solution). Then, the scene is
raytraced, which means all light and shadows are
incorporated and the final rendered image is
generated.
Rendered views are displayed instantly on the
screen once theyve been calculated. By default,
the image will also be saved to a BMP or JPG file
that can be opened in a number of graphic editing
applications.

Once the radiosity calculations are complete,

raytracing begins. Please wait while the
rendered image is generated.

Once the rendering is complete, it fills your

current view window. The Rendering
3DTrueView dialog tells you that the image
is complete.

At this point you can print the view if you

want.

310

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Adjusting the Rendering Quality

4.

When you are finished viewing the

3DTrueView rendering, click Close in the
Rendering 3DTrueView dialog. The view
returns to its original, pre-rendered state.
By default, the image is saved in the same
directory your project is located in. For more
information, see Saving a 3DTrueView
Rendering to a File on page 313.

Adjusting the Rendering Quality

By default, the quality level chosen for
3DTrueView renderings is Level 1 - Lowest
(fastest). You can select an increased quality level
before rendering if you want. Note that the higher
level of quality you choose, the longer the
rendering process takes.
To adjust the rendering quality:
1.

Select View > 3DTrueView >

3DTrueView Options, or click the
3DTrueView Options button on the
3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Rendering tab.

3.

Select the quality level you want from the

Quality Level drop box.

4.

Click OK.

3DTrueView Options button on the

3DTrueView toolbar.
2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Rendering tab.

3.

Edit the value in the Change Display Every

_ Steps edit box. Fewer steps increase the
frequency of visual updates, but can increase
rendering time.

4.

Click OK.

Adjusting the Brightness of the

Rendered Image
The program's "virtual camera" works in a
manner similar to actual point-and-shoot
cameras. It automatically calculates the correct
"exposure" for the lighting situation and produces
a view with infinite depth of field (i.e. everything
is in focus). However if, in exceptional
circumstances, you want to brighten or darken a
rendering, you can use the Image Brightness
option to manually override the automatic
exposure. Brightness can be increased or
decreased.
To adjust image brightness:
1.

Select View > 3DTrueView >

3DTrueView Options, or click the
3DTrueView Options button on the
3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Rendering tab.

3.

Specify the amount you want to increase or

decrease the brightness in the Image
Brightness edit box, or use the arrow
buttons to scroll up or down. A positive
value increases the brightness, while a
negative values decreases it.

4.

Click OK.

Changing the Refresh Rate During

Lighting Calculations
As the program performs lighting calculations,
the view updates at regular intervals to reflect
calculations up to that point. You can change the
interval at which the view refreshes by increasing
or decreasing the number of steps between visual
updates.
To change the refresh rate during radiosity
calculations:
1.

Turning Daylight Off

By default, daylight is included in radiosity
calculations, even for indoor scenes (light can
come through a window). You can turn daylight

Select View > 3DTrueView >

3DTrueView Options, or click the
Users Guide

311

47

Chapter 47 3DTrueView
off if you want. This basically omits daylight from
the lighting calculations, and can speed up
rendering.
Note: The Enable Daylight option should always
remain on for exterior shots, even if it is a night
shot. If you want to create a night shot, change
your time of day instead. See Defining Your
Location and Time of Day on page 309.

Creating a Fog Effect

To create a fog effect in your rendering, you need
to turn on the Fog option in your rendering
settings before rendering the view.
To create a fog effect:
1.

Select View > 3DTrueView >

3DTrueView Options, or click the
3DTrueView Options button on the
3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Rendering tab.

3.

In the Effects area, check the Enable check

box.

4.

Enable the Fog radio button.

5.

In the Density edit box, specify the desired

thickness of the fog. The higher the
percentage, the thicker the fog.

6.

Click OK.

To turn daylight off:

1.

Select View > 3DTrueView >

3DTrueView Options, or click the
3DTrueView Options button on the
3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Rendering tab.

3.

Uncheck the Enable Daylight check box.

4.

Click OK.

Using Antialiasing to Reduce

Jagged Edges
Antialiasing blends pixels in areas where two
colors or two materials meet to reduce artifacts
(or stair steps) and produce a more natural look
to the scene. By default, antialiasing is disabled to
increase rendering speed. You can select varying
levels of antialiasing.

Creating a Smoke Effect

To create a smoke effect in your rendering, you
need to turn on the Smoke option in your
rendering settings before rendering the view.
To create a smoke effect:
1.

Select View > 3DTrueView >

3DTrueView Options, or click the
3DTrueView Options button on the
3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Rendering tab.

To use antialiasing:
1.

Select View > 3DTrueView >

3DTrueView Options, or click the
3DTrueView Options button on the
3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Rendering tab.

3.

In the Effects area, check the Enable check

box.

3.

Use the up arrows key next to the

Antialiasing edit box to increase the level of
antialiasing. The higher the level, the cleaner
the image, but the longer the rendering
process takes. The highest level is 4.

4.

Enable the Smoke radio button.

5.

In the Density edit box, specify the desired

thickness of the smoke. The higher the
percentage, the thicker the smoke.

6.

Click OK.

4.

312

Click OK.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Adjusting the Light Coming from Light Fixtures

Adjusting the Light Coming from

Light Fixtures

7.

If creating a custom finish, specify its

properties. These are described below.
Specular. Reflection that creates
highlights on materials, making them appear
shiny.

To adjust the color or intensity of light coming

from a light fixture, you can add light bulbs,
change a light bulb to a different type, adjust the
intensity of the light, select a different color for
the light, or turn a light off completely.

Emissive. The amount of light given off by a

material. The more emissive a
material is, the more self-luminous it
appears.

See the following topics:

Editing a Light Fixtures Light Source on

Transparency. The degree to which a material is pervious to light.

page 139

Color Bleed. The degree to which different

colors blend where they meet.

Turning a Light On or Off on page 140

Editing the Surface Properties of

Materials

8.

Click OK in the Edit Materials dialog.

9.

Click OK in the Materials dialog.

Different materials have different finishes.

Surface finishes include Dull, Low Gloss, Semi
Gloss, High Gloss, Liquid, Fully Reflective,
Partially Reflective, Shiny, Fully Transparent, and
Partially Transparent. The finish determines how
much a material reflects, emits and absorbs light.
These factors can affect the lighting in a rendered
scene.

10. Click OK in the properties dialog.

To edit the surface properties of an elements

materials:
1.

Select the element in your drawing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the properties dialog, select the

Appearance tab.

4.

On the Appearance page, click the Select

button, or click the Texture swatch to access
the Materials dialog.

5.

In the Materials dialog, click the Rendered

swatch to bring up the Edit Materials dialog.

6.

To change the surface finish of the material

(dull, shiny, etc.), make a selection from the
drop box in the Surface Properties area. If you
want to specify a custom surface finish, select
Custom in the list, then click the Advanced
button.

Saving a 3DTrueView Rendering

to a File
By default, renderings are automatically saved to
a BMP or JPG file that you can open in most
graphic editing applications. You can disable the
Render to File option if you want, or specify a
different location to save in.
To save a 3DTrueView rendering to a file:
1.

Select View > 3DTrueView >

3DTrueView Options, or click the
3DTrueView Options button on the
3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Rendering tab.

3.

In the Image Output area, enable the Render

to File check box.

4.

By default, rendered images are saved in the

same directory your projects are stored in. By
default, this would be the following
directory:
C:\Documents and Settings\<Current
User>\My Documents\3D Home Architect
Design Suite Deluxe 8\Projects
To select a different location to save
your rendered image in, click the
Browse button next to the current

Users Guide

313

47

Chapter 47 3DTrueView
output folder path. In the Open dialog,
navigate to the folder where you want to
store rendered images.
By default, the file has the same name as your
project for easy identification. To specify a
custom name, enter the name in the File
Name edit box. You can select either BMP or
JPG as your file format from the Files of type
drop box.
5.

To create and save an additional 3DTrueView

rendering:
1.

Select View > 3DTrueView >

3DTrueView Options, or click the
3DTrueView Options button on the
3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Rendering tab.

3.

In the Image Output area, make sure Render

to File is checked.

4.

Click the Browse button next to the

current output folder path.

5.

In the Open dialog, enter a name in the File

name edit box that is different from any
other images that you have saved. You can
select either BMP or JPG as your file format
from the Files of type drop box.

6.

Click Open.

7.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Click OK.

Specifying the Output Size of

Rendered Images
3DTrueView

By default,
images fill the view
window they are created from. If you enabled the
Render to File option in your rendering settings,
the image is also saved at that size. You can select
another output size if you want.
To specify an output size for rendered images:
1.

Select View > 3DTrueView >

3DTrueView Options, or click the
3DTrueView Options button on the
3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Rendering tab.

3.

In the Image Output area, select the desired

size from the Size drop box. The default
selection is Current View Size, which saves the
image at the size currently shown on the
screen. Pre-defined sizes include 640 x 480,
800 x 600, and 1024 x 768. Selecting the
Custom option lets you define a custom size
by entering values in the Width and Height
edit boxes.

4.

Click OK.

Creating Multiple 3DTrueView

Renderings in the Same Project
If you enable the Render to File option before
creating a rendering, the image is saved to a BMP
or JPG file in your projects directory. The file has
the same name as your project. If you create
another 3DTrueView rendering in the same
project, the file from the previous rendering is
overwritten.

314

If you want to create and save more

3DTrueView renderings within the same
project, you need to specify a different output
name for each new image before creating the
rendering.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

The next 3DTrueView rendering you create

will be saved to the new file name.

(
An animation is just like a movie. Design Suite Deluxes powerful animation tools let you record
an actual tour through your 3D model that you can play back at any time. You can even add
realistic sounds to your animation, such as a doorbell ringing. You can also choose to ray trace the
animation for a photorealistic display that includes light, shadows and reflection.
To create an animation, all you need to do is draw one or more paths for the camera to follow.
Then, just sit back and watch your design come to life!

315

Chapter 48 Animation

Creating an Animation

2.

Select Tools > Animation > Insert

Path, or click the Insert Path button on
the Animation toolbar.

3.

In the Path Properties dialog, specify a

name for the path for identification purposes.

4.

In the Behavior area, specify what you want

the camera to focus on during the animation.
If you select Follow Path, the camera will
focus on a different target along the path in
each frame. If you select Specify Target, the
camera will always point towards a target
point that you specify.

5.

In the View Angle area, specify how wide you

want the view angle to be by either sliding
the ruler or entering a value in the edit box.
Higher values produce a wide-angle view;
lower values produce a close-up view.

6.

Click OK.

7.

Select a start point for the camera. For

example, if you want to start your animation
by walking through the front door, select a
point outside the front door.

8.

If you selected the Specify Target option,

select the point you want to the camera to
remain focused on during the animation.

9.

Select the next point of the path. Each point

you select is called a control point. The camera
will move to each control point and capture
an image of the view at that point. Basically,

An animation is a series of images that, when

viewed in rapid succession, create the illusion of
movement through a scene.
To create an animation, you need to draw a path
through your 2D plan for the camera to follow.
Once the path has been drawn you can change it
if you want, and even enhance it with sound. You
can draw more than one path if you want, and
specify the order of paths for the camera to
follow. You then use the Preview Animation tool
to view the resulting animation.
Animations can be output to an AVI file. You can
control the animations speed, video
compression, frame size and frame rate. You can
also opt to ray trace the animation for optimal
effect.

Drawing an Animation Path

The first step in creating an animation is defining
a path for the camera to follow. You can specify
where you want the camera to look (along the
path or at a specific target or target path), as well
as the view angle.
You draw the path by selecting a camera start
point and subsequent control points. The path
automatically curves between points to create a
smooth motion for the camera. Once you have
drawn the path, you can add, remove and elevate
control points if you want.
You can draw more than one path if you want. By
default, all paths will be included in the
animation, and will be followed in the order in
which they were drawn. You can, however,
choose which paths you want to include in the
animation, as well as the order of paths for the
camera to follow.
To draw an animation path:
1.

316

Make sure that the location on which you

want to capture the animation is the current
building location. Also, it is recommended
that you draw the path while in 2D plan
view.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Drawing Separate Camera and Target Paths

control points are the key to drawing and
shaping your path.

2.

In the Path Properties dialog, give the target

path a name.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Pick points to define the target path, then

right-click and select Finish.

5.

Select Tools > Animation >

Animation Properties, or click the
Animation Properties button on the
Animation toolbar.

6.

If you do not want to include the target path

in your animation, uncheck the Include
check box beside the target paths name in
the Animation Properties dialog.

7.

Click OK.

Camera start point

Step Two: Draw the Camera Path

10. Continue selecting control points until your

path is finished.

1.

Select Tools > Animation > Insert

Path, or click the Insert Path button on
the Animation toolbar.

2.

In the Path Properties dialog, give the

camera path a name.

3.

Enable the Specify Target option.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Select the start point of the camera path.

6.

Select a random target point. You will snap

the target to the target path later.

Drawing Separate Camera and

Target Paths

7.

Select the remaining points of the camera

path, then right-click and select Finish.

If you want you can draw two paths: one for the
camera to move along (camera path), and a
separate one for the camera to focus on (target
path). This would be like watching an airplane
from a moving car.

Step Three: Connect the Paths

11. Right-click and select Finish.

Tip: You can simulate the movement from one
location to another by drawing your path up or
down a staircase. Once the path is drawn, you can
then edit the elevation of control points on the
other location to view elements on that location.
See Editing the Elevation of a Control Point on
page 320.

If you want your camera to focus on a target path,

you need to draw the camera path using the
Specify Target option. Once you have drawn both
paths, you need to snap the camera paths target
point to the target path.

Step One: Draw the Target Path

1.

Select Tools > Animation > Insert

Path, or click the Insert Path button on
the Animation toolbar.

1.

Click on the camera path to select it.

2.

Click and drag the target point (the point at

the end of the arrow) to the target path, then
release your mouse button. The target point
automatically snaps to the camera of the
target path. You are now ready to preview
the animation.
When you preview the animation, youll
notice that the camera moves along the
camera path and focuses on points along the
target path as the animation plays.

Users Guide

317

48

Chapter 48 Animation

Previewing the Animation

Once you have drawn one or more paths for your
animation, you can preview the resulting
animation. The animation is loaded into a
separate viewer where you can play and pause
the animation, as well as edit animation
properties.
To view an animation:
1.

Make sure you have drawn a suitable path

for your camera.

2.

Select Tools > Animation > Preview

Animation, or click the Preview
Animation button on the Animation
toolbar.

3.

In the Preview Animation dialog, click Play.

The animation begins to play. You can pause
the animation at any time by clicking Pause.
When the animation is not playing, you can
click and drag the slider to play the
animation manually, or to view specific parts
of the animation.

Note: If you enabled the Ray Trace Animation

option in your Animation Properties, the ray
tracing will not appear in the preview. It will only
appear when you export the animation to a file.

Repeating an Animation During

the Preview
By default, an animation is played once when you
use the Preview Animation tool. You can set the
animation to repeat during the preview, meaning
it will play continuously until you close the
preview window.
To repeat an animation during the preview:
1.

Select Tools > Animation >

Animation Properties, or click the
Animation Properties button on the
Animation toolbar. This button is also
available in the Preview Animation window.

2.

On the Paths page of the Animation

Properties dialog, enable the Repeat
Animation during preview check box.

3.

Click OK.

Changing the Path Order in an

Animation
If you have drawn more than one path for your
animation, the paths will be followed in the order
in which they were drawn. You can change the
path order if you want.
To change the path order in an animation:
1.

4.

When the animation has finished playing,

click Close.

Note: To output the animation to an actual file so

that it can be viewed outside of Design Suite
Deluxe, you need to use the Export Animation to
File tool. See Exporting an Animation to a File on
page 321.

318

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Select Tools > Animation >

Animation Properties, or click the
Animation Properties button on the
Animation toolbar. This button is also
available in the Preview Animation and
Export Animation to File windows.

Choosing the Paths to Include in an Animation

2.

On the Paths page of the Animation

Properties dialog, use the Move Up or Move
Down buttons to move selected paths up or
down in the list.

Moving an Animation Paths

Control Points
Once you have drawn an animation path, you can
move any control point including the camera start
point if you want. When you move a control
point, the path automatically adjusts to maintain
a smooth, curved path.
To move control points on a path:
1.

Click on the camera or any point on the path

to select the path. Blue grab handles appear
at each control point.

2.

Hover your pointer over the control

point you want to move. This displays
the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the point to the desired

location, then release your mouse button.

Adding Control Points to an

Animation Path
3.

Click OK.

Choosing the Paths to Include in

an Animation
By default, all animation paths that are present in
your drawing will be included in the resulting
animation. You can choose to prevent selected
paths from being included if you want.
To choose which paths you want to include in
the animation:
1.

2.

3.

Once you have drawn a path for your animation,

you can easily add control points to the path if
you want. Adding control points can help you
expand your path where needed, or provide a
point to attach a sound to.
To add a control point to your path:
1.

Select Tools > Animation > Add

Control Point, or click the Add
Control Point button on the Animation
toolbar.

2.

Click where you want to add the control

point. A control point is automatically added
to the path.

Select Tools > Animation >

Animation Properties, or click the
Animation Properties button on the
Animation toolbar. This button is also
available in the Preview Animation and
Export Animation to File windows.

Removing a Control Point from an

Animation Path

On the Paths page of the Animation

Properties dialog, uncheck the boxes in the
Include column for any paths you do not
want to include.

To remove a control point from a path:

Click OK.

You can easily remove a control point from an

animation path using the Remove Control Point
tool.

1.

Select Tools > Animation > Remove

Control Point, or click the Remove
Control Point button on the Animation
toolbar.
Users Guide

319

48

Chapter 48 Animation
2.

Click on the control point you want to

remove.

2.

Click on the control point on your animation

path where you want to insert the sound.

Note: Removing a control point can change the

shape of the path slightly depending on the
location of adjacent control points to ensure a
smooth, curved path.

3.

In the Open dialog, select the sound file you

want to insert. Sound files have a *.wav
extension. A number of sounds can be found
in the programs Sounds directory. To hear
the selected sound, click the Play Sound
button.

4.

Click Open. A small node is inserted next to

the control point.

Editing the Elevation of a Control

Point
By default, control points are 4-6 above the floor
level of the current building location. You can edit
the elevation of a control point on an animation
path using the Elevate Control Point tool. This
adjusts the path so it goes up or down depending
on the elevation you specify. For example, if your
path is on the ground floor and you have a control
point at either end of a staircase, elevating the top
control point will make it seem as if youre
walking up the stairs.

Note: Sound nodes can only be placed at control

points. You can add control points to your path if
necessary. See Adding Control Points to an
Animation Path on page 319.

Removing Sounds from an

Animation

To edit the elevation of a control point:

You can easily remove sounds that you have

inserted in your animation using the Remove
Sound Node tool.

1.

To remove a sound from an animation:

Select Tools > Animation > Elevate

Control Point, or click the Elevate
Control Point button on the Animation
toolbar.

1.

With your 2D plan displayed, select

Tools > Animation > Remove Sound
Node, or click the Remove Sound
Node button on the Animation toolbar.
Click on the control point that the sound has
been added to. The sound node is removed.

2.

Click on the control point you want to edit.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, the value currently

shown is the current elevation of the control
point. Edit the elevation as desired.

2.

4.

Click OK.

Selecting a Default Sounds

Directory

Adding Sounds to an Animation

You can add a variety of sounds to your
animation, such as a doorbell ringing or the creak
of a door opening. Sound is added to an
animation by inserting a sound node at a selected
path control point, and choosing the sound file
you want to play at that point. The sound will be
played when the camera reaches that point
during the playback of the animation.
To add a sound to an animation:
1.

320

With your 2D plan displayed, select

Tools > Animation > Add Sound
Node, or click the Add Sound Node
button on the Animation toolbar.
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

When adding sounds to your animation, the

programs Sounds directory is displayed by
default when you are selecting a sound to add.
You can display a different default directory if
you want.
To select a default sounds directory:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

In the File Paths area, click on the Sounds

Directory to select it.

Exporting an Animation to a File

4.

Click Modify.

5.

In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the

directory you want to use as your default
sounds directory, then click OK.

2.

In the Animation Properties dialog, select

the Output File tab.

3.

Click the browse button next to the Filename

edit box.

Exporting an Animation to a File

Once you have previewed your animation and
are satisfied with it, you can record it to an *.avi
file which can be played using any digital media
application that supports the *.avi file format,
such as Windows Media Player.
To export an animation to a file:
1.

Select Tools > Animation > Export

Animation to File, or click the Export
Animation to File button on the
Animation toolbar.

2.

In the Export Animation to File dialog, click

Record. The animation begins recording.

3.

When the animation has stopped, click

Close.

Note: By default, animations take the name of the

project and are saved in the Projects directory. If
you want to create more than one animation in
the same project, you will need to change the file
name before exporting the next animation. See the
next topic, Editing the Name or Location of the
Animation Output File.

4.

To edit the location where the file is saved,

select the desired directory in the Save As
dialog. If you want to change the name of the
output file, type the desired name in the File
name edit box.

5.

Click Save.

Editing the Name or Location of

the Animation Output File

Changing the Speed of an

Animation

Before exporting an animation to a file, you can

specify the name of the resulting *.avi file, as well
as the location in which it is saved. You will need
to change the file name if you want to produce
multiple animations within the same project.

By default, the speed of an animation is 80 inches

per second if working in feet and inches, or 2.032
meters per second if working in metric units. You
can speed up or slow down an animation by
editing either the duration or velocity setting in a
paths properties. Note that a different speed can
be set for each path in your drawing.

To edit the name or save location of an

animation output file:
1.

Select Tools > Animation >

Animation Properties, or click the
Animation Properties button on the
Animation toolbar. This button is also
available in the Preview Animation and
Export Animation to File windows.

To change the speed of an animation:

1.

Click on the path whose speed setting you

want to change. The path is highlighted with
blue grab handles.

2.

Right-click and select Path Properties.

3.

In the Path Properties dialog, edit either the

Duration or Velocity value. The duration is
Users Guide

321

48

Chapter 48 Animation
based on the specified velocity and length of
the path. Increasing the duration value will
slow the animation down, and decreasing the
duration value will speed it up. The velocity
determines what distance in covered in one
second. Increasing the velocity value will
increase animation speed.

4.

To edit the size of an animation output file:

1.

Select Tools > Animation >

Animation Properties, or click the
Animation Properties button on the
Animation toolbar. This button is also
available in the Preview Animation and
Export Animation to File windows.

2.

In the Animation Properties dialog, select

the Output File tab.

3.

Select the desired size from the Size drop

box. Pre-defined sizes include 640 x 480, 800
x 600, and 1024 x 768. Selecting the Custom
option lets you define a custom size by
entering values in the Width and Height edit
boxes.

4.

Click OK.

Click OK.

Note: The Speed setting affects only the output

file. It does not apply to the preview.

Compressing an Animation Output

File
When you use the Export Animation to File tool,
you can opt to create a compressed file.
Compressing an animation converts the data into
a format that requires fewer bits, usually so that it
can be stored or transmitted more efficiently.
Design Suite Deluxe offers an extensive list of
video compression coders to choose from.
To compress an animation output file:
1.

Select Tools > Animation >

Animation Properties, or click the
Animation Properties button on the
Animation toolbar. This button is also
available in the Preview Animation and
Export Animation to File windows.

2.

In the Animation Properties dialog, select

the Output File tab.

3.

Select the desired coder from the Video

Compression drop box.

4.

Click OK.

Editing the Resolution of an

Animation Output File
By default, animations are recorded at a size of
640 x 480 pixels. You can select a different predefined size, or specify a custom size.

322

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Editing the Frame Rate of an

Animation
The frame rate is the number of images displayed
per second. More simply, it is the video playback
rate of the AVI animation. The playback rate
directly relates to the perceived smoothness of its
playback. The higher the number of frames
playing per second, the smoother the video
playback appears. Lower rates can result in a
choppier playback.
To edit the frame rate of an animation:
1.

Select Tools > Animation >

Animation Properties, or click the
Animation Properties button on the
Animation toolbar. This button is also
available in the Preview Animation and
Export Animation to File windows.

2.

In the Animation Properties dialog, select

the Output File tab.

3.

In the Frame Rate edit box, enter a value

between 1 and 32, or use the arrow buttons to
scroll up or down through a list of values.

4.

Click OK.

Ray Tracing an Animation

Ray tracing involves the calculation and display
of light, shadows and reflection for a
photorealistic effect. Light comes from lighting

Turning Animation Paths On and Off

fixtures as well as through windows, and is
bounced off of surfaces that have reflective
properties.

option should always remain on for exterior

animations, even if it is a night scene.
Antialiasing. Blends pixels in areas where
two colors or two materials meet to reduce
artifacts (or stair steps) and produce a
more natural look to the scene.

By default, animations are not ray traced. If you

want to create a ray traced animation, you need to
enable ray tracing before exporting the animation
to a file. You can set a number of rendering
options as well. Note that ray tracing can increase
the recording time significantly.

Effects/Enable. Allows you to create either a

fog or smoke effect in the ray traced
animation.
Fog. Creates a fog effect.

To enable ray tracing in an animation:

1.

Smoke. Creates a smoke effect.

Select Tools > Animation >

Animation Properties, or click the
Animation Properties button on the
Animation toolbar. This button is also
available in the Preview Animation and
Export Animation to File windows.

2.

In the Animation Properties dialog, select

the Output File tab.

3.

Enable the Ray Trace Animation check box.

4.

To specify ray tracing options, click Options.

Rendering Settings
Quality Level. The level of quality in the
resulting ray traced animation file. There are
5 levels to choose from. Note that the higher
level of quality you choose, the longer the ray
tracing process takes.
Change display every _ steps. As the
program performs lighting calculations, the
view updates at regular intervals to reflect
calculations up to that point. This is the
number of steps between visual updates.
Image Brightness. Specifying a value
manually overrides the automatic exposure
of the virtual camera. The program's "virtual
camera" works in a manner similar to actual
point-and-shoot cameras. It automatically
calculates the correct "exposure" for the
lighting situation and produces a view with
infinite depth of field (i.e. everything is in
focus).
Enable Daylight. If disabled, omits daylight
from the lighting calculations, and can speed
up ray tracing. Daylight is included in
lighting calculations, even for indoor scenes
(light can come through a window). This

Density. The thickness of the fog or smoke.

Global Settings
Specifying your location in the world and the
time of day determines how much daylight is
in the scene. For more information about the
options on the Global Settings page, see
Defining Your Location and Time of Day on
page 309.
5.

Click OK in the Animation Properties

dialog.

Note: Ray tracing occurs only when you record

the animation using the Export Animation to File
tool. It is not applied when previewing the
animation in the Preview Animation dialog.

Turning Animation Paths On and

Off
You can instantly hide or show all animation
paths using the Animation Paths On/Off tool.
To turn animation paths on or off:
1.

Select View > Viewing Aids > Animation

Paths On/Off, or click the Viewing Aids
button on the Basic View Control or
Advanced View Control toolbar and select
Animation Paths On/Off.

Deleting an Animation Path

You can remove an animation path from your
drawing in a couple of easy steps.
To delete an animation path:
1.

Click on the path to select it.

Users Guide

323

48

Chapter 48 Animation
2.

324

Press the Delete key on your keyboard,

right-click and select Delete, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Delete.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Opening, Saving & Printing

page 327

Importing

page 335

Exporting

page 341

Once you have started and saved a project, you can work on it whenever you like. You can open
a saved project by selecting Open on the File menu. Once you have opened a project, you can
edit, save, print and export it, as well as save it as a template for future projects.
You can have more than one project open at a time. If you have more than one project open, you
can switch between projects using the Window menu.
As you edit your drawing, the changes you make are stored temporarily in your computers
memory until you save them. The Save function saves the current project under its current name.
You can use Save As to save a project under a different name, and Save All to save all currently
open projects. You can also use the Save As tool to save a drawing as a template for use in future
projects.

327

Chapter 49 Opening, Saving & Printing

Opening a Saved Project

You can open a saved project using the Open tool.

If the recovery is successful, the following dialog

box appears:

To open a saved project:

1.

Select File > Open, or click the Open

button on the Standard toolbar.

2.

In the Open dialog, navigate to the location

where you saved the project.

3.

Select the project to open, then click Open.

Tip: If the project you want to open is one that

your recently worked on, it may be listed in the
recently used file list near the bottom of the File
menu. Just select it to open it.

Changing the Number of Files in

the Recently Used File List
By default, a maximum of four projects are listed
in the recently used file list near the bottom of the
File menu. You can increase or decrease this
number if you want.

If the recovery is not successful, a dialog appears

telling you why it was not successful.

Saving Projects
The program has three save functions: Save,
Save As and Save All. They are located on the
File menu.

To change the number of files in the recently

used file list:

To save the current project under the

current name, or to save the current
project for the first time, select File >
Save, or click the Save button on the
Standard toolbar. If you are saving for the
first time, you are prompted for a file name.
To save the current project under a different
name (i.e. create a copy of it), select File >
Save As, then specify a name in the Save As
dialog.
To save all currently open projects,
select File > Save All, or click the Save
All button on the Standard toolbar.

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

By default, projects are saved in the following

directory unless you specify otherwise:

3.

Type the maximum number of files to

display in the Recently used file list edit
box, or use the arrows to select a number.
You can list a maximum of 9 files.

C:\Documents and Settings\<Current User>\My

Documents\3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe
8\Projects

Repairing Damaged Projects

Occasionally a drawing may become damaged,
usually when drawing walls. The Repair Project
tool scans the project for elements that have
caused damage, and either fixes or removes them.
To repair a damaged project:
1.

328

Select File > Repair Project.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Setting the Automatic Save

The Automatic Save option prompts you to save
your project at regular intervals. This is a great
way to make sure you save your changes
regularly and avoid any loss should a power

Specifying a Default Save Directory

failure or system error occur. By default, the
Automatic Save is enabled.

To set the Automatic Save:

To specify the default save directory:

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

In the File Paths area, click on the Projects

Directory to select it.

4.

Click Modify.

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click

the Program Settings button on the Settings
toolbar.

5.

In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the

directory you want to use as your default
save directory, then click OK.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

6.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

3.

Enable the Auto Save check box.

4.

From the Save time (min) drop box, select

the desired save interval in minutes, or use
the arrows to select a value.

5.

Click OK.

Note: When you are prompted to save your

project, you can choose not to save at that time by
clicking Cancel in the prompt dialog. If you want
to disable the automatic save prompt, you can
click Disable in the dialog.
Note: Disabling the Automatic Save applies to the
current project only. The Automatic Save is
turned on by default for all new projects.

Specifying a Default Save

Directory

Saving a Project as a Template

By default, every new project you start is based
on a template. A template determines what
settings new projects will have, such as the unit of
measure, and building location settings. You can
even include building elements in a template if
you want.
You can create a template out of any drawing by
simply saving it in your Templates directory. To
use the template in new drawings you need to
select the template in your Startup options.
To create a template:
1.

Unless you have already created the drawing

you want to use as a template, start a new
project (File > New).

2.

Specify the settings you want to save with

the template, such as your building locations
and program settings. Note that any
elements in your drawing will be saved as
well, so unless you want these elements to
appear in new projects, you should delete the
elements from your drawing.

3.

Select File > Save As.

4.

In the Save As dialog, navigate to the

programs Templates folder
(e.g. C:\Program Files\3D Home
Architect\Design Suite Deluxe\Templates).

5.

In the File name edit box, type a name for

the template.

By default, new (unsaved) projects are saved in

the following directory unless you specify
otherwise:
C:\Documents and Settings\<Current User>\My
Documents\3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe
8\Projects
You can specify a different default save directory
if you want.

Users Guide

329

49

Chapter 49 Opening, Saving & Printing

6.

Click Save.

To disable the use of templates:

Selecting a Default Project

Template

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

By default, new projects are based on a default

template that ships with the program. Templates
determine what units and settings are used when
you start a new project.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

You can select a different template to use as the

default template when starting new drawings.
You can use one of the templates that ships with
the program, or one that you have created
yourself.

In the Startup area, disable the Startup using

Project Template check box.

4.

Click OK.

To select a default project template:

1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

In the Startup area, make sure the Startup

using Project Template radio button is
enabled.

4.

Click the Browse button next to the

current template name.

5.

In the Open dialog, select the template you

want to use from the Templates directory,
then click Open.

Setting the Path to the Templates

Directory
By default, the Templates directory is located in
the Design Suite Deluxe program group. If you
have moved your Templates directory, or have
chosen to store your templates in a different
directory, you should reset the path to the
template directory in your program settings. The
path you set determines the default directory
shown when you browse for templates in your
Startup options on the General page of the
Program Settings dialog.
To set the path to your templates directory:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

In the File Paths area, click on the Templates

Directory to select it.

4.

Click Modify.

Disabling the Use of Templates

5.

By default, new projects are based on a template

that determines the unit of measure used.
Templates also have a few pre-defined settings,
such as a set of default building locations.

In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the

directory containing your templates, then
click OK.

6.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

6.

In the Program Settings dialog, click OK.

Note: You need to start a new drawing to put the

new template into effect.

If you prefer you can start new projects without

using a template. If you choose to do this, new
projects will be blank with no pre-defined
settings.

330

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Selecting a Directory for

Temporary Files
Certain functions of the program create
temporary files which are stored in a directory on

Closing Projects
your computer system. By default, the path to the
temporary directory is as follows:

To print a drawing:
1.

Select File > Print, or click the Print

button on the Standard toolbar.

2.

In the Print dialog, specify your print

settings.

C:\Documents and Settings\<Current User>\Local

Settings\Temp
You can specify a different directory to store your
temporary files in if you want.
To set a different temporary files directory:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

In the File Paths area, click on the Temporary

Directory to select it.

4.

Click Modify.

5.

In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the

directory you want to use as your default
temporary files directory, then click OK.

6.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Closing Projects
Projects remain open until you close them or exit
the program. You can close the active project
without exiting the program. If you have more
than one drawing open, make sure the drawing
you want to close is the active one.
To close a drawing:
1.

Select File > Close, or click the Close

button on the Standard toolbar.

2.

In the dialog, click Yes or No when you are

asked to save changes.

3.

If you havent named the project yet and you

clicked Yes in the previous step, specify a
name for the project in the Save As dialog,
then click Save.

Printing Drawings
The program uses the standard Windows Print
routine with a few added features, such as a print
preview, print area selection, scaling options, and
paper placement.

Printer. Select a printer from the drop box.

Click Properties to specify general printer
properties such as orientation and paper size.
Note that if you are printing to scale, and the
scale of the drawing is too large for the
selected paper size, the drawing will be
automatically tiled across multiple sheets of
paper. See Printing Across Multiple Sheets
of Paper on page 333.
Print to file. If enabled, the project is printed
to a print file rather than a printer. For more
information, see Printing to a File on
page 333.
(Print) All. Prints the extents of your
drawing, which is the portion of your
drawing that currently contains elements. As
you add new elements, the extents update
automatically.
(Print) Display. Prints exactly what you see
on the screen in the current view. If only part
of your drawing is currently visible, only that
part will appear in the printout.
(Print) Window. Prints a specific area of your
drawing that you define by drawing a
bounding window around it. Click the
Window button, then click two points in
Users Guide

331

49

Chapter 49 Opening, Saving & Printing

your drawing to define the bounding
window. The preview in the Print dialog will
update automatically.
Copies. Select the number of copies to print
from the Number of copies drop box.
Scaling. The Print to Scale option prints the
current view according to its defined scale in
the view properties.
To see a views defined scale, select Edit >
View Properties, or right-click in the
drawing area and select View Properties, or
right-click on a views tab below the drawing
area and select View Properties. If you want
to edit the views print scale, see Editing the
Print Scale of a View on page 332.
Note that the Print to Scale option will not
work with most 3D views (unless they are
elevation views), since 3D views cannot be
scaled.
The Fit To Page option scales the drawing to
fit the selected paper size. Note that this is
the default setting for 3D views, since 3D
views are not affected by changes in scale
(unless they are elevation views).
Placement. If you select Lower left, the
image is printed in the lower left corner of
the paper. If you select Center on paper, the
image is centered on the paper.
Print Quality. Choose from three levels of
print quality (150, 300 or 600 dpi). A higher
resolution (600 dpi) produces graphic images
that are sharper and show finer detail, while
a lower resolution (150 dpi) permits faster
printing and shows less detail.
Preview. Displays a preview of how the
drawing will fit on the paper. If the drawing
is too large for the selected paper size, it will
be automatically tiled across multiple sheets
of paper. Separation marks will then appear
in the preview indicating where the drawing
will be divided. For more information, see
Printing Across Multiple Sheets of Paper on
page 333.
3.

332

Click OK.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Editing the Print Scale of a View

You can edit the print scale of a view by accessing
the views properties.
A views print scale is the ratio of units on paper
to real-world units. If the scale is set to 1:1 (12" =
1'- 0"), twelve inches on paper will represent one
foot of your model. This would be a rather large
printout. A scale of 1:12 (1" = 1'- 0"), however,
would result in a smaller-scale view when the
drawing is printed because every foot is
represented by only one inch on paper.
Note that if you change the print scale, your 2D
plan does not scale on the screen. It will only be
scaled on paper when you print the drawing. The
scale you specify in a view windows properties
has a direct link to the Print to Scale option in
the Print dialog.
Changing the print scale has no effect in 3D
views, neither on the screen nor in printouts,
unless it is an elevation view. This is because a
model being viewed in 3D does not have concrete
measurements like a flat, 2D view has.
Things like text and dimensions will scale on the
screen when you change the scale because they
are specified in real-world units, whereas the
model on your screen is created using units that
are only proportional to real-world units.
Regardless of a views scale, things like text and
dimensions will always print out at the size that
was assigned to them at the time of insertion. For
example, if you inserted text that had a 1/2 text
height setting, the text will be 1/2 on paper,
regardless of the view scale or what the text looks
like on the screen.
To edit a view windows print scale when it is
the current view window:
1.

Select View > View Properties, or right-click

in the view window and select View
Properties.

2.

In the View Properties dialog, select the

desired scale from the Scale drop box.

3.

Click OK.

Printing Across Multiple Sheets of Paper

To edit a view windows print scale in the View
Manager:

4.

1.

Select View > View Manager, or click

the View Manager button on the
Advanced View Control toolbar.

Printing to a File

2.

Select the view to edit and click the

Properties button.

3.

In the View Properties dialog, select the

desired scale from the Scale drop box.

4.

Click OK.

Printing Across Multiple Sheets of

Paper
You may want to print out your drawing at a
large scale, but do not have a piece of paper big
enough to fit it. In this case you can print the
drawing in sections onto smaller sheets of paper,
then attach the sheets together after printing.

Click OK. The drawing is printed onto

multiple sheets of paper.

When you print to a file, you need to first

determine which printer for example, a
PostScript printer will ultimately print the file.
This way you can specify an appropriate file type
to print to (e.g. *.ps).
A print file allows others to print your Design
Suite Deluxe drawing, even if Design Suite Deluxe
is not installed on their computer. All they need is
a printer that prints the specified file type.
To print to a file:
1.

Select File > Print, or click the Print

button on the Standard toolbar.

2.

In the Print dialog, enable the Print to file

check box.

To print across multiple sheets of paper:

3.

Click OK.

1.

Select File > Print, or click the Print

button on the Standard toolbar.

4.

In the Save As dialog, navigate to the folder

where you want to save the print file.

2.

In the Print dialog, click Properties to select

the paper size to use.

5.

In the File name edit box, type a name and

extension for the print file (e.g. Project1.ps).

3.

Enable the Print to Scale check box.

6.

Click Save. The project is written to the print

file.

The print preview displays separation marks

representing the individual sheets of paper.

Using Print Setup

The program uses the standard Windows Print
Setup for printer and paper selection.
To select a printer and paper for output:
1.

Select File > Print Setup.

2.

Choose the options you want.

3.

Click OK.

If you want to adjust the print scale, see

Editing the Print Scale of a View on
page 332.

Users Guide

333

49

*
Design Suite Deluxe lets you import pre-designed plans into your workspace, as well as custom
3D objects from outside sources.
Using the Project Trace Image tool you can import a BMP, JPG or TGA file into your drawing
space. You can then trace the image using elements from the catalog, creating a true Design Suite
Deluxe model. This is the perfect tool to use if you have sketched out ideas in a drawing program
or scanned a floor plan that you have permission to use, and want to recreate the plan in Design
Suite Deluxe. You can resize the image if you need to before tracing, and delete it once youre
done tracing. Most floor plans are copyrighted, so make sure you have permission to copy them.
Using the Object Import Wizard you can quickly import custom 3D objects in DXF or 3DS format
directly into your drawing.

335

Chapter 50 Importing

Importing an Image to Trace

You can import a BMP, JPG or TGA image, such
as a scanned floor plan, and trace it using
elements from the catalog, creating a true Design
Suite Deluxe model.
To import an image to trace:

Matching the Floor Plans Drawing

Scale
If the floor plan is not the right size, you can scale
it up or down to match the plans drawing scale.
Having a correct drawing scale is important for
tracing purposes so elements can be created at the
correct size.

1.

In 2D plan view, select File > Import >

Project Trace Image.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the file type you

are importing from the File type drop box.
You can import BMP, JPG or TGA files.

1.

Select the trace image.

2.

Right-click and select Resize Image, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Resize Image.

Locate the file to import, then click Open.

3.

Find a wall with a known length, then select

a point at each end of the wall.

4.

In the Resize Image dialog, enter the

distance between the two points as shown on
the floor plan, then click OK. The image is
scaled instantly.

3.

4.

5.

If you want to reverse the image (i.e. flip it

left to right), enable the Flip Horizontal
check box. If you want to flip the image
vertically (so it is upside down), enable the
Flip Vertical check box.
To change the scale of the image, enter the
dimensions in the Length and Height edit
boxes. Typically you would use the overall
dimensions shown on the floor plan. For
example, if the house is 70 long, enter 70 in
the Length edit box. Keeping the Maintain
Aspect Ratio check box enabled ensures that
the image scales uniformly when one of the
dimensions is changed. This prevents the
image from becoming distorted.

6.

Click OK. A bounding box is attached to your

cursor.

7.

Position the box in your drawing area, then

click to insert it. The image is displayed.

336

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To resize a project trace image:

Tracing the Imported Floor Plan

Tracing an imported image is easy just use the
Insert tools described earlier in this Users Guide.

To trace foundation walls, see Creating a

Basement or Crawlspace Foundation on
page 44.
To trace ground floor exterior walls, see

Drawing the Ground Floor Exterior Walls

on page 56.
To trace interior walls, see Drawing Interior
Walls on page 59.
To insert doors, see Inserting Doors on
page 66.
To insert windows, see Inserting Windows
on page 70.
To insert wall openings, see Inserting Wall
Openings on page 75.
To insert stairs, see Inserting Stairs and
Ramps on page 88.

Deleting a Project Trace Image

Deleting a Project Trace Image

To import a custom object into your drawing:

Once youre done tracing a floor plan, you can

delete the trace image from your drawing, leaving
just your Design Suite Deluxe model on the screen.

1.

Select File > Import > Object Wizard.

2.

On the first screen of the Object Import

Wizard, click Next.

3.

In the first edit box, type a name for the

element.

4.

From the element drop box, select the type of

element you are importing.

5.

If you selected Exterior Furniture or Exterior

Accessories, you have the option of inserting
the element on the floor of the current
building location, or the terrain. Select either
Insert on location, or Insert on terrain.

To delete a project trace image:

1.

Select the trace image.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete, or select
Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Note: If you prefer you can just hide the project

trace image from view instead of deleting it. See
Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images on
page 37.

Importing Custom Objects into

Your Drawing
If you have any custom 3D objects in DXF or 3DS
format, you can import them into your Design
Suite Deluxe drawing. Many sites on the Internet
offer free downloading of objects for your
convenience. Typically, these are objects such as
furniture and appliances.
You can import a custom object directly into your
drawing using the Object Import Wizard. Once
inserted, you can edit its properties as well as
save the object in your catalog using the Save
Element to Catalog tool.

Users Guide

337

50

Chapter 50 Importing
6.

Click the Select button next to step 3 in the

Wizard.

7.

In the Open dialog, locate and select the file

that you want to import, then click Open.
You can import DXF and 3DS files.

8.

Specify how you want the components

created by making a selection from the next
drop box. For DXF files you can choose from
Colors or Layers. Since 3DS objects are
essentially an assembly of materials, the only
selection for 3DS objects is Materials.

9.

By default, the imported objects materials

will be stored in a new group in your
materials library. If you want to store them in
a specific group, click the lower Select
button, then select the desired group.

11. Click Next.

12. If you know what units were used to create

the object, select the units from the units drop
box. Otherwise, select the unit of measure
that will result in a logical Resultant Width,
Resultant Depth and Resultant Height.
Selecting Custom lets you specify a custom
scale in the Custom Scale edit box.
You can add and rename groups using the
Add Group or Rename Group tools on the
dialogs Material menu or right-click menu.
You can also delete any custom groups you
have created using the Delete Group tool.
10. Click OK in the Material Group(s) dialog.

338

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

The scale is the multiplication factor of the

units used for objects in the block. For
example, if you're converting a file that you
assume was created in feet and inches, the
scale is 25.4.
13. Click Next.

Importing Custom Objects into Your Drawing

14. The next screen lists the objects individual
components. To rename a component,
double-click it, then type the new name and
press Enter.
15. To display or hide a component from view in
2D and/or 3D view, select it in the list, then
click the appropriate eye icon. Enabling the
Show only selected component check box
displays only the currently selected
component in the object preview. This helps
you distinguish between the object's
individual components.
Component is displayed
Component is not displayed
16. Click Next.

17. Click Finish.

18. Click to insert the new element in your
drawing.
19. Right-click and select Finish.
Tip: You can save the imported element in your
catalog using the Save Element to Catalog tool.
See Saving Edited Elements in Your Drawing to
a Catalog on page 372.

Users Guide

339

50

1
Design Suite Deluxe offers three different Export tools: 2D Image, 2D Drawing and 3D Model.
The 2D Image tool lets you export the image on the screen to a BMP, JPG or TGA file, which can
be opened in a variety of graphic editing applications.
With the 2D Drawing tool you can export your 2D plan to an AutoCAD DXF file (R13, R14, 2000
or 2004).
The 3D Model tool lets you export your 3D model to the following formats: AutoCAD DXF, 3DS
(3D Studio), and WRL (VRML). When you open the file in the associated application, you will see
an actual 3D model in that application.

341

Chapter 51 Exporting

Exporting the Current View to a 2D

Image File

Exporting the 2D Drawing to a 2D

AutoCAD File

The 2D Image export tool lets you save the

current view to a BMP, JPG or TGA file, which
can be opened in most graphic editing
applications.

The 2D Drawing export tool saves your 2D plan

to an AutoCAD DXF file, which is a 2D, vector
drawing format. Choose from the following
formats:

To export the current view to an image file:

1.

Select File > Export > 2D Image.

2.

In the Save As dialog, click on the Save as

type drop box and select the file format you
want to export to.

3.

Locate the directory where you want to save

the exported file.

4.

In the File name edit box, type a file name.

5.

Click Save. The Export View dialog appears:

6.

7.

8.

From the Color drop box, select the desired

color setting. Choose from Grayscale, 256
Color, High Color (16-bit), High Color (24-bit) or
True Color (32-bit).
From the Size drop box, select the desired
output size. By default, Current View is
selected, which saves the image at the size
currently shown on the screen. You can
choose from a list of preset sizes, or select
Custom and enter the desired values in the
Width and Height edit boxes.
Click Save. The view is exported.

AutoCAD 2004 DXF (*.dxf)

AutoCAD 2000 DXF (*.dxf)
AutoCAD R14 DXF (*.dxf)
AutoCAD R13 DXF (*.dxf)

To export your 2D drawing to an AutoCAD file:

1.

Select File > Export > 2D Drawing.

2.

In the Save As dialog, click on the Save as

type drop box and select the file format you
want to export to.

3.

Locate the directory where you want to save

the exported file.

4.

In the File name edit box, type a file name.

5.

Click Save. A dialog appears confirming the

model has been exported successfully.

6.

Click OK.

Exporting the 3D Model

The 3D Model export tool lets you save your 3D
model in the following 3D file formats:
AutoCAD 2004 DXF (*.dxf)
AutoCAD 2000 DXF (*.dxf)
AutoCAD R14 DXF (*.dxf)
AutoCAD R13 DXF (*.dxf)
Autodesk 3D Studio (*.3ds)
VRML (*.wrl)
When you open the file in its associated
application, you will see an actual 3D model in
that application.
To export your 3D model:
1.

342

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Select File > Export > 3D Model.

Exporting the 3D Model

2.

In the Save As dialog, click on the Save as

type drop box and select the file format you
want to export to.

3.

Locate the directory where you want to save

the exported file.

4.

In the File name edit box, type a file name.

5.

Click Save. A dialog appears confirming the

model has been exported successfully.

6.

Click OK.

Users Guide

343

51

Screen Settings

page 347

Managing View Windows

page 353

Custom Viewing

page 359

Catalogs & Elements

page 369

Materials, Colors & Patterns

page 385

Manufacturers

page 393

Line Styles

page 397

Text & Dimension Styles

page 403

Light Sources

page 411

Design Suite Deluxes screen environment is totally customizable, so you can create a work
environment that is both functional and comfortable according to your personal needs.
This chapter describes how to display, hide and move screen components, change the color of the
drawing area and toolbar areas, and improve graphics display.

347

Chapter 52 Screen Settings

Displaying/Hiding Toolbars

To display toolbars in non-tabbed format:

There are 13 toolbars available for display. (By

default, not all of them are displayed.) You can
hide or show individual toolbars by setting your
workspace options. When you display a toolbar,
it is displayed in one of the toolbar areas which
are located directly above and below the drawing
area. Note that if you hide a toolbar that is
displayed in a tab, the tab is hidden from view as
well.

1.

Select Settings > Toolbars.

2.

Make sure the check box of the toolbar you

want to display is enabled.

3.

Disable the toolbars Tabbed check box.

4.

Click OK.

To hide or show toolbars:

1.

Select Settings > Toolbars.

2.

Check the toolbars that you want to display,

and uncheck those that you do not want to
display.

3.

Click OK.

Tip: If a toolbar is currently floating freely on the

screen, you can hide it by clicking the close button
on its title bar, or right-clicking its title bar and
selecting Hide.

Displaying Toolbars in Tabbed

Format
You can display any toolbar in tabbed format,
meaning a tab will be added to the row of toolbar
tabs below the menu bar.
To display a toolbar in a tab:
1.

Select Settings > Toolbars.

2.

Enable the check box of the toolbar you want

to display in a tab.

3.

Enable the toolbars Tabbed check box.

4.

Click OK.

Changing the Background Color of

Toolbars
You can change the general background color of
individual toolbars by changing your workspace
options. This applies to both tabbed and freestanding toolbars.
To change the background color of toolbars:
1.

Select Settings > Toolbars.

2.

Click the Color box next to the toolbar you

want to change.

3.

In the Color dialog, select or create the

desired color, then click OK.

4.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Changing the Color of Toolbar

Areas
The program has two toolbar areas: one directly
above the drawing area, and one directly below
the drawing area. You can change the color of
toolbar areas in your workspace options.
To change the color of toolbar areas:
1.

Select Settings > Toolbars.

2.

Click the colored box next to the Toolbar

Areas option.

3.

In the Color dialog, select or create the

desired color for your toolbar areas, then
click OK to return to the Program Settings
dialog.

4.

Click OK.

Displaying Toolbars in a Nontabbed Format

By default, the Building, Interiors, Landscape and
Terrain toolbars are displayed in tabs below the
menu bar. You can change any tabbed toolbar to
be displayed as a non-tabbed, free-standing
toolbar.

348

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Moving Toolbars
You can drag any non-tabbed toolbar to any
location on the screen. At window edges, the
toolbar will automatically dock itself according to
the location. For example, if you drag it to the

Displaying/Hiding the Catalog Panel

panel to the left side of the screen, position
your pointer over the right edge.) Watch for
the Resize cursor to appear.

right edge of the screen, it will assume a vertical

orientation.
If you drag it into the drawing window, it will
float freely. You can then move it by dragging it
by its title bar.
To move a toolbar:
1.

Click and hold your mouse button over the

left grip end of the toolbar (or its title bar if it
is currently in the drawing area).

Toolbar Grip End

2.

Drag the toolbar to the desired location.

3.

Release the mouse button.

Displaying/Hiding the Catalog

Panel
By default, the catalog panel is displayed on the
right side of the screen, as it is an essential
component of the program. You can hide the
catalog panel from view if you want.
To display or hide the catalog panel:
1.

Select Settings > Toolbars. Or, select

Settings > Program Settings (or click the
Program Settings button on the Settings
toolbar) and select the Workspace tab in the
Program Settings dialog.

2.

In the Tool Display area, check or uncheck the

Catalog Panel check box.

3.

Click OK.

Resize
cursor
2.

Click and drag the edge of the panel to

stretch it in the desired direction.

3.

Release your mouse button.

To resize the catalog panel if it is free-floating:

1.

Position your pointer over one of the panels

corners.

2.

Click and drag to stretch the panel.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Moving the Catalog Panel

If the catalog panel is docked on one side of the
screen, you can move it by clicking and dragging
its outside edge. If you move a panel to the side of
the screen, it will automatically dock itself to the
edge of the screen. Otherwise, the panel is
displayed in a free-floating window.
If the panel is free-floating, you can move it by
clicking and dragging its title bar.
To move the catalog panel when it is docked:
1.

Resizing the Catalog Panel

When the catalog panel is docked at one side of
your screen, you can make it narrower or wider
by simply clicking and dragging its edges. If you
have moved the catalog panel away from the
edge, so it is free-floating, you can resize it by
clicking and dragging its corners.

Move
cursor

To resize the catalog panel if it is docked:

1.

Position your pointer over the panel's left

outside edge. (If you have moved the catalog

Position your pointer over the panels

outside edge (the edge that is at the side of
the screen). Watch for the Move cursor.

2.

Click and drag the panel to move it.

Users Guide

349

52

Chapter 52 Screen Settings

3.

Release your mouse button.

To move the catalog panel when it is

free-floating:
1.

Position your pointer over the panels title

bar.

2.

Click and drag the panel to move it.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Displaying/Hiding the Status Bar

The Status bar can be toggled on and off as
needed.
To display/hide the Status bar:
1.

Select Settings > Toolbars. Or select

Settings > Program Settings and select the
Workspace tab in the Program Settings
dialog.

2.

In the Tool Display area, select or clear the

Status Bar check box.

3.

Click OK.

Changing the Background Color of

the Drawing Window
By default, the color of the main drawing window
is white. You can select a different color if you
like. Note, however, that selecting a different
background color can make some elements
difficult to see depending on their color settings.
To change the background color of the
drawing window:
1.

Select Settings > Toolbars. Or, select

Settings > Program Settings (or click the
Program Settings button on the Settings
toolbar) and select the Workspace tab in the
Program Settings dialog.

2.

Click the colored box next to the

Background option.

3.

In the Color dialog, select or create the

desired color for your drawing area, then
click OK to return to the Program Settings
dialog.

4.

350

Click OK.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Hardware Acceleration
The Hardware Acceleration option controls how
your screen responds during a work session. By
default, hardware acceleration is enabled.
Hardware acceleration increases the speed of
your graphics display. When hardware
acceleration is enabled, your computer takes
advantage of any installed graphics card that
supports hardware acceleration. If no card exists,
and the Hardware Acceleration option is still
enabled, your computer automatically defaults to
slower software acceleration, which uses the
Windows implementation of OpenGL. For
detailed information about OpenGL, see the
OpenGL topic in the online help.
In most cases, it is best to enable the Hardware
Acceleration option. However, problems
sometimes arise with graphics cards on which
hardware acceleration is poorly implemented. If
you are experiencing display-related problems
like scrambled line patterns, see the next topic,
Improving Graphics Display.
To enable or disable hardware acceleration:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

In the Graphics area, check or uncheck the

Hardware Acceleration check box.

4.

Click OK.

Improving Graphics Display

The type of graphics card you have can affect the
way the programs graphics are displayed on the
screen. If the display seems unstable or contains
some graphic artifacts (e.g. large pixels), here are
some tips on how you may be able to improve the
display:
1.

Lower your screen resolution (to 1024 x 768,

for example). To access this setting, rightclick your Windows desktop and select
Properties. In the Display Properties
dialog, select the Settings tab.

Changing the Quality Level of Interactive Lighting

2.

3.

4.

5.

Lower your color setting in Windows. For

example, if your colors are set to True Color
(32 bit), change the setting to High Color (16
bit). To access this setting, right-click your
Windows desktop and select Properties. In
the Display Properties dialog, select the
Settings tab.
Disable interactive lighting, which is the realtime lighting effect you see when you insert
light fixtures in Rendered or Rendered
Outline display mode. See Disabling
Interactive Lighting on page 351.
Disable pre-selection. Pre-selection displays
tooltips on elements as you hover over them
with your cursor. See Disabling PreSelection on page 22.
If the above methods fail to improve the
graphics display, disable Hardware
Acceleration in your Program Settings. See
Hardware Acceleration on page 350.

Disabling Interactive Lighting

By default, you can see real-time lighting effects
as you insert light fixtures in Rendered or
Rendered Outline display mode. If interactive
lighting slows down your graphics display, or
you simply do not want to use it, you can disable
it.
To disable interactive lighting:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

In the Graphics area, select None from the

Interactive Lighting Quality drop box.

4.

Click OK.

Changing the Quality Level of

Interactive Lighting
As you insert light fixtures in your design you can
see real-time lighting effects if working in
Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode. By
default, the quality level of interactive lighting is
set to Low, which provides an adequate lighting
display for the average computer. If your
computer has a powerful video card, you can
select a higher level of quality for your interactive
lighting.
To change the quality of interactive lighting:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

From the Interactive Lighting Quality drop

box, select either Low, Medium or High.

4.

Click OK.

Note: Selecting a higher quality level can slow

down your graphics display.

Users Guide

351

52

By default, your project has one view window called Standard. You can create additional view
windows using the View Manager. Each view window can have different view settings. For
example, you may want to keep the wireframe 2D plan view in the Standard view window, and
create a new view window containing a 3D view of the model.
When you create new view windows, you can switch between open view windows using the
Window menu. You can also turn your view tabs on, which will display a row of tabs below the
drawing area. This provides instant point-and-click access to all your view windows.
You can display multiple view windows at the same time using the Tile Open Views and Cascade
Open Views tools. View windows can be moved, resized and closed to create the exact
arrangement you want.
This chapter describes all the functions of the View Manager, how to navigate between view
windows, and arrange view windows.

353

Chapter 53 Managing View Windows

Using the View Manager

Creating New View Windows

The View Manager contains a listing of view

windows and lets you open, close, create, and edit
views.

By default, your project contains one view

window called Standard. You can use the View
Manager to create new view windows and
specify different view settings for each window.
For example, you may want to create a view
window dedicated to 3D viewing only.

By default, your project contains one view

window called Standard. The scale of the view in
this window is 1:48, or 1/4 = 1-0.
Using the New View tool you can create new
view windows. Each window can have different
view settings. For example, you may want to
display a wireframe, 2D plan view in the
Standard view window, and create a new view
window containing a 3D view of your model.
Using the Window menu or view tabs you can
switch between view windows as needed to see
different views of your design. This can eliminate
the need to constantly change the current view
settings to see a particular view of your design.
You can even display two or more view windows
at the same time.
You can edit the name and scale of views listed in
the View Manager.
To access the View Manager:
1.

Select View > View Manager, or click

the View Manager button on the
Advanced View Control toolbar.

Views are stored in groups for easy organization

and navigation. You can add view windows to
the default group, or create your own groups if
you want. For example, you might want to create
a group for 3D views only, then add a set of 3D
view windows to that group.
To create a new group in the View Manager:
1.

Select View > View Manager, or click

the View Manager button on the
Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

Click the Add Group button, or rightclick in the View Managers view
window and select Add Group. A
group is added to the list.

3.

Right-click the new group and select

Rename.

4.

Type a name for the group, then press

ENTER.

To rename a group in the View Manager:

1.

Right-click the group and select Rename.

2.

Type the new name, then press ENTER.

To delete a group in the View Manager:

1.

Make sure the group contains no views.

2.

Select the group and click the Delete

button, or right-click the group and
select Delete.

To create a new view in the View Manager:

354

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Select the group you want to add the view to.

2.

Click the New View button, or rightclick and select New View.

3.

In the View Properties dialog, type a name

for the view window, then select a print scale
for the view.

Turning View Tabs On

The scale is the ratio of units on paper to realworld units. If the scale is set to 1:1 (12" = 1'0"), twelve inches on paper will represent one
foot of your model. This would be a rather
large printout. A scale of 1:12 (1" = 1'- 0"),
however, would result in a smaller-scale
view when the drawing is printed because
every foot is represented by only one inch on
paper.
4.

Click OK. The view is added to the View

Manager, and becomes the current view
window.

5.

Click OK in the View Manager dialog.

A new view window is created, and becomes
the current view window.

6.

To set the current view window:

1.

Select View > View Manager, or click

the View Manager button on the
Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Manager dialog, select the view

window you want to make current.

3.

Click Set Current. The selected view

window is displayed and made current.

Switching Between View Windows

When you create a new view in the View
Manager, the view appears in the programs
Window menu.

Select the desired view settings for the new

view window.

Turning View Tabs On

When you turn your view tabs on, a row of tabs
are displayed below the drawing area. Each tab
represents an open view in the View Manager.

If you have not created any new views in the

View Manager, only the Standard view tab is
displayed.
To turn view tabs on:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Workspace tab.

3.

In the Tool Display area, check the View Tabs

check box.

4.

Click OK.

Making a View Window the Current

View Window
If you have created new view windows, you can
use the Set Current option in the View Manager
to make a particular view window the current one
displayed.

Also, if you have turned your view tabs on, a

view tab is created for the new view.
To make a view window the current view
window, simply select it from the Window menu,
or select the views corresponding view tab below
the drawing area.

Tiling View Windows

By default, only one maximized view window is
displayed at a time. Using the Tile Open Views
tool you can instantly tile all open view windows
in the drawing area. This is a great way to see
different views of your design while you are
working on it. When you make a change in one
view window, the design updates automatically
in all other view windows.
To tile all open view windows:
1.

Select Window > Tile Open Views.

Cascading View Windows

By default, only one maximized view window is
displayed at a time. Using the Cascade Open
Views tool you can instantly display all open
view windows in a stacked format, with the
current view window on top. Once the view
Users Guide

355

53

Chapter 53 Managing View Windows

windows are cascaded you can move and resize
each one if you want.
To cascade all open view windows:
1.

To close a view window from within the

window itself:
1.

Select Window > Cascade Open Views.

Click the Close button in the top right corner

of the view window.
Application window controls

Returning to a Maximized View

If you have tiled or cascaded your open view
windows, you can return to a maximized view
(where only one view window is visible) by
maximizing one of the open view windows.
To maximize a view window:
1.

If you tiled, cascaded or arranged your view

windows, then maximized one of them, you can
use the Restore Down button to return to the view
window arrangement that was displayed before
you used the Maximize button.
To restore the previous arrangement of view
windows:
Click the Restore Down button in the top
right corner of the current view window.
Application window controls
View window controls
Restore Down

Closing View Windows

By default, the Standard view window is open
when you start a project. Also, every time you
create a new view window in the View Manager,
that window is automatically opened for you.
You can close individual view windows using the
View Managers Close View button, or by
clicking the view windows Close button.

356

Close
To close a view window using the View
Manager:
1.

Select View > View Manager, or click

the View Manager button on the
Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

Select the view you want to close.

3.

Click Close View.

Click the Maximize button in the view

window you want to maximize.

Restoring the Previous

Arrangement of View Windows

1.

View window controls

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Opening View Windows that You

Have Closed
If you have closed a view window either through
the View Manager or by clicking a view
windows Close button, you can open it again
using the View Managers Open View button.
To open a view window:
1.

Select View > View Manager, or click

the View Manager button on the
Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

Select the view you want to open.

3.

Click Open View. The view window

becomes the current view window. It
appears on the Window menu as well as on a
view tab if you have view tabs turned on.

Renaming a View Window

You can edit the name of a view window as it
appears in the View Manager, in the programs
title bar, and on the view tabs. You can do this in
the View Manager, or by accessing the view
windows properties.

Deleting View Windows

To rename a view window when it is the
current view window:
1.

Select View > View Properties, or right-click

in the view window and select View
Properties.

2.

In the View Properties dialog, type the new

name in the Name edit box.

3.

Click OK.

To rename a view window in the View

Manager:
1.

Select View > View Manager, or click

the View Manager button on the
Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

Right-click the view you want to rename,

then select Rename. Or, select the view to
rename and click the Properties button.

3.

Type the new name and press ENTER.

4.

Click OK.

Deleting View Windows

You can delete a view window by removing it
from the View Manager.
To delete a view window:
1.

Select View > View Manager, or click

the View Manager button on the
Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

Select the view to delete.

3.

Click the Delete button, or right-click

and select Delete.

4.

Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete

the view.

Users Guide

357

53

"
You can create your own custom 3D camera views and edit existing 3D camera views to suit your
needs. For example, you can change the angle of the view, or the camera height.
While in 3D view you can use a variety of dynamic navigation tools to walk through and look
around your house.
Design Suite Deluxe also lets you view instant elevations of your design, and create custom
elevations to suit your presentation needs. You can also draw a cut line through your design to
create custom section views.

359

Chapter 54 Custom Viewing

Creating New 3D Camera Views

You can create a new 3D camera view by placing
a new camera in your 2D plan view. Once youve
inserted the camera, you specify the camera angle
and viewing field angle by rotating and clicking
your mouse.
To create a new 3D camera view:
1.

While in 2D plan view, select View > 3D

Camera Views > Place New Camera, or
click the 3D Camera Views button on the
Basic View Control or Advanced View
Control toolbar and select Place New
Camera. A camera is attached to your cursor,
ready to be inserted.

2.

Click to insert the camera where you want it.

3.

Move your cursor in the direction you want

to view. Moving the cursor back and forth
changes the camera angle.

4.

Once you have the desired direction and

angle in place, click to select a location for the
target.

Once youve defined the position and angle of

your camera, the 3D view is instantly displayed.
The view will appear on your 3D Camera Views
menu and toolbar flyouts for easy access. (By
default, the first view you create is called
Camera1).

Changing a 3D Camera View

The position of the camera determines the point
you are viewing your design from while in a 3D
camera view. By moving your camera you can
change your viewpoint. See Changing Your
Viewpoint on page 360.
If you are currently in a 3D camera view, you can
use navigation tools such as Walk Around and
Slide to move the camera dynamically. You can
find these topics later in this chapter, starting on
page 362.
You can also change what youre focused on in a
3D camera view by moving the target. You can do
this by displaying your cameras in 2D plan view
and dragging the target icon to a new spot. See
Changing the Target of Your View on page 361.

360

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

You can also change your camera height

(page 361), target height (page 361) and viewing
field angle (page 361).

Turning Cameras On and Off

Every 3D camera view is controlled by a virtual
camera. The Cameras On/Off function displays
a camera icon on the screen. This gives you an
idea of where you are viewing from. If you click
on a camera, the target and viewing field angle
become highlighted. This lets you know what the
camera is focused on, and how much of your
design is included in the view.
When you have your cameras turned on, you can
move cameras and their targets. You can also
view the 3D view associated with a camera using
the Look Through tool on a cameras right-click
menu.
To turn cameras on:

Select View > Viewing Aids > Cameras On/

Off, or
Click the Viewing Aids button on the
Basic View Control or Advanced View
Control toolbar and select Cameras
On/Off

In 2D plan view, all cameras for all 3D camera

views are visible. (By default there are two: one
for the 3D Perspective, and one for the 3D
Overview.) You may need to zoom out to see
them.

Changing Your Viewpoint

Moving a camera changes the angle you are
viewing from in a 3D camera view. You can
change the position of a camera by turning your
cameras on, then moving the camera in 2D plan
view. When you switch back to 3D view, the view
will be changed accordingly.
To change your viewpoint in a 3D camera
view:
1.

Make sure you are in 2D plan view.

2.

Turn your cameras on. (See Turning Cameras

On and Off on page 360.)

Changing the Camera Height

By default, the camera for the 3D Perspective
view is located to the left of the model. The
camera for the 3D Overview is located
towards the right side of the model.
3.

Click on the camera you want to move.

4.

Hover your pointer over the cameras

blue grab handle to display the Move
cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing
area and select Move Camera.

5.

Click and drag the camera to move it where

you want it.

Changing the Camera Height

The height of your camera determines the height
you are viewing your model from in a 3D camera
view. A positive camera height lets you look
down on your model, while a negative camera
height lets you look up at your model. A camera
height of 0 would be like standing on the ground
and looking at your model.
The default camera height in the 3D Perspective
view is 6-6. In the 3D Overview, the camera
height is set to approximately 32.
To change the camera height in a 3D camera
view:
1.

With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the

drawing window and select Camera
Properties.

2.

In the Camera Properties dialog, type the

height you want in the Camera Height edit
box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down
through a list of values.

3.

Click Apply to see the change.

4.

If the view is acceptable, click OK.

Changing the Target of Your View

The target of a 3D camera view is the area you are
focused on, or looking towards. You can change
the position of a target by turning your cameras
on, then moving the target in 2D plan view. When
you switch back to 3D view, the view be changed
accordingly.

To change the target of a 3D camera view:

1.

Make sure you are in 2D plan view.

2.

Turn your cameras on. (See Turning Cameras

On and Off on page 360.)
By default, the camera for the 3D Perspective
view is located to the left of the model. The
camera for the 3D Overview is located
towards the right side of the model.

3.

Click on the camera whose target you want

to move. The target is usually inside or near
your model. It is marked with a blue grab
handle.

4.

Hover your pointer over the targets

grab handle to display the Move
cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing
area and select Move Target.

5.

Click and drag the target to move it where

you want it.

Changing the Target Height

Raising or lowering your target can increase or
decrease the steepness of the angle you are
viewing from when looking through the camera.
To change the target height in a 3D camera
view:
1.

With the 3D camera view displayed, rightclick in the drawing window and select
Camera Properties.

2.

In the Camera Properties dialog, type the

height you want in the Target Height edit
box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down
through a list of values.

3.

Click Apply to see the change.

4.

If the view is acceptable, click OK.

Changing the Viewing Field Angle

In a 3D camera view, the viewing field refers to
your field of vision. It works like a camera lens:
higher values produce a wide-angle view; lower
values produce a close-up view.
Sometimes changing the viewing field angle
makes it seem like you are zooming in or out. This
is because for wide-angle views, the program

Users Guide

361

54

Chapter 54 Custom Viewing

needs to shrink the image to provide enough
screen space to contain the view. Conversely, the
program enlarges the image to fill the screen at
smaller view angles, creating a close-up view.

Walking Around in a 3D Camera

View
When you are in a 3D camera view, you can use
the Walk Around tool to walk around your
model, or even go right inside it. You can walk
forward, backward, left or right.
To walk around in a 3D camera view:
1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Walk Around, or right-click in the
drawing area and select Walk Around,
or click the Walk Around button on the
Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

2.

Click and drag in the direction you want to

move.

To move forward, click and drag

upward.
To move backward, click and drag
downward.
To walk left or right, click and drag left
or right.
If you click and drag up to the left, your path
of motion will curve upward to the left, and
so forth.

Interior with 45 View Angle

Flying Around Your 3D Model

In a 3D camera view, the Fly Around tool
revolves the camera around the target.
Interior with 120 View Angle

To change the viewing field angle:

1.

With the 3D camera view displayed, rightclick in the drawing window and select
Camera Properties.

2.

In the Camera Properties dialog, type the

desired angle in the View Angle edit box, or
use the slider to increase or decrease the
angle.

3.

Click Apply to see the change.

4.

If the view is acceptable, click OK.

362

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To fly around your model in a 3D camera view:

1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Fly Around, or right-click in the
drawing area and select Fly Around, or
click the Fly Around button on the Zoom and
Navigate toolbar.

2.

Use your mouse button to orbit the camera.

Your options are described below.

Click and hold the mouse button to

slowly rotate the camera around the
target on a level plane.
Drag toward the top of the screen to
make your model tilt downward like a
boat coming off a wave.

Sliding in a 3D Camera View

Drag toward the bottom of the screen to

make your model tilt up like a boat
riding onto a wave.
Drag to the right to rotate the model in a
clockwise direction.
Drag to the left to rotate the model in a
counterclockwise direction.

or click the Look Around button on the Zoom

and Navigate toolbar.
2.

Once Look Around is selected, you can do

the following (presuming that your target is
located inside or near the model):

Note: Model direction is the opposite of camera

direction. For example, if the model appears to be
moving clockwise, the camera is actually moving
counterclockwise.

Sliding in a 3D Camera View

In a 3D camera view, the Slide tool moves both

the camera and target at the same time.
To slide in a 3D camera view:
1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Slide, or right-click in the drawing
area and select Slide, or click the Slide
button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

2.

Once Slide is selected, you can do the

following:

Drag right to move your model view to

the left.
Drag left to move your model view to
the right.
Drag up (toward the top of the screen) to
move your model view down (toward
the bottom of the screen).
Drag down to move your model view
up.

Note: Model direction is the opposite of camera

and target direction. For example, if the model
appears to be moving to the right, the camera and
target are actually moving to the left.

Spinning the View Using the Look

Around Tool
In a 3D camera view, the Look Around tool
revolves the target around the camera.

Drag right to move the target in a

counterclockwise direction. Your model
orbits around you in a clockwise
direction.
Drag left to move the target in a
clockwise direction. Your model orbits
around you in a counterclockwise
direction.
Drag up to lower the height and shorten
the distance of the target. Your view
becomes high-angle, and your model
moves toward the top of the screen.
Drag down to raise the height and
lengthen the distance of the target. Your
view becomes low-angle, and your
model moves toward the bottom of the
screen.

Note: Be careful when using the Look Around

tool. It is very easy to lose sight of your model
since the camera's "eye" is fixed in one direction
only. It does not move to follow the orbiting
target. Therefore, your field of vision is limited,
and your model can quickly get above, below or
behind you.

Resetting the Camera in a 3D View

If you have moved the camera of a 3D camera
view, either by dragging it in 2D plan view or
using a navigation tool like Walk Around or
Slide, you can use the Reset Camera tool to move
the camera back into its original position.
To reset the camera to its original position:
1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Reset Camera, or click the Reset
Camera button on the Zoom and
Navigate toolbar.

To spin the view in a 3D camera view:

1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate >

Look Around, or right-click in the
drawing area and select Look Around,
Users Guide

363

54

Chapter 54 Custom Viewing

Viewing Elevations

To turn elevation marks on or off:

Elevations are 2D views that show a particular

side of your house (front, rear, left or right) as if
you were looking at it face on. While in an
elevation view you can zoom in and out as well as
change the display type.

Select View > Viewing Aids > Elevation

Marks On/Off, or
Click the Viewing Aids button on the
Basic View Control or Advanced View
Control toolbar and select Elevation
Marks On/Off

The marks are located at the extents of your

drawing, so you may need to zoom out to see
them.

Sample Elevation

If you select and right-click an elevation mark,

you can access a number of editing tools such as
Properties, Move and Move Target. Selecting
View Elevation displays the elevation associated
with that mark.

To view an elevation:

Moving Elevation Marks

1.

Select View > Elevation Views, or

click the Elevation Views button on
the Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

From the flyout, select the elevation you

want to view (Front, Back, Right or Left).

By default, elevation marks are centered with

your model, which means the model is centered
on the screen when you view the resulting
elevation view. If you move an elevation mark in
your 2D plan view, the model may be moved left
or right when you display the elevation view.
Moving a mark closer to or farther away from the
model has no effect on the resulting elevation
view.

Tip: If you have your elevation marks turned on

in your 2D plan view, you can switch to an
elevation view by selecting an elevation mark,
right-clicking it, then selecting View Elevation.

Turning Elevation Marks On and

Off
You can use the Elevation Marks On/Off tool to
display elevation marks in your 2D plan view. An
elevation mark contains the label given to the
elevation in the elevations properties, as well as a
target arrow that identifies the view direction of
the elevation.

Back Elevation Mark

By default, four marks are displayed, one for each

of the default elevations on the Elevation Views
menu. If you have created a custom elevation, a
mark is displayed for that elevation as well.

364

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To move an elevation mark:

1.

Select the elevation mark in 2D plan view.

2.

Hover your pointer over the marks

blue grab handle to display the Move
cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing
area and select Move.

3.

Click and drag the mark to move it where

you want it.

4.

Right-click and select View Elevation to see

the resulting elevation.

Changing the Target of an

Elevation
By default, elevation marks point straight at your
model. The result is a completely face-on view
when you display the resulting elevation view. If
you rotate an elevation mark, you change the
target of the elevation. This focuses the view on a

Editing Elevation Properties

different part of your design when you display
the elevation view.
To change the target of an elevation:

Deleting an Elevation
You can delete an elevation from the Elevation
Views menu by deleting its corresponding
elevation mark in 2D plan view.

1.

Make sure your elevation marks are turned

on.

2.

In 2D plan view, select the mark whose target

you want to change.

1.

Make sure your elevation marks are turned

on.

3.

Right-click and select Move Target.

2.

In 2D plan view, select the mark to delete.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the mark so it is

pointing in a different direction.

3.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete.

5.

Right-click and select View Elevation to see

the result.

Creating a Custom Elevation

To delete an elevation:

You can edit the name of an elevation as it

appears on the Elevation Views menu, as well as
edit the name and text style of an elevation mark.

You can create a custom elevation by inserting an

elevation mark in your 2D plan view. Once
youve inserted the mark, which represents your
viewpoint, you can rotate it using your mouse to
define the view direction.

To edit elevation properties:

To create a custom elevation:

1.

1.

Make sure you are in 2D plan view.

2.

Turn your elevation marks on. This is not

necessary, but we recommend it so that you
can see where other elevation marks are
located. The default elevation marks are
located at the extents of the terrain, so you
may need to zoom out to see them.

3.

Select View > Elevation Views >

Create New Elevation, or click the
Elevation Views button on the
Advanced View Control toolbar and select
Create New Elevation. An elevation mark is
attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted.

4.

Click to insert the new elevation mark. This

represents your viewpoint, so naturally you
would select a point in front of the model
side you want to look at in your elevation.

5.

Move your cursor to rotate the arrow on the

elevation mark and define the view direction.
Once it is pointing in the desired direction
(usually towards your model), click to finish.

Editing Elevation Properties

If the elevation view is currently displayed,

right-click and select Elevation Properties.
If you are currently in 2D plan view, select
the elevation mark, then right-click and select
Properties.

2.

To edit the name of the elevation as it

appears on the Elevation Views menu, edit
the name in the Name edit box.

3.

To edit the text that appears on the elevation

mark, edit the text in the Mark Text edit box.

4.

To apply a different text style to the elevation

mark, click the Text Style button and make a
selection from the Text Styles dialog. You can
also edit the current text style if you want.

5.

Click OK.

Once youve positioned the elevation mark, the

resulting elevation is instantly displayed. It is also
added to the Elevation Views menu and toolbar

Users Guide

365

54

Chapter 54 Custom Viewing

flyout for easy access. (By default, the first view
you create is called Elevation1.)

distance and direction from the section line,

click to finish.

Tip: You can change the name of the elevation as

well as edit the elevation mark properties by
editing the Elevation Properties.

Creating a Section View

You can cut through any portion of your model to
create a section view. Section views are a great
way to see the interior features of your model that
you are not able to see from the outside.

Once youve defined the section mark, the

resulting section view is instantly displayed. It is
also added to the Section Views menu and toolbar
flyouts for easy access. (By default, the first view
you create is called Section1.)
Sample Section

To create a section view, you draw a section line

through your model in 2D plan view, then click to
define the view direction and depth.
To create a section view:
1.

Make sure you are in 2D plan view.

2.

Select View > Section Views > Create

New Section, or click the Section
Views button on the Advanced View
Control toolbar and select Create New
Section.

3.

Select two points to draw a line that cuts

through your model. This is the line you will
be viewing from.

4.

Move your cursor in the direction you want

to view. The more you move away from the
section line, the deeper your view becomes.
Once the bounding box is the desired

366

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Viewing Section Views

If you have created section views, you can display
them at any time using the Section Views menu or
toolbar.
To view a section view:
1.

Select View > Section Views, or click

the Section Views button on the
Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

From the flyout, select the section you want

to view.

Tip: If you have your section marks turned on in

your 2D plan view, you can switch to a section
view by selecting a section mark, right-clicking it,
then selecting View Section.

Turning Section Marks On and Off

When you create a section, a section mark is
displayed in the 2D plan view. The section mark
contains markers at each end of the section line
which indicate the direction of the section view.
You can turn section marks on and off using the
Section Marks On/Off tool.

Editing a Section View

To turn section marks on or off:

Select View > Viewing Aids > Section

Marks On/Off, or
Click the Viewing Aids button on the
Basic View Control or Advanced View
Control toolbar and select Section
Marks On/Off

Editing Section Properties

You can edit the name of a section as it appears on
the Section Views menu, as well as edit the name
and text style of a section mark.
To edit section properties:
1.

If the section view is currently displayed,

right-click and select Section Properties. If
you are currently in 2D plan view, select the
section mark, then right-click and select
Properties.

2.

To edit the name of the section as it appears

on the Section Views menu, edit the name in
the Name edit box.

3.

To edit the text that appears on the section

mark, edit the text in the Mark Text edit box.

4.

To apply a different text style to the section

mark, click the Text Style button and make a
selection from the Text Styles dialog. You
can also edit the current text style if you
want.

5.

Click OK.

Editing a Section View

You can edit a section view by moving the section
mark associated with the section view, or by
stretching the bounding box attached to the
section line. By moving a section mark you are
changing your viewpoint. By stretching the
bounding box, you are changing the depth of the
view.
To change your viewpoint by moving the
section mark:
1.

In 2D plan view, make sure your section

marks are turned on.

2.

Click on the section mark.

3.

Hover your pointer over the blue grab

handle on the section line to display the
Move cursor. Or, right-click in the
drawing area and select Move.

4.

Click and drag the mark to move it where

you want it.

5.

Right-click and select View Section to see

the result.

To change the depth of the section view:

1.

In 2D plan view, make sure your section

marks are turned on.

2.

Click on the section mark.

3.

Hover your pointer over the blue grab

handle on the bounding box line to
display the Stretch cursor. Or, rightclick in the drawing area and select Stretch.

4.

5.

Click and drag to make the bounding box

smaller or bigger. The bigger the box, the
deeper the view.
Right-click and select View Section to see
the result.

Deleting a Section View

You can delete a section from the Section Views
menu by deleting its corresponding section mark
in 2D plan view.
To delete a section:
1.

Make sure your section marks are turned on.

2.

In 2D plan view, select the mark to delete.

3.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or

right-click and select Delete.

Users Guide

367

54

Chapter 54 Custom Viewing

Selecting a Background for 3D

Views
By default, a sky image is displayed behind your
model when you are in a 3D view. You can select
a different image to display, including custom
bitmaps that you have imported, or switch to a
night scene.
To select a background for the view:
1.

Select Settings > Background

Settings, or click the Background
Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Background Settings dialog, select

either the Day Scene or Night Scene radio
button. You would want to switch to a night
scene if you are doing a nighttime
3DTrueView rendering of your model.

3.

Click on the current preview to access the

Materials dialog.

368

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

4.

In the Materials dialog, select a background

from the Materials list. To add a material to
the list (if you have your own bitmap, for
example), see Customizing the Materials
Library on page 386.

5.

Click OK in the Materials dialog.

6.

Click OK in the Background Settings

dialog.

"
Design Suite Deluxes Catalog Manager lets you add, edit and delete elements to suit your needs.
You can also create new, custom catalogs that contain a specific selection of elements. You can
open any catalog you want during a work session to gain access to the elements you want.
Another great feature is Save Element to Catalog, which lets you save an element that you have
edited in your drawing to the current catalog.

369

Chapter 55 Catalogs & Elements

Using the Catalog Manager

To view a listing of a particular element type:

The programs Catalog Manager provides full

control of new and existing catalogs.

1.

Select the element from the Element drop

box.

To view the properties of an element:

1.

Select the element in the Select an Element

window.

2.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or

right-click and select Properties.

Adding a Group to a Catalog

Using the Catalog Manager you can:

View the contents and properties of any

catalog
Add groups and elements to a catalog
Delete groups and elements from a catalog
Edit elements in a catalog
Import elements into a catalog from another
catalog
Create and save new catalogs

To access the Catalog Manager:

1.

370

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

All elements are organized by group. For

example, walls are grouped under Exterior Walls,
Interior Walls, or Foundation Walls. This helps
you locate specific element types quickly. You can
add groups to any catalog using the Add Group
tool.
To add a group to the current catalog:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the

Element drop box.

3.

Select Catalog > Add Group, or right-click in

the Select a Type window and select Add
Group.

4.

Type a name for the group, then press

ENTER.

Renaming a Group in a Catalog

Renaming a Group in a Catalog

To edit an element in a catalog:

You can change the name of any group in a

catalog using the Rename Group tool.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

To rename a group:

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the

Element drop box.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group

containing the element you want to edit.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the

Element drop box.

4.

In the Select an Element window, select the

element to edit.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group

you want to rename.

5.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or

right-click and select Properties.

4.

Select Catalog > Rename Group, or rightclick and select Rename Group.

6.

5.

Type the new name and press ENTER.

Edit the properties as desired. See Working

with Property Pages on page 375 for more
information.

7.

Click OK to return to the Catalog Manager.

Deleting a Group in a Catalog

You can delete a group in a catalog provided it
contains no elements.

Note: Editing elements in a catalog has no effect

on elements already inserted in your drawing. It
only affects future insertions of the element.

To delete a group in a catalog:

To add a new element to a catalog:

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the

Element drop box.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the

Element drop box.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group

you want to delete. Note that the group can
only be deleted if it contains no elements.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group

you want to add the element to.

4.

Select Catalog > Delete Group, or right-click

and select Delete Group.

4.

Select Catalog > Add Element.

Adding and Editing Elements in a

Catalog

Elements like furniture, appliances and

accessories can be defined based on a set of
general parameters, or by importing a DXF

Every element has a number of different

properties that determine its size, geometry and
appearance. You can edit these properties to suit
your needs. If you want you can create a new
element instead of editing an existing one.
Note: You cant edit elements in the catalog panel.
You need to use the Catalog Manager.

Users Guide

371

55

Chapter 55 Catalogs & Elements

or 3DS file. If this is the case, you will see a
dialog similar to the following:

Saving Edited Elements in Your

Drawing to a Catalog
If you have edited the properties of an inserted
element, you can save that element (and its
custom properties) to the current catalog.
To add an edited element from your drawing
into the current catalog:

To define the element by specifying size

properties, select the Use a Parametric
Template radio button, select the specific
element type you want to create (chair, table,
etc.), then click OK.

5.

2.

Select the element in your drawing.

3.

Click Yes to save the element. The element is

added to the current catalog.

Importing Custom Objects into

Your Catalog
If you have any custom 3D objects in 3DS or DXF
format, such as furniture and appliances, you can
import them into your Design Suite Deluxe catalog
through the Catalog Manager. You can then insert
the object in your drawing when you want.

Define the element's properties. (See

Working with Property Pages on page 375.)

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the

Element drop box (e.g. Furniture).

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group

you want to add the element to.

If you want to give the element a different

name, disable the Auto Name check box and
type the desired name in the Name edit box.

372

Select File > Catalogs > Save

Element to Catalog. Your pointer
changes to a catalog cursor.

To import a DXF or 3DS file, select the

Import geometry from file radio button,
click OK, then select the desired file. Some
elements, like electronics, will prompt you
directly for a file because they do not have a
parametric template. For more information,
see Importing Custom Objects into Your
Catalog on page 372.

Note that if the Auto Name check box is

enabled, the element will be automatically
named for you. For example, if you are creating a wall and select Masonry for the wall
type, and specify a width of 6, the name
automatically becomes 6 Masonry Wall. For
more information about automatic name
generation, see Using Automatic Name Generation on page 375.)

6.

1.

Click OK. The element is added to the

catalog.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To import a custom object into your catalog:

Importing Custom Objects into Your Catalog

4.

Select Catalog > Add Element. In the Define

Element dialog, select the Import geometry
from file radio button.

materials library. If you want to store them in

a specific group, click Select, then select the
desired group.

5.

Click OK.

You can add and rename groups using the

Add Group or Rename Group tools on the
dialogs Material menu or right-click menu.
You can also delete any custom groups you
have created using the Delete Group tool.

6.

In the Open dialog, select the appropriate file

type from the Files of type drop box (DXF or
3DS).

7.

Locate and select the file to import, then click

Open.

10. Click OK in the Material Group(s) dialog.

11. If you know what units were used to create
the object, select the units from the Convert
File From drop box. Otherwise, select the
unit of measure in the Convert File From
drop box that will result in a logical
Resultant Width, Resultant Depth and
Resultant Height. Selecting Custom lets you
specify a custom scale in the Custom Scale
edit box.
The scale is the multiplication factor of the
units used for objects in the block. For
example, if you're converting a file that you
assume was created in feet and inches, the
scale is 25.4.
12. Once logical dimensions are displayed, click
OK in the Block Import Options dialog.

8.

In the Block Import Options dialog, specify

what you want the components created from
by making a selection in the Create
Components From drop box.
For DXF files you can choose from Colors or
Layers. Since 3DS objects are essentially an
assembly of materials, the only selection for
3DS objects is Materials.

9.

By default, the imported objects materials

will be stored in a new group in your
Users Guide

373

55

Chapter 55 Catalogs & Elements

13. In the properties dialog, enter a name for the
element in the Name edit box.

14. Define the elements properties. The element

will already have size properties assigned to
it that are taken from the original file, but you
can change these. You may need to edit the
orientation of the element so that it inserts
correctly in the drawing.
15. If you want to select a different file to apply
to your new element, click the Select button
in the Imported Element area of the properties
dialog.
16. Click OK. The new element is added to the
catalog.

Simplifying an Element
If an element looks too complex in the preview
window, you can simplify it by reducing the
number of polygons used to display it. This
applies only to some block elements like furniture
and appliances.
To simplify an imported element:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Locate the element in the catalog.

3.

Select Catalog > Element Properties.

374

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

4.

In the property dialog, click Simplify.

5.

To simplify the element, slide the ruler to the

left. The Number of vertices in object and
Percentage of simplification values update
accordingly.

6.

To put a limit on how much simplification

can take place, enter a value in the Min
number of vertices per component edit
box. The larger the number, the less
simplified the element will become.

7.

Click OK to return to the properties dialog.

8.

Click OK in the properties dialog.

Controlling What Parts of an

Element are Displayed
You can hide certain parts of an element from
view by changing its display properties. This
applies only to some block elements like furniture
and appliances.
To control what parts of an element are
displayed:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Locate the element in the catalog.

3.

Select Catalog > Element Properties.

Working with Property Pages

4.

In the property dialog, click Display.

by right-clicking in the preview window and

making a selection from the menu.

When the image is in a 3D view, you can rotate it

around by clicking and dragging with your
mouse.
5.

To display or hide a component from view in

2D and/or 3D view, select it in the list, then
click the appropriate eye icon.
Component is displayed

Using Automatic Name Generation

Names of elements are based on pre-defined
formulas. The name 8" Concrete Wall is made up
of three variables:

Component is not displayed

6.

Click OK to return to the properties dialog.

7.

Click OK in the properties dialog.

Working with Property Pages

When you access an elements property pages, a
multi-tabbed dialog is displayed. The tabs and
properties vary depending on the element. The
most common property pages are Basic,
Appearance, Quantity and Behavior. The notes
and hyperlinks properties are common to all
property pages.

8 Concrete Wall
Width

Type

Element

Each variable is separated by a space. These

variables and spaces are defined in the name's
formula.
If you add or change an element, and select Auto
Name, the element's name updates automatically
in the catalog. For example, if you create a
concrete wall, and define a width of 10", the name
automatically becomes 10" Concrete Wall.
Automatic name generation:

Sample Properties Dialog

A preview of the element is shown in the preview

window. By default, the image is displayed in a
3D rendered view. You can switch between 3D
and 2D as well as select a different display mode

Saves typing a name every time you add or

edit an element
Ensures consistency in catalogs
Prevents duplicate entries if you forget to
change a name
To use automatic name generation when adding
or editing an element, enable the Auto Name
check box next to the Name edit box in the
elements properties dialog.
Note: If Auto Name is not selected, you can type
any name you want in the Name edit box.

Users Guide

375

55

Chapter 55 Catalogs & Elements

Editing the Name Generation

Formula
When you add or edit a catalog element, you can
modify the formula used to generate the
element's name if you are using automatic name
generation. Formulas are made up of variables
(like Element Class and Element Type) and
separators (spaces, symbols or characters).
Editing an elements name generation formula
sets the formula for any new elements you create
of that type. For example, if you edit the name
generation formula for an 8 Brick Wall, any new
walls you add to the catalog will use the new
formula if you use automatic name generation.
To modify the formula used for an element's
automatic name generation:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the

Element drop box.

3.

Select the element to edit.

4.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or

right-click and select Properties.

5.

Click the Options button to the right of the

Auto Name check box. The Automatic
Name Generation dialog for that element
type is displayed. The right pane (titled Used
Variables and Separators) displays the current
formula.

6.

To remove a component from the formula,

select it and click Remove, or press the left
arrow key on your keyboard.

7.

To add a component to the formula, select

the desired variable or separator in the
Available Variables or Available Separators
window and click Add, or press the right
arrow key on your keyboard.

8.

To move a component in the formula, select

the component and click Move Up or Move
Down.

9.

When you have finished modifying the

formula, click OK to close the Automatic
Name Generation dialog.

10. Click OK to close the element's properties

dialog.

Basic Page
Most elements have a Basic property page,
although the properties on this page will vary
according to the element type. Generally there is a
Type section, where you can select the specific
element type, as well as a Properties section,
where you can specify the dimensions of the
element.

Sample Basic Page

Note: You can find detailed descriptions of size

properties for specific element types in their
respective chapters.

376

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Changing an Elements Orientation

Changing an Elements
Orientation

element, so you can apply a different material to

each component.

Symbol elements, such as furniture and light

fixtures, are oriented in a logical fashion when
you insert them in your drawing. For example,
tables are inserted in a flat, upright position on
the floor, and electrical outlets are inserted in a
vertical position on the face of walls. You can edit
the orientation of most symbol elements. For
example, you may want to flip an air register so
that you can insert it on the ceiling in your
basement.
To change an elements orientation:
1.

On the Basic property page, click the

appropriate arrow keys in the Orientation
area to rotate the element.
X Axis: Rotates the element front to back,
and vice versa.
Y Axis: Rotates the element towards its left
or right side in 3D.
Z Axis: Rotates the element left or right in 2D
plan view.

Sample Appearance Page

To change an elements material:

1.

In the Components pane, select the component

whose material you want to change.

2.

In the Material area, click the Select button.

3.

In the Materials dialog, select the group

containing the desired material. If you want
to choose a solid color, select the Paint group.

4.

Select the material you want to use. The

swatches in the preview windows update
automatically. If you want to edit the

Appearance Page
The Appearance properties page is common to
most elements. It provides control over the
materials applied to elements, which come into
play when you view your model in Rendered or
Patterned mode.
A material can be a texture, such as brick, or a
color. This is what you see in Rendered mode.
Materials also have a pattern assigned to them,
which is what you see when you view in
Patterned mode.
The contents of the Components window varies
depending on the element. It contains a listing of
the individual components that make up the

Users Guide

377

55

Chapter 55 Catalogs & Elements

material, click on one of the swatches to
access the Edit Materials dialog. For
information about editing materials, see
Editing Material Properties on page 387.
5.

Click OK to return to the Appearance page.

6.

If you want to rotate the

material on the element,
enter an angle in the Rotation edit box, or
use the arrows to scroll through a list of
angles. This rotates the material in a
clockwise direction.

7.

To shift the material on the

element (left, right, up or
down), use the Position
arrows.

8.

To specify a custom tile size for the material,

enable the Override tile size check box, then
enter the desired tile height and width in the
Height and Width edit boxes.

9.

Sample Quantity Page

Tile height refers to the height of one bitmap

tile. The program uses tiled rendering to
display images, meaning images are
generated in pieces (tiles) vertically and
horizontally. Changing the tile height of a
brick material, for example, would make the
bricks look taller. Changing the tile width
would make the bricks look wider.

Manuf: The Manufacturer of the product.

Note that the Override tile size option lets

you customize the tile size for this instance
only without creating a new material.

Part No.: Part Number. A series of numbers that

identifies the product.

Select another component in the Components

pane and select a material for that
component.

10. When all your materials are defined, click

OK.

Quantity Page
The Quantity properties page is common to most
elements. It contains information that helps
identify the element as a material, such as the
manufacturer and price. Some of the information

378

on this page is used in the project estimate, such

as assemblies.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Supplier: The company or store who will be

supplying the product.
Price: The unit price of the product.
Division: A construction division identification.
In North America, CSI divisions are used.

Alt Code: Alternate Code. An extra identification

code that is used to link an element in the
programs catalog to the databases of other
applications, such as Timberline.
Include Element in Quantities. Reports the
element in the project estimate.

Behavior Page

Behavior Page

An X value moves the insertion point left or

right. A Y value moves the insertion point
forwards or backwards. A Z value moves the
insertion point up or down on the element.

The Behavior property page is available for

symbol elements like cabinets, furniture and
lights.

To edit an elements snap edge:

1.

Click on the desired snap edge graphic in the

Snap Edge area.

Adding Notes to an Elements

Properties
The Notes function in the properties dialog lets
you enter a note about the element. This
additional information can be anything you want.
To add a note to an elements properties:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the

Element drop box.

3.

Select the element to edit.

4.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or

right-click and select Properties.

5.

In the bottom left corner of the dialog,

click the Add Notes button.

To edit an elements insertion height:

6.

Enter your note in the Notes dialog.

1.

7.

Click OK.

Sample Behavior Page

Usually this page contains a Distance above

current location or terrain option which lets you
control the height at which the element is inserted
relative to the floor or terrain. The value entered
is the distance from the floor or terrain to the
insertion point of the element. (For most elements
except windows and wall openings, the insertion
point is at the bottom of the element.)
Some elements have a defined Insertion Point,
which is the point on the element that is attached
to the cursor when you are inserting the element.
Some elements also have a defined Snap Edge,
which determines which edge of the element will
snap to the wall if you position it near a wall.

Edit the value in the Distance above

current location or terrain edit box.

To edit an elements insertion point:

1.

Edit the values in the X Axis, Y Axis and Z

Axis edit boxes, or use the sliders beside
these edit boxes.

Adding Hyperlinks to an Elements

Properties
When defining an elements properties, you can
create a link to an external file (e.g. Word
document) or Web address. You can then open
the hyperlink any time you are viewing the
Users Guide

379

55

Chapter 55 Catalogs & Elements

elements properties. You can add multiple
hyperlinks to an elements properties if you want.
To add a hyperlink to an elements properties:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the

Element drop box.

3.

Select the element to edit.

4.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or

right-click and select Properties.

5.

In the bottom left corner of the

dialog, click the arrow next to the
Hyperlinks button, then select
Manage Hyperlinks.

10. To delete a hyperlink, select it in the

hyperlink window, then click Delete.
11. Click OK.
Note: You can create a link to another Design
Suite Deluxe (*.bld) file. However, if that file uses
the same catalog as the current drawing, you
cannot access the catalog in the linked file.

Opening an Elements Hyperlink

If you have attached a hyperlink to an element,
you can open the hyperlink when viewing the
elements properties.
To open an elements hyperlink:
1.

Access the elements properties.

2.

In the bottom left corner of the

dialog, click the arrow next to the
Hyperlinks button, then select
Open Current Hyperlink. The hyperlink is
opened.

Note: If you have attached multiple hyperlinks to

the elements properties, the one marked current
in the Hyperlinks dialog will be opened.

Making a Hyperlink Current

6.

In the Hyperlinks dialog, click Add. A new

entry is added to the hyperlinks window. An
icon appears to the left of the new hyperlink
indicating that it is the current hyperlink.

7.

Type a name for the hyperlink in the Name

field (e.g. Encore Web Site).

8.

Press the Tab key to move to the Links field,

then type the web address (e.g. http://
www.encoreusa.com) or path to the file you
are linking to. If you are linking to a file, you
can click Browse to search through the
directories on your computer. Once youve
located the file in the Open dialog, click
Open. The path to the file is automatically
displayed in the Links field.

9.

380

To view the link, select it in the hyperlink

window, then click Open.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

When you attach more than one hyperlink to an

elements properties, the current one is marked
with an icon in the Hyperlinks dialog.

Icon

When you use the tools in the Hyperlinks dialog

(Browse, Open, Delete), they apply to the
currently selected hyperlink. Also, when you
select the Open Hyperlink tool from the
Hyperlinks flyout, it opens the currently selected
hyperlink.

Creating a New Catalog

To make a specific hyperlink current in the
Hyperlinks dialog, just click on any of its fields.

Creating a New Catalog

If you plan to edit or add elements in the Master
Catalog, you may want to create a new catalog
instead of editing the existing one. That way, the
custom elements you create are distinguishable
from the defaults and are stored in one place.
When you create a new catalog, you specify a
name and where you want to store the catalog.
When you close the Catalog Manager, the new
catalog will become the current catalog in the
catalog panel.

5.

From the Type drop box, select the unit of

measure you would like to use for elements
in the catalog.

6.

From the Precision drop box, select the level

of precision you would like to use for
measurements. For example, selecting
#-# #/16 sets the level of precision to 1/16th
of an inch when working in feet and inches.

7.

In the Name edit box, type your name.

8.

In the Company edit box, type the name of

your company, if applicable.

9.

Click OK. A new, blank catalog is created.

To create a new catalog:

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the Catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select File > New Catalog.

10. Select File > Save Catalog.

3.

In the Create a new catalog dialog, type a

name (without extension) in the File Name
box.

4.

Click the Browse button next to the

Location edit box and select the
directory where you want to store the
new catalog. The default is the program's
Catalogs directory, which is where you
should store all catalogs.

11. You can now add groups and elements to the

catalog, or import elements from another
catalog (see Importing Elements into
Catalogs on page 382). Remember to save the
catalog after you make changes to it.

Users Guide

381

55

Chapter 55 Catalogs & Elements

Creating a Copy of a Catalog

2.

You can save a catalog under a different name,

which essentially creates a copy of it.

Make sure the catalog you want to import

elements into is the currently open catalog.

3.

From the Element drop box, select the

appropriate element type.

To create a copy of a catalog under a different

name:

4.

Click Expand to expand the Catalog

Manager dialog.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

5.

On the right side of the dialog, click the

Browse button, then select the catalog
you want to import elements from.

2.

Make sure the catalog you want to save is the

current catalog.

3.

Select File > Save Catalog As.

6.

In the right-hand window, select an element

to import, then click Import Item. If you want
to import all elements listed, just click Import
All. The element is imported into the current
catalog. Note that the group that the element
belongs to is also imported into the current
catalog.

4.

In the File name edit box, type the name you

want to save under (without extension).

5.

Click Save.

Note: The newly saved catalog becomes the

current catalog.

Importing Elements into Catalogs

Using the Catalog Manager you can import
elements from another catalog into the current
catalog. This feature is often used when you are
creating new catalogs.
Note: If you want to import a DXF or 3DS file, see
Importing Custom Objects into Your Catalog on
page 372.
To import elements into a catalog:
1.

382

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Deleting Elements from a Catalog

7.

When you are done importing elements, click

Collapse to return to the regular view in the
Catalog Manager.

Deleting Elements from a Catalog

You can delete any element from a catalog.
To delete an element from a catalog:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the

Element drop box.

3.

Select the element you want to delete.

4.

Select Catalog > Delete Element, or

right-click and select Delete Element.

Opening a Catalog
You can use the Open Catalog tool to open any
catalog and make it the current catalog in the
catalog panel. The Open Catalog tool is also
available in the Catalog Manager.

5.

Click OK. The catalog is now the current

catalog in the catalog panel.

Closing a Catalog
You can use the Close Catalog tool to close the
current catalog in the catalog panel or the
Catalog Manager dialog. Note that this leaves
the catalog window blank until you open another
catalog.
To close the catalog in the catalog panel:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Close Catalog.

To close a catalog in the Catalog Manager:

1.

Select File > Close Catalog.

Viewing Catalog Properties

You can view the properties of the current catalog
(file name, location, etc.) using the Catalog
Properties tool.

To open a catalog for display in the Catalog

panel:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Open Catalog.

2.

In the Open dialog, locate the catalog you

want to open.

3.

Click Open. The catalog you opened

becomes the active catalog. Note that when
you open a catalog, only one element type is
displayed. The type displayed depends on
the last Insert tool selected.

To open a catalog in the Catalog Manager:

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select File > Open Catalog.

3.

In the Open dialog, locate the catalog you

want to open.

To view catalog properties within the catalog

Manager:

4.

Click Open. The catalog you opened

becomes the active catalog in the Catalog
Manager.

1.

To view the properties of the catalog currently

in the catalog panel:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Properties.

Select File > Catalog Properties.

Users Guide

383

55

"

Every element has a material assigned to it in the element's property pages. Materials determine
what textures, colors and patterns are used to display elements in 3D view. You can edit and
create materials on the fly.
All materials are stored in a materials library, called materials.mlb. You can create new material
libraries containing a specific selection of materials, and load those custom libraries in other
projects.
This chapter tells you how to customize materials and work with material libraries.
If you want to edit the material, color or pattern of an inserted element, see Changing an

Elements Material or Color on page 277.

385

Chapter 56 Materials, Colors & Patterns

Things You Should Know About

Editing Materials

You can add new materials to the library, as well

as edit and delete existing materials.

When you add or edit a material through the

Catalog Manager, the custom material is saved
with the catalog, and is only available when
editing elements in the catalog. If you add or edit
a material when editing an element that has been
inserted in your drawing, however, the
customized material is only available in the
current project when editing the properties of
inserted elements. The materials library in the
catalog remains unchanged. This is because the
materials library in the catalog is separate from
the materials library in the current drawing.
The reason that there is a project-specific
materials library is so that any materials used in
your project are always saved with the project,
making it possible to share your project with
others and always maintain your customized
materials.
If you want materials that you have customized
in your catalog to be available in your projectspecific materials library, or vice versa, you can
use the Transfer tool to save the custom materials
to the external materials library file
(materials.mlb), then import the custom materials
from the library file into the other materials
library.

If you customize the catalog materials library

(through the Catalog Manager), your change is
saved with the catalog.
If you customize the project-specific materials
library (by editing an inserted element), your
change is saved in the current project only.
To access the catalog materials library:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries >

Materials. The Materials dialog appears.

Customizing the Materials Library

The materials library contains a vast array of
materials that you can apply to elements. Even so,
you may find that you want to customize it at
some point in time.
In the materials library, materials are listed in
groups (Concrete, Brick, Wood, etc.) so you can
organize and find them easily. You can add,
rename and delete groups as needed.

To access the project-specific materials

library:
1.

Select an element in your drawing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties.

3.

In the properties dialog, select the

Appearance tab.

4.

Click the Select button. The Materials dialog

appears.

To add a group to the materials library:

1.

386

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Select Material > Add Group, or right-click

in the Group window and select Add Group.

Editing Material Properties

2.

Type a name for the group, then press

ENTER.

To rename a group in the materials library:

2.

Select Material > Edit Material, or right-click

and select Edit Material.

3.

Edit the material properties in the Edit

Materials dialog. See Editing Material
Properties on page 387.
Click OK.

1.

Select the group in the Group window.

2.

Select Material > Rename Group, or rightclick and select Rename Group.

4.

3.

Type the new name, then press ENTER.

To delete a material from the materials library:

To delete a group from the materials library:

1.

Select the group in the Group window.

2.

Select Material > Delete Group, or rightclick and select Delete Group.

Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains

materials.

1.

Select the material in the Material window.

2.

Select Material > Delete Material, or rightclick and select Delete Material.
If the material is being used by an element, it
cannot be deleted. In this case, the following
dialog appears:

To add a new material to the materials library:

1.

In the Group window, select or create the

group you want to add the material to.

2.

Select Material > Add Material, or right-click

in the Material window and select Add
Material.

3.

In the Material Name edit box, type a name

for the new material.

4.

Specify the material properties. See Editing

Material Properties on page 387.

5.

Click OK. The material is added to the

library.

To edit a material in the materials library:

1.

Select the material in the Material window.

If you want to see a list of which elements are

using the material, click Yes. A dialog
similar to the following appears:

When you are finished viewing the element

list, click OK to return to the Materials
dialog.

Editing Material Properties

When you are adding or editing a material in the
materials library, you need to specify the
materials properties. A material has two main
types of properties: Rendered and Patterned.
Rendered properties determine what texture or
color is used to display an element in the
Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode.
Users Guide

387

56

Chapter 56 Materials, Colors & Patterns

Patterned properties determine what pattern is
used to display an element in Patterned mode.

height of a brick material, for example,

would make the bricks look taller. Changing
the tile width would make the bricks look
wider.

To edit the properties of a material:

1.

Select the material to edit in the materials list.

2.

Select Material > Edit Material, or click one

of the preview swatches.

5.

To edit Rendered properties:

1.

In the Edit Materials dialog, select the

Rendered tab.

By default, the Tile Height and Tile Width

have the Maintain Aspect Ratio lock closed.
When the lock is closed, the Tile Width
changes to match the Tile Height, and vice
versa. This prevents distortion. If you want to
specify different values for each, you need to
open the Maintain Aspect Ratio lock by
clicking on it.

Maintain
Aspect
Ratio

2.

If you want to display an element in a solid

color in 3D rendered or rendered outline
view, enable the Use Solid Color radio
button. Click the Select button, then select
the color you want to use in the Color dialog.

3.

If you want to display an element with a

texture applied to it in 3D rendered or
rendered outline view, enable the Use
Texture radio button. Click the Select
button, then select the texture you want to
use. A wide selection of textures can be
found in the programs Textures directory.
You can use BMP, JPG, TGA and PNG files. If
want to use textures from outside sources,
see Using Textures from Outside Sources on
page 389 for guidelines.

4.

388

If you want to change the scale of the texture,

enter new values in the Tile Height and Tile
Width edit boxes. Tile height refers to the
height of one bitmap tile. The program uses
tiled rendering to display images, meaning
images are generated in pieces (tiles)
vertically and horizontally. Changing the tile
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

6.

To repeat the bitmap tile horizontally, enable

the Tile Horizontally check box.

7.

To repeat the bitmap tile vertically, enable

the Tile Vertically check box.

8.

To change the surface finish of the material

(dull, shiny, etc.), make a selection from the
drop box in the Surface Properties area. This
setting will take effect when you create a
3DTrueView. If you want to specify a custom
surface finish, select Custom in the list, then
click the Advanced button.

9.

If creating a custom finish, specify its

properties. These are described below.
Specular. Reflection that creates
highlights on materials, making them appear
shiny.
Emissive. The amount of light given off by a
material. The more emissive a
material is, the more self-luminous it
appears.
Transparency. The degree to which a material is pervious to light.
Color Bleed. The degree to which different
colors blend where they meet.
To return to the basic view, click the Basic
button at the bottom of the dialog.

Using Textures from Outside Sources

To edit Patterned properties:
1.

In the Edit Materials dialog, select the

Patterned tab.

uniform throughout. However, cropping can

have an undesirable result if the texture is
something like a tree.

Saving Customized Materials to a

Materials Library File
If you have added or edited materials in either the
catalog materials library or project-specific
materials library, you can save the custom
materials to the external materials library file
(materials.mlb). You can then import the
customized materials from the library file into
any materials library, whether that be the catalog
materials library or project-specific materials
library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle
between libraries.
2.

To select a different pattern to use in 3D

patterned views, select the pattern in the
Pattern list.

You can save materials to the default materials

library, or create a new library to save them in.

3.

To edit the scale of the pattern, edit the value

in the Scale edit box. A value of 2 doubles
the original scale, while a value of .5 halves
the original scale.

To save customized materials to a materials

library file:
1.

In the Materials dialog, select

File > Transfer.

To specify more options, click the Advanced

button. To edit a pattern, see Customizing
the Patterns Library on page 390.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the library you

want to export materials to, then click Open.
The main materials library is called
materials.mlb.

4.

Using Textures from Outside

Sources

Tip: You can create a new library file if you

want by entering a name in the File name
edit box.

When changing a materials texture assignment,

you can use textures from outside sources
provided they are appropriately sized and not too
large. As a rule, the textures dimensions should
be a power of 2:
2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, etc.
If the dimensions are not a power of 2, the texture
will be cropped (from the top and right side) to
the next smallest size. For some textures, this will
make it look like the texture is cut off.
For example, if your texture is 500 x 500, it will be
cropped down to 256 x 256, since 500 is not a
power of 2. If the texture were 512 x 512, however,
it would not be cropped.
Cropping is not that important if the texture is a
grid pattern (such as brick), since such a texture is

3.

In the left pane, select the customized

material, then click Export Item. The
material (and the group it is under) is added
to the materials library file. If you wanted

Users Guide

389

56

Chapter 56 Materials, Colors & Patterns

you could also click Export All to instantly
export the entire materials list to the library
file.
4.

Click OK.

If you want to import the customized materials

into your catalog materials library or projectspecific materials library, see the next topic,
Importing Materials from a Materials Library File.

Importing Materials from a

Materials Library File
If you have saved customized materials to the
materials library file, you can import the
materials into your catalog materials library or
any project-specific materials library.
To import materials from a library file:

Specifying the Location of the

Textures Directory
By default, textures are located in the programs
Textures directory. If you move your textures
directory to another location on your system, or
would like to link to the Textures directory of a
compatible program, you will need to specify the
location of the Textures directory so that textures
appear properly in the program.
To specify the location of your Textures
directory:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

1.

In the Materials dialog, select File >

Transfer.

3.

In the File Paths area, click on the Textures

Directory to select it.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the materials

library (e.g. materials.mlb) that you want to
import materials from, then click Open.

4.

Click Modify.

5.

In the Browse For Folder dialog, locate the

folder containing your textures, then click
OK.

6.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Customizing the Patterns Library

The patterns library contains an excellent
selection of pre-defined patterns that you can
apply to materials.
You can edit patterns to suit your needs.

3.

In the right pane, select the material to

import, then click Import Item. Or, just click
Import All to import the entire list.

4.

Click OK.

390

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Customizing the Patterns Library

To access the patterns library:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries >

Patterns. The Patterns dialog appears.

Note: You can also access the patterns library

when editing the Patterned properties of a
material, by clicking the pattern swatch in the
Edit Materials dialog.

Offset. The spacing between lines as the line

is repeated (offset) parallel to the original
throughout the pattern.
Shift. The distance each offset line is shifted
(left or right) from the origin of the previous
line. This creates a staggered effect. (See
Example 3 on page 391.)
Example 1 (single line pattern)
No. of Lines: 1
Line Definition: 20,-5,10,-5

To edit a pattern:

Angle: 45

1.

Select the pattern in the list.

Offset: 5

2.

To edit the scale of a pattern, enter a value in

the Scale edit box. A value of 2 doubles the
original scale, while a value of .5 halves the
original scale.

3.

To edit the patterns line definition, click the

Advanced button at the bottom of the dialog.
A number of properties pop up that let you
define the pattern.
No. of Lines. The number of lines that will
repeat in the pattern. Usually, this will be 1 or
2, but it could be more depending on the
complexity of the pattern.
Edit Line. The line you are currently editing.
Definition. Generally, the segment lengths
and spaces in the line's pattern.
A single value (other than 0) creates a solid
line. (See Example 2 on page 391.)

Example 2 (multi-line pattern)

No. of Lines: 2
Line Definition: 1.00 (both lines)
Angle: 45 (line 1) and 135 (line 2)
Offset: 20 (both lines)
Example 3 (pattern with a shift)
No. of Lines: 1
Line Definition: 10,-5
Angle: 0
Offset: 5
Shift: 5

For dashed patterns, segments and spaces

can be different lengths, but spaces must be
preceded by a negative sign to indicate they
are spaces.
For example, a definition of 20,-5,10,-5 (in
Metric) creates the following pattern: 20 mm
dash, 5 mm space, 10 mm dash, 5 mm space.
(See Example 1 on page 391.)
X Origin. The point on the X axis the line
passes through.
Y Origin. The point on the Y axis the line
passes through.
Angle. The angle of the line in degrees.

Users Guide

391

56

You can apply manufacturer information and logos to any element in your drawing or catalog, as
well as any material in your materials library. This provides instant real-world manufacturer
information when you are viewing the properties of an element or material.
Design Suite Deluxes manufacturers library contains several manufacturers of materials found in
the materials library. You can add manufacturers to the library to suit your needs. Each
manufacturer has name, logo and contact information. You can also choose to display
manufacturer logos on the property pages of elements and materials.

393

Chapter 57 Manufacturers

Setting Up the Manufacturers

Library
Design Suite Deluxes manufacturers library
contains several manufacturers of materials
found in the materials library. You can add
manufacturers to the library, as well as edit and
delete existing manufacturers. Each manufacturer
has name, logo and contact information. You can
then attach manufacturer information to elements
and materials.
To set up the manufacturers library:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Manufacturers. Or,

open the Catalog Manager and select
Libraries > Manufacturers.

Open dialog. You can use JPG, BMP and

TGA files.
4.

Click OK to return to the Manufacturers

dialog.

5.

To edit an existing manufacturer, select it in

the list, then click Edit. Update the
information in the Manufacturer
Information dialog as desired.

6.

To delete a manufacturer, select it in the list,

then click Delete.

7.

Once you have finished setting up your

library, click OK.

Note: You can also add, edit and delete

manufacturers when accessing the properties of
inserted elements. However, the manufacturers
you specify will appear only in the projectspecific manufacturers library. Therefore, it is
recommended that you specify manufacturers
through the Catalogs menu or Catalog Manager
as described above.

Attaching Manufacturer
Information to an Element
You can attach manufacturer information to an
element in the catalog, or in the drawing. You can
then view the manufacturer information any time
you are viewing the elements properties.
2.

3.

394

To add a new manufacturer to the list, click

Add.

In the Manufacturer Information dialog, fill

out the name and contact information fields.
To select a logo if you have one, click inside
the Logo pane, then select the logo file in the
3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To attach manufacturer information to an

element in the catalog:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the element you want to edit.

3.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or

right-click and select Properties.

4.

In the properties dialog, select the Quantity

tab.

5.

Click the Browse button next the

Manuf: edit box.

6.

In the Manufacturers dialog, select the

manufacturer you want to attach to the
element. You can add or edit manufacturers
if necessary.

Attaching Manufacturer Information to a Material

7.

Click OK.

4.

To attach manufacturer information to an

element in your drawing:
1.

Select the element you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the properties dialog, select the Quantity

tab.

4.

Click the Browse button next the

Manuf: edit box.

5.

In the Manufacturers dialog, select the

manufacturer you want to attach to the
element. You can add or edit manufacturers
if necessary.

6.

Click OK.

Note: Attaching a manufacturer to an element in

your drawing only applies the information to that
particular instance of the element. Other instances
or future insertions of the element are unaffected.

Attaching Manufacturer
Information to a Material
You can attach manufacturer information to
materials in your materials library. You can then
view the manufacturer information any time you
are viewing the materials properties.
To attach manufacturer information to a
material:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries >

Materials. The Materials dialog appears.

3.

Select the material you want to edit, then

right-click and select Edit Material, or click
on one of the swatches.

In the Edit Materials dialog, click the Browse

button next to the manufacturer logo pane.
Click Here

5.

In the Manufacturers dialog, select the

manufacturer you want to attach to the
material. You can add or edit manufacturers
if necessary.

6.

Click OK.

Note: You can also access the materials library

through an elements Appearance property page.
Note that if you edit a material when editing an
element that has been inserted in your drawing,
the customized material is only available in the
current project when editing the properties of
inserted elements.

Displaying Manufacturer Logos in

the Catalog and Property Pages
If you have attached manufacturer information to
elements or materials, and that information
includes logos, you can choose to display the
logos in the catalog, on the property pages of
elements, and in the Materials dialog. The logo
appears above the preview of the element or
material.
To display manufacturer logos:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

Workspace tab.

Users Guide

395

57

Chapter 57 Manufacturers
3.

In the Tool Display area, enable the

Manufacturer Logos check box.

4.

Click OK.

Logo

Logo

396

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

A line style defines the pattern (linetype) and color of a line. Line styles are used by elements,
electrical wiring and dimension styles.
You can customize the line style and linetype libraries to suit your needs.
If you want to change the line style of electrical wiring that you have already inserted, see
Changing the Line Style of Wiring on page 146.
To change the dimension style of an inserted dimension, see Changing the Style of a Dimension
on page 298.

397

Chapter 58 Line Styles

Things You Should Know About

Editing Line Styles

Customizing the Line Styles

Library

A line style defines the pattern, color and

thickness of a line. Line styles are used by
electrical wiring and dimension styles. They are
also used by elements, but you cannot change an
elements line style definition.

The line styles library contains a wide selection of

line styles that you can apply to electrical wiring
and dimension styles.

When you add or edit a line style through the

Catalog Manager, the custom line style is saved
with the catalog, and is only available when
editing line styles in the catalog. If you add or edit
a line style when editing your drawing, however,
the customized line style is only available in the
current project when editing elements in the
drawing. The line styles library in the catalog
remains unchanged. This is because the line styles
library in the catalog is separate from the line
styles library in the current project.
The reason that there is a project-specific line
styles library is so that any line styles used in your
project are always saved with the project, making
it possible to share your project with others and
always maintain your customized line styles.
If you want line styles that you have customized
in your catalog to be available in your projectspecific line styles library, or vice versa, you can
use the Transfer tool to save the custom line styles
to the external line styles library file
(linestyles.klb), then import the custom line styles
from the library file into the other line styles
library.

In the line styles library, line styles are listed in

groups so you can organize and find them easily.
You can add, rename and delete groups as
needed. You can add new line styles to the
library, as well as edit and delete existing line
styles.
You can access the Line Styles library by editing
the properties of electrical wiring or a dimension
style, or through the Libraries menu in the
Catalog Manager.
To access the line styles library in the Catalog
Manager:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries >

Line Styles.

To access the line styles library through

inserted electrical wiring:

398

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Select the wiring in your drawing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. The

Customizing the Line Styles Library

Line Styles dialog appears. This is your
project-specific line styles library.

2.

Select Line Style > Add Line Style, or rightclick in the Line Style window and select Add
Line Style.

3.

In the Line Style Name edit box, type a

name for the new line style.

4.

From the Linetype drop box, select a

linetype for the line style, or click the
Browse button next to the Linetype
drop box to access the Linetypes dialog. If
you want to add or edit a linetype, see
Customizing the Linetypes Library on
page 401.

5.

Click the Color box in the Edit Line Styles

dialog, then select the line color you want
from the Color dialog.

6.

Click OK. The line style is added to the

library.

To access the line styles library by editing a

dimension style:
1.

Select Settings > Dimension Styles. Or,

select a dimension in your drawing, then
right-click and select Properties.

2.

In the Dimension Styles dialog, click Edit.

3.

In the Edit Dimension Styles dialog, select

the Line Styles tab. This is your projectspecific line styles library.

To add a group to the line styles library:

1.

Select Line Style > Add Group, or right-click

in the Group window and select Add Group.

2.

Type a name for the group, then press

ENTER.

To rename a group in the line styles library:

1.

Select the group in the Group window.

2.

Select Line Style > Rename Group, or rightclick and select Rename Group.

3.

Type the new name, then press ENTER.

To delete a group from the line styles library:

1.

Select the group in the Group window.

2.

Select Line Style > Delete Group, or rightclick and select Delete Group.

Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains line

styles.
To add a new line style to the line styles
library:
1.

To edit a line style in the line styles library:

1.

Select the line style in the Line Style window.

In the Group window, select or create the

group you want to add the line style to.

Users Guide

399

58

Chapter 58 Line Styles

2.

3.

Select Line Style > Edit Line Style, or rightclick and select Edit Line Style.

To select a different linetype, make the

desired selection from the Linetype
drop box, or click the Browse button
next to the Linetype drop box to access the
Linetypes dialog. If you want to add or edit
a linetype, see Customizing the Linetypes
Library on page 401.

4.

To select a different color for the line style,

click the Color box in the Edit Line Styles
dialog, then select the line color you want
from the Color dialog.

5.

Click OK.

To delete a line style from the line styles

library:
1.

Select the line style in the Line Style window.

2.

Select Line Style > Delete Line Style, or

right-click and select Delete Line Style.
If the line style is being used by an element, it
cannot be deleted. In this case, the following
dialog appears:

400

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

If you want to see a list of which elements are

using the line style, click Yes. A dialog
similar to the following appears:

When you are finished viewing the element

list, click OK to return to the Line Styles
dialog.

Saving Line Styles to a Line Styles

Library File
If you have added or edited line styles in either
the catalog line styles library or project-specific
line styles library, you can save the custom line
styles to the external line styles library file
(linestyles.klb). You can then import the
customized line styles from the library file into
any line styles library, whether that be the catalog
line styles library or project-specific line styles
library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle
between libraries.
You can save line styles to the default line styles
library, or create a new library to save them in.
To save customized line styles to the line
styles library file:
1.

In the Line Styles dialog, select

File > Transfer.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the linestyles.klb file

(or whatever file you want to save to), then
click Open.

Importing Line Styles from a Line Styles Library File

Tip: You can create a new library file if you
want by entering a name in the File name
edit box.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the linestyles.klb file

(or whatever file you want to import line
styles from), then click Open.

3.

In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select

the line style you want to save, then click
Export Item. To export the entire list, just
click Export All. The library file is updated.

3.

4.

Click OK.

In the right pane of the Transfer dialog,

select the custom line style you want to
import, then click Import Item. Or, to import
the entire list, just click Import All. The list in
the left pane is updated.

4.

Click OK.

If you want to import the custom line styles into

your catalog line styles library or the projectspecific line styles library, see the next topic,
Importing Line Styles from a Line Styles Library File.

Importing Line Styles from a Line

Styles Library File

Customizing the Linetypes Library

The linetypes library contains a list of
pre-defined linetypes that you can apply to line
styles. You can add or edit linetypes to suit your
needs.

If you have saved customized line styles to the

line styles library file, you can import the line
styles into your catalog line styles library or any
project-specific line styles library.
To import line styles from a line styles library
file:
1.

In the Line Styles dialog, select

File > Transfer.

You can access the Linetypes library while adding

or editing a line style, or through the Libraries
menu in the Catalog Manager.

Users Guide

401

58

Chapter 58 Line Styles

To access the linetypes library while editing a
line style:
1.

In the Edit Line Styles dialog, click the

Browse button next to the Linetype drop
box.

To add a linetype to the list:

1.

Click the Add Item button below the

linetypes list, or right-click in the left
pane and select Add Item. A new entry
is added to the list.

2.

Type a name for the linetype and press

ENTER.

3.

In the Definition edit box, specify the

linetypes definition.

4.

Once youve defined the linetype, click OK.

To delete a linetype from the list:

Click to access
the Linetypes
dialog

Note: If you are editing a line style in your

drawing, it will be saved in the current drawing
only. If you are editing a line style in the catalog,
it will be saved in the catalog only.
To access the linetypes library from the
Catalog Manager:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries >

Linetypes. The Linetypes dialog appears.

To edit a linetype:
1.

Select the linetype in the list.

2.

In the Definition edit box, edit the linetypes

definition. Lines are defined by a series of
distances separated by commas. Each
number represents the length of either a line
segment or space. Positive numbers create a
line segment of the specified length.
Negative numbers create a space of the
specified length. For example, a dashed line
may have a definition like 1/4, -1/4.

3.

Once youve edited the linetype, click OK.

402

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Select the linetype in the list.

2.

Right-click and select Delete, or click

the Delete button below the linetypes
list.

Note: You cannot delete the existing,

pre-defined linetypes because they are being used
by line styles.

, 1
When you insert text or dimensions in your drawing, they are always based on a style that
determines how they look.
Text and dimension styles are stored in libraries. You can edit and create text and dimension
styles to suit your needs.
If you want to change the style of text that you have inserted in your drawing, see Changing the
Style of Text on page 291. If you want to change the style of a dimension in your drawing, see
Changing the Style of a Dimension on page 298.

403

Chapter 59 Text & Dimension Styles

Things You Should Know About

Editing Text Styles

When you add or edit a text style through the

Catalog Manager, the custom text style is saved
with the catalog, and is only available when
editing text styles in the catalog. If you add or edit
a text style when editing text in your drawing (or
an element that uses text), however, the
customized text style is only available in the
current project when editing text styles in your
drawing. The text styles library in the catalog
remains unchanged. This is because the text styles
library in the catalog is separate from the text
styles library in the current project.

Customizing the Text Styles

Library
The text styles library contains a number of predefined text styles that you can apply to text. You
can edit the existing text styles, or create your
own.

The reason that there is a project-specific text

styles library is so that any text styles used in your
project are always saved with the project, making
it possible to share your project with others and
always maintain your customized text styles.
If you want text styles that you have customized
in your catalog to be available in your projectspecific text styles library, or vice versa, you can
use the Transfer tool to save the custom text styles
to the external text styles library file
(Textstyles.tsl), then import the custom text styles
from the library file into the other text styles
library.

When you edit the text styles library in your

catalog, the text styles are saved with your
catalog. If you edit text styles while editing
inserted text, or an element that uses text, the text
styles are saved in the current drawing only.

Tip: You can save text styles in your template

drawing by opening the template drawing, then
selecting Settings > Text Styles and creating
your custom text style in the Text Styles dialog.
The custom text styles will then be available in the
project-specific text styles libraries of future
projects that you base on the template drawing.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries >

Text Styles. The Text Styles dialog appears.

To access the text styles library in the Catalog

Manager:

To access the text styles library through

inserted text:
1.

Select the text in your drawing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Text dialog, click the Text Style

button. The Text Styles dialog appears. This
is your project-specific text styles library.

To access the text styles library through the

Settings menu:
1.

404

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Select Settings > Text Styles. This is your

project-specific text styles library.

Saving Customized Text Styles to the Text Styles Library File

To add a text style to the library:
1.

2.
3.

Right-click in the text style window

and select Add Item. Or, click the Add
Item button below the text style
window. A new entry is added to the list.
Type a name for the text style and press
ENTER.
In the Properties area, define the text style.
Font. A set of text characters in a specific
style and size.
Font Style. The style of text. Choices can
include Regular, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic.
Text Height. The size of text.
Text Color. The color of text. Click the
swatch to access the Color dialog and select a
color.

4.

Click OK.

Saving Customized Text Styles to

the Text Styles Library File
If you have added or edited text styles in either
the catalog text styles library or project-specific
text styles library, you can save the custom text
styles to the external text styles library file
(Textstyles.tsl). You can then import the
customized text styles from the library file into
any text styles library, whether that be the catalog
text styles library or project-specific text styles
library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle
between libraries.
You can save text styles to the default text styles
library file, or create a new library to save them
in.
To save customized text styles to the text
styles library file:
1.

In the Text Styles dialog, click the Transfer

button.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the Textstyles.tsl

file (or whatever file you want to save to),
then click Open.

To edit a text style in the library:

1.
2.

Select the text style in the list.

Edit the properties in the Properties area.
Font. A set of text characters in a specific
style and size.

Tip: You can create a new library file if you

want by entering a name in the File name
edit box.

Font Style. The style of text. Choices can

include Regular, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic.
Text Height. The size of text.
Text Color. The color of text. Click the
swatch to access the Color dialog and select a
color.
3.

Click OK.

Note: Clicking Reset will return a text style to the

following default values: Arial, Regular, 4", Black.
To delete a text style from the library:
1.

Select the text style in the list.

2.

Right-click and select Delete, or click

the Delete button below the text styles
window.

3.

In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select

the text style you want to save, then click
Export Item. To export the entire list, just
click Export All. The library file is updated.

4.

Click OK.

If you want to import the custom text styles into

your catalog text styles library or the current

Users Guide

405

59

Chapter 59 Text & Dimension Styles

drawing, see the next topic, Importing Text Styles
from a Text Styles Library File.

Importing Text Styles from a Text

Styles Library File
If you have saved customized text styles to the
text styles library file, you can import the text
styles into your catalog text styles library or any
project-specific text styles library.
To import text styles from a text styles library
file:
1.

In the Text Styles dialog, click Transfer.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the Textstyles.tsl

file (or whatever file you want to import text
styles from), then click Open.

the dimension styles library in the catalog is

separate from the dimension styles library in the
current project.
The reason that there is a project-specific
dimension styles library is so that any dimension
styles used in your project are always saved with
the project, making it possible to share your
project with others and always maintain your
customized dimension styles.
If you want dimension styles that you have
customized in your catalog to be available in your
project-specific dimension styles library, or vice
versa, you can use the Transfer tool to save the
custom dimension styles to the external
dimension styles library file (Dimstyles.dlb), then
import the custom dimension styles from the
library file into the other dimension styles library.
Tip: You can save dimension styles in your
template drawing by opening the template
drawing, then selecting Settings > Dimension
Styles and creating your custom dimension style
in the Dimension Styles dialog. The custom
dimension styles will then be available in the
project-specific dimension styles libraries of
future projects that you base on the template
drawing.

3.

4.

In the right pane of the Transfer dialog,

select the custom text style you want to
import, then click Import Item. Or, to import
the entire list, just click Import All. The list in
the left pane is updated.
Click OK.

Customizing the Dimension Styles

Library
The dimension styles library contains one predefined dimension style called Standard. This is
the default dimension style used when you insert
dimensions in your drawing. You can add and
edit dimension styles to suit your needs.

Things You Should Know About

Editing Dimension Styles

When you add or edit a dimension style through

the Catalog Manager, the custom dimension style
is saved with the catalog, and is only available
when editing dimension styles in the catalog. If
you add or edit a dimension style when editing
dimensions in your drawing, however, the
customized dimension style is only available in
the current project when editing dimension styles
in your drawing. The dimension styles library in
the catalog remains unchanged. This is because

406

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

When you edit the dimension styles library in

your catalog, the dimension styles are saved with

Dimension Style Properties

your catalog. If you edit dimension styles while
editing inserted dimensions, the dimension styles
are saved in the current drawing only.
To access the dimension styles library in the
Catalog Manager:
1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries >

Dimension Styles. The Dimension Styles
dialog appears.

To access the dimension styles library

through inserted dimensions:
1.

Select the dimension in your drawing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. The
Dimension Styles dialog appears. This is
your project-specific dimension styles library.

To access the dimension styles library

through the Settings menu:
1.

4.

Click OK.

To delete a dimension style from the library:

1.

Select the dimension style in the list.

2.

Right-click and select Delete, or click

the Delete button below the dimension
styles window.

Dimension Style Properties

You can control a dimensions line, arrow and text
style properties.

Anatomy of a Dimension
Dimension
Line

Text
Arrow,
Tick or
Dot

Extension
Line

Lines and Arrows

Select Settings > Dimension Styles. This is

your project-specific dimension styles library.

To add a new dimension style to the list:

1.

Right-click in the dimension style

window and select Add Item. Or, click
the Add Item button below the
dimension style window. A new entry is
added to the list.

2.

Type a name for the dimension style and

press ENTER.

3.

Click the Edit button, then define the

dimension style. See Dimension Style
Properties on page 407.

4.

Click OK.

To edit a dimension style:

1.

Select the dimension style in the list.

2.

Click Edit.

3.

Define the dimension in the Edit Dimension

Styles dialog. See Dimension Style
Properties on page 407.

Arrow Type
You can specify an arrow type for dimensions and
leaders (leaders are used with the Text with
Leader tool). Choose an arrow, dot or tick for your
arrow type.
The properties below the Arrow Type selection
window (Extension Offset, Dimension Offset, etc.)
vary depending on the arrow type selected. As
you make different selections, the dimension
updates in the preview window.

Users Guide

407

59

Chapter 59 Text & Dimension Styles

Dimension Text

Distance: Distance between the text and the

dimension line when placing text above the
dimension line.

Horizontal Text Position

This is the position of the dimension text relative
to the ends of the dimension line.
Centered: Centers the text inside the dimension
line.
Distance from first end: Places the text a specific
distance from the first end of the dimension.
Specify the distance in the Distance edit box.

Units
The units (e.g. feet and inches) and precision used
to display the dimension value.
Override system units: Uses the unit of measure
specified in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog
instead of the unit of measure specified in the
program settings.
Type: Choose from Feet-Inches, Millimeters,
Centimeters, Meters or Inches.

Distance from the second end: Places the text a

specific distance from the second end of the
dimension. Specify the distance in the Distance
edit box.

Line Styles
You can select a different line style for the
dimension line, extension lines and arrows. A line
style determines the pattern, color and weight of
a line.

Precision: For Feet-Inches, the choices are whole

units (0, 1/2, 1/4 and so on). For metric units, the
choices are number of decimal places you can use.

Text Style
Refers to the font, font style, text height and color
of the dimension text. Click Text Style to select a
style.

Vertical Text Position

This is the vertical position of the dimension text
relative to the dimension line.
Vertically Centered: Text is placed inside the
dimension line.
Horizontal Text: Forces the dimension text to
always be horizontal, regardless of the dimension
line's angle.
Above Dimension Line: Text is placed above the
dimension line.

408

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

To assign a different line style to a dimension

component, select the component in the left pane,
then click Select in the center pane to access the
Line Styles dialog.
For information about creating custom line styles,
see the Line Styles chapter on page 397.

Saving Customized Dimension Styles to the Dimension Styles Library File

Saving Customized Dimension

Styles to the Dimension Styles
Library File
If you have added or edited dimension styles in
either the catalog dimension styles library or
project-specific dimension styles library, you can
save the custom dimension styles to the external
dimension styles library file (Dimstyles.dlb). You
can then import the customized dimension styles
from the library file into any dimension styles
library, whether that be the catalog dimension
styles library or project-specific dimension styles
library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle
between libraries.
You can save dimension styles to the default
dimension styles library file, or create a new
library to save them in.
To save dimension styles to the dimension
styles library file:
1.

In the Dimension Styles dialog, click the

Transfer button.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the Dimstyles.dlb

file (or whatever file you want to save to),
then click Open.

If you want to import the custom dimension

styles into your catalog dimension styles library
or the project-specific dimension styles library,
see the next topic, Importing Dimension Styles from
a Dimension Styles Library File.

Importing Dimension Styles from

Dimension Styles Library File
If you have saved customized dimension styles to
the dimension styles library file, you can import
the dimension styles into your catalog dimension
styles library or any project-specific dimension
styles library.
To import dimension styles from a dimension
styles library file:
1.

In the Dimension Styles dialog, click

Transfer.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the Dimstyles.dlb

file (or whatever file you want to import
dimension styles from), then click Open.

3.

In the right pane of the Transfer dialog,

select the custom dimension style you want
to import, then click Import Item. Or, to
import the entire list, just click Import All.
The list in the left pane is updated.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: You can create a new library file if you

want by entering a name in the File name
edit box.

3.

In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select

the dimension style you want to save, then
click Export Item. To export the entire list,
just click Export All. The library file is
updated.

4.

Click OK.
Users Guide

409

59

&
Light sources are basically light bulbs. Light sources are contained in a light source library which
is accessible through the Catalog Manager as well as the Lights property page of light fixtures.
You can edit existing light sources as well as import your own light source files into the library.
If you want to change a light fixtures light source, see Editing a Light Fixtures Light Source on
page 139.

411

Chapter 60 Light Sources

Things You Should Know About

Editing Light Sources

Customizing the Light Source

Library

Light sources are basically light bulbs. They are

applied to light fixtures. When you add or edit a
light source through the Catalog Manager, the
custom light source is saved with the catalog, and
is only available when editing light sources in the
catalog. If you add or edit a light source when
editing a light fixture that has been inserted in
your drawing, however, the customized light
source is only available in the current project
when editing the properties of inserted light
fixtures. The light source library in the catalog
remains unchanged. This is because the light
source library in the catalog is separate from the
light source library in the current drawing.

The light source library contains an assortment of

light sources, mainly fluorescent and
incandescent light bulbs, that can be applied to
lighting fixtures.

The reason that there is a project-specific light

source library is so that any light sources used in
your project are always saved with the project,
making it possible to share your project with
others and always maintain your customized
light sources.
If you want light sources that you have
customized in your catalog to be available in your
project-specific light source library, or vice versa,
you can use the Transfer tool to save the custom
light sources to the external light source library
file (Lights.llb), then import the custom light
source from the library file into the other light
source library.

You can customize the light source library by

adding and editing light sources. Most
manufacturers of lighting equipment provide
downloadable .IES photometric data files free of
charge on their web sites for use in lighting
calculations. Once youve added a light source to
your library, you can edit its intensity and color if
you want.
Light sources are listed in groups so you can
organize and find them easily. You can create,
rename and delete groups.
When you edit the light source library in your
catalog, the light sources are saved with your
catalog. If you edit the light source library while
editing an element, the light sources are saved in
the current drawing only.
To access the light source library in the
Catalog Manager:

412

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager,

or right-click an element in the catalog panel
and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries >

Light Sources. The Light Sources dialog
appears.

Saving Customized Light Sources to the Light Source Library File

To access the light source library through an
inserted light fixture:
1.

Select the light fixture.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select

Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Lights dialog, select the Lights tab.

4.

Click Add or Edit to access the light source

library.

7.

To apply a different IES file to a light source:

1.

Select the light source in the list.

2.

Click the Load IES File button.

3.

Locate and select the *.ies file and click Open.

The filename is displayed in the right pane of
the Light Sources dialog.

To add a group to the light source library:

1.

2.

Right-click an existing group and select

Add Group, or click the Add Group
button below the light source window.
An entry is added to the list.

If you want to change the color of the light,

click the Color edit box and make a selection
from the Color dialog.

To edit the intensity of a light source:

1.

Select the light source in the list.

2.

In the Scale edit box, specify how much you

want to scale the intensity in terms of a
percentage. For example, if the light source is
a 60 Watt bulb, a value of 50% would make
the bulb function like a 30 Watt bulb.

Type a name for the group, then press

ENTER.

To delete a group from the light source library:

1.

Select the group to delete.

To edit the color of a light source:

2.

Right-click and select Delete Group,

or click the Delete button below the
light source window.

1.

Select the light source in the list.

2.

Click the Color edit box.

3.

In the Color dialog, select the color you want,

then click OK.

Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains

light sources.
To add a light source to the list:
1.

Select the group you want to add the light

source to.

2.

Click the Add Item button below the

light source window, or right-click in
the light source window and select
Add Item. A new entry is added to the list.

3.

Type a name for the light source and press

ENTER.

4.

Click the Load IES File button.

5.

Locate and select the *.ies file and click Open.

The filename is displayed in the right pane of
the Light Sources dialog.

6.

If you want to change the intensity of the

light, specify the desired percentage in the
Scale edit box. For example, if the light
source is a 60 Watt bulb, a value of 50%
would make the bulb function like a 30 Watt
bulb.

To delete a light source from the library:

1.

Select the light source in the list.

2.

Right-click and select Delete, or click

the Delete button below the light
source window.

Saving Customized Light Sources

to the Light Source Library File
If you have added or edited light sources in either
the catalog light source library or project-specific
light source library, you can save the custom light
sources to the external light source library file
(Lights.llb). You can then import the customized
light sources from the library file into any light

Users Guide

413

60

Chapter 60 Light Sources

source library, whether that be the catalog light
source library or project-specific light source
library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle
between libraries.
You can save light sources to the default light
source library, or create a new library to save
them in.

To import light sources from a light source

library file:
1.

In the Light Sources dialog, click Transfer.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the Lights.llb file

(or whatever file you want to import light
sources from), then click Open.

3.

In the right pane of the Transfer dialog,

select the custom light source you want to
import, then click Import Item. Or, to import
the entire list, just click Import All. The list in
the left pane is updated.

4.

Click OK.

To save light sources to the light source

library file:
1.

In the Light Sources dialog, click Transfer.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the Lights.llb file

(or whatever file you want to save to), then
click Open.
Tip: You can create a new library file if you
want by entering a name in the File name
edit box.

Specifying the Location of the

Light Source Directory
3.

In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select

the light source you want to save, then click
Export Item. To export the entire list, just
click Export All. The library file is updated.

4.

Click OK.

If you want to import the custom light sources

into your catalog light source library or the
project-specific light source library, see the next
topic, Importing Light Sources from a Light Source
Library File.

Importing Light Sources from a

Light Source Library File
If you have saved customized light sources to the
light source library file, you can import the light
sources into your catalog light source library or
any project-specific light source library.

414

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

By default, light sources are located in the

programs Lights directory. If you move your
Lights directory to another location on your
system, you will need to specify the location of
the Lights directory so that light sources can be
accessed by the program.
To specify the location of your Textures
directory:
1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or

click the Program Settings button on
the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the

General tab.

3.

In the File Paths area, click on the Lights

Directory to select it.

4.

Click Modify.

Specifying the Location of the Light Source Directory

5.

In the Browse For Folder dialog, locate the

folder containing your light sources, then
click OK.

6.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Users Guide

415

60

0
This handy Glossary contains definitions of construction terms, abbreviations and technical terms
used in the program and in this Users Guide. Entries are listed in alphabetical order for your
convenience.

417

Glossary

Glossary
A
Alkaline Having a PH of more than 7.
Alt Code Alternate Code. An extra
identification code that is used to link an element
in the program's catalog to the databases of other
applications.
Ambient A general level of light that is
everywhere in the scene.
Angle Snap Makes elements move/rotate at
specific increments (angles).
Animation A movie. A series of images that,
when viewed in rapid succession, create the
illusion of movement through a scene.

Balustrade A railing consisting of balusters

(spindles) attached to a top rail. Used along stairs,
landings, porches, decks, etc. Also called a
banister.
Baseboard A board or moulding along the base
of a wall. Also called skirting.
Bay Window A window made up of three sash
units that project out from the wall. Usually
includes a roof structure.
Beam In a floor frame, structural member
supported by posts that acts to support the floor
joists.
Bi-Fold Doors Narrow doors that are hinged to
fold against each other and flat against the jamb.
Bird's Mouth The notch cut in the lower end of
a rafter to fit it to the top plate of a wall.

Antialiasing A method of improving image

quality by smoothing out jagged edges. This is
achieved by adjusting pixel positions or setting
pixel intensities so that there is a more gradual
transition between the color of a line and the
background color.

BLD BUILD file. The drawing file produced by

the program. The extension given to the
program's drawing files.

Array A method of copying an element into a

pattern of rows and/or columns.

Bow Window A type of bay window made up

of several window units set at slight angles to
form a curve.

Artifacts Fuzz or distortion in a graphic image

or sequence of video images. Large digital pixels
(blocks) and jerkiness in the video stream are
examples of artifacts.
Aspect Ratio The ratio of width to height.

BMP Bitmap. An image file whose bits are

referenced to pixels.

C
Casement Window A window having a sash
hinged on pins at the top and bottom corners of
one side. It opens outward by means of a crank.

Automatic Save Saves your drawing for you at

specified intervals without prompting.

Catalog Directory The directory containing the

Master Catalog and other catalogs that you have
created.

AVI Audio Video Interleaved. A common video

file format by Microsoft that can be used to record
animations.

Catalog Panel The window on the right side of

the screen that displays the contents of the current
catalog.

Awning Window A window having a sash

hinged on pins at the two top or bottom corners
of the frame. It opens outward.

Cathedral Ceiling A high, open, usually

slanting or pointed ceiling.

B
Backsplash A vertical surface designed to
protect the wall behind a stove or countertop.

418

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Ceiling Height The height of the underside of a

ceiling surface relative to the floor level.
Chair Rail A decorative moulding applied
horizontally to a wall inside a room at a height of

Glossary
about 3 feet. Used to prevent chairs from marring
the wall.
Collision Control An intelligent drawing aid
that prevents elements from being inserted where
they won't fit.
Color Bleed The degree to which different
colors blend where they meet.
Commander An editing window that appears
when certain functions are chosen. It provides
precise control over such things as distance and
direction.
Complexity The level of detail shown when
elements are displayed.
Compression The conversion of data into a
format that requires fewer bits, usually so that it
can be stored or transmitted more efficiently.
Cove Molding A molding with a concave face
used as trim.
Crawlspace The shallow area beneath a house
enclosed by the foundation walls.
Crown Molding A decorative molding along
the top of a wall.
Cut Line A standard 2D drafting symbol used
to represent a break in the drawing. It indicates
that the object continues in the same manner after
or between the break lines.

Drag and Drop Mode The default mode you are

in when you select an element for editing. You
can move and rotate elements with your mouse
when you are in Drag and Drop Mode.
Drawing Aids Tools that control the way your
cursor works and the way elements are inserted.
Drywall Gypsum, sometimes with additives,
made into paper-covered sheets for use an
interior wall or ceiling covering.
Duplicate Copies a selected element on the
same location.
Dutch Gable A combination of a hip and gable
roof. On either end, the lower segment is a hip
roof and the upper segment is a gable end. Also
known as a Dutch Hip Roof or a Full Return
Gable.
DXF Drawing Exchange Format. An ASCII or
binary file format of a CAD drawing.
E
Editor A software application capable of editing
text.
Element A specific type of element, such as a
door, having its own distinct properties (size,
appearance, etc.).
Elevation 1. The front, back and side views of a
building. 2. The height of an element above the
floor or terrain.

D
Daylight Saving Time Time usually one hour
ahead of standard time.

Emissive The amount of light given off by a

material. The more emissive a material is, the
more self-luminous it appears.

Diffuse The amount of color that is reflected

when an element is illuminated by a light.

Estimate A report containing a listing of

materials, quantities, unit costs, and total cost.

Division A construction division identification.

In North America, CSI divisions are used.
DLB File Dimension Style Library File.
Contains Dimension Styles.
Double Roof A type of hip roof in which the
slope to all four sides is broken into two slopes.
Both slopes have a pitch.
DPI Dots per inch. The measurement of
resolution for printers.

F
Face Slider Two or more doors that open by
sliding to the side in front or behind each other.
Also called bypass doors.
Fascia A flat wood or plywood strip nailed to
the overhanging ends of rafters.
Filter To exclude an element or location from
being displayed, quantified or selected.

Users Guide

419

Glossary
Fixed Window A window whose sash is
permanently fixed in the frame.

Highlite A pane of glass located at the top of a

window or door.

Floor Level The height of a floor (location)

above the ground (0).

Hinged Door Any type of door that swings

open.

Fold-Back Stairs Stairs that have two flights

separated by a landing and that make a complete
180-degree turn. Sometimes called Scissor Stairs.

Hip Roof A roof with four sloping sides (as

opposed to a Gable Roof, with two sloping sides).

Fold-Up Door A door made up of a number of

narrow panels that opens overhead by folding up
like an accordion.
Foundation The supporting portion of a
structure below the ground floor construction, or
below grade, including the footings.
Frame Rate The number of images displayed
per second. The video playback rate of an AVI
animation.
G
Gable Roof A roof with two sloping sides (as
opposed to a Hip Roof, with four sloping sides).
Girt Wall A wall built up of horizontal
structural members that are suspended between
vertical columns. Usually found in industrial
buildings.
Glass Slider A door having a wood or
aluminum frame fitted with one fixed glass panel
and one sliding glass panel. Often called a patio
door.
H
Hatching A pattern of lines used to represent a
material, such as wood or concrete. Hatching is
only visible in Patterned display mode.
Head Height The height at which the tops of
openings, doors and windows are located relative
to the floor level.
Header The structural members placed
horizontally over doors, windows and wall
openings.
Hidden Line A view mode where hidden lines
are removed from the view, leaving only surfaces
displayed.

420

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

HLB File Pattern Library File. Contains

hatching patterns.
Hopper Window A window in which the sash is
hinged on pins at the two bottom corners, and
which opens inward.
Hung Window A window having two sashes,
and whose lower sash slides up and over the
fixed, upper sash on the inside.
Hyperlinks Jumps (links) to external document
files or Web addresses.
I
IES File Name derived from Illuminating
Engineering Society. A photometric data file
(Lights file) containing Luminaire definition and
information.
Interactive Lighting Real-time lighting effects
displayed while you are inserting light fixtures in
Rendered or Rendered Outline mode.
Interface Program components that you see on
the screen and use to perform tasks.
J
Jamb The wood or metal pieces that form the
sides and top of a door or window enclosure.
Joist One of a parallel set of structural members
used to support floor and ceiling loads. They, in
turn, are supported by beams, girders, or bearing
walls.
K
KLB File Line Styles Library File.
L
Landing A platform between flights of stairs or
at the termination of a flight of stairs.

Glossary
L-Winder Stairs Stairs that ascend in an Lshape and that use wedge-shaped treads called
winders to change direction.

Mullion Thin horizontal and vertical members

that divide the individual panes of glass in a
window.

Line Styles Settings that determine the color,

pattern and thickness of a line.

N
Newel The main post to which the end of a
railing is attached.

Linetype The pattern of a line, such as dashed

or solid.
Lineweight The thickness (or heaviness) of a
line.
Lite A pane of glass in a window or door.
LLB File Lights Library File.
Locations Drawing layers containing
definitions for wall height, floor level, head
height and ceiling level.
Louvre Window A small, slatted window
placed high in a gable end. Used mostly for
ventilation.
Lumen A Lumen is equal to one foot-candle
(the amount of light one candle generates one foot
away) falling on one SQUARE foot of area.
Luminaire The international term for a piece of
lighting equipment. The complete unit including
lamp, fixture, and other parts.
M
Magnetic North Magnetic North is the
magnetic north pole. It is the focus of the planet's
magnetic field and is the point magnetic
compasses point toward.
Mansard Roof A type of hip roof in which the
slope to all four sides is broken into two slopes.
The upper slope is nearly or completely flat, while
the lower slope has a sharp pitch. Also known as
a French gable roof.
Masonry Brick, stone, concrete or concrete
block.
MLB File Materials Library File.
Mono Footing A pad of masonry, usually
concrete, that is wider than the column it
supports. Used to transfer the load of the column.

NLB File Linetype Library File.

Nosing The portion of a stair tread that projects
over the riser. Also, the projecting edge of a
countertop.
O
Open GL A 3D graphics Application
Programming Interface (API) that includes
routines for shading, texture mapping, texture
filtering, anti-aliasing, lighting, geometry
transformations, etc.
Opening A cutout in a wall.
Ortho A Drawing Aid that restricts drawing to
straight up, down, left, or right.
Orthogonal View An alternate name for
Parallel View in which all drawing lines are
parallel and the effect of distance is eliminated.
Contrasts with Perspective View.
Overhang The part of the roof that extends over
the side wall. Also, the distance from the side wall
to the fascia.
P
Pan A control that allows you to move the onscreen view by dragging up, down, left, or right.
Percent (%) Below Horizon The percentage
that you want the background to appear below
ground level (absolute zero).
Perspective View A 3D view in which the scale
of an element decreases according to its distance
from the viewer. Drawing lines converge to a
vanishing point. Perspective view represents the
way an element would appear to the human eye.
Photometric Data File A file that allows you to
define complex light distributions based on
physical lamp properties. When loading a
photometric file, a photometric web is
Users Guide

421

Glossary
constructed that defines the intensity of light for
any direction from a light source.
Pixel A word invented by combining the two
words picture and element. The smallest unit
of color on a computer display. Size varies by
resolution.
Pixel Search Distance The Pixel Search
Distance determines how close your cursor
(which is attached to an element you are
inserting) needs to be to an existing element
before Object Snap occurs.
Plan View A flat, 2D view from above.

Rendered Mode A display mode where solid

colors and textures are applied to surfaces,
creating a realistic 3D effect.
Rendered Outline Mode A display mode
where solid colors and textures are applied to
elements, and surfaces are outlined with a black
line for high definition.
Retaining Wall A wall constructed to contain a
lateral force, such as a bank of dirt.
Riser The vertical board placed between the
treads of a staircase.

Plate (Top Plate) The top member of a framed

wall upon which the rafters and ceiling joists rest.

Roller Door A door made of hinged, horizontal

steel or wood panels that move on rollers in
overhead and side tracks.

Pocket Door A door that rolls on an overhead

track into a frame or pocket hidden in the wall.

Rough Opening The opening created in a wall

to receive a door or window frame.

Project Directory The location of the default

directory in which projects are stored.

S
Saddle A small, double-sloping roof built
behind upper-story walls or the back side of a
chimney to divert water around the wall or
chimney.

Project Estimate A report containing a listing

of materials, quantities, unit costs, and total cost.
Q
Quantity Report A list of the type and quantity
of materials in your model. Also known as a
Materials List or Bill of Materials.
R
Rafter Structural members that make up the
framing for a roof and roof overhang, and that
support the sheathing and roofing materials.
Rake To incline from the perpendicular.
Raster Image An image with its display mode
set to Rendered, Rendered Outline, Patterned,
Radiosity or Radiosity Mesh.
Ray Trace Render. The process of calculating a
light rays reflection, refraction, or absorption
whenever it intersects an element in a scene. The
result is a photo realistic display including light,
shadow and reflection.
Render To display a 3D model with light,
shadows and reflection for a photorealistic effect.

422

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Sash A frame that holds one or more panes of

glass and that is set into the window frame.
Seat Cut The horizontal cut that is made when
cutting a bird's mouth in a rafter.
Shininess The ability of a texture to reflect
light.
Sill A member located at the lower side of a
rough or finished opening, as a window sill.
Slab Concrete pavement, i.e. driveways,
garages, and basement floors.
Snap Angle The increment angle your cursor
will snap at (if Angle Snap is enabled).
Soffit The area below the eave and overhang.
The underside where the roof overhangs the
walls.
Specular Reflection that creates highlights on
materials, making them appear shiny.

Glossary
Split L-Shaped Stairs Stairs that ascend in an
L-shaped direction and whose landing is split on
a diagonal to make the change in direction.
Spreadsheet A table of values arranged in
rows and columns.
Status Bar The bar below the drawing area that
contains the Help message for the current state or
tool. Also contains drawing aid buttons.
Stringer The inclined side of a stair that
supports the treads and risers.
Strip Footings A flat, masonry section, usually
concrete, that is wider than the wall it supports.
Used to transfer the vertical load of the wall.
Studs Members inserted vertically in a wall
frame.
Suspended Ceiling A grid of T-shaped bars
hung on wires from overhead support framing,
into which removable panels are inserted to form
a finished ceiling that allows easy access to the
area above it. Typically found in office buildings
and basements.
T
Template A set of pre-defined properties that
determines the setup and outcome of something
(like a report).
Temporary Directory The default directory in
which temporary files generated by the program
are saved.
Terrain A piece of land.
Tile Height The height of one tile in a texture
pattern. The program generates large images by
tiling texture bitmaps horizontally and
vertically.
Tilt Door A door consisting of a single leaf that
opens overhead by tilting up (e.g. Tilt Garage
Door).
Toe Space A recessed area between the bottom
of a cabinet and the floor that allows you to stand
close to the cabinet. Also called a toe kick.
Transom A member between a door or window
and a sidelite or highlite frame.

Transparency The degree to which a texture

can be penetrated by light.
Tray Ceiling A ceiling constructed with the
sides angling at approximately 45 or curving to
another flat ceiling.
Tread The horizontal part of a stair that is
stepped on.
True North True North is the geographic North
Pole. It is located at 90 degrees North latitude and
all lines of longitude converge at the pole.
Truss A variety of members made up into a
series of triangles. Used for constructing roofs.
TSL File Text Style Library File
U
U-Winder Stairs Stairs that ascend in a Ushaped direction.
V
Velocity Quickness of motion. The distance
covered per second.
Video Compression The conversion of data
into a format that requires fewer bits, usually so
that it can be stored or transmitted more
efficiently.
View Filter A dialog used for displaying and
hiding elements and/or locations, and controlling
the selectability of elements.
Vent Window A window made up of two or
more segments with one segment acting as a vent.
VRML Virtual Reality Modeling Language. The
open standard for virtual reality on the Internet.
W
Winder One of the wedge-shaped treads that
make up a winding or spiral staircase.
Windowing A selection method where you click
and drag a rectangle, from left to right, around
elements you want to select.
Wireframe View The default 3D view where all
lines making up elements are displayed. It allows
you to see through elements.

Users Guide

423

Glossary
WRL File WORLD file. Capable of being
viewed in VRML viewers.
X
X Axis One of the three drawing axes. An X
coordinate specifies a horizontal distance.
Y
Y Axis One of the three drawing axes. A Y
coordinate specifies a vertical distance.
Z
Z Axis One of the three drawing axes. The Z
coordinate indicates either elevation or depth.
Z Buffer A block of memory used to store the Zaxis value of a pixel on the screen. Higher depth
values improve detail of 3D display but may slow
the system.
Zoom Realtime Magnifies or shrinks the view
as you click and drag with your mouse.
Zoom to Fit Zooms the drawing to the extents
of the drawing area, creating a maximized view
of your entire design.
Zoom Window Magnifies an area of your
drawing that you select by windowing.

424

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

"

When you want to know where to find something in the catalog, this is the place to look. The
Catalog Index contains a list of elements everything from air hockey tables to water heaters
and tells you what tool to select to access each one, and what group to select in the catalog. Items
are listed in alphabetical order for your convenience.

425

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Air Hockey Table

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Air Returns

Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements

Ventilation

Aquariums

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Aquariums

Arbors

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Arbors and Trellis

Area Rugs

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Area Rugs

Armchairs

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Armoire

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Arrows, north

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

North Arrows

Badminton Courts

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Sports

Barbecues

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Outdoor Cooking and

Heating

Bark

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Barstools

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Basinet

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Basketball Nets and

Courts

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Sports

Bathroom Vanities

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Bathroom Vanities

Bathtubs

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Tubs and Showers

Beds

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Beer Bottle

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Benches, exercise

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Exercise

426

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Benches, exterior

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Benches and Storage

Benches, interior

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Bicycle, stationary

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Exercise

Bidets

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Toilets and Bidets

Billiards Tables

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Bird Baths, Feeders

& Houses

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Blender

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Blinds

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Window Treatments

Books

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Decorative

Bookshelves

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture
Office Furniture

Borders, garden

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Built-in Ovens

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Cabinets, base

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Single Door Base Cabinets

Double Door Base Cabinets
Base Drawer Units
Base Corner Cabinets
Base Island Cabinets
Bathroom Vanities

Cabinets, upper

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Upper Corner Cabinets

Upper Cabinets
Upper Island Cabinets

Cable Outlets

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Outlets

Cable Service Box

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Electrical/Metering

Candle Sticks

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Decorative

Users Guide

427

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Card Table

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Cars

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Other Outdoor Items

CD Stands

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Ceiling Fans

Insert > Interiors > Interior Lighting

Ceiling Lights

Central Vac

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Cleaning

Chairs, living room

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Chairs, patio

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Chairs

Chairs, recroom

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Change Screen

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Change Table

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Chests

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Chimney

Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements

Ventilation

Clocks

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Clocks

Closet Rods/
Shelves

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Coffee Tables

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Columns,
decorative

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Compost Box

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Disposal

Computer

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Computer Components

Concrete Edging

Insert > Landscape > Edging

Rail Edging

428

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Concrete fills

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Cooktops

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Corner Accents

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Cribs

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Cubicals

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Office Furniture

Cups

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen
Accessories

Curtains

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Window Treatments

Dart Board

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Deck Box

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Benches and Storage

Desks

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Office Furniture

Dining Sets

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Dining Room/Kitchen
Furniture

Dishes

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen
Accessories

Dishwasher

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Doghouses

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

Door mats

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Decorative

Down Spout

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Exterior Plumbing Fixtures

Drapes

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Window Treatments

Dressers

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Dry Bars

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Users Guide

429

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Dryers

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Laundry Appliances

Dumpsters

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Disposal

DVD Player

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Televisions

Edging

Insert > Landscape > Edging

Plastic Edging
Post Edging
Rail Edging

Electrical Meters
and Junction Boxes

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Electrical/Metering

End Tables

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Entertainment Units

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Exercise Benches

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Exercise

Faucets

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Faucets/Fixtures

Fax Machine

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Communications

Filing Cabinets

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Office Furniture

Fire Hydrant

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Other Outdoor Items

Fireplaces, indoor

Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements

Heating

Fireplaces, outdoor

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Outdoor Cooking and

Heating

Flat Exercise Bench

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Exercise

Floor Registers

Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements

Ventilation

Flower Pots, indoor

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Decorative

Foosball Table

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Fountains

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Decorative Accessories

430

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Furnace

Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements

Heating

Futon

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Garages, detached

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

Garbage Bins,
exterior

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Disposal

Garbage Bins,
interior

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen
Accessories
Bathroom Accessories

Garbage Can

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Disposal

Garden Boxes

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Planters and Garden Boxes

Garden Hoses

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Other Outdoor Items

Gas Meter

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Electrical/Metering

Gazebos

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

Golf Hole

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Sports

Gravel

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Greenhouse

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

Gym, universal

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Exercise

Hammocks

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Swings and Hammocks

Hoses, garden

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Other Outdoor Items

Hot Tubs

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Pools & Hot Tubs

House Templates

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

House Templates

Hydro Meter

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Electrical/Metering

Users Guide

431

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Inclined Exercise
Bench

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Exercise

Islands, kitchen

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Base Island Cabinets

Upper Island Cabinets

Junction Boxes

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Electrical/Metering

Jungle Gyms

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Kitchen Tables

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Dining Room/Kitchen
Furniture

Knife Sets

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen
Accessories

Lamps

Insert > Interiors > Interior Lighting

Lamps

Lawn Edging

Insert > Landscape > Edging

Plastic Edging

Light Switches

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Switches

Lights

Insert > Interiors > Interior Lighting

Ceiling Lights
Lamps
Wall Lights

Lights, outdoor

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Lighting

Ground Lighting
Light Posts

Lounge Chairs,
outdoor

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Chairs

Loveseats

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Mail Boxes

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Other Outdoor Items

Medicine Cabinet

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Bathroom Accessories

Merry-Go-Round

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Meters, utility

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Electrical/Metering

Microwaves

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Mirror, standing

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

432

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Mirrors, wall

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Decorative

Natural Gas Meter

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Electrical/Metering

Nightstands

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

North Arrows

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

North Arrows

Obelisks

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Arbors and Trellis

Office Tables

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Office Furniture

Ottoman

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Outlets

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Outlets

Ovens

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Pantry Cabinets

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Pantry Cabinets

Patio Furniture

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Tables
Chairs
Benches and Storage

Patio umbrellas

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Tables

Phone

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Communications

Phone Jacks

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Outlets

Photo Copier

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Communications

Pianos

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Picnic Tables

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Tables

Pictures

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Decorative

Pillows

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Decorative

Users Guide

433

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Ping Pong Table

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Planters

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Planters and Garden Boxes

Play Gyms & Play

Houses

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Ponds

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Pool Tables

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Pools

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Pools & Hot Tubs

Playground

Pot Racks

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Dining Room/Kitchen
Furniture

Pots & Pans

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen
Accessories

Printer

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Computer Components

Propane Heater

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Outdoor Cooking and

Heating

Range Hoods

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Ranges

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Recycling Box

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Disposal

Refrigerators

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Registers, floor

Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements

Ventilation

Rugs, area

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Area Rugs

Sand

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Sandbox

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Satellite Dishes

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Satellite Dishes

434

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Sconces

Insert > Interiors > Interior Lighting

Wall Lights

Screen, change

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Screened Rooms

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

See-Saw

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Sheds

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

Shelves, closet

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Shelving Units

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Office Furniture

Shower Curtain

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Bathroom Accessories

Showers

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Tubs and Showers

Shutters

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen
Accessories

Sinks

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Sinks

Smoke Detector

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Sensors and Controls

Snooker Table

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Sofas

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Soil

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Stair Machine

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Exercise

Stationary Bicycle

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Exercise

Sundials

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Swing Sets

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Users Guide

435

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Swings, bench

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Swings and Hammocks

Switches

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Switches

Tables, coffee

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Tables, end

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Tables, kitchen

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Dining Room/Kitchen
Furniture

Tables, office

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Office Furniture

Tables, patio

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Tables

Telephone

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Communications

Telephone Service
Box

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Electrical/Metering

Television Stands

Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Televisions

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Televisions

Tennis Courts

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Sports

Thermostats

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Sensors and Controls

Toaster

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Toilet Paper
Dispenser

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Bathroom Accessories

Toilets

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Toilets and Bidets

Towel Racks/Rings

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Bathroom Accessories

Track Lighting

Insert > Interiors > Interior Lighting

Ceiling Lights

Trampoline

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Sports

436

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Transformer Box

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Electrical/Metering

Trash Can

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Disposal

Trash Compactor

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Tread Mill

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Exercise

Trellis

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Arbors and Trellis

Umbrellas, patio

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Tables

Universal Gym

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Exercise

Valance

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Window Treatments

Vanities, bathroom

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Bathroom Vanities

Vases

Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories

Decorative

VCR

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Televisions

Volleyball Courts

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Washers

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Laundry Appliances

Water

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Water Heater

Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements

Heating

Water Meter

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Electrical/Metering

Water Well

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Other Outdoor Items

Weather Vanes

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Weightlifting
Benches

Insert > Interiors > Equipment

Exercise

Users Guide

437

Catalog Index

Catalog Index
Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Windchimes

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Windmill

Insert > Landscape > Exterior

Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Wood Edging

Insert > Landscape > Edging

Post Edging
Rail Edging

Wood Stove

Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements

Heating

438

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Index

1-2-3
2D % Open, 67
2D Designers View, 26
2D Drawing export, 342
2D Image export, 342
2D Percent Open, 220
2D Plan Preview, 375
2D Plan View, 26
2D plant representation, editing, 190
2D Viewing
in catalog panel, 375
in drawing area, 26
3D % Open, 67
3D Camera Views
changing camera height, 361
changing the display mode, 29
changing the target height, 361
changing the viewing field angle, 361
changing your viewpoint, 360
changing, 360
creating, 360
displaying, 27
flying around in, 362
moving the camera, 360
moving the target, 361
resetting the camera, 363
sliding in, 363
spinning the view, 363
walking around in, 362
3D Home Architect Online, 4
3D Model export, 342
3D Percent Open, 220
3D Studio files
exporting to, 342
importing, 337, 372
selecting to apply to an element, 374
3DS export, 342
3DS import, 337, 372

3DTrueView
about, 308
adjusting image brightness, 311
changing refresh rate during lighting calculations, 311
creating fog effect, 312
creating smoke effect, 312
rendering a view, 310
save location, 313
save name, 314
saving multiple renderings, 314
saving to file, 313
setting quality, 311
setting the viewpoint, 308
setting up the scene, 308
specifying image size, 314
turning daylight off, 311
using antialiasing, 312

A
Above Dimension Line, 299
Above-ground pools, 244
Accessories
applying different colors/finishes, 129
deleting, 130
editing properties, 129
inserting, 128, 252
lowering, 129
moving, 128
raising, 129
rotating, 128
Add City, 309
Add Control Point, 319
Add Group
catalog, 370
light source library, 413
line styles library, 399
materials library, 386

439

Index
Add Linestyle, 399
Add Location, 16
Add Material, 387
Add Sound Node, 320
Add Text with Leader, 291
Add Text, 290
Adjust Height
ramps, 92
stairs, 89
Adjust Height to Door, 68
Adjust Height to Window, 73
Adjust Width
highlite, 68, 73
landing, 90, 92
ramps, 92
stairs, 89
Adjusting 3, 311
Air conditioner, central, 154
Air returns, 154
Aligned Dimensions, 297
Alignment of text, 291
Alkaline, 418
Alt Code, 378
Angle Bearing Method, 184
Angle Format, site boundary, 184
Angle from Joists, 228
Angle Snap, 259
Angle, slope, 165
Angle, view, 360, 361
Angles, specifying, 268
Animals, 285
Animation
adding control points, 319
adding sounds, 320
changing speed, 321
compressing output file, 322
creating, 316
deleting path, 323
drawing a path, 316
drawing separate camera/target paths, 317
editing frame rate, 322
editing output file name, 321
editing output size, 322
editing path order, 318
editing save location, 321
elevating a control point, 320
exporting to *.avi file, 321
moving control points, 319
previewing, 318
ray tracing, 322

440

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

removing control points, 319

removing sounds, 320
repeating during preview, 318
reshaping path, 319
turning paths on/off, 323
Animation Paths On/Off, 323
Annotation
Dimensions, 293
Text with Leader, 291
Text, 290
Antialiasing, 3DTrueView, 312
Antialiasing, animation, 323
Appearance page, 377
Appearance properties, 377
Appearance, elements, 277, 377
Appliances
applying different colors/finishes, 125
deleting, 125
editing properties, 124
inserting, 124
lowering, 124
moving, 124
raising, 124
rotating, 124
Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions, 294
Aquariums, 128
Arbors, 252
Arc Direction (site boundary), 183
Arc Radius (site boundary), 183
Area/Perimeter Calculator, 263
Array, 275
Artifacts, eliminating, 350
Auto Dimension Settings
exterior, 294
interior, 296
Auto Exterior Dimensions
creating, 294
specifying settings, 294
Auto Interior Dimensions
adding, 295
specifying settings, 296
Auto Name, 372, 375, 376
Auto Save, 328
AutoCAD
exporting 2D plan to, 342
exporting 3D model to, 342
Auto-cut terrain around building, 160
Automatic name generation
editing the formula, 376
using, 375

Index
AVI file export, 321
Avoid saddle situations in next story, 101

B
Background color, drawing area, 350
Background, in 3D views, 368
Backsplash, 121
Badminton courts, 244
Balustrades, 93
Barstools, 128
Base Height, 267
Base Offset, column, 52
Baseboards, 61
Basement, drawing, 44
Basic property page, 376
Basketball courts, 244
Bathtubs, 150
Bearing text style, 184
Bearings, 182
Beds, 128
Beds, garden, 206
Behavior page, 380
Behavior, Photo Board, 284
Benches, 240
Berms/Trenches
creating, 161
deleting, 163
editing height, 162
editing peak shape, 162
moving, 162
stretching, 162
Bill of Materials, 302
Billboard behavior, 284
Billboards, 284
Billiards table, 128
Bird baths, 252
Bird feeders, 252
Bird houses, 252
Birds Mouth, 107
Bitmaps
importing for tracing, 336
using your own in materials, 389
Blank Project, 2
Blinds, 128
Bloom time, 194
BMP
exporting to, 342
importing for tracing, 336
using your own in materials, 389

Board Offset, 218, 221

Board Spacing, 218, 221
Board Style, 218, 221
Bookshelves, 128
Borders, garden, 252
Borders, wallpaper, 61
Bottom Rail Depth, 96
Bottom Rail Height, 96
Bottom Rail Style, 96
Bottom Rail Width, 96
Boundary line style, 184
Bowls, 128
Box planters, 252
Boxes, garden, 252
Breaking
edging, 211
fences, 217
footings, 51
retaining walls, 177
walls, 46, 60
Brick, 58, 177
Brightness, image, 311
Building Configuration, 12
Building elements, filtering from view, 34
Building Locations
adding, 16
current, 17
defining, 16
deleting, 16
dimming, 17
filtering from view, 35
making selectable/non-selectable, 38
Building lot, 180
Building tab, 6
Building Wizard
custom element configuration, 12
disabling automatic launch, 12
using, 10

C
Cabanas, 244
Cabinets
applying different finishes, 122
deleting, 122
editing properties, 120
inserting sinks into, 122
inserting, 120
lowering, 120
moving, 120

Users Guide

441

Index
raising, 120
rotating, 120
Cable service box, 132
Camera Height, changing, 361
Camera Views
changing camera height, 361
changing target height, 361
changing viewing field angle, 361
changing, 360
creating, 360
flying around in, 362
moving the target, 361
resetting the camera, 363
sliding in, 363
spinning the view, 363
walking around in, 362
Cameras
changing the height of, 361
looking through, 27
moving, 360
orbiting around targets, 362
placing new, 360
resetting, 363
turning on and off, 360
Carpet, 79
Cars, 252
Cartesian Coordinate System, 267, 268
Cascade Open Views, 355
Casing, 61
Catalog Index, 425
Catalog Manager, about, 370
Catalog Panel
about, 7
displaying/hiding, 349
moving, 349
resizing, 349
Catalog Properties, 383
Catalogs
adding a group to, 370
changing preview display, 375
closing, 383
creating copies of, 382
creating new, 381
deleting elements from, 383
deleting groups from, 371
editing elements, 371
importing elements into, 382
importing objects, 372
opening, 383
previewing images in, 375

442

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

renaming groups in, 371

saving edited elements from your drawing,
372
saving under different name, 382
saving, 381, 382
viewing properties of, 383
Categories
adding to catalogs, 370
deleting in catalogs, 371
renaming in catalogs, 371
Cathedral ceilings, 82
Ceiling fans, 138
Ceiling Height, 16
Ceiling lights, 138
Ceiling Openings
creating, 84
curving edges, 85
removing, 85
resizing, 84
Ceilings
about, 80
applying different materials to, 85
by Perimeter, 80
by Picking Points, 81
by Room, 81
cathedral, 82
curving openings in, 85
curving, 84
cutting openings in, 84
deleting, 86
displaying framing, 30
lowering, 84
moving, 83
raising, 84
raising/lowering, 84
removing openings from, 85
reshaping, 83
resizing openings, 84
resizing, 83
specifying framing, 85
suspending, 84
tray, 82
vaulted, 82
Center on wall
door, 66
opening, 75
window, 71
Centered text, 291
Centimeters, working in, 262
Central Air Unit, 154

Index
Central Vac Outlet, 144
Central Vac, 132
Ceramic Tiles, 79
Chair Rails, 61
Chairs, 128
Chairs, patio, 240
Change Display Every _ Steps, 311
Change display every _ steps, 323
Changing 29
Chests, 128
Chimneys
applying materials to, 155
editing height, 154
inserting, 154
City, 309
Cleaning equipment, 132
Click-and-drag insertion method, 20
Close Catalog, 383
Closed Riser, 234
Closing
catalogs, 383
projects, 331
Coffee tables, 128
Cold air returns, 154
Collision Control, 259
Color
Background (drawing area), 350
changing an elements, 277, 377
editing an elements, 377
editing material color, 388
light sources, 413
of plants throughout growing season, 194
text, 291, 405
toolbar areas, 348
toolbars, 348
viewing an elements, 377
Color Bleed, 313, 388
Columns
attaching footings to, 52
decorative, 252
deleting, 52
editing elevation, 52
editing size, 52
editing type, 51
inserting, 51
moving, 52
Commander
displaying, 266
selecting a reference point for actions, 267
specifying insertion heights, 267

using to rotate elements, 269

using when curving elements, 269
using, 266
Common plant names, 194
Complexity of care (plant), 194
Component Display, 374
Components, appearance of, 377
Compost box, 132
Compression, animation, 322
Computer desks, 128
Computers, 128
Concrete slabs
applying different materials to, 173
creating, 172
curving, 48, 173
deleting, 48, 173
editing thickness, 48, 173
inserting, 47
moving, 47, 172
reshaping, 48, 172
resizing, 47, 172
rotating, 47, 172
Concrete walls, drawing, 44
Connection, 96
Contents, package, 2
Context-sensitive menus, 22, 272
Control Points
adding, 319
elevating, 320
moving, 319
removing, 319
Convert File From, 373
Coordinate icon, displaying/hiding, 266
Coordinate system
Cartesian, 268
Polar, 268
selecting, 267
Coordinates, entering, 268
Copies (print), 332
Copying
elements, 275
walls to create a new story, 57
Corner details, 252
Corrupted projects, repairing, 328
Country, 309
Cove Molding, 61
Crawlspace foundation, creating, 44
Create Elevation View, 365
Cribs, 128
Cropped textures, 389
Users Guide

443

Index
Cross-section, creating, 366
Crown Molding, 61
Current View Size, 314
Curtains, 128
Curving
ceiling opening edges, 85
ceilings, 84
deck edges, 227
deck opening edges, 231
fills, 207
floor opening edges, 80
pads, 48, 173
paths, 169
retaining walls, 176
site boundary edges, 183
slabs, 48
using the Commander, 269
walls, 46, 60
Custom elements, importing, 337, 372
Custom textures, 389
Customer Service, 4
Customizing
catalogs, 369
dimension styles, 403
elements, 371
light sources, 411
line styles, 397
materials, 385
patterns, 390
screen, 347
text styles, 403
view windows, 353
views, 359
Cut an opening around next story, 101
Cut Line Spacing, 91
Cut Line, editing on stairs, 91
Cut Opening
ceiling, 84
deck, 230
roof, 107
Cut-off textures, 389

D
Damaged projects, repairing, 328
Date and time, 309
Day, 192
Daylight Savings, 309
Daylight, turning off, 311, 323
Deck Builder Wizard

444

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

starting automatically at startup, 225

using, 224
Deck Openings
curving edges, 231
inserting, 230
removing, 231
reshaping, 230
resizing, 230
Deck Stairs
controlling railing display, 233
deleting, 234
editing properties, 232
editing size, 232
inserting, 231
moving, 232
parts, 232
Deck tool, 225
Decks
building with Deck Builder Wizard, 224
building with Deck tool, 225
changing direction of deck boards, 226
changing the railing style, 229
controlling display of railings, 229
controlling railings on deck stairs, 233
creating openings in, 230
curving edges, 227
curving opening edges, 231
deleting, 231
displaying footings under posts, 228
displaying skirting, 230
editing frame construction, 228
editing height, 227
editing posts, 227
inserting a deck floor, 225
inserting stairs, 231
moving, 226
removing openings, 231
reshaping openings, 230
reshaping, 227
resizing openings, 230
stretching, 226
Default save directory, 329
Delete Element, 383
Delete Group
light source library, 413
line styles library, 399
materials library, 387
Delete Linestyle, 400
Delete Material, 387
Deleting

Index
accessories, 130
animation paths, 323
appliances, 125
berms/trenches, 163
building locations, 16
cabinets, 122
ceiling openings, 85
ceilings, 86
columns, 52
deck openings, 231
deck stairs, 234
decks, 231
dimension styles from library, 407
dimensions, 298
doors, 70
dormers, 109
edging, 212
electrical elements, 145
electronics, 130
elements, 279, 383
elevations, 365
equipment, 133
exterior accessories, 253
exterior furniture, 241
exterior structures, 245
fences, 219
filled areas, 208
floor openings, 80
floors, 79
footings, 51, 53
foundation, 45
furniture, 130
gates, 221
groups from catalogs, 371
groups from light source library, 413
groups from line styles library, 399
groups from materials library, 387
groups in View Manager, 354
hills, 161
HVAC elements, 156
irrigation, 214
light fixtures, 141
light source from library, 413
line styles from library, 400
linetypes from linetypes library, 402
materials from library, 387
mono footings, 53
openings from roofs, 107
outdoor light fixtures, 250
pads, 48, 173

paths, 170
photo boards, 286
plants, 192
plateaus, 164
plumbing fixtures, 151
railings, 97
ramps, 93
retaining walls, 177
roofs, 108
section views, 367
site boundary, 185
skylights, 110
slabs, 48
slopes, 165
sprinklers, 214
stairs, 93
strip footings, 51
text with leader, 293
text, 291
trace image, 337
valleys, 161
views in View Manager, 357
wall openings, 76
walls, 46, 57, 61
windows, 74
wiring, 147
Density, 323
Depth below ground level, 227
Deselecting elements, 21
Designers View, 26
Dim Line Spacing, 295
Dimension Offset, 295
Dimension Styles
adding, 407
changing, 298
customizing dimension styles library, 406
customizing library, 406
deleting from library, 407
editing, 407
important considerations before editing, 406
importing dimension styles from library into
catalog, 409
properties, 298, 407
saving to library file, 409
setting current, 293
Dimensions
about, 293
aligned, 297
auto exterior settings, 294
auto exterior, 294
Users Guide

445

Index
auto interior, 295
changing style, 298
deleting, 298
displaying/hiding, 36
editing an elements, 276
filtering for selection, 39
linear, 296
moving dimension line, 297
scale, 332
setting current style, 293
stretching, 297
Dimming Percentage, locations, 17
Direction, site boundary edges, 182
Direction, specifying, 268
Disabling
Building Wizard, 12
templates, 330
Diseases page (Encyclopedia), 200, 201
Dishwasher, 124
Display All But Framing, 31
Display Filter, 34
Display Framing, 30
Display Highlite, 67, 72
Display Left Sidelite, 67, 72
Display Lowlite, 72
Display Mode
about, 29
hidden line, 29
patterned, 30
rendered outline, 30
rendered, 29
wireframe, 29
Display of graphics, improving, 350
Display Right Sidelite, 67, 72
Display settings, adjusting, 3
Displaying
animation paths, 323
cameras, 360
catalog panel, 349
Coordinate Icon, 266
dimensions, 36
electrical wiring, 36
elements on location, 34
framing, 30
grid lines in project estimate, 302
project trace images, 37
selected building elements, 34
selected parts on elements, 374
terrain, 165
text, 36

446

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

toolbars, 348
view tabs, 355
Distance above current location or terrain, 273,
379
Distance from first end, 299
Distance from line, 184
Distance from the second end, 299
Distance, measuring, 262
Distance, specifying, 268
Dividing
ceilings, 78
floors, 78
rooms, 78
Diving board, 244
Division, 378
Doghouses, 244
Door mats, 252
Door sills, 61
Door Trim, 61
Doors
adding sills, 61
automatically centering, 66
deleting, 70
editing leaf, 68
editing shape, 66
editing sidelites/highlites, 67
editing size, 66
editing type, 66
flipping the swing, 69
flipping, 69
inserting, 66
lowering, 70
moving, 69
raising, 70
Dormer Roof, 108
Dormers
about, 108
creating, 108
deleting, 109
moving, 109
stretching, 109
Down to deck location, 232
Down to previous location, 232
Down to terrain, 232
DPI, 419
Dragging method of insertion, 20
Drawing Grid
displaying, 258
setting up, 258
turning on and off, 258

Index
Drawing Scale, 332
Dressers, 128
Driveways, 168
Drop Exterior Face, 59, 176, 273
Dropping 59
Dryer, 124
Drywall, 419
Dumpsters, 132
Duplicate to Locations, 57, 275
Duplicate, 275
Duration, animation, 321
DXF export, 342
DXF import, 337, 372

E
Edge Shape, 82, 83
Edging
breaking, 211
changing length, 211
changing material, 212
cleaning up corners, 210
deleting, 212
editing height, 212
editing width, 212
inserting, 210
moving, 211
repeating, 20
rotating, 211
selecting insertion method, 20
stretching, 211
Edit City, 309
Edit Linestyle, 399
Edit Material, 387
Edit menu, 22
Editing
about, 271
accessing edit commands, 272
accessing edit tools, 22
appliances, 124
berms, 162
building locations, 16
cabinets, 120
catalogs, 370
ceilings, 84
column elevation, 52
column size, 52
column type, 51
deck stairs, 232
decks, 226

dimension styles, 406

dimensions, 297
doors, 66
edging, 210
electrical elements, 145
element properties, 276
elements in catalogs, 371
equipment, 132
exterior accessories, 252
exterior furniture, 240
exterior structures, 244
fences, 217
fills, 206
floors, 78, 79
furnishing elements, 128
gates, 220
hills, 161
HVAC elements, 155
leader with text, 292
light fixtures, 139, 248
light sources, 412
line styles, 398
linetypes, 401
materials, 386
mono footing size, 53
mono footing type, 52
openings, 75
path elements, 168
patterns, 390
photo boards, 286
plants, 190
plumbing fixtures, 150
railings, 95
ramps, 91
retaining walls, 176
roofs, 101, 104
screen settings, 347
sections, 367
slopes, 164
stairs, 88
strip footing type, 50
text styles, 404
text, 290
views, 359
wall elevation, 45, 59, 176
wall height, 45, 59, 176
wall openings, 75
wall width, 45, 59, 176
walls, 44, 56
windows, 71
Users Guide

447

Index
Editing Mode, 21, 272
Electrical Elements
applying different colors/materials, 145
deleting, 145
editing size, 145
lowering, 144
moving, 145
raising, 144
wiring, 146
Electrical Junction Box, 132
Electrical Wiring
changing line style, 146
deleting, 147
displaying/hiding, 36
inserting, 146
making selectable/non-selectable, 40
reshaping/stretching, 146
Electronics
applying different colors/finishes, 129
deleting, 130
editing properties, 129
inserting, 128
lowering, 129
moving, 128
raising, 129
rotating, 128
Element index, 425
Element Properties, 370
Elements
attaching manufacturers to, 394
changing display of in preview window, 375
changing elevation, 273
creating custom, 371
deleting from catalogs, 383
deleting, 279
editing in catalogs, 371
editing properties, 276
excluding from project estimate, 303
filtering from view, 34
importing external files, 337, 372
importing into catalogs, 382
inserting, 20
moving, 272
rotating, 273
saving edited elements to a catalog, 372
Elevate Control Point, 320
Elevate tool, 273
Elevation
accessories, 129
appliances, 124

448

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

cabinets, 120
ceilings, 84
cut lines, 91
doors, 70
editing an elements, 273
electrical elements, 144
electronics, 129
equipment, 132
exterior accessories, 252
furniture, 129
HVAC elements, 155
light fixtures, 138
photo board, 286
plants, 190
plumbing fixtures, 150
retaining walls, 176
wall openings, 76
wall, 60
windows, 74
Elevation Marks
editing properties of, 365
moving, 364
turning on/off, 364
Elevation Properties, 365
Elevations
changing the target of, 364
creating custom, 365
deleting, 365
displaying marks for, 364
moving left or right, 364
viewing, 364
viewing/editing properties, 365
Emissive, 313, 388
Enable Collision Control, 259
Enable Daylight, 311, 323
Enable Pre-Selection, 22
Encyclopedia
about, 193
accessing, 194
Diseases page, 200
inserting plants from, 202
Main page, 194
Notebook page, 198
Picture page, 199
Plant Care Calendar, 196
searching for a plant, 194
selecting a plant to add to a catalog, 202
selecting a plant to view, 194
World Map page, 197
Entering lengths, 265

Index
Equipment
applying different materials, 133
deleting, 133
editing size, 132
inserting, 132
lowering, 132
moving, 132
raising, 132
rotating, 132
Estimate
changing report format, 302
excluding elements from, 303
filtering, 302
generating, 302
hiding grid lines, 302
printing, 305
saving, 304
specifying name, 304
specifying save location, 304
viewing in associated editor, 304
Example projects, 3
Excavated areas, 163
Excel XLS template, 302
Exercise equipment, 132
Explicit Height, 232
Export Animation to File, 321
Exporting
animations to *.avi files, 321
custom light sources to library file, 413
custom line styles to library file, 400
dimension styles to library file, 409
materials to library file, 389
text styles to library file, 405
to 3DS, 342
to BMP file, 342
to DXF file, 342
to JPG file, 342
to TGA file, 342
to WRL (VRML) file, 342
Extend Stair, 232
Extending
edging, 211
fences, 217
paths, 168
railings, 97
retaining walls, 176
roofs, 105
strip footings, 51
walls, 60
Extension Below Base, wall, 59

Extension Lines, 295

Exterior Accessories
changing elevation, 252
deleting, 253
editing appearance, 253
editing size, 252
inserting, 252
moving, 252
rotating, 252
Exterior dimension settings, 294
Exterior Furniture
applying different colors/materials, 241
deleting, 241
editing size, 240
inserting, 240
moving, 240
rotating, 240
Exterior Lighting
editing size, 248
inserting, 248
moving, 248
Exterior Structures
applying different materials, 245
deleting, 245
editing size, 245
inserting house templates, 244
inserting, 244
moving, 244
rotating, 244
Exterior Wall Tops to Roof, 103
Exterior walls
ground floor, 56
upper stories, 57

F
Fabrics, 129
Fascia Depth, 107
Fascia Distance, 106
Fascia type, 107
Faucets, 150
Feet/Inches, working in, 262
Fences
breaking, 217
deleting, 219
editing material, 219
editing properties, 217
inserting, 216
lengthening, 217
parts, 217

Users Guide

449

Index
raked, 218
repeating, 20
selecting insertion method, 20
shortening, 217
stepped, 218
stretching, 217
Field of vision, 361
File Paths
Projects Directory, 329
Sounds directory, 320
Templates directory, 330
Temporary Directory, 330
Filing cabinets, 128
Fills
changing fill material, 207
creating, 206
curving, 207
deleting, 208
moving, 206
reshaping, 207
resizing, 206
rotating, 206
Filtering
building elements for selection, 38, 39
building elements from view, 34
building locations for selection, 38
dimensions for selection, 39
dimensions from view, 36
display, 34
electrical wiring from view, 36
elements in Project Estimate, 303
elements/locations for selection, 37
landscape elements for selection, 39
landscape elements from view, 35
locations in project estimate, 302
plants by disease, 200
plants by selected criteria, 201
project trace images from view, 37
text for selection, 39
text from view, 36
Finishing commands, 20
Fireplaces, indoor, 154
Fireplaces, outdoor, 252
Fit To Page, 332
Flags, 285
Flip Horizontal, 336
Flip Opening
doors, 69
gates, 220
windows, 74

450

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Flip Swing
doors, 69
gates, 220
Flip Vertical, 336
Flipping
doors swing, 69
elements, 276
gate swing, 220
gates, 220
Floor Level, 16
Floor Locations
adding, 16
current, 17
defining, 16
deleting, 16
dimming, 17
filtering from view, 35
making selectable/non-selectable, 38
Floor Openings
creating, 79
curving edges, 80
removing, 80
resizing, 80
Floor plan tracing, 336
Floor registers, 154
Floor to Ceiling Height, 10
Floors
about, 78
applying different materials to, 46, 79
curving openings in, 80
cutting openings in, 79
deleting, 79
displaying framing, 30
editing thickness, 78
foundation, 44
raising/lowering, 78
removing openings from, 80
resizing openings, 80
specifying framing, 79
splitting, 78
Flowers, 190, 202
Fly Around tool, 362
Focal point, moving, 361
Fog, 312, 323
Follow Path, 316
Font Style, 291, 405
Font, 291, 405
Footings
attaching strip footings to walls, 50
breaking, 51

Index
deleting mono footings, 53
deleting strip footings, 51
deleting, 51, 53
displaying under deck posts, 228
editing size, 50, 53
editing type, 50, 52
inserting mono footings, 52
lengthening/shortening, 51
moving mono footings, 53
moving strip footings, 50
rotating mono footings, 53
stretching strip footings, 51
strip footings beneath walls, 47
Format, project estimate, 302
Foundation
applying different material to floor, 46
deleting, 45
drawing walls, 44
inserting a slab on grade, 47
moving, 44
resizing, 44, 45
Fountains, 252
Frame Rate, animation, 322
Framing
changing, 31
displaying, 30
editing deck frames, 228
hiding, 31
roofs, 106
specifying for ceilings, 85
specifying for floors, 79
specifying for walls, 62
Freezer, 124
Furnaces, 154
Furniture
applying different materials, 129
deleting, 130
editing properties, 129
interior, 128
lowering, 129
moving, 128
outdoor, 240
raising, 129
rotating, 128

G
Gable End appearance, 102
Gable roofs
changing appearance of surfaces under gable

ends, 102
converting from hip roofs, 101
extending gable end walls to roof, 102
Gable type, 107
Gap, between trim and wall 62
Garages, 244
Garbage bins, 128
Garbage disposals, 132
Garden beds, 206
Garden borders, 252
Garden boxes, raised, 252
Garden sheds, 236
Gardens, 190
Gas Meter, 132
Gates
deleting, 221
editing properties, 220
flipping swing, 220
flipping, 220
hinge side, 220
inserting, 219
moving, 220
Gazebos, 244
Generate Project Estimate, 302
Geometry, editing, 276
Global Settings, 309
Glossary of Terms, 4, 417
Golf Holes, 244
Graphics display, improving, 350
Greenhouse, 244
Grid
drawing, 258
snap, 258
Grid lines, hiding in project estimate window, 302
Grid Mesh Spacing, terrain, 160
Grid Snap, 258
Ground Floor Height above Terrain, 11
Ground floor walls, drawing, 56
Groups
adding to catalogs, 370
adding to light source library, 413
adding to line styles library, 399
adding to materials library, 386
deleting from catalogs, 371
deleting from light source library, 413
deleting from line styles library, 399
deleting from materials library, 387
renaming in line styles library, 399
renaming in materials library, 387
renaming, 371
Users Guide

451

Index
Growing season (plant), 194
Growth, plant, 194
Guardrails, 93

H
Handicap ramp, 88
Handle Style, 122
Handrail Depth, 96
Handrail Height, 96
Handrail Style, 96
Handrail Width, 96
Handrails, 93
Hanging planters, 252
Hardware Acceleration, 350
Hardwood flooring, 79
Hatched view, 30
Head Height, 16
Headers, 62
Heater, propane, 252
Heating elements, 154
Height
Camera, 361
ceiling, 16
deck, 227
edging, 212
floor, 16
head, 16
insertion, 379
retaining walls, 176
specifying insertion height in Commander,
267
staircase, 88
Target Height, 361
wall, 16, 59
window, 16
Height (elevation)
appliances, 124
cabinets, 120
ceilings, 84
doors, 70
editing an elements, 273
electrical elements, 144
exterior accessories, 252
HVAC elements, 155
light fixtures, 138
photo boards, 286
plants, 190
plumbing fixtures, 150
roof, 106

452

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

wall openings, 76
walls, 45
windows, 74
Help
Glossary of Terms, 4
Online Help, 3
online self-support, 4
Technical Support, 4
Hidden Line display mode, 29
Hiding
animation paths, 323
cameras, 360
catalog panel, 349
Coordinate Icon, 266
dimensions, 36
electrical wiring, 36
elements on locations, 34
framing, 31
grid lines in project estimate, 302
project trace images, 37
selected building elements, 34
terrain, 165
text, 36
toolbars, 348
Highlites
door, 67
window, 72
Hills
deleting, 161
editing height, 161
editing peak shape, 161
inserting, 160
moving, 161
Horiz. Distance, 106
Horizontal Separation, mullion, 69, 74
Horizontal Text Position, 299
Horizontal Text, 299
Hot tubs, 244
House Builder Wizard
custom element configuration, 12
disabling automatic launch, 12
using, 10
House Templates, 244
Hug Terrain, 218
HVAC Elements
deleting, 156
editing properties, 155
inserting, 154
lowering, 155
moving, 155

Index
raising, 155
rotating, 155
Hydro meter, 132
Hyperlinks
adding, 379
deleting, 379
making one current, 380
opening, 380

I
Icon, coordinate, 266
IES files, importing, 413
Ignore next story, 101
Image Brightness, 311, 323
Importing
3D Studio Files, 337, 372
dimension styles into dimension styles library, 409
DXF files, 337, 372
elements into catalogs, 382
IES files, 413
light source files, 413
light sources into light source library, 414
line styles into line styles library, 401
materials from library file, 390
objects, 337, 372
photo boards, 284
text files, 290
text styles into text styles library, 406
Improving graphics display, 350
Inches, working in, 262
Include Element in Quantities, 378
Include First Post, 96
Include Last Post, 96
Include Posts, 96
Include railing on selected edges, 229
Include Railings, 233
Include skirting on selected edges, 230
Include Walls, 108
Included Angle, 269
In-ground pools, 244
Inserting
about inserting elements, 20
accessories, 128
air returns, 154
appliances, 124
cabinets, 120
columns, 51
concrete slab, 47

decks, 224
doors, 66
driveways, 168
edging, 210
electrical elements, 144
electronics, 128
equipment, 132
exterior accessories, 252
exterior furniture, 240
exterior structures, 244
exterior walls, 57
fences, 216
fills, 206
floor registers, 154
foundation walls, 44
gates, 219
hills, 160
HVAC elements, 154
interior furniture, 128
irrigation, 214
landscaping, 187
light fixtures, 138, 248
mono footings, 52
pads, 172
paths, 168
photo boards, 284, 285
plants, 190
plumbing fixtures, 150
property lines, 180
ramps, 88
retaining walls, 176
scanned home plan, 336
sidewalks, 168
site boundary, 180
sprinklers, 214
stairs, 88
strip footings, 47
text, 290
vents, 154
walls (exterior), 56
walls (foundation), 44
walls (interior), 59
windows, 70
Insertion Height, 267, 379
Insertion Method for line-drawn elements, 20
Insertion Point, editing an elements, 379
Inside arc direction, 183
Inside Line, 184
Installing the software, 2
Interactive lighting
Users Guide

453

Index
changing quality, 351
turning off, 351
Interior dimension settings, 296
Interior dimensions, auto, 295
Interior Lighting, 138
Interior Wall Tops to Roof, 103
Interior Walls
dimension setting, 295
dimension string, 295
Interior walls, inserting, 59
Interiors tab, 6
Irrigation
deleting, 214
editing height, 214
editing spray, 214
inserting, 214
moving, 214
rotating, 214

J
Jacks, 144
Joist Direction, 79, 85
Joist Member, 79, 85
Joist Spacing, 79, 85
JPG
exporting to, 342
importing for tracing, 336
using your own in materials, 389
Jungle Gyms, 244
Justification, text, 291

K
Kitchen Builder Wizard
custom element configuration, 117
starting automatically at startup, 117
using, 116
Kitchen Configuration, 117

L
Lamps, 138
Landing Connection, 89
Landing Thickness, 91, 92
Landings
adding to ramps, 93
adding to stairs, 90
Landscape Lighting
editing size, 248
inserting, 248
moving, 248

454

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Landscape tab, 6
Landscaping
decks, 223, 224
edging, 210
fences, 215, 216
fills, 206
filtering elements for selection, 39
filtering elements from view, 35
garden beds, 206
gates, 219
inserting furniture, 240
inserting house templates, 244
inserting structures, 244
irrigation, 214
paths, 168
patios, 171
plants, 190
ponds, 206
retaining walls, 176
sidewalks, 168
terrain, 159
toolbar, 6
Latin plant names, 194
Latitude, 309
Launch wizard when starting new project, 12, 117,
225, 237
Lawn edging, 210
Leader arrow style, 292
Leader with text, 291
Leaf Depth, 68
Leaf, door, 68
Lean-to roof, 103
Left Justify Text, 291
Length, site boundary edges, 182
Lengthening
edging, 211
fences, 217
paths, 168
railings, 97
retaining walls, 176
strip footings, 51
walls, 45, 60
Lengths, precise, 265
Levels, defining locations for, 16
Libraries
Building Configuration, 12
Dimension Styles, 406
dimension styles, 406
Kitchen Configuration, 117
Light Source, 412

Index
Line Styles, 398
Linetypes, 401
Materials, 386
Patterns, 390
Shed Configuration, 237
Text Styles, 404
Lifetime (plant), 194
Light bulbs, changing, 139
Light fixtures
changing the look of, 141, 250
changing the snap on insertion, 138
deleting, 141, 250
editing light source, 139, 248
editing size, 139, 248
inserting outdoors, 248
inserting, 138
lowering, 138
moving, 139, 248
raising, 138
rotating, 139
turning on and off, 140, 249
turning on/off, 141, 250
Light posts, 248
Light Sources
adding groups to library, 413
adding to library, 413
customizing library, 412
deleting from library, 413
deleting groups from library, 413
editing color, 413
editing in light fixtures, 139, 248
editing intensity, 413
important considerations before editing, 412
importing from library into catalog, 414
saving custom light sources to library file, 413
specifying directory, 414
Light switches, 144
Lighting preference (plant), 194
Lighting, interactive, 351
Lights
adjusting light emitted, 313
customizing light source library, 412
interior, 138
outdoor, 248
path, 248
Lights Directory, 414
Line Styles
accessing library, 398
adding groups to line styles library, 399
adding to library, 399

changing for inserted wiring, 146

deleting from library, 400
deleting groups from library, 399
editing in library, 399
editing in site boundary, 183
important considerations when editing, 398
importing line styles from library into catalog, 401
in dimensions, 299
renaming groups in library, 399
saving custom line styles to library file, 400
Linear Dimensions, 296
Lines, grid, 302
Linetypes
adding to linetypes library, 402
customizing linetypes library, 401
deleting from library, 402
editing, 402
viewing an elements, 377
Linoleum, 79
Load city template, 310
Load IES File, 413
Location Dimming, 17
Locations
adding, 16
current, 17
defining, 16
deleting, 16
filtering from view, 35
making selectable/non-selectable, 38
lock, Maintain Aspect Ratio, 388
Logos, manufacturer
displaying, 395
selecting, 394
Longitude, 309
Look Around tool, 363
Look Through, 27
Lot lines, 180
Lounges, 240
Lower Width, 89, 92
Lowering
appliances, 124
cabinets, 120
ceilings, 84
decks, 227
doors, 70
electrical elements, 144
elements, 273
equipment, 132
floors, 78
Users Guide

455

Index
furnishing elements, 129
HVAC elements, 155
light fixtures, 138
outdoor accessories, 252
photo boards, 286
plants, 190
plumbing fixtures, 150
retaining walls, 176
wall openings, 76
walls, 60
windows, 74
Lowlites, 72

M
Mailboxes, 252
Maintain Aspect Ratio, 286, 336, 388
Make Continuous, 96
Manage Hyperlinks, 379
Manufacturer Logos, displaying, 395
Manufacturers
adding to library, 394
attaching to elements, 394
attaching to materials, 395
deleting from library, 394
editing in library, 394
in element properties, 378
Mark Text, 365, 367
Marks
elevation, 364
section, 366
Material Groups dialog, 338, 373
Materials
adding groups to materials library, 386
adding to library, 387
attaching manufacturer information, 395
changing an elements, 277, 377
customizing materials library, 386
deleting from library, 387
deleting groups from library, 387
editing an elements, 377
editing in library, 387
editing surface properties, 313
estimate, 302
important notes about editing, 386
importing from library file, 390
properties, 387
renaming groups in library, 387
rotating on elements, 278, 378
saving to library file, 389

456

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

scale of in rendered views, 388

Tile Height, 388
Tile Width, 388
using textures from outside sources, 388, 389
viewing an elements, 377
Materials Paintbrush, 277
Mats, door, 252
Max Stringer Spacing, 91
Max. Post Spacing, 218
Max. Riser Height, 233
Maximizing a view window, 356
Measure tool, 262
Measuring area, 263
Medicine cabinets, 128
Member Spacing, 106
Menu Bar, 6
Menus for editing, 22, 272
Meters, utility, 132
Meters, working in, 262
Microwave, 124
Millimeters, working in 262
Min number of vertices per component, 374
Mirror tool, 276
Mirrors, 128
Modify Elements, 22, 272
Mono footings
attaching to columns, 52
deleting, 53
editing size, 53
editing type, 52
moving, 53
rotating, 53
Mono Footings Attached to Columns, 52
Month, 309
Move Target, 361, 364
Move Whole Element
ceilings, 83
deck, 226
fill, 206
pad, 172
plateau, 163
roof, 105
slab, 47
Movies, creating, 316
Moving
accessories, 128
animation control points, 319
animation path control points, 319
appliances, 124
berms, 162

Index
cabinets, 120
cameras for 3D views, 360
catalog panel, 349
ceilings, 83
columns, 52
deck stairs, 232
decks, 226
dimension line, 297
doors, 69
dormers, 109
edging, 211
electrical elements, 145
electronics, 128
elements vertically, 273
elements, 272
elevation target, 364
elevations marks, 364
equipment, 132
exterior accessories, 252
exterior furniture, 240
exterior lighting, 248
exterior structures, 244
filled areas, 206
foundation, 44
furniture, 128
gates, 220
hills, 161
HVAC elements, 155
irrigation, 214
leader text, 293
light fixtures, 139
mono footings, 53
pads, 47, 172
paths, 168
photo boards, 285
plants, 190
plateaus, 163
plumbing fixtures, 150
ramps, 93
roofs, 105
section marks, 367
sheds, 237
site boundary, 182
skylights, 110
slabs, 47
slopes, 165
sprinklers, 214
stairs, 93
strip footings, 50
targets in 3D views, 361

text leader, 292

text, 290
toolbars, 348
trenches, 162
valleys, 161
wall openings, 76
walls, 56
windows, 74
Mugs, 128
Mulched beds, 206
Mullion, 69, 74
Multiple text insert, 290

N
Name generation
about, 375
editing the formula, 376
using, 375
Name, building location, 16
Naming elements, 372
New Catalog, 381
New Project, 2
New View, 354
Newel Depth, 96
Newel Spacing, 96
Newel Style, 96
Newel Width, 96
Night backgrounds, 368
Nightstands, 128
North arrows, 252
Nosing Depth (stairs), 90
Nosing, 234
Nosing, cabinet, 121
Notebook page (Encyclopedia), 198, 201
Notes, adding to element properties, 379
Number of copies, 332
Number of Floors, 10
Number of Steps, 89
Number, location, 16

O
Obelisks, 252
Object Import Wizard, 337
Object Snap, 258
OBJSNAP, 258
Office furniture, 128
Offset below roof surface, 103
Offset from wall, 62
Offset, trim, 62
Users Guide

457

Index
Online 4
Online Help, 3
Online Software Help, 4
Open Catalog, 383
Open Current Hyperlink, 380
Open Samples, 3
Open View, 354
Open with Associated Editor, 304
Open, 328
Opening
catalogs, 383
sample projects, 3
saved project, 328
saved projects, 328
views, 354
Openings
adding sills, 61
automatically centering on walls, 75
creating in ceilings, 84
creating in floors, 79
creating in roofs, 107
curving ceiling openings, 85
curving deck opening edges, 231
curving floor openings, 80
deleting from walls, 76
deleting, 76
dimension string, 294
dimension style, 295
editing wall opening shapes, 75
editing wall opening size, 75
inserting in decks, 230
inserting in walls, 75
lowering in walls, 76
moving, 76
raising in walls, 76
removing from decks, 231
reshaping in decks, 230
resizing in ceilings, 84
resizing in decks, 230
resizing in floors, 80
Order of paths, 318
Orientation, element, 274, 377
Ortho, 259
Outdoor accessories, 252
Outdoor fireplaces, 252
Outdoor furniture, 240
Outdoor structures, 244
Outlets, 144
Outside arc direction, 183
Outside Line, 184

458

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Oven, 124
Overall dimension string, 294
Overall Height, 88
Overhang
deck beams, 229
deck boards, 228
deck joists, 229
deck stairs, 234
Overhang Drop, 106
Overhang, roof, 106
Override system units, 299, 408
Override tile size, 278, 378

P
Package contents, 2
Pad footings
editing size, 53
editing type, 52
inserting, 52
moving, 53
Pads
applying different materials to, 173
curving, 48, 173
deleting, 48, 173
editing thickness, 48, 173
inserting, 47, 172
moving, 47, 172
reshaping, 48, 172
resizing, 47, 172
rotating, 47, 172
Paint, 61
Paintbrush, materials, 277
Panelling, wood, 61
Panning, 28
Pans, 128
Paper size, 331
Part No., 378
Path lights, 248
Path Order, 318
Paths
applying different materials, 169
curving, 169
deleting for animations, 323
deleting, 170
drawing for animations, 316
drawing, 168
editing length, 168
editing order in animations, 318
editing thickness, 169

Index
editing width, 169
moving, 168
rotating, 168
Patio furniture, 240
Patio umbrellas, 252
Patios
applying different materials to, 173
creating, 172
curving, 173
deleting, 173
editing thickness, 173
moving, 172
reshaping, 172
resizing, 172
rotating, 172
Patterned display mode, 30
Patterned properties, 389
Patterns
editing on elements, 277
viewing an elements, 377
Peg style, site boundary, 183
Peg text style, 184
People, 285
Pets, 285
Phone jacks, 144
Photo Boards
changing elevation, 286
changing to rotating, 286
changing to stationary, 286
creating transparency in, 286
deleting, 286
editing size, 286
importing, 284
inserting, 285
moving, 285
rotating, 285
saving to the catalog, 285
Photo realistic images, 307
Pianos, 128
Pick and drag insertion method, selecting, 20
Pick Points insertion method, selecting, 20
Picnic tables, 240
Picture page (Encyclopedia), 199
Pictures, 128
Piers, inserting, 51
Pixel Search Distance, 259
Place New Camera, 360
Placement, 332
Plan view
displaying, 26

rendered, 26
Plans, importing for tracing, 336
Plant Care Calendar 196
Plant Encyclopedia
about, 193
accessing, 194
care requirements, 194
Diseases page, 200
growth information, 194
inserting plants from, 202
lighting preferences, 194
Main page, 194
Notebook page, 198
Picture page, 199
Plant Care Calendar, 196
searching for a plant, 194
selecting a plant to add to a catalog, 202
selecting a plant to view, 194
temperature preferences, 194
water requirements, 194
World Map page, 197
Plant Growth Over Time, 192
Plant Seasonal Change, 192
Planters, 252
Planting age, 191
Plants
adding to catalog from Encyclopedia, 202
applying seasonal change, 192
care calendar, 196
changing age, 191
changing elevation, 190
deleting, 192
diseases, 200, 201
editing appearance in 2D plan view, 190
editing size, 191
Encyclopedia, 193
filtering by selected criteria, 201
forcing custom size, 191
inserting from Encyclopedia, 202
inserting, 190
life expectancy, 194
moving, 190
seeing growth over time, 192
soil requirements, 194
usages, 194
zone information, 194
Plateaus
creating, 163
deleting, 164
editing height, 163
Users Guide

459

Index
editing peak shape, 163
moving, 163
reshaping, 163
stretching, 163
Plates, 128
Playgrounds, 244
Playhouses, 244
Plumb fascia, 107
Plumb soffit, 107
Plumbing Fixtures
applying different colors/finishes, 151
deleting, 151
editing size, 150
inserting, 150
lowering, 150
moving, 150
raising, 150
rotating, 150
Pointer tool, 21, 272
Polar Coordinate System, 267, 268
Ponds, 206
Pool slide, 244
Pool table, 128
Pools, 244
Porch roof, 103
Position Offset, 89, 92
Position, materials on elements, 278
Post Depth, 96
Post edging, 210
Post Extension, 218
Post Height, 96
Post Position, 96
Post Rotation, 96, 218
Post Spacing, 96
Post Style, 96
Post Width, 96, 218
Posts
deck, 227
deleting, 52
editing elevation, 52
editing size, 52
editing type, 51
fence, 218
general, 51
inserting, 51
moving, 52
railings, 96
PostScript files, creating, 333
Pot lights, 138
Pots, 128

460

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Precision
for units of measure, 262
in catalog, 381
of dimensions, 299
Pre-Selection, enabling, 22
Preview
element, 375
print, 332
Preview Animation, 318
Price, 378
Pricing, editing, 303
Print Preview, 332
Print Quality, 332
Print Scale, 332
Print Setup, 333
Print Tiling, 333
Print to File, 333
Print to file, 331
Print to Scale, 332
Print, 331
Printing
across multiple sheets, 333
all, 331
area/perimeter calculations, 263
drawings, 331
project estimate, 305
to a file, 333
to file, 331
window, 331
Program Help, 3
Project Estimate
changing report format, 302
excluding elements from, 303
filtering, 302
generating, 302
hiding grid lines, 302
printing, 305
saving, 304
selecting report template, 302
specifying name, 304
specifying save location, 304
viewing in associated editor, 304
Project Trace Image
deleting, 337
displaying/hiding, 37
importing, 336
making selectable/non-selectable, 40
resizing, 336
Projections dimension string, 294
Projects

Index
opening, 328
repairing, 328
sample, 3
saving as templates, 329
saving, 328
Projects Directory, 329
Propane heater, 252
Properties
accessories, 129
appearance, 377
appliances, 124
berms, 162
cabinets, 120
columns, 51
deck posts, 227
deck railings, 229
deck stairs, 232
decks, 227, 228
dimensions, 298
doors, 66, 67, 68
edging, 212
editing element properties in catalogs, 375
electrical elements, 145
electronics, 129
element composition, 276
element geometry, 276
element size, 276
element, 276
elevation, 365
equipment, 132
exterior accessories, 252
exterior furniture, 240
exterior structures, 245
fence, 217
floors, 78
furniture, 129
gate, 220
hills, 161
HVAC elements, 155
light fixtures, 139, 248
mono footings, 52
of catalogs, 383
openings, 75
path elements, 169
photo boards, 286
plants, 190
plateaus, 163
plumbing fixtures, 150
railings, 95
ramps, 91

retaining walls, 176

roofs, 105
Section Properties, 367
skylights, 110
slopes, 165
stairs, 89, 90
stairs/ramps, 88
strip footings, 50
viewing an elements, 370
wall openings, 75
windows, 71
Property lines, 180
PS files, creating, 333

Q
Quality, animation, 323
Quality, rendering, 311
Quantity page, 378
Quantity Report
generating, 302
opening in associated editor, 304
printing, 305
saving, 304

R
Radiosity Solution
about, 308
stopping, 310
Radius, 269
Radius, arc, 183
Radius, nosing curve, 121
Rafters, 106, 422
Rail edging, 210
Railings
by Picking Points, 95
by picking points, 95
changing a decks railings, 229
deleting, 97
editing properties, 95
horizontal, 95
inserting on a floor, 95
inserting on stairs automatically, 93
inserting, 93
on deck stairs, 233
on decks, 229
on stair center, 94
on stair left, 94
on stair right, 94
parts, 95
Users Guide

461

Index
repeating, 20
rotating, 97
selecting insertion method, 20
stretching, 97
Rails (edging), 210
Raised garden boxes, 252
Raised Heel, 107
Raising
appliances, 124
cabinets, 120
ceilings, 84
decks, 227
doors, 70
electrical elements, 144
elements, 273
equipment, 132
floors, 78
furnishing elements, 129
HVAC elements, 155
light fixtures, 138
outdoor accessories, 252
photo boards, 286
plants, 190
plumbing fixtures, 150
retaining walls, 176
wall openings, 76
walls, 60
windows, 74
Raked fascia, 107
Raked fence, 218
Raked soffit, 107
Raking walls, 102
Ramp Thickness, 91
Ramps
adding landings to, 93
adding segments to, 93
changing a segment type, 93
deleting segments from, 93
deleting, 93
editing layout, 92
editing properties, 91
editing size properties, 88
inserting, 88
moving, 93
rotating, 93
Range, 124
Raster, 422
Ray Trace Animation, 322
Raytracing, about, 308
Recently used file list, 328

462

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

Recording animations, 321

Recycling box, 132
Redo, 272
Reference Angle Method, 184
Reference point icon, 266
Reference point, commander, 267
Refreshing the view during rendering, 311
Refrigerator, 124
Registers, 154
Remove Control Point, 319
Remove Opening
ceiling, 85
deck, 231
floor, 80
roof, 107
Remove Sound Node, 320
Rename Group
line styles library, 399
materials library, 387
Renaming
groups in catalog, 371
groups in View Manager, 354
projects, 328
View Windows, 356
Render 3DTrueView, 310
Render to File, 313, 314
Rendered 2D plan view, 26
Rendered display mode, 29
Rendered Outline display mode, 30
Rendered properties, 388
Rendering
about, 308
adjusting image brightness, 311
changing refresh rate during lighting calculations, 311
changing refresh rate, 311
creating a 3DTrueView rendering, 310
creating fog effect, 312
creating smoke effect, 312
saving multiple image files, 314
setting quality, 311
setting the viewpoint, 308
setting up scene, 308
specifying image size, 314
turning daylight off, 311
using antialiasing, 312
Repair Project, 328
Repeat Animation During Preview, 318
Repeat, 20
Replacing elements, 278

Index
Report filter, 302
Report format, estimate, 302
Report, material, 302
Requirements, system, 2
Reset Camera, 363
Reshaping
ceilings, 83
deck openings, 230
decks, 227
filled areas, 207
pads, 48, 172
paths, 168
plateaus, 163
slabs, 48
wiring segments, 146
Resizing
catalog panel, 349
ceiling openings, 84
ceilings, 83
deck openings, 230
exterior wall layout, 56, 58
fills, 206
floor openings, 80
foundation, 44, 45
pads, 47, 172
Project Trace Image, 336
slabs, 47
Resolution, animation, 322
Resolution, setting, 3
Restarting line-drawn elements, 20
Restoring previous view window arrangement,
356
Retaining Walls
applying different finishes to, 177
breaking, 177
curving, 176
definition, 422
deleting, 177
drawing, 176
editing properties, 176
lengthening, 176
lengthening/shortening, 176
rotating, 176
shortening, 176
Reverse plan, 276
Right Justify Text, 291
Right-click menus, accessing, 22, 272
Riser Angle, 90
Riser Height, 88, 233
Riser Maximum, 89

Roof Openings
creating, 107
removing, 107
Roof tiles, 107
Roofs
applying different materials to, 107
by Perimeter, 100
by Picking Points, 100
changing appearance of surfaces under gable
ends, 102
changing the way lower-story roofs are created, 101
converting hip to gable, 101
cutting openings in, 107
deleting, 108
displaying framing, 30
editing height, 106
editing shape, 105
editing size, 105
extending gable end walls to roof, 102
inserting automatically, 100
inserting dormers, 108
inserting skylights, 109
moving, 105
porch, 103
removing openings from, 107
rotating, 105
selecting for editing, 104
shed, 103
solution types, 101
specifying framing details, 106
stretching, 105
Room Division, 78
Rotating
accessories, 128
appliances, 124
cabinets, 120
decks, 226
edging, 211
electronics, 128
elements, 273, 274, 377
equipment, 132
exterior accessories, 252
exterior furniture, 240
exterior structures, 244
filled areas, 206
furniture, 128
HVAC elements, 155
irrigation, 214
light fixtures, 139
Users Guide

463

Index
materials on elements, 278, 378
mono footings, 53
pads, 47, 172
paths, 168
photo boards, 285
plumbing fixtures, 150
railings, 97
ramps, 93
retaining walls, 176
roofs, 105
sheds, 237
skylights, 110
slabs, 47
sprinklers, 214
stairs, 93
text, 290
using the Commander, 269
walls, 46, 60
Rugs, 128

S
Sample projects, 3
Sandboxes, 244
Satellite dishes, 132
Save All, 328
Save As, 328
Save Catalog As, 382
Save Catalog, 381, 382
Save city template, 310
Save directory, default, 329
Save Element to Catalog, 372
Save location, 3DTrueView image, 313
Save location, project estimate, 304
Save time (min), 328
Save, 328
Saved Project, 328
Saving
3DTrueView renderings, 313
animations, 321
automatically, 328
catalogs, 382
cities, 310
custom materials to library file, 389
dimension styles to library file, 409
multiple rendered images in same project,
314
photo boards to the catalog, 285
project estimate, 304
projects as templates, 329

464

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

projects, 328
text styles to the library file, 405
to 3DS (3D Studio) file, 342
to BMP file, 342
to DXF file, 342
to JPG file, 342
to TGA file, 342
to WRL (VRML) file, 342
Scale
drawing, 355
editing, 332
Fit to Page, 332
light source intensity, 413
of dimensions, 332
of materials, 388
of text, 332
of views, 332
print, 332
Scaling project trace images, 336
Scaling, in printing, 332
Scanned floor plans, importing, 336
Scene setup for rendering, 308
Sconces, 138
Screen area size, setting, 3
Screen layout, 5
Screen settings, 347
Screen tips, disabling, 22
Screened rooms, 244
Season Change, 192
Season Color Diagram, 194
Seat, 107
Second Floor, adding, 57
Secondary Post Position, 218
Section Marks On/Off, 366
Section Properties, 367
Section Views
creating, 366
deleting, 367
editing properties, 367
editing, 367
turning section marks on/off, 366
viewing, 366
Select All, 21, 39
Select button (3D Studio file), 374
Select button (Encyclopedia), 202
Select elements on current location only while in
plan view, 21
Select None, 39
Select Previous, 21
Select/Edit, 21, 272

Index
Selectability
of building elements, 39
of building locations, 38
of dimensions, 39
of electrical wiring, 40
of elements in 2D plan view, 21
of elements on locations, 38
of project trace images, 40
of text, 39
specifying, 37
Selecting
disabling pre-selection, 22
elements, 21
roofs, 104
Selection Filter
about, 37
filtering building elements, 39
filtering building locations, 38
filtering dimensions, 39
filtering electrical wiring, 40
filtering elements on locations, 38
filtering landscape elements, 39
filtering project trace images, 40
filtering text, 39
Selection mode, 21, 272
Set Current (view window), 355
Set Current Time, 309
Set Decking Direction, 226
Setback line style, 184
Setbacks, defining, 183
Settings, saving in a template, 329
Shape, door, 67
Shed Builder Wizard
building a shed, 236
custom element configuration, 237
starting automatically at startup, 237
Shed Configuration, 237
Shed roof, 103
Sheds
building with Shed Builder Wizard, 236
editing, 237
inserting pre-made, 244
moving, 237
rotating, 237
Shelves
inserting, 128
showing in cabinets, 121
Shingles, 107
Shortcut menus, 22, 272
Shortening

edging, 211
fences, 217
paths, 168
railings, 97
retaining walls, 176
strip footings, 51
walls, 45, 60
Show Backsplash, 121
Show Coordinate Icon, 266
Show Counter, 121
Show Cut Lines, 91
Show Grid, 263, 302
Show Handle, 122
Show Nosing, 121
Show Riser, 89
Show Shelves, 121
Show trunk in plan, 191
Shower curtains, 128
Showers, 150
Shrubs, 190, 202
Shutters, 128
Side Offset, 96
Sidelites
door, 67
window, 72
Sidewalks, 168
Siding, 58
Signs, 285
Sills, door, 61
Sills, window, 61
Simplify, 374
Sinks, 122, 150
Site Boundary
controlling text placement, 183
curving edges, 183
defining setback distances, 183
deleting, 185
editing angle of an edge, 182
editing bearings, 182
editing length of an edge, 182
editing line styles, 183
editing peg style, 183
editing text styles, 183
inserting, 180
moving, 182
selecting method of angle measurement, 184
stretching, 182
Size
animation output file, 322
editing an elements, 276
Users Guide

465

Index
property page, 376
rendered image, 314
Skirt Width, 82, 83
Skirting, deck, 230
Skylights
deleting, 110
editing properties, 110
inserting, 109
moving, 110
rotating, 110
Slabs
applying different materials to, 173
creating, 172
curving, 48, 173
deleting, 48, 173
editing thickness, 48, 173
inserting on grade, 47
moving, 47, 172
reshaping, 48, 172
resizing, 47, 172
rotating, 47, 172
Slide tool, 363
Slope Type, 106
Slope Value, 106
Slope, ramp, 92
Slopes
creating, 164
deleting, 165
editing angle, 165
editing height, 165
moving, 165
stretching, 164
Sloping ceilings, 82
Smoke detectors, 144
Smoke, 312, 323
Snap Angle, 259
Snap Edge, 379
Snap Light To, 138
Snapping
at defined angles, 259
orthogonal, 259
to drawing grid, 258
to objects, 258
Sofas, 128
Soffit type, 107
Soil beds, 206
Soil requirements (plant), 194
Solution Type (roofs) 101
Sounds
adding to animation, 320

466

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

removing from animation, 320

Sounds Directory, default, 320
Spacing
deck boards, 228, 229
posts along beam, 227
Specify Framing
ceilings, 85
floors, 79
roofs, 106
walls, 62
Specify Target, 316
Specular, 313, 388
Speed, animation, 321
Spinning in 3D view, 363
Splitting floors, 78
Spray properties, sprinkler, 214
Sprinklers
deleting, 214
editing height, 214
editing spray properties, 214
inserting, 214
moving, 214
rotating, 214
Square footage, measuring, 263
Stairs
adding flights to, 90
adding landings to, 90
changing a segment type, 90
deleting segments from, 90
deleting, 93
editing cut line, 91
editing details, 90
editing layout, 89
editing size properties, 88
inserting railings on, 93
inserting, 88
moving, 93
parts, 88
rotating, 93
Stairs, adding to deck, 231
Standard Report Form template, 302
Start a New Project, 2
Starting the program, 2
Startup using Project Template, 330
Stationary photo board, 284
Status Bar
about, 8
displaying, 350
hiding, 350
Stepped fence, 218

Index
Stone, 58, 177
Stopping radiosity solution, 310
Storage sheds, 244
Stories
adding, 57
defining locations for, 16
Stretching
animation path, 319
berms, 162
ceiling openings, 84
ceilings, 83
decks, 226
dimensions, 297
dormers, 109
edging, 211
exterior wall layout, 56, 58
fences, 217
fills, 206
floor openings, 80
foundation wall layout, 44
paths, 168
plateaus, 163
railings, 97
retaining walls, 176
roofs, 105
section marks, 367
site boundary, 182
slopes, 164
strip footings, 51
text leader, 292
trenches, 162
walls, 44, 45, 56, 58, 60
wiring segments, 146
Stringer Side Offset, 90
Stringer Thickness, 91
Stringer Width, 90
Strip footings
attaching to walls, 50
breaking, 51
deleting, 51
editing size, 50
editing type, 50
lengthening/shortening, 51
moving/stretching, 50
stretching, 51
Strip Footings Attached to Walls, 47
Structures, exterior, 244
Studs, 62
Sundials, 252
Supplier, 378

Support height above main roof, 108

Support Height, 106
Support, technical, 4
Surface Properties, materials, 313
Survey, site, 180
Suspended Ceiling, 84, 423
Swing Type, 67
Swing, flipping, 69
Swings, 244
Switches, 144
System Requirements, 2

T
Tables, 128
Tables, patio, 240
Tables, picnic, 240
Tabs
changing color of, 348
disabling tabbed toolbars, 348
displaying toolbars in 348
hiding, 348
showing, 348
toolbar, 6
view tabs, 355
Target
changing the height of, 361
moving an elevations, 364
moving, 361
orbiting around the camera, 362
Target Height, changing, 361
Target paths, animation, 317
Technical Support, 4
Telephone service box, 132
Telephones, 128
Television outlets, 144
Televisions, 128
Temperature preferences (plant), 194
Template
house, 244
path to Templates directory, 330
report 302
saving a project as, 329
setting default, 330
starting drawings without, 330
Temporary Directory, 330
Tennis courts, 244
Terrain
auto-cut around building, 160
base level, 160

Users Guide

467

Index
grid mesh spacing, 160
hills and valleys, 160
plateaus, 163
size, 160
slopes, 164
texture, 160
toolbar, 7
turning on/off, 165
Terrain Base Level, 160
Terrain tab, 6
Text
adding to drawing, 290
changing justification, 291
changing the style of inserted text, 291
controlling in site boundary, 183
deleting, 291
displaying/hiding, 36
editing content, 290
editing leader text, 293
filtering for selection, 39
importing text files, 290
moving, 290
rotating, 290
scale, 332
with leader, 291
Text Color, 291, 405
Text Height, 291, 405
Text Styles
changing the style of existing text, 291
customizing text styles library, 404
editing in elevation marks, 365
editing in section marks, 367
editing in site boundary, 183
elevation marks, 365
important considerations when editing, 404
importing text styles from library into catalog, 406
in dimensions, 299
saving to library file, 405
Text with Leader
adding, 291
changing leader arrow, 292
deleting, 293
editing text, 293
moving the text, 293
moving/stretching, 292
Textures
applied to elements, 377
applying different textures to elements, 277
appropriate sizing for, 389

468

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

cropped, 389
specifying location of directory, 390
using different, 388
using from outside sources, 389
viewing an elements, 377
Textures Directory, 390
TGA
exporting to, 342
importing for tracing, 336
using your own in materials, 389
Thermostats, 144
Thickness
foundation slab, 48
pad, 173
roof, 106
Three-dimensional viewing, 27
Tile Height, 388
Tile Horizontally, 388
Tile Open Views, 355
Tile Vertically, 388
Tile Width, 388
Tiled printing, 333
Tiles, 79
Time of day, 309
Time Zone, 309
Title bar, 6
Toaster, 124
Toe Depth, 121
Toe Height, 122
Toilet paper dispenser, 128
Toilets, 150
Tool sheds, 236
Toolbars
Building, 6
changing color of toolbar areas, 348
changing the background color of, 348
displaying in non-tabbed format, 348
displaying in tabs 348
hiding, 348
Interiors, 6
Landscape, 6
moving, 348
showing, 348
tabbed, 6
terrain, 7
Zoom and Navigate, 7
Tooltips on elements, 22
Total Steps, 88
Towel accessories, 128
Tracing imported floor plans, 336

Index
Trampolines, 244
Transfer
dimension styles, 409
light sources, 413, 414
line styles, 400
materials, 389, 390
text styles, 405
Transformer Box, 132
Transom
door lites, 69
window lites, 74
Transparency, 313, 388
Transparency, in photo boards, 286
Trash cans, 132
Trash Compactor, 124
Tray ceilings, 82
Tray Height, 82
Tread Run, 89
Tread Thickness, 90
Trees, 190, 202
Trellises, 252
Trenches
creating, 161
deleting, 163
moving, 162
stretching, 162
Trim basepoint, 62
Trim, adding to walls, 61
Trunk Diameter, 191
Trusses, 106, 423
Tubs, 150
Typing lengths, 265

U
Umbrella, patio, 252
Undo, 272
Units of Measure
for elements in catalog, 381
for site boundary entry, 184
general, 262
Upper Offset, 89, 92
Upper Width, 89, 92
Usage (plant), 194
Use Solid Color, 388
Use Texture, 388
Users Guide (online), 3
Utility meters, 132

V
Valleys
deleting, 161
inserting, 160
moving, 161
Vaulted ceilings, 82
Vegetable garden boxes, 252
Velocity, animation, 321
Vents, 154
Vert. Distance, 106
Vertical Separation, mullion, 69, 74
Vertical Text Position, 299
Video Compression, animation, 322
View Angle, animation, 316
View Filter
about, 33
filtering building elements from view, 34
filtering dimensions from view, 36
filtering elements on terrain, 35
filtering locations from view, 35
filtering text from view, 36
View Manager
accessing, 354
adding groups to, 354
adding new views to, 354
deleting groups in, 354
deleting views in, 357
renaming groups, 354
setting the current view window, 355
View Project Estimate, 304
View Properties, 332
View Tabs, turning on/off, 355
View Windows
cascading, 355
creating new, 354
creating, 354
deleting, 357
managing, 354
maximizing, 356
renaming, 356
restoring the previous arrangement, 356
setting one current, 355
switching between, 355
Viewing
2D Designers View, 26
2D Plan View, 26
cameras, 360
elevations, 364
framing, 30
Users Guide

469

Index
in 3D, 27
managing views, 354
section views, 366
switching between view windows, 355
Viewing Angle, increasing/decreasing, 361
Viewing Field, 361
Viewpoint in 3DTrueView renderings, 308
Viewpoint, 3D camera view, 360
Views, opening, 354
Volleyball courts, 244
VRML export, 342

W
Wainscoting, 61
Walk Around tool, 362
Wall air returns, 154
Wall Height, 16, 45, 59, 176
Wall lights, 138
Wall Openings
automatically centering, 75
deleting, 76
editing shape, 75
editing size, 75
inserting, 75
lowering, 76
moving, 76
raising, 76
Wallpaper borders, 61
Wallpaper, 61
Walls
adding trim to, 61
applying different finishes to, 58
attaching strip footings to, 47, 50
breaking, 46, 60
concrete, 44
curving, 46, 60
deleting openings, 76
deleting, 46, 57, 61
displayed framing, 30
editing elevation, 45, 59, 176
editing height, 45, 59, 176
editing opening shapes, 75
editing properties, 45
editing size, 59
editing width, 45, 59, 176
entering precise lengths, 265
extending below floor level, 59
extending to gable ends, 102
exterior, 56

470

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe

foundation, 44
ground floor exterior, 56
inserting openings in, 75
interior, 59
lengthening, 60
lengthening/shortening, 45, 60
lowering, 60
moving openings, 76
moving, 56
painting, 61
raising, 60
repeating, 20
retaining, 176
rotating, 46, 60
second floor exterior, 57
selecting insertion method, 20
shortening, 60
specifying framing members, 62
stretching the layout, 56, 58
stretching, 44, 45, 56, 58
wallpapering, 61
Washer, 124
Water heaters, 154
Water requirements (plant), 194
Weather vanes, 252
web site, 3D Home Architect, 4
Width, wall, 45, 59, 176
Windchimes, 252
Windmills, 252
Window Height, 72
Window sills, 61
Window treatments, 128
Window trim, 61
Window Width, 72
Windows
adding sills, 61
automatically centering, 71
deleting, 74
editing details, 73
editing lites, 72
editing size, 71
editing type, 71
flipping, 74
inserting, 70
lowering, 74
moving, 74
raising, 74
skylights, 109
Wireframe display mode, 29
Wiring

Index
changing line style, 146
deleting, 147
displaying/hiding, 36
inserting, 146
making selectable/non-selectable, 40
reshaping, 146
stretching, 146
Wizard Configurations
House Builder, 12
Kitchen Builder, 117
Shed Builder, 237
Wizards
Deck Builder, 224
House Builder, 10, 12
Kitchen Builder 116
Object Import, 337
Photo Board, 284
Shed Builder, 236
Wood flooring, 79
Wood panelling, 61
Wood stoves, 154
World Map page, 197, 201
WRL export, 342

X
X coordinate, 268
X, Y, Z coordinates, 268

Y
Y coordinate, 268

Z
Z coordinate, 268
Zone (plant), 194
Zoom and Navigate toolbar, 7
Zoom In, 27
Zoom Out, 27
Zoom Previous, 28
Zoom Realtime, 27
Zoom to Fit, 28
Zoom Window, 28

Users Guide

471